IE-29-B Inst. Manual For Fire Alarm Sys. (OCR)

SEC. NO.
SHIP DESIGN OFFICE SHIP TYPE

C3F9 SHIP OUTFITTING DESIGN DEPT No.3 172,000 DWT CLASS BULK CARRIER
TEL. NO. SHIP NO. SHIP NAME

4882 1475 IRINI
NAME OF DRAWING
APPROVED H. Y. LEE
CHECKED B. H. KIM INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
DRAWN
DATE SCALE DRAWING NO.

2003.12.01
I 6N-7431-401
~ HYUNDAI HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD

ULSAN SHIPYARD, KOREA
CONSOLIDATED NO.
IE-29-B
I_
J_
L
•
'
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 15A-02-O1
ISSUE No. & DATE: 04 11/99
DOCUMENT CONTROL NUMBER /

'MINERVA' RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
PRODUCT APPLICATION AND SYSTEM DESIGN
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 3 4.3.13EMC COMPLIANCE 19
4.4 BOARD DESCRIPTIONS 29
2. SALIENT FEATURES 3
4.4.1 GENERAL 29
2.1 SHARED FEATURES 3
4.4.2 AC POWER MODULE 29
2.2 SPECIFIC FEATURES 4
4.4.3 DC/DC CONVERTER 29
2.2.1 MINERVA 8 4
4.4.4 MAIN PROCESSOR 29
2.2.2 MINERVA 16E 4
4.4.5 MULTI-PURPOSE INTERFACE
2.2.3 MINERVA 80 4
MODULE 30
2.2.4 T890 [As for MINERVA 80] 4
4.4.6 ZONAL DISPLAY 31
2.2.5 T891 [As for MINERVA 16E] 4
4.4. 7 MARINE APPLICATION
2.3 OPTIONAL FEATURES 4 MODULE 31
3. OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND 4.4.8 LINE POWER INSERTION
INDICATORS 5 MODULE 31
3.1 GENERAL 5 4.4.9 LOOP POWERED SOUNDERS
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION 31
3.2 INDICATORS 5
4.4.10MINERVA 80 WITH LOOP
3.3 SWITCHES 7
POWERED SOUNDERS 31
3.4 BASIC CONTROLLER OPERATION 7 4.5 CONFIGURATION OPTIONS 32
3.5 ACCESS TO CONTROLLER
4.5.1 MPIM 'PERSONALITY' 35
FUNCTIONS 7
4.5.2 MINERVA CONTROLLER
4. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 7 ANO LOCAL EQUIPMENT 36
4.1 GENERAL 7 4.5.3 MINERVA CONTROLLER
4.2 MAINS SUPPLY AND REMOTE PRINTERS 37
16
4.5.4 MINERVA CONTROLLER
4.3 CABLES 16
AND REPEATER 38
4.3.1 GENERAL 16
4.5.5 MINERVA CONTROLLER AND
4.3.2 CABLE TYPES 17 REMOTE MIMICS 39
4.3.3 CABLE TERMINATION 18 4.5.6 ALTERNATIVE CIRCUIT
4.3.4 FERRITE BEAD PLACEMENT 19 LAYOUTS 40
4.3.5 EARTHING 8/16E /80 19 4.5. 7 REMOTE/LOCAL BUS
4.3.6 EARTHING T890/ T891 19 LIMITATIONS 41
4.3.7 HAZARDOUS AREA CABLES 19 4.5.8 EXPANSION INPUT/OUTPUT
MODULE [XIOM] 41
4.3.8 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT
CABLES 19 4.6 ANCILLARY DEVICES 41
4.3.9 POWER SUPPLY CABLES 4.6.1 WIRING OF DEVICES 41
[MARINE] 19 4.6.2 HOUSINGS 41
4.3.10REMOTE BUS CABLES 19 4.6.3 LINE ISOLATOR MODULES 41
4.3.11 CABLE ROUTING 19 4.7 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION 44
4.3.12EMI PROTECTION [T890/T891) 19 4.7.1 GENERAL 44
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 1 of67

1. R•gistered Offit<>: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, !krks RGffl 2QE
I A "tqca INTERNATfONAL lTD. COMPANY
i..
L
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.7.2 SYSTEM ZONING 44 7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 59

4. 7.3 EVENT TYPES AVAILABLE IN
CONSYS 45 8. 80-WAY MIMIC 60
4.7.4 GROUPS 46 8.1 GENERAL 60
4.7.5 NORMAL SOUNDER 8.2 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 60
RESPONSE 51
8.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 60
4.7.6 LOCAL BUS CONFIGURATION 52
8.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 60
4.7.7 REMOTE BUS
CONFIGURATION 52
9. ORDERING INFORMATION 63
4.7.8 OPERATOR PASSCODES AND
ACCESS LEVELS 52
4.8 COMPLETION OF 10. RELATED PUBLICATIONS 66
CONFIGURATION FORMS 55
4.8.1 GENERAL 55 APPENDIX A DEVICES
4.8.2 FORM 180(1A) 55
4.8.3 FORM 180(18) 55
4.8.4 FORM 180(2) 56
4.8.5 FORM 180(3) 56
4.8.6 FORM 180(4) 56
4.8.7 FORM 180(6) 56
4.8.8 FORM 180(9A) 56
4.8.9 FORM 180(9B) 56
4.8.10FORM 180(10/1) 56
4.8.11 FORM 180(10/2) 57
4.8.12FORM 180(11/1) 57
4.8.13FORM 180(11/2) 57
4.8.14FORM 180(11/3) 57
4.8.15FORM 180(11/4) 57
4.8.16FORM 180(23) 57
4.8.17FORM 180(24) 57
4.8.18FORM 180(25) 57
4.8.19 FORM. 180(30/1 to 30/4) 57
4.8.20 FORM 180(31/1 an<:130/2) 57
4.8.21 FORM 180(32/1 to 32/4) 57
4.8.22FORM 180(33/1 and 33/2} 58
4.8.23FORM 180(34/1 and 34/2) 58
4.8.24FORM 180(35/1 to 35/4) 58
4.8.25FORM 180(36/1 to 36/4) 58
4.8.26FORM 180(37) 58
5. POWER SUPPLIES 58
6. CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS 58
6.1 MINERVA CONTROLLER, POWER
BOX AND TERMINAL CHAMBER 58
PAGE 2 of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBUCATION: 15A-02-D1
1. INTRODUCTION 2. SALIENT FEATURES

The 'MINERVA' controllers. form a range of 2.1 SHARED FEATURES
microprocessor-based, analogue addressable fire
controllers. This range has been designed to use common • Provide indication of zone in alarm via
hardware modules, thus ensuring maximum compatibility LEDs.
both within the range and between the controllers and • Provide conventional fire control switches
associated equipment. [Evacuate, Silence and Reset], which are
• MINERVA8 enabled by a keyswitch.
• MINERVA l 6E • Display pre-programmed event messages on

an integral 4 x 20-charactcr backlit
• MINERVA 80 alphanumeric display, with precise
• T890 [MINERVA Marine} identification of addressable points. The
point and zone identification messages are
• T891 [MINERVA Marine] defined at configuration [sec para 4.7.3).
• Provide computer-controlled output signals
[conventional multi-zone bell ringing and/or
They arc designed for use with the MS00, M900 [low
profil c] and S25 l i/S25 If range of analogue addressable fire programmable logic control mechanism].
detectors and M520 ancillary modules. It is also possible to • Reco~d events [such as alarms, faults etc.] in
use the M400 range of fire detectors with the an event log, which may be viewed or
controller. Conventional fire detectors [such as the S 100 printed
series. M300 series, S231i/S231f, M600 etc.] may be used
individually or in small groups in conjunction with a • Address up to 99 devices per loop.
dedicated addressable interface module [DM520 • Monitor all circuits for open circuit fau Its.
Conventional Detector Module).
• Provide isolate and override facilities for
The controllers also come as a combined Fire and Security inputs and outputs.
controller, the intruder part is described in publication 09A-
02-D I • Provide a real-time clock for event logging.
The controllers may be used to monitor detectors and simple • Provide walk-test facilities. the results of
apparatus installed in Hazardous Areas using Intrinsically which may be viewed or printed.
Safe System 602 [for design infonnat:on on System 602, • Provide signaliing via the A lam1 and Fault
refer to Publication 26A-02-Dl - Intrinsically Safe Systems relays.
for use in Low Voltage Fire Detection Systems - Application
and Design Information]. • Provide reduced detection sensiti\"iry in
selected zones when premises are occupied.
The controller communicates with the addressable devices
using a multiplexing technique. The controller can also be • Allow monitoring of fire doors for correct
connected to off-site central stations. operation and usc.
The controller may be networked using a ThomNet network • Allocation of inputs and outputs to user
[publication 07A-04-DI), using TLK530 Line Interface groups to allow related functions to be
Boards allows up to 62 MINERVA controllers to be handled in the same way.
networked using the MINERVA Speak protocol. • Drive xenon beacons, klaxons etc. via an
The controller complies with the requirements of BS5839 S8520 Sounder Booster Module.
Part 4 [ 1988) and may be installed in a system which • Monitor and control smoke dampers via the
complies with the requirements of BS5839 Part I [ 1988]. SD520 Smoke Damper Module.
The marine versions also comply with the requirements of
S.O.L.A.S. and Marine Classification Societies. • Provide the inputs and outputs required to
monitor and control plant machinery via
Appendix A provides details of all detectors and ancillaries PI521 Plant Interface Modules.
that may be connected to the MINERVA.
• Provide a battery backed event log.
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 3of67

Kegist•red Office: 19-21 Denmark Slreel, Woltinghan,, Berks RG-10 2QE
A t:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

...
-
\,.
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
• Provide all inputs and outputs typically 2.2.5 T891 [As for MINERVA 16E]
required to interface individual shop units
with a landlords site-wide monitoring system The T89 l is intended for use in small fo medium sized
via an SU52 I Shop Interface Module. A vessels, in which cover can be provided by a maximum of
typical application would be a shopping 16 zones.
precinct.
• Provide the ability to force output devices 2.3 OPTIONAL FEATURES
ON. OFF or UNFORCE [Engineer only].
• A local serial printer connected to a dedicated
controller output.
2.2 SPECIFIC FEATURES • Serial or parallel printers connected to a
2.2.1 MINERVA 8 controller communication output via an
interface module for each printer.
The MINERVA 8 is designed for use in small to medium
sized premises, in which cover can be provided by a • Connection to remote LCD Repeaters via the
maximum of8 fire zones. serial printer pon.
A MINERVA-8 fire controller can: • Connection to a Programmable Logic

Controller via a MIPLOC interface.
• Address up to 99 devices. Each device may
be an input-only. or an input/output device. • Connection to remote repeaters/operators
pancl[s]/mimic[s].
• Arrange the devices in up to 8 zones,
detcnnined by configuration. • Drive loop powered sounders.
• Bell mapping to allow operation to be
2.2.2 MINERVA 16E customised to a particular site or location.
The MINERVA 16E is designed for use in small to mcdi~1111

sized prcm ises, in which cover can be provided by a Note: The bell map defines the way the sounders
maximum of 16 fire zones. operate. It may be either a default bell response
A MINERVA-I 6E fire controller can: or a customised response defined at
configuration.
• Address up to 198 devices arranged in two
circuits, each of up to 99 devices. Each
device may be an input-only, or an input/ • Connection to 'ThomNet' communications
output device. system which allows Peer-to-Peer
• Arrange the devices in up to 16 zones, communications between MINERVAs.
determined by configuration. Connects to 'ThomGraph · a PC based
Graphic User Interface [GUI].
2.2.3 MINERVA 80
The MINERVA 80 is intended for use in medium to large • Connection to a pager transmitter via the
sized premises. in which cover can be provided by a serial printer output, two types of receiver are
maximum of 80 fire zones. available; firstly, one which receives only
A MINERVA-SO fire controller can: alarm and fault messages, secondly, one
which receives all messages
• Address up to 990 devices arranged in up to
ten circuits, each of up to 99 devices. Each • Display of a warning message and generation
device may be an input-only, or an input/ of an audible alert when the routine weekly
output device. test is due.
• Arrange the devices in up to 80 zones, • Provide zonal display mimics of the

detcnnined by configuration. following groups:
zonal alarm display,
zonal fault display,
2.2.4 T890 [As for MINERVA 80]
zonal isolate display,
The T890 is intended for use in medium to large sized
vessels, in which cover can he provided by a maximum of80 zonal alarm output,
fire zones. Additional controllers can be used if more than create own zonal display groups
80 fire zones are required.
PAGE 4of67
.
''
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 15A-02-D1
• Provide point alann/fault displays [point 3. OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND

mimics] in the range I to 80 INDICATORS
• The following software options may also be
configured: 3.1 GENERAL
detector threshold compensation All operator controls and indicators arc mounted on the front
[automatic adjustment for degradation in panel. The left-hand side of the panel contains the
the detector], indicator LEDs and Zonal Display [FIRE ZONES]. The
right -hand side contains the alphanumeric display, keypad,
detector pre-alann signalling [i.e. control keys, and keyswitch.
notification of a condition that may shortly
give rise to an alarm], All front panels are basically the same, the front panel shown
• coincidence detection groups [three levels in Fig. 1 is a T890, any differences being described in the
of coincidence 2, 3, or 4 ], following paragraphs:
detector condition monitoring and
notification of any faults, 3.2 INDICATORS.
open circuit monitoring disable,
The front panel of the 'T890' controller [Fig. I] contains the
zonal identification messages, following displays and indicators:
point identi ti cation messages,
• An SO-character backlit LCD alphanumeric
programmable timers, and, display. arranged in 4 rows of 20 characters.
activation counter. This is used to display infonnation about the
system status and alanns. The baeklight is
on only when the keyswitch is set to the
• Sector Disable [Marine] - disables specified
'enable' position, in order to conserve
detectors for a predetermined time period,
power.
i.e. detectors on a ferry car deck whilst
loading or unloading is in progress via a • A green LED - 'POWER ON'.
TM520 Timer Module.
• A yellow LED - 'POWER FAIL'. [T890/
• Occupied Premises [MINERVA 8/l6E/80] - T891 only]
as for Sector Disable, but instead of being
disabled, the sensitivity of the detector is • Two red LEDs - 'FIRE'.
lowered while 'Occupied Premises' is • A yellow LED - 'FAULT'.
operated.
• A yellow LED - 'DISABLED'.
• 80 red LEDs -Zone display LEDs numbered
Note: I to 80 [MINERVA 80/T890].
1) The open circuit monitoring facility would • 16 red LEDs-Zone display LEDs numbered
normally be enabled. If, however, the l to 16 [MINERVA 16E/T891 ].
addressable circuits are not wired as loops [see
para 4.4.6], this facility should be disabled. • 8 red LEDs -Zone display LEDs numbered I
to 8 [MINERVA 8].
2) Whenever pre-alarm and/or detector condition
monitoring are selected, threshold • On the MINERVA T890/f891 the switch to
compensation is automatically enabled. the right of the keyswitch is labelled 'FIRE
ALARM'.
• On the MINERVA 8/ I6E/80 the switch to the
right of the keyswitch is labelled
'EVACUATE'.
,.
"
Ri,gistered Office: 19-Z I Dun1ark Street, Wokingham,, Berks R~O 2QE
A 1:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

1.-
1.._,..
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
MINERVA MARINE FIRE CONTROLLER
· · · · · ·"'- @·lii!·dU•
' /
1
OS:SB39: PART t : 1981
11_
I
Fig. I MINERVA Fire Controller - Front Panel Layout
A. 'FIRE' LED - RED L. 'POWER FAIL' LED - YELLOW [T890/T891

ONLY]
B. 'FIRE' LED - RED
M NUMERIC KEYPAD
C. 'FAULT' LED - YELLOW
D. 'DISABLED' LED - YELLOW
N. C!l!.111 KEY
E. 'FIRE ZONE' LEDs - RED
P. KEYSWITCH
F. LARGE ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
G j~[eJj1J3l:ji:f KEY
Q liOii:f-11-1;)®1 l(EY [9'/.llliTm=i MINERVA
8/16E/80]
H. f.1fi;J•J!l!li .A. UP KEY
R. Ml•d@M=i KEY
I. SCROLL DOWN TKEY
S. 1;h@:jj KEY
T. )f.1®1:li::J:.ii KEY
K. 'POWER ON' LED - GREEN
PAGE 6 of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.3 SWITCHES 3.5 ACCESS TO CONTROLL~R

FUNCTIONS
The front panel of the controller also contains the following
switches and keys: As stated above. the MINERVA has built-in
• A two-position keyswitch, with positions functions. These functions allow the operator to perform
·normal" and ·enable'. such actions as viewing the event log, setting the date and
time, etc. The functions are arranged according to
sophistication and access to certain of them necessarily
needs to be restricted to trained staff.
Note: The positions of the keyswitch are not marked
on the front panel but are as follows: The control of access has been achieved by assigning
functions to Access Levels. each Access Level having an
·normal' - "9-o'clock"
associated numeric passcode. The passcode for a particular
·enable' - "12-o'clock" Access Level is defined at system configuration.
• A 20-key keypad, containing the following 4. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

keys:
the digits m-m. 4.1 GENERAL
C!lDii Note:
FAST ACCESS 1) The MINERVA controller and ancillaries form a
fire detection system and the installation
• lil;J#.;.1'4#3®11 l¾PJllail=i key, therefore should conform to British Standard
Mll=lfti=i key, BS 5839 Part 1 [1988] 'Fire detection and alarm
jiJ:@iikey, systems for buildings - Code of practice for
system design, installation and servicing'.
jt.:.Mlil•::f..i• key,
N@=iH•=i~ key, 2) The mains supply must be in accordance with
Clause 16.2 of BS5839 Pt 1 [1988], where
iM•N•1§•=i•= key, applicable.
,U;J•J!IIJ; a key,
3) The Marine versions also comply with the
SCROLL DOWN a key. requirements of S.O.L.A.S. and Marine
Classification Societies.
3.4 BASIC CONTROLLER OPERATION

All equipment must be sited and installed as detailed in the .
The controller has the basic four fire control keys normally
specification and/or drawings for the system. To ensure
found on a conventional fire controller, i.e.:
reliability and integrity, good ir.sta!lation practice such as
• ii¾M!t!il=i flilti=f-1fT1iJII Marine] that laid down in the I.E.E. 'Regulations for Electrical
Installations' must be observed.
• Mll#t~M=i Reference should be made to the standard documents 0SA-
• lii=M=il 02-D 1, Low Voltage Fire Detection Systems - General
• 11411=11::f..il Design Information, 0SA-02-11, Low Voltage Fire Detection
Systems - General Installation Information and 0SA-02-C I,
Low Voltage Fire Detection Systems - General
Note: The first three of these keys are enabled by Commissioning Information.
turning the keyswitch to the 'enable' position. The housing/ housings are fitted and cabled up at the
installation stage, with the other items being fitted at system
commissioning.
These keys allow the controller to be operated in a similar
manner to a conventional fire control panel. The MINERVA The M[NERVA 8/l6E/80 electronics are fitted to a chassis
controller, however, also contains built-in functions which plate which is mounted in the backbox. The T890/T89 I
allow more sophisticated operations to be electronics are fitted directly to the backbox.
performed. Access to these functions is achieved by the use Ensure that the position in which the housing/ housings arc
of numeric passcodes as described in the following 10 be fitted allows adequate clearance for cables and for
paragraph. opening the front cover assembly, which is hinged on the
right and opens to 90° [see Fig. 2 to Fig. 5].
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 7 of 67

Regi•terecl Orlke: 19·21 lwnm.ark Stre<t, Wokingham, links RG40 2QE
A tqcu INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
Conduit knockouts are provided for top and bottom entry for
MINERVA 8/16E/80. The T890/T891 controllers use gland
plates which require the required number of cable entries to
be drilled.
For marine versions T890/T89 I the housings may be fitted to
Bulkhead Mounting Brackets [Fig. 6) for direct mounting to
a bulkhead, or fitted with Rack Mounting Brackets [Fig. 7] for
fitting to a suitable 19 inch rack.
The fixing dimensions for a Mimic are shown in Fig. 8.
Constructional details of the housings are given in para 6.
Note: The housings are NOT suitable for exterior

mounting.
PAGE 8 of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
_,
---
440
220
- I
I
~
-
~
!
'
IE5l
1.,__Sdla.
fE5l
I~ ( J-4--9.5 dla.
3 20
200
6.4O1A.
"'!
r~
1
v -0
I
!
55 '
IE'.'.:51 ' ~
1, ·~
... 100
, ... 100
20
-'I
140
0
ON TOP ONLY NOT ON TOP ON TOP ONLY
Fig. 2 MINERVA-8/16E/80 - Controller Housing (Surface Mounting(

Overall and Fixing Dimensions

Registered Office: 19-21 0•11markS1,e..r, Wokingham, Buks RG40 2QE
-. A t:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
.-
}.-- . ---------------------------
MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
380
6.4D1A.
i
~ "<DI
II
--+·.\ . . 100
---~1~30_ _ _.,.~
-~------------------~-~
20
.------+------------------i=f-
NOTONTOP
140
0
Fig. 3 MINERVA-8/16E/80- Controller Housing (Flush Mounting!
. PAGE 10 of 67
~ :
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
HOLES TOP SURFACE ONLY
0
140
20
--
440
-- 220 -
~
J~
D l~Sdia.
Ja (}4--9.Sdia.
D I I
3 20
200
6.4 DIA.
55
i'
'
t,
"' -~
55
•II ... I
.
100
-- .
100
-
Fig. 4 Expansion Housing [Power Box and Terminal ChambcrJ
A tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD COMPANY
t·----------------------------------
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 440 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
320
CABLE GLAND MAXIMUM USABLE AREA

PLATE OF GLAND PLATE
t ~ I
20
~ I
I
135
I'
- - - - - -......
-
1- - - - - - - - 7
I t
80
I
125
I I
!i 2.5 (3 .SFOR
T POWERAND
I
l
!- -
I
- - - - - - - - - - - -
310
- - -
I
___J -- - _J_~_: __ I___
.
EXPANSION ------------356--------------~
BOXES)
Fig. 5 T890ff89I Fire Controller Housing - Overall Dimensions
PAGE 12 of 67
i.
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
520
7: 480
·1
0 (0 © 0 0 0 (-'
v 0
@ NOTE: THE TWO OUTER HOUSING

SECURING HOLES ARE FOR
USE WITH THE POWER BOX ANO
EXPANSION BOX ONLY.
205 170
17.5
-e- 0 0
14 HOLES 5.6 4 HOLES
COUNTERSUNK 11.0
16.0 x 6.0 DEEP (BULKHEAD MOUNTING BRACKET
(BULKHEAD MOUNTING BRACKET TO BULKHEADl
TO MINERVA ENCLOSURESl
Fig. 6 Bulkhead Mounting Bracket - Overall and Fixing Dimensions

Reglster«I Ofr.«•: 19-21 Denmark Stre<'I, Wokingh•m, Berl,:s RG4fl 2QE
A t:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD COMPANY
t--------------------------------------
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
320
REAR OF BOX
114
. 139
0 SIDE FIXINGS ···~··

_j_
;
i
!
__L __________ _
270 90 -~ ··---
' 19_3
170
Q RACK FIXINGS
0
-- ---------- - - -'-
190.5 .
·------1
82.15
Fig. 7 Rack Mounting Brackets - Overall and Fixing Dimensions
PAGE 14of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
i5 I 5 :
' .
I
100
- 25-
____ _J
5
0
105
105
0 0
105
90
0 0
t
35
t
35
!
'
Fig. 8 Mimic Fixing Dimensions

R•::i•t.,ed Ollice; 19-21 Uenn,ark Sin-er, Wokingh•m, Berks RG-tll !Q[
A t:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
·,:-----------------------------------
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.2 MAINS SUPPLY 4.3 CABLES

Connection ro the mains supply must be via an isolating switch 4.3.1 GENERAL
reserved solely for the purpose, its cover coloured red and
labelled 'FIRE ALARM: DO NOT SWITCH OFF·. Cable requirements for all parts ofan installation arc discussed
in publication 05A-02-l2 which should be referred to before
The isolating dcYicc: installation is carried out. All cables should be specified and
• Must be as close to the incoming supply as is installed to meet the requirements of BS5839 Part l
Subsection 17 or local equivalent standard.
practicably possible.
• Should be secure from unauthorised operation. For the addressable circuit wiring, any type of screened cable
that would normally be used on a fire protection system may
be used with a ·MINERVA. fire controller. Thus MICC,
FP200 and SWA cables may all be used, providing that the
WARNING:
conductor size is not less than l.5mm 2, and not greater than
2.5rnm 2 .
FOR A SITE WHERE THE NEUTRAL OF THE
MAINS SUPPLY CANNOT BE IDENTIFIED A For marine applications. 2-core or 4-core twisted pair,
TWO-POLE ISOLATING DEVICE MUST BE ethylene propylene rubber (EPR] insulation and chloro-
USED WHICH DISCONNECTS BOTH POLES sulphanated polyethylene [CSP] sheath to BS6883 is to be
SIMULTANEOUSLY. used, with a conductor size of l.5mm 2•
The addressable circuit cable screens must be 101ncd w1th1n
WHERE THE NEUTRAL OF THE MAINS CAN
each device on the loop to form a continuous cable screen.
BE IDENTIFIED, A SINGLE POLE ISOLATING
DEVICE MAY BE USED WHICH All other cables must be of a sufficient size not to cause an
DISCONNECTS THE PHASE CONDUCTOR. excessive voltage drop [max. I volt for a 24 volt circuit] for the
current required .
.'\ schematic diagram for a typical system layout is shown in
fig. 11.
Note: If a two-pole device is used, a label must be
affixed inside the unit warning of a fuse in the
neutral line. Note: It is an fE.E. Regulation that fire alarm cables be
segregated from all other [non-fire alarm} cables.
PAGE 16 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ISSUE No. &· DATE: 04 11/99
4.3.2 CABLE TYPES

The following cable types should be used to comply with EU EMC directive [89i336EECJ:
Addressable loops: MICC, SWA [using a suitable termination gland] or any 'foil and
drain wire type' fire resistant cable [tcnninated with an SHV type gland (Stock coded)
or a CXT type gland (not Stock coded)).
i\fains: Nonna! mains cable, MJCC, SWA [using a suitable termination
gland] or any 'foil and drain wire type· fire resistant cable [tcnninate<l
with an SHV or CXT type gland]. A ferrite bead must be fitted as shown.
Power box 10 Controller

[MINERVA 80rf890]: Two 4-corc screened cables [as above].
Remote Bus: MICC, SWA [using a suitable termination gland] or any 'foil and drain
wire type' fire resistant cable [terminated with an SHV or CXT type gland).
Network: MICC, SWA [using a suitable termination gland] or any 'foil and drain
wire type' fire resistant cable [tenninated with an SHV or CXT type gland).
CABLE PARAMETERS BETWEEN TLK530s [Max length - 1200m]
38,400 Max resistance 75 ohms per conduCtL)r
• Max capacitance 0.3~tF between conductors
19,200 Max resistance 75 ohms per conductor
Max capacitance 0.6µF between conductors
9,600 am! below Max resistanc.: 75 ohms per conductor
Max capacitance 1.2µ F between conductors
The maximum distance, using shielded twisted pair cable with characteristics within
the parameters above. terminated with an SHV or CXT type gland, is 3000 metres.
Examples arc Belden 9460 or 9574.
Serial output; Wall mounted printer [conduit/MJCC].

Remote LCDs [MICC, SWA [using a suitable termination gland)
or any 'foil and drain wire type' [terminated with an SHY or CXT type gland].
Ferrite beads arc to be used at each Remote LCD as detailed in
the commissioning section.
Pager (conduit/MICC].
The following 'foil and drain wire type' fire resistant cables arc suitable:
OAETWYLER Lifeline
DELTA Firetuff
FABRICA CAVICEL Fircccll
HUBER & SUHNER Radox FR
PIRELLI FP range
DRAKA CALFLEX Calflam
RAYDEX FG950
GEC AEI Firetcc
TRATOS CAYI Firesafe
ALCATEL pyrolyon

Rl•gis1..-red Office: 19-21 Ot·nm.ark Street, \\'okinghan1., Berks RG-101QE
A "tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.3.3 CABLE TERMINATION

All ·foil and drain wire type' fire resistant cable and Belden shielded twisted pair terminations MUST be made using a CXT
type gland shown in Fig. 9, or the SHY type gland shown in Fig. 9.
CXT TYPE GLAND MANUFACTURED BY CMP PRODUCTS Ltd TELEPHONE: (019112657411 FACSIMILE, (0191) 2650581
... E
....
BELDEN CABLE MAY REQUIRE SLEEV!flG TO OBTAIN A TIGHT FIT.
DRAIN WIRE/SHIELD IMUST BE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND TERMI-

NATE OUTSIDE CONTROLLER HOUSING)
OUTSIDE
METAL WASHERS
CONTROLLER HOUSING
D
LOCKNUT
DRAIN WIRE SLOT
INSIDE
Min Cable Range Max
Metric PVC
Gland Thread 'B' Across
thf"ead Shroud
Size Length Comers
·c· Min . Max Ref.
'D' Dia. 'E'
20/16 20 15 3.1 - 8.6 24.4 223

20S 20 15 6.1 . 11.6 26.5 223
C
20 20 15 6.5 13.9 30.0 225
FOIL MUST NOT EXTEND BEYOND GLAND
All Dimensions in Millimetres
Fig. 9 Cable Termination CXT Type Gland Detail
SIIV type gland:; arc Stock cod.::d as follows:
INNER OUTER STOCK CODE

CABLE SIZE GLAND REFERENCE
SHEATH SIZES SHEATH SIZES NUMBER
I .Smm 2 two core 3.5 - 5.0mm 6.8- 8.8mm SHV0I 90 I .007.369
2.Smm 2 two core 4.5- 6.0mm 8.5 - I0.8mm SHV02 901.007.370
I .5mn/ 4 core 5.0- 5.7mm 8.5 - 10.8mm SHV03 901.007.371
PAGE 18 of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
4.3.8 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT CABLES

BRASS
EARTHING Further to the information given in the General section the
FERRUlE following notes are also applicable.
RUBBER
•Q"RING COMPRESSION
NEOPRENE CONE [BRASS]
BUSH
Note:
1) The maximum permitted addressable circuit
cable parameters are as follows:
THREAO
• Resistance 75 ohm
SIZE "A"
SECURING
MAIN BODY CAP[BRASS]
[BRASS] • Inductance 1.5mH measured
}
• Capacitance 0.5µF at lkHz
Push earthing ferrule between braid and cable.

Run strain wire between braid and outer sleeve,
terminate slrain wire at earthing lerrule. These parameters allow cable lengths of up to
2km with suitable cables. Reference should be
made to the cable manufacturers' data in order
Fi~. 10 SIi\. Type Gbmd Detail to calculate cable lengths using the above
parameters.
2) The resistance quoted above is for the TOTAL
resistance of the addressable circuit cable
including any L/520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Modules
fitted. Each of these modules has a resistance
4.3.4 FERRITE BEAD PLACEMENT of approximately 0.25 ohms and a MAXIMUM of
[MINERVA 8/16E/80J twelve may be fitted on a direct route between
any addressable device and the controller
Th.; ti:rrit.; b.:ads supplied with the equipmem must be lined
wh.:n:: shown in the internal \"iC\\" diagrams. 3) The WHOLE of any circuit that includes an
SM520 must be wired in cables which meet the
requirements of BS 5839 Part 1 Subsection
4.3.5 EARTHING 8/16E /80 17.2.
Ali exposed metalwork and cabling conduits must be returned

to earth \'ia a suitable copper con<lucror. Mains should be 4.3.9 POWER SUPPLY CABLES
eanhcd as shown in Fig. 15 and Fig. 16.
[MINERVA 80/T890]
Two 4-core screened cables as described for the addressable
Note: Earthing should be to I.EE. Regulations. circuit cables must be used to supply the controller from the
power box. using three cores of one cable and two cores in
the other.
4.3.6 EARTHING T890/ T891
All exposed metalwork and cabling conduits must be returned 4.3.10 REMOTE BUS CABLES
t(, earth via a su11,1hlc copper cunductor. All cable screens arc
to be terminated on cable entry\ ia suitable glands. System The remote bus is an RS485 differential wire pair
OV i',,·JUST NOT ht: conncct.;d to eanh. The earching stud on communications bus. The cable used must therefore not
the bot!om of the T8901T89 l controller MUST BE connected cause loss or attenuation of the signal.
to ship\ c,u1h.
The maximum length of the cable is I 200111.
Note: Earthing should be to IEE. Regulations.
4.3.7 HAZARDOUS AREA CABLES

For cable parameters for Intrinsically Safe circuits in
Hazardous Areas, refer to Publication 26A-02-D 1.

Regist,red Office: 19-21 Ucnnrnrk Street, Wokingh3m, Berks RG~O 1Q£
A t:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.3.11 CABLE ROUTING

1, is impor1an1 to ensure the correct routing of cables in
order 10 minimise coupling effects. In particular, power
and "MINERVA signal cables should NOT be grouped
together in the same conduit or trunking. Where it is
unan1idabk to run power and signal cables together, it is
recommended that the separation between them is not less
than the minimum values shown in Table I.
4.3.12 EMI PROTECTION [T890/T891]

To providc extra EMI protection Ferrite beads arc to be
placed on the cables as shown in Fig. 12 and Fig. 13.
4.3.13 EMC COMPLIANCE

To comply with current EMC directives, Ferrite beads arc
to be plai:cd on the ..:ables as shown in Fig. 15 and Fig. I 6.
POWER CABLE VOLTAGE SEPARATION [m] POWER CABLE CURRENT SEPARATION [m]
115V 0.30 5A 0.30
240V 0.45 15A 0.35
415V 0.58 50A 0.50
3.3kV 1.1 100A 0.60
6.6kV 1.25 300A 0.85
11kV 1.4 600A 1.05
Table. I Cable Separation Distances
PAGE 20 of 67
,
..
KEY:
ADET • ADDRESSABLE DETECTOR

DET • CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR
LI• LINE ISOLA TOR
CP • CALLPOINT
DM • CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE
RM· RELAY MODULE
SM • SOUNDER MODULE
SB • SOUNDER BOOSTER MODULE
LPS • LINE POWERED SOUNDER MODULE
.,, REMOTE SU • SHOP INTERFACE UNIT
z~· BUS Pl • PLANT INTERFACE MODULE
~--
=
SERIALI
f
SERIAL (NOTE 2)
EXPANSION PORT i ••• ·-· PRINTER
BUS
, / PAGER
CONTROLLER TRANSMITTER
230V a.c, -----1~
EXTERNA -0
cC
B1BEOL
CONTACT (/)
-----'+ PSU [J) C
24V C c;:;
REMOTE LCD r
BATTERY m
REPEATERS r.
IN POWER _J_ ADDRESSABLE z s:
~ ,z..
EOL DET
CIRCUIT A ~
SOX
(NOTES 1 AND 3)
EOL '
~
I
I
I 0 :-;
OCCUPIED CONTACT I 0 7.
..
:;..
----11.... PREMISES 1 -,I
r:,
1/P
I CONTACT
2
AL-f-l--;---,__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __,---=::J_-¾...---
FAULT i LPSI SU
AL+-~-->---------------~--I
1/P
MAXIMUM OF 6 SOUNDERS PER LPS520
ALARM & '\ EXTERNAL

SE100 FAULT I_ EQUIPMENT
RELAYS
BT LINE/
EXCHANGE NOTES:
JC) 1. EACH CIRCUIT MAY BE ATTED WITH UP T099 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
m 2. EACH EXTERNAL MPIM MUST BE POWERED FROM A DCPM
N 3. ONLY ONE LOOP IS SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
.....
....
0
~
MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
ADDRESSABLE • EXTERNAL POWER

1
LOOP CABLES SUPPLY
I
A B A B
REPEATER BUS CABLE I
GLAND
MAlNS IN OUT PLATE
CABlE EARTH POWER SUPPLY CABLE
STUD
GLAND---+----
PLATE
EARTH
STUD
5.35mrn
FERRlTE
BEAD
12.7mm 6.35mm
FERRITE FERRITE
BEAD BEADS
EARTHlNG
POINTS
ACPM MP
TS91 CONTROLLER T291 REPEATER
EMI FERRITE BEADS ARE TO BE PLACED ON THE MAINS, ADDRESSABLE LOOP, T291 REPEATER ANO POWER CABLES.
PLACE THE 6.35mm BEADS ON THE MAINS CABLE AND ON EACH PAIR OF THE REPEATER CABLE
(REPEATER ONLY).
PLACE THE 12.7mm BEADS ON THE ADDRESSABLE LOOP CABLES. THE ADDRESSABLE LOOP BEAD SHOULD
COUPLE A PAIR OF LOOPS i.e. ( A & BJ.
CABLES SHOULD BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND ARRANGED INTO THEIR NATURAL PAIRS.
Eg +24V and OV, RS422+ and RS422-.
Fig. 12 Cabling Arrangement and the Plarrment Of EMI Ferrite Beads

for T891 Controller and T29 I Repeater
PAGE 22 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
·,
ADDRESSABLE
POWER CABLES LOOP CABLES
GLAND A B A B GLAND REPEATER
MAINS CABLE
PLATE IN OUT PLATE
CABLE EARTH EARTH
STUD STUD
1 2 3 4 I 2 3 4 I 2
6.35mm
FERRITE
BEAD
EARTHING
ACPM POINT
MOTHERBOARD EARTHING
ANOAllCMs POINTS
MP
T890 POWER BOX Tll90 CONTROLLER
EXTERNAL - - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
POWER REPEATER POWER SUPPLY
SUPPLY GLAND-----~
PLATE
EARTH
STUD
EMI FERRITE BEADS ARE TO BE PLACED ON THE MAINS, ADDRESSABLE LOOP,

T291 REPEATER AND POWER CABLES.
PLACE THE 6.35mm BEADS ON THE MAINS CABLE ANO ON EACH PAIR OF THE
REPEATER CABLE (REPEATER ONLY).
6.35mm
PLACE THE 12.7mm BEAOS ON THE ADDRESSABLE LOOP CABLES. THE FERRITE
ADDRESSABLE LOOP SLEEVE SHOULD COUPLE A PAIR OF LOOPS i.e. ( A & B). BEADS
CABLES SHOULD BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND ARRANGED INTO

THEIR NATURAL PAIRS. Eg +24V and OV, RS422+ and RS422-.
1291 REPEATER
Fig. 13 Cabling Arrangement and the Placement ofEMI Ferrite Beads

for T890 Controllers, T290 Repeater and T890 Power Box

Rtgi,t•rl/d Office: 19-21 lwnmark Strttt, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
FRONT PANEL
HOUSING~
BATTERY
'' SOR 16-ZONE

MAIN 1 1
J~i:_ ___ J., DISPLAY
ACPM
TERMINA~OCESSOR ' I I MAM I
I (T891 only) I
BLOCK
1.------.,
~
I I
BATTERY
D LPIM
(Not Morine)
I
I
:
I
I
I_ 1 KEVSWITCH
:
I
V I
- -1
-=k=-
L_c_H_A_s_s1_s_P_L_AT_E_ _ =· =H=Al,l=D=L=E===::!1P
I MPIM
Fig. 14 MINERVA 8/16E and T891 Fire Controllers - Internal View Showing Positions
of the Chassis Plate and Circuit Boards
LOCAL EARTI-1 CABLE MIN 4mm2 MAX 1 OHM
6.35mm FERRITE BEAD
HOUSING
FRONT PANEL
PL2
(REVERSE SIDE)
NOTES
1- n-tE FERRITE BEADS MUST BE FITTED TO THE CABLES AS SHOWN IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH THE EMC DIRECTIVE_
2. THE MAINS LEAD SHOULD ENTER THE HOUSING VIA TI-IE LEFTMOSTTOP KNOCKOUT AND ROUTED AS FAR AWAY FROM THE MP AS POSSIBLE.
3. •• FITTED ON MINERVA BAND 16E ONLY
Fig. 15 MINERVA 8/l6E and T891 Fire Controllers - PCB Interconnections and
Placement of Ferrite Beads for MINERVA 8/16E
PAGE 24 of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATlON: 15A-02-O1
ISSUE No. &"DATE: 04 11/99
LINKED IN MARINE VERSION ONLY
FRONT PANEL
80-ZONE
DISPLAY
TB 1
.,
,.
TERMINAL BLOCK
PL2N
MOTHERBOARD
:,
PL11 PL4N
LOCAL EARTH CABLE MIN 4mm 2 1 OHM MAX
POWER BOX HOUSING FRONT COVER
TO MAIN
PROCESSOR
6.35mm
FERRITE
BEAD
+ +
BATTERY BATTERY
TERMINAL CHAMBER HOUSING FRONT COVER
TO ADDRESSABLE LOOPS*
TO MOTHERBOARD TERMINAL BLOCK

IN CONTROLLER
• ADDRESSABLE LOOP CONNECTION OPTIONS, SEE TEXT
NOTE: THE FERRITE BEADS MUST BE PLACED ON THE CABLES IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH THE EMC DIRECTIVE
Fig. 16 MINERVA-80/T890 Fire Controller - Internal View showing PCB Locations, Connections,
and Placement of Ferrite Beads for MINERVA 80

Registered Oflin: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham. Berks RG412QE
A 1:qcu INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
r--------1
I LINE POWER I
I INSERTION MODULE
I (MINERVA 8 and I
I 16EONLY) I
115VI AC/DC L...---------'
240Va.c. POWER
MODULE
ADDRESSABt.E CIRCUITS
MAIN
,_ _ _ _.......,,..,_ REMOTE BUS (see 1ext)
PROCESSOR
BATTERIES t-------1~ SOUNDER OUTPUTS
t-------1~ RELAY OUTPUTS
'OCCUPIED PREMISES' 1/P
~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - 'FAULT' 1/P
"TAMPER' 1/P (NOT USED)
LOCAL LOCAL BUS
BUS (see text)
,----------,
8-WAV ZONAL I 16 - WAY ZONAL
DISPLAY -I DISPLAY (MINERVA :
(MINERVA 8 only) I 16E andT891) __ I
XIOMs . , . _ . DIGITAL 1/0
MULTI-
PURPOSE
INTERFACE
I - ;~;~ - -
MODULE
I[ _______ .
,---._:I APPLICATIONS I (TB91 only)
MODULE I
KEYPAD/
DISPLAY
KEYSWITCH
I
I
I
I L . __ _ _ _ _ _~ SERIAL PORT
I
I
'-----------• PARALLEL PORT
(OPTIONAL)
Fig. 17 MINERVA-8/16Eff891 Fire Controller - Block Diagram·
PAGE 26of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
...
ACIOC
230V a.c. POWER
MODULE
MOTHER- ALXM ADDRESSABLE
BOARD MODULES CIRCUITS
MAIN
BATTERIES
PROCESSOR
1------• REMOTE BUS (see text)
1------• SOUNDER OUTPUTS
RELAY OUTPUTS
'OCCUPIED PREMISES' VP
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - < 'FAULT'IIP
'TAMPER' UP (NOT USED)
LOCAL BUS LOCAL BUS (seelext)
I
I 1-------
.
1- - ··- ·- - - .. •• v _---· -.
,--------1 -
80-WAY
ZONAL
DISPLAY
I OPTIONAL
I
I MODULES
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
I- - ;;R~~ - -
I I APPLICATIONS I (T890 only)
I Il _ _MODULE
_ _ _ _ _ JI
MULTI-
I MULTI-
PURPOSE
I PURPOSE
INTERFACE
I INTERFACE
MODULE
I MODULE
I
I
I I
I
I
I
4i__ I KEYPAD/
D_1SP_LAY~
I
~--??--- KEYSWITCH
EXPANSION I I
BUS t
I ,._____ _ _ _ _ _ _ SERIAL PORT
---~---I I
I
XIOMs I ' .__ - - - - - - - - - - • PARALLEL PORT
I
L _______ J (OPTIONAL)
L - - -- . -- -· ·- - J
fig. 18 MINERVA-80ff890 Fire Controller (Non Loop Powered! - Block Diagram

R•gi,trn,d Onie<•; 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG-10 2QE
A "tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD_ COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
OCPM-LP
ACJDC
230V a.c. POWER
MODULE
MOTHER· ALXM • LP ADDRESSABLE
BOARD MODULES CIRCUITS
·LP
MAIN
PROCESSOR ....__ _ ___,,_ REMOTE BUS (,..e text)
BATTERIES
1 - - - - - - - - 1 1 - SOUNDER OUTPUTS
'---,,-------,.--''--------11- RELAY OUTPUTS

'OCCUPIED PREMISES' 1/P
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - < 'FAULT'IIP
LOCAL BUS "TAMPER" 1/P (NOT USED)
LOCAL BUS (see text)
I
____ v_ --
r-------
1 I
I ,------
80-WAY
ZONAL
DISPLAY
OPTIONAL I
MODULES I I ' I- - ;.;;;~ - -I
I I I APPLICATIONS I (T890 only)
I I IL _______
MODULE JI
I I MULTI-
I MULTI· I PURPOSE
I PURPOSE
INTERFACE
I INTERFACE 1
1
MODULE
I MODULE
I I I
I
I I i
I l I
KEYPAOf
I I DISPLAY
I I
I I
~--0---
I I
I
EXPANSION I I
BUS I I I
I .___ _ _ _ ___._ SERIAL PORT
---~--- I I
I I
I
I
I I
'- - - - - - - - - - - __. PARALLEL PORT
XIOMs
I
t _______ JI '
(OPTIONAL)
- -- .. -- - --- - -- - - - J
NOTE: EVERY MINERVA 80 FITTED WITH A LOOP POWERED MOTHERBOARD

MUST ALSO BE FITTEDWJTH A OCPM-LP, EVEN IF THE MINERVA 80 IS
ONLY FITTED WITH ONE ALDI-LP_
Fig. 19 MINERVA-80rf890 Fire Controller !Loop Powered!- Block Diagram
PAGE 28 of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
4.4 BOARD DESCRIPTIONS 4.4.4.1 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT

INTERFACE
4.4.1 GENERAL
The addressable circuit interface [main processor] controls
The 'MINERVA' fire controller contains a number of the communication between the detectors [and other
different printed circuit boards [PCBs]. The location of the ancillary devices] connected to the 2-wire analogue
PCBs within the controller arc similar. addressable circuits and the controller. The ALXMS
The locations of the PCBs in a MINERVA 8, 16E or T891 provide the same interfaces for MINERVA 80/T890. In
system are shown in Fig. 14. addition, the addressable interface also contains line
isolation circuits which protect the addressable circuits from
The interconnections between the PCBs in a M(NERVA 8, short-circuit conditions.
l 6E or T89 I system are shown in Fig. 15.
The locations and interconnections of the PCBs in a 4.4.4.2 POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY
MINERVA 80/T890 system are shown in Fig. 16. MONITORING
A block diagram of the interconnections between the PCBs The MP regularly monitors the operation of the ACPM to
for a MINERVA 8, l 6E or T89 I system is given in Fig. 17. ensure that the mains supply is present. It also monitors the
A block diagram showing the interconnections between the battery voltage to ensure that the batteries are connected and
PCBs for a MINERVA-80/T890 system is given in Fig. 18 operational.
and Fig. 19.
The available PCBs arc described in the following 4.4.4.3 RELAY OUTPUTS
paragraphs.
The MP contains four changeover relays. Two of these are
used to drive the sounders, the other two are general Alarm
4.4.2 AC POWER MODULE and Fault relays which may be used to connect the controller
to public [e.g. British Telecom [BT]] signalling systems or
The AC Power Module [ACPM,J is common to all models the E.C.R.[marine versions only].
and supplies power to all the PCBs and other devices The coils of these relays [with the exception of the Fault
fitted. It contains an integral battery charger which
relay] are monitored to ensure that they are operational. The
continuously charges back-up batteries. These are required
Fault relay is normally energised and monitored for
to supply the system in the event of a mains failure, in order
operation.
to comply with the requirements of BS 5839 Part I
[1988}. Marine versions T890/T89I also comply with the
requirements ofS.O.L.A.S. 4.4.4.4 SOUNDER OUTPUTS
The ACPM is fitted into the controller housing for In addition to the monitoring of the sounder driver relay coils
MINERVA 8, 16E and T891, and fined into the Power Box as described above, the MP also monitors the condition of
on MINERVA 80, and T890 when more than 4 loops arc the sounders and end-of-line monitoring devices to ensure
usct!. that they are not faulty or disconnected.
The sounder outputs are protected by self-resetting
electronic fuses, or miniature fuse links depending on board
4.4.3 DC/DC CONVERTER
issue.
The DC/DC Converter produces regulated d.c. supplies from
the ACPM outputs for use by the controller logic 4.4.4.5 FAULT LOOP MONITOR
circuits. The DC/DC Converter is supplied only with
MINERVA 80, and T890, and is fitted into the controller A fault loop may be connected to sounders and other
housing. ancillaries. This loop is monitored by the MP and can be
used to signal that the devices are faulty. In particular, the
loop may include the return signal, 'transmitter fault', from
4.4.4 MAIN PROCESSOR any BT or similar signalling system to which the controller
is connected.
The Main Processor [MP] is fitted into the controller housing
and is common to all the controllers in the 'MINERVA'
range. It is the system controller and thus controls all 4.4.4.6 LOCAL BUS INTERFACE
information flow throughout the system as well as handling
communications with other systems. This is a high-speed synchronous serial bus capable of
addressing up to 16 peripherals. Its main function is to
The MP carries out a number of functions which are briefly provide communication with the Multi-Purpose Interface
described in the following paragraphs. Module [MPIM] inside the controller. It can, in addition, be
used to communicate with additional, local MPIMs.

... Regbt.o.-.d Office: 19·21 Denmark Stn,ol, Wokingham, Berks RG48 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
Note: The maximum length of the Local Bus cable 4.4.5.3 KEYPAD INTERFACE
allowed is 460mm from the Main Processor:
The MPIM provides scanning and debouncing for the
membrane keypad. Valid keypad inputs are reported to the
MP, invalid inputs are signalled by a short tone on the internal
i) To any other board, or,
buzzer.
ii) where boards arc 'daisy chained' together
the total cable lengths added together. The @aJ;J•J•l•l:i A and SCROLL DOWN Y keys
operate with auto-repeat, i.e. holding down either key causes
the display to scroll in the appropriate direction.
The cable used for the Local Bus is
manufactured to specific lengths. Non-standard [n data entry mode, each valid digit entered is 'echoed' onto
cables for 'specials' cannot be supported. No the display. In password entry mode, an asterisk is displayed
other system is fully compatible. for each valid digit entered. In both of these modes, some
The reason is the clock signal running at close to
editing of the data is possible using the Ht•)a131:11:j key,
which acts as a 'delete last digit entered' key.
1 Megabit/second, at this frequency, the cable
parameters, particularly capacitance have a
marked effect an data transfer.
4.4.5.4 DISPLAY INTERFACE
The display used is an alpha-numeric backlit liquid crystal
4.4.5 MULTI-PURPOSE INTERFACE display consisting of four lines each of 20 characters. It can
MODULE display the full extended ASCII character set. The backlight
is operated when the key is inserted and set to 'enable'.
The Multi-Purpose Interface Module [MPIM] is mounted on
the rear of the front cover assembly and is used to provide
interface facilities between the MP and a number of different 4.4.5.5 EXPANSION BUS
peripherals. An MPIM must have its 'Personality'
[configuration] set by means of plug-in headers to suit the This is a I-bit bi-directional bus which is capable of
•1articular application and is always addressed as address '00' addressing up to 801/0 devices. It may be used to drive up to
cc para 4.4]. 80 off-board LEDs, relays, etc., or to read up to 80 auxiliary
inputs.
The board can perform a number of functions, each
• Personality' being a different combination of these Its main function in the 'MINERVA' is to communicate with
functions. The functions available are briefly described in the the Zonal Display [ZD].
following paragraphs.
Note: The maximum length of the Expansion Bus

4.4.5.1 LOCAL BUS INTERFACE cable is 1.5 metres from the MPIM:
This is a high speed (92 I .6kHz] synchronous serial bus, i) To any other board, or,
driven by the MP. As this bus can address up to 16 ii} where boards are 'daisy chained' together
peripherals, the address of any MPIM on the bus must be set the total combined cable lengths.
using a plug-in header. [Although able to support 16
addresses, only 10 arc ever used, one is always used for the
front keypad and five arc reserved for the ALXMs]. The cable used for the Expansion Bus is
manufactured ta specific lengths. Non-standard
cables for 'specials' cannot be supported. No
4.4.5.2 REMOTE BUS INTERFACE other system is fully compatible.
This is an RS485 party-line asynchronous bus [maximum The reason is the clock signal running at 0.5
length 1200m }, driven by the MP. As this bus can address up Megabits/second, at this frequency, the cable
to 16 peripherals, the unique address of any MPIM on the bus parameter particularly capacitance have a
must be set using a plug-in header. marked effect on data transfer.
Note: The maximum number of RBUS devices is

limited by design considerations i.e. MPIM
personality. [see para 4.4].
PAGE 30 of67
..
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 1SA-02-O1
ISSUE No. & 'DATE: 04 11/99
4.4.5.6 SERIAL PORT

This is a general purpose, 6-wire RS232 interface. Its HOUSING
primary purpose is intended to be to drive a serial printer but BATTERY
it may also be used to communicate with computers, MAIN
~
terminals, etc. for configuration or monitoring purposes.
ACPM
The protocol of this port is as follows: PROCESSOR
'TERMINAL
BLOCK
Baud rate: 4800
Data bits: 8
ILPIMI
Stop bits: I BATTERY
Parity: None
4.4.5. 7 PARALLEL PORT 'HANDLE

CHASSIS PLATE
This is a Centronics-compatible standard parallel printer

interface, which can run simultaneously with the serial
Fig. 20 LPIM Mounting
printer port when the board's 'Personality' is used [see para
4.4).
4.4.9 LOOP POWERED SOUNDERS
4.4.6 ZONAL DISPLAY MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION
The Zonal Display [ZD] is mounted on the rear of the front A maximum of 24 sounders may be permitted per loop.
cover assembly. It is driven by the MPIM expansion bus Definition:
[sec para 4.3.4.5] and contains the following LEDs and the
associated driver circuitry. A Loop Power Unit [LPU] is composed as follows:
• 2 red "FIRE ALARM" LEDs. I LPBB =I LPU

I LPSM = 6 LPU[maxj
• I yellow 'FAULT' LED.
[LPBB Loop Powered Besson Banshee]
• I yellow 'DISABLED' LED.
[LPSM Loop Powered Sounder Module]
• Either 8, 16, or 80 red ·FIRE ZONE' LEDs.
Maximum number ofLPUs
• I green 'POWER ON" LED [Marine only].
Per loop:
• 24 LPU {i.e. 24 LPBBs or 4 LPS or
4.4.7 MARINE APPLICATION MODULE combinations]
The Marine Application Module [MAM] is mounted on the Per MINERVA 8:
rear of the front cover, [T890/T89 I only]. It contains I
green 'POWER ON' LED, I yellow 'POWER FAIL' LED, • 24 LPU
four LEDs for providing backlighting for the keyswitch f2 Per MINERVA 16EIT891:
LEDs] and the SILENCE and RESET switches. The
Module also has the following functions: • 48 LPU
• Sounds a warning buzzer in the event of a Per MINERVA 80/T890:

total power supply failure. • 80 LPU- with one ACPM
• Controls the LCD backlight. • 200 LPU - with 2 ACPMs [one ACPM with
• Provides an earth fault output to MPIM. batteries and one without]
Maximum loop length
4.4.8 LINE POWER INSERTION MODULE 1km - with evenly distributed LPBBs and LPSM units and
up to 7 Linc Isolator modules·[L1520 Mk II].
The Linc Power Insertion Module [LPIM] is mounted
An example of the maximum length of a fully loaded loop
• ·piggy-back' on the Main Processor PCB [Fig. 20}. It is for
with 4 LPSM units evenly distributed is shown in Fig. 21.
use with Main Processor board issue nine and above. The
LPIM is used to power the addressable loops during the
. refresh period when Loop Powered Sounders arc

fitted. [MINERVA 8/16E/T891]. The LPIM is powered by
the Main Processor DCPM +26V via a Molex type plug.

Registered Orlice; 19-ZI Dtnmark Str~et, Wokingham, 8uks RG40 ZQE
A 1:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
.
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.4.10 MINERVA 80 WITH LOOP POWERED 4.4.10.2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

SOUNDERS [MINERVA 80]
4.4.10.1 REQUIREMENTS See Fig. 22 for hardware configuration and Fig. 23 for
ALXM-LP detail. A loop can contain a maximum of 24
The MINERVA 80 controller requires the following LPU. A MINERVA 80 may power up to 80 LPU using one
equipment for driving loop powered sounders: ACPM and a DCPM-LP. The ACPM is connected to the
• Main Processor [issue 9 or above] Main Processor as normal, a second cable must be used to
connect the ACPM 0V and +24V output to the DCPM-LP
• Motherboard-LP [557-180-204] [TBI].
• DCPM-LP [557-180-205] Using from 81 to 200 [maximum] LPU requires a second
ACPM without batteries which is monitored via the
• ALXM-LP [557-180-203]
loop. The ACPM is configured in 'CONSYS' as PM 500
• Ll520 Mk 2 (545-001-007] (Firel no Batt.
The 0V and +24V output from the second ACPM are
connected to the second pairof0V and +24V tenninals of the
When using the Motherboard-LP, only DCPM-LP and
DC PM-LP [TB I].
ALXM-LPS can be fitted. Conversely, when using the
s1andard motherboard, only standard DCPM and ALXMs can The header HD I on the Motherboard-LP must be set to the
be titted. i.e. no mixing is allowed as tenninal damage to the DCPM-LP position.
equipment might result.
The Loop powered MINERVA 80 will not operate correctly
without a DC/DC Loop Powered Convenor [DCPM-LP).
Unlike the standard MINERVA 80, every MINERVA 80 fitted
with a Loop Powered Motherboard, [MP-LP, stock code no.
557-180-204]. must also be fitted with a DC/DC Loop
Powered Convertor, (DCPM-LP, stock code no. 557-180-
205}, even if the MINERVA 80 is only fitted with one
Addressable Loop Powered Expansion Module, [ALXM-LP,
stock code no. 557-180-203].
,__2_oo_m_--,,LPSM1---2-oo_m
_ ___,LPSM1---~
MINERVA 200m
t-------1LPSM,,__-~
200m 200m
Fig. 21 Loop Powered Sounders - Example of Cable Layout
PAGE 32 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
[SSUE No. & DATE: 04 11/99
EARTH CONNECTION ....
. DC-DC CONVERTER LOOP POWERED

I
Q DO NOT USE THIS OUTPUT TO POWER
THE LOOP POWERED DC-DC CONVERTER
DCPM-LP
Q SPARE
o••v
1:,_••....- 1 - - -......
TBI ( ) ••v
PU ( )............- - 1 - -
- ..... +
MINERVA MAIN PROCESSOR
ISSUE 7 OR ABOVE
- DCPM-lP DCPM
- + a:!l
HEADER ttDI SET
PL10 AS.SKOWN
MOTHERBOARD LOOP POWERED
'
L-------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- I
CONNECT LOOP FOR MONITORING OF THE
rT
lololololololololololre,
:i
::;
rn
!:!!e
~ 0
~ ~ 0
~ i Q DO NOT USE THESE OUTPUTS TO POWER THE
' LOOP POWERED DC-DC CONVERTER
BATTERIES WILL BE REOUlREO, SIZED

NO BATTERIES ARE REQUIRED ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENT OF
FOR THIS ACPM STANDBY ANO ALARM CURRENT
SEPARATE HOUSING FOR THIS

ACPM MINERVA POWER BOX
. Fig. 22 MINERVA-80ff890 Fire Controller - PCB Layout and Connections for Loop Powered Sounders

Rei:is1ered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Buks RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
ALXM-LP
~[B] [B]~
LK2 LK1
SPECIAL TEST
~Hl
"D m
0
0
'"
(I)
,,m men
,, -<
:0 (/)
.,, :0
"'
0
D )> EEPROM 0 o-i
0
C
~ PROCESSOR WRITE s: s:~
- "" -
I I ENABLED
110 01IH2
- -
Note:
I. Spl'Cial header ff I s!wu!d 11/11 hejitted. This is.for the/i1c101y to ("ll/T1· /111fji111crio11 /es/s mu! is not
.rnitahleji>r/iefd test us this ,.emoi•es the hardu·a,.e protection o/"the loop 011 the ,-lLXM.
.!. Headers LK l and LK2 should hejitted on the ALXMj()I' loop po\l"ered sounders and loop poll"ered
sounder modules.
3. Loop powered sounders und 111od11les should no/ hejilled or removed 11'he11 the loop is alive as this H'i!I
cause damage tu the loop drivers.
Fig. 23 ALXM Connection Detail
PAGE 34 of 67
•
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
4.5 CONFIGURATION OPTIONS

4.5.1 MPIM 'PERSONALITY'
The MPIM may be configured to have different
..
-
'Personalities·, using various combinations of the functions
described in para. 4.3.4. There arc seven 'Personalities'
available as follows:
• 018-L - Operator Interface Board [Local].
" • 018-R - Operator Interface Board [Remote].

• XBB-L - Expansion Bus Board [Local].
• XBB-R - Expansion Bus Board [Remote].
• PIB-L - Printer Interface Board [Local].
• PIB-R - Printer Interface Board [Remote].
• RBS - Remote Bus Slave Communications
• Driver.
These options allow for a wide variety of system
configurations. examples of which are described in the
following paragraphs. The functions available for each
·Personality', together with the associated mnemonics, arc
summarised in Table 2.
LOCAL REMOTE EXPANSION SERIAL PARALLEL

MNEMONIC KEYPAD DISPLAY
BUS BUS BUS PORT PORT
018-L
OIB-R
XBB-L
XBB-R
..
RBS
Table. 2 MPIM Functions Available for Different 'Personalities'

Note: 'Personalities marked '+' require the Printer Driver kit

H•g;s,or"d Oflkr: 19-21 lh.'no1ork Strtte, Wokingham, Berks l{G40 IQE
... A 1:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.5.2 MINERVA CONTROLLER AND LOCAL

EQUIPMENT
Connection between a MINERVA controller and possible
local equipments arc shown in Fig. 24. The controller
contains an MPIM configured for 'Personality' OIB-l. In
this configuration, the MPIM is connected to the MP [via the
local bus] and drives the ZD [via the expansion bus).
A serial port is also available from the MPIM, which may be
used to drive a serial pri ntcr or a term ina I/computer.
It is possible to "piggy-back" an additional MPIM onto the
MPIM on the front panel and this will, when connected to
the local bus, provide the interfaces for additional
equipment. This could be used, as in the example given, as
a parallel printer driver ['Personality' PIB-L].
The maximum number ofOIBs is 8.
ZONAL
DISPLAY
EXPANSION
BUS
ADDITIONAL MPIM
MPIMs
(if required) LOCAL (PIB-Lj LOCAL SERIAL
BUS ~-~-~ BUS ~ - . . . . - - - PORT
LLEL LOCAL
RT BUS
MAIN
INTER PROCESSOR
CONTROLLER
' •••••••••••••••·•••••••••••••••••••••••••••n••••••••••••••H••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••unu•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Fig. 24 MINERVA Fire Controller - Connection to Local Equipment
PAGE 36 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
..
·
REMOTE PRINTERS
The local bus is designed for transmission over a very short
distance [less than I metre] and so printers attached to this
[see para 4.4.2] must be positioned adjacent to the
controlkr. If it is required to have printers positioned at a
remote location, an MPIM [personality PIB-RJ must be
used. This MPIM has its address set on-board and is
connected to the controller's remote bus.
The connections between a MINERVA controller and remote
printers are shown in Fig. 25.
; ············-··· ........ ·- ~---~ !
ZONAL
DISPLAY
EXPANSION
BUS
ADDITIONAL
MPIMs
(if required)
<:::===:::::
LOCA
MPIM
(PIB-L) LOCAL SERIAL
BUS BUS PORT
PARALLEL
PORT LOCAL
BUS
TO PRINTER
PRO~~ORJ:=======±::::;,
REMOTE
BUS
,.....•........................•............•..............................•.......•..•......................................• CONTROLLER)
i.······················-···-----·················································. ·······································:
DCCM
EXPANSION
BUS
SERIAL
PORT
24V d.c. (PIB-R)
PARALLEL -r;-7
PORT V
TO PRINTER
Fig. 25 MINERVA Controller - Connection to Remote Printers
...

Registered om,e: 1\1-21 Denmark Strrrt, Wokingham. Borks RG~O ZQt:

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99

REPEATER
A MINERVA controller may be connected to a
repeater. The connection is made, via the remote bus, to an
MPIM configured to ·Personality' OIB-R. The repeater has
all the facilities of the main panel. i.e. keypad, LCD, and
Zonal Displays. but external equipment may not be
connected because the MPIM's configuration does not
include a local bus driver.
Up to 16 repeaters may be connected to this remote bus, each
with its own address [set on-board].
The connections between a MINERVA controller and
repeater are shown in Fig. 26.
Note: Because of the operating speed of the remote

bus. the normal maximum recommended
number of repeaters is three. If non-pulsing
Zonal Alarm Display Repeaters are used, there
is no longer a restriction of 3 Repeaters but up
to 7 Repeaters [maximum 8 0/B Personalities]
can be configured.
' ~---~ !
ZONAL
DISPLAY
EXPANSION
BUS
ADDITIONAL MPIM
MPIMs L AL LOCAL SERIAL
(if required) (PIB • LJ
BUS BUS PORT
PARALLEL LOCAL
PORT BUS
TO PRINTER
REMOTE
BUS
..... ~.?~~~~.~~E~j
..-····························· .. ,-...+.~---···················----------······-·······---·-···············-
,-----~
..
ZONAL
DISPLAY
24V d.c.
EXPANSION
BUS
MPIM
DCCM (OIB-R)
REMOTE
SUS
......................................................REPEATER ... j
\.,
V
Fig. 26 MINERVA- 16E/80 Controller - Showing Connection to a Repeater
PAGE 38 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA

REMOTE MIMICS
In addition to the options described in para 4.4.2, a remote
Mimic can be connected to the remote Mimic drivers via the
remote bus. Each remote MPIM is configured as
·Personality' XBB-R.
Up to 16 MPIMs may be connected on to the remote bus,
each with an unique address [set on-board].
The difference between a Repeater and a Mimic is the local
control facility which is not featured in a Mimic.
Both Repeater and Mimic include audible and visible
warning facilities.
The connections between a MINERVA controller and remote
l\fonics arc shown in the Fig. 27 .
. -·---·-- ·········-················-······-···-··--·--···-·-·········T•••h•••·•n••n•••·•·•H•PTTHHOO•n•n•••••••••••n••·················
ZONAL
DISPLAY
EXPANSION
BUS
' ·,_:=,,. ~~Prl .!10NAL

{ifrequiredl
LOCAL
BUS
(X::~LI
~~~-~
LOCAL
BUS
SERIAL
~-~-~ PORT
·1·---··············--·:~:::: ___. . . 24V d.c. DCCM

=:~:~.MPIM
TO MIMIC,
(XBB-R)
RELAY BOARD, etc. EXPANSION REMOTE
BUS BUS
TO MIMIC, MPIM
RELAY BOARD, etc. EXPANSION (XBB-R) REMOTE
BUS BUS
,
..
•'-IL"'
24V d.c. _ __,__, DCCM
Fig. 27 MINERVA Fire Controller - Connection to Remote Mimics

R.,g,,t.,rod Office: 19·ZI lnnmark Str«t, Wokingham, lkrk5 RG40 2Qt:
A "tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.5.6 ALTERNATIVE CIRCUIT LAYOUTS 4.5.6.2 MINERVA 16E/T891 and 80/T890

As an alternative to the loop arrangements shown in the [Refer to Fig. 29l This, in effect, provides a 4-zone
typical system layout [Fig. I I. Page 2 I], the addressable controller for a MINERVA l 6E, or an 20-zone controller for
circuit may be wired as follows: a MINERVA 80. Note that, for clarity, only two of the
addressable loops are shown, although the other eight loops
may be similarly wired.
4.5.6.1 MINERVA 8
[Refer to Fig. 28]. This, in effect, provides a 2-spur, 2-zone
Note:
controller. This arrangement could be used to provide fire
cover at a minimal cost. 1) If the circuits is wired as shown. the open
circuit monitoring facility MUST be disabled.
2) Each 'leg' should not contain more than ONE
zone in order to comply with BS 5839 Part 1
[1988].
ADDRESSABLE
CIRCUIT
CONTROLLER
CP - CALL POINT
OET - ADDRESSABLE DETECTOR
Fig. 28 MINERVA-8 Fire Controller - Example of Alternative Circuit Layout
Fig. 29 MINERVA-16E/80 Fire Controller - Example ofan Alternative Circuit Layout
PAGE 40 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
4.5.7 REMOTE/LOCAL BUS LIMITATIONS 4.6 ANCILLARY DEVICES

It should be noted that a MAXIMUM of 16 boards can be A list of ancillary devices is gi,·en in Appendix A
attached to both the remote and local buses. Each board
thus attached must have its own address [set on-
board). There is no limitation on the combination ofboards 4.6.1 WIRING OF DEVICES
that c,111 be attached, provided that the total docs not exceed
16 per bus and no more than 4 zonal displays or mirn ics arc Addressable de\"ices may be connected on the circuit in any
used. order [they do not have to be in address order - but see
para 4.6]. It is recommended, however, for ease of
commissioning and servicing that the system be designed in
Note: a logical order. The wiring may therefore follow the most
economical route.
1) Local Bus addresses O and 11-15 [inclusive]
are reserved and may not be used. For a loop circuit. a separate 2-core feed out and back must
be provided. A 4-core feed introduces unnecessary
2) The maximum number of Remote Bus terminations, increases the possibility of failures, and
communication points is software limited to the provides no better protection than a single 2-core loop.
following:
In conventional systems. the practice of ·teeing' detectors
and other devices is not permitted due to the method of
Repeaters [OIB~R] monitoring. In the case of a ·MINERVA' fire controller,
monitoring is effected by addressing the various points
(Default Configuration] 3 within the system and therefore 'teeing off' is permitted on
Operator Interface the addressable circuit[s].
boards O18-L + O18-R 8
Zone Displays IO Note: Care should be taken when 'teeing' detectors,
etc., as a fault on a spur circuit will disable all
Digital 1/0 Points [8/ l 6E/ T89 I] 80 devices beyond its occurrence and this may
Digital 1/0 Points [80/ T890] 250 contravene the requirements of BS 5839 Part 1
regarding Joss of protection.
One repeater = one OIB-R + one Zonal Display.
One repeater uses 13 Digital 1/0 points.
'Teeing' is not permitted on the local circuit[s) connected to
DM520 modules, where the detectors are not individually
addressed.
4.5.8 EXPANSION INPUT/OUTPUT
MODULE [XIOM] For wiring of devices in Hazardous Areas, refer to
Publication 26A-02-D I.
4.5.8.1 CONNECTION
The Expansion Input/Output Module [XIOM] is connected
as shown in Fig. 30. 4.6.2 HOUSINGS
Module printed circuit boards [PCBs} that fit onto the custom
made facia plate [up to 16} and the SU521/t>l521 [up to 4)
4.5.8.2 CONFIGURATION may be fitted to a MINERVA Ancillary housing using a
The configurations for the XIOM are shown in Fig. 31. custom made back plate.
,.. 4.5.8.J SELECTION OPTIONS 4.6.3 LINE ISOLATOR MODULES
The selection options for the XIOM inputs / output are 4.6.J.1 GENERAL
given in Table 3. The use ofll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Modules is required for
two reasons, short-circuit protection and zoning.
Each LI520 Mk 2 module introduces a resistance of
approximately 0.25 ohms into the circuit.

Registered Oflice: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, ~rks RGiO 2QF.

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
-
+24V DCPM
ov tJTe1
~
I I
[7 1
PL2
14
ACPM
l 14
I I PL2
LOCAL BUS
I I
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF IN TERCONNECTION BETWEEN XIOM.
I I
1. TO ENSURE THAT THE CABLE WILL FIT IT IS NECESSARY TO
FILE THE KEY OFF THE CONNECTOR. 0 EXPANSION
BUS
2. TAKE SPECIAL NOTICE OF THE IDC ORIENTATIONS,
TWIST OR FOLDTHE RIBBON CABLE AS REQUIRED.
16 1
\;··-- .... ____
\
\,
.,
~---
--- -- -- -- --- --
,·
-----
.
,
·-- ----~-- -----
PL2
5THXlOM >' 2NDXIOM
'
":, 1STXIOM
-. --
PL1 1 16 PL2 PL1 1 16 PL2 PL1 1
EOL
LINK
ON
LAST
XIOM
LK1
DD
D
16
l ~
1 ::ILK1
~
D D 16 1
=ILK1
~
DD
13
16
I/
! ,..
~ •• 1:. !~i~
DD D D D D 11.,..
I~
..!;.
" ~ 1=
~~ !:; ~~ fi:
~
; ; ~
}
~
TB3
• r::--::, ft
{
-
} TB3
-OIH~ ,.Wall ·
{
! }-~-{ i
Fig. 30 Expansion Input/Output Module IXIOMJ Connection
PAGE 42 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
;. PUBLICATION: 15A-02-D1
1. LED DRIVER (10mA SOURCE) 2. RELAY DRIVER (100mA SINK)
PU PU
3300HM "'' 2804
·,
EXTERNAL
SUPPLY
,,.,
10
'
10
10
16
10
,.-.
10
I ,.
10
5.32voc
;;;,- IO•
10 10
.. 15 iii 2 ... 1$
,_ IO
.,,. f!10 ~ 10
•• ,.,
D D ,.
3
D D
3
IO .,"
•
10
JO
13
Kl
•
IO
,.
·r
•
IO
12
10
•
IO
12
10
l;; • ~u l;; • ~ 11
>- IO >- IO .. ,o ,_ IO
1 1
r~
10
10 IO
• •
10
• 10
•
... "" "" .. w{ .. .. wi ..
TB3
.
~
OUT IN
. rw
;;;
••
•
TB3
ID
. OUI "" 0V ..
3. VOLT FREE CONTACT MONITOR 4. VOLTAGE MONITOR INPUT
.... .... .
... PL!
D D
10 10 1-----v,
'
10
IS
IO
iii 2
,_ IO
3
10
•
5
i;; •
>-10
'
10
I"
.. 10
,. .
i;; •
10
7
10 IO
• • •
. ..
TB3
.. w{
T83
.;;; rw ,.., ;;;

... .... .
rw
ID
otn av ov IN •••
OUT IN
EXTERNAL SUPPLY
8·30VDC
Fig. 31 Expansion Input/Output Module IXIOMJ Configuration
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 43of 67

Registered Oflke: 19-Zl Denmark Sired, Wok;ngham, Berks II.G-10 ZQE

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
HEADER HEADER
MODE BLOCK H1, H2, & H3, H4 & U1 U2 U3 U4
POSITION POSITION
INPUT
RELAY COIL MONITOR
NORMAL 8 - 30V 1/0 1-8 Hl-1/P H4-I/P 22k - X X
FAULT 0- l.5V 1/0 9-16 H2-rtP H3-l/P X X - 22k
VOLT FREE CONTACT [+5V)

LOGIC I >3.5@5mA SINK 1/0 1-8 Hl-1/P H4-I/P lk lk X X
LOGIC 0 >1.5 1/0 9-16 H2-I/P H3-I/P X X lk lk
OUTPUT
LED DRIVE 1/0 1-8 Hl-O/P H4-O/P - 330 X X
IOmA SOURCE 1/0 9-16 H2-O/P H3-O/P X x- 330 -
RELAY DRIVE 1/0 1-8 Hl-O/P H4-O/P - 2804 X X
I00mA SINK 1/0 9-16 H2-O/P H3-0/P X X 2804 -
Table. 3 XIOM Input/ Output Selection Options
Note: Use ULN2804 for relay drive, or 330R OIL resistor pack [16 PIN OIL} for LED drive, or 100k OIL resistor pack
[16 PIN OIL] for relay monitor.
4.6.3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION 4.7 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION

If the current nowing in an addressable circuit exceeds a 4.7_1 GENERAL
certain value, devices auached to the circuit [including the
controller) may be damaged. In order to provide a degree of The following information is intended as a guide to
protection against this, Line Isolator Modules need to be fitted configuring a 'MINERVA' fire controller system. The
to the addressable circuit. When these devices detect the configuration details are documented using pre-prepared
presence of a low resistance on the circuit, they will switch, forms [which are signed by the customer to indicate
isolating the affected area. acceptance] and then entered into the 'CONSYS'
configuration system for subsequent transfer to an EEPROM.
Refer to para 4. 7 for instructions for completing the
Note: A Line Isolator Module circuit is contained in the configuration forms.
addressable circuit drivers in the controller.
4.7.2 SYSTEM ZONING

4.6.3.3 CIRCUIT ZONING
The specific features of each type of ·MINERVA' fire
BS 5839 Part I [ 1988] sect 6.6.2 states: 'The wiring controller is given in para 2.2.
arrangement of the system should be such that a fault, or
faults, in one zone cannot prevent the operation of the system The zoning of the 'MINERVA' controller is totally uscr-
in other zones of the building.' dcfinable, i.e. any point may be assigned to any zone required.
It is likely that the addressable circuit will exceed the

definition of a zone and so Line Isolator Modules need to be Note: Each device is referred to by its point number
fitted in order to divide the circuit into notional zones. which is formed from its circuit letter and
address, e.g. A82.
Note: For LPS 1014 systems it is not sufficient to site

Lis every 20 devices. They must be sited at Each zone may have up to 20 characters of descriptive text,
zone boundaries. which will be shown on the second line of the controller's
display when the zone is in alarm or fault condition.
PAGE44of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ISSUE No. &"DATE: 04 11/9'9
It is also possible to define up to 20 characters of descriptive ENABLE

text for each point. This will be shown on the third line of the
controller's display when the point is in alarm or fault Rising Edge Actions:
condition. "Enable" group associated with generated "Event"
Falling Edge Actions:
4. 7.3 EVENT TYPES AVAILABLE IN "Disable" group associated with generated "Event"
CONSYS Reset "Group[Count" [of associated Group] back to 0
"Kill" any pending delay events belonging to
For information on the functions of each event which can be associated group
configured by the CONSYS user see the CONSYS manual.
The following section gives a list of special processes.
GROUP RESET
4.7.3.1 SPECIAL PROCESSES: Rising Edge Actions:
Events with these processes invoke the corresponding Reset "Group Count'' [of associated group] back to O
responses: "Ki II" any pending delay events belonging to
associated group
ALERT
As per "Power Up/Reset" configuration
Rising Edge Actions: "Enable/Disable" group associated with generated
Adjust zonal alam1 counter "'Event"
Activate ··system Fire" group
Do "Bell Map" processing for "Alert" None
lf"First Alarm" then adjust alarm group cycle
COUnl
Activate ·'System Alert" group FAULT
Rising Edge Actions:
·-r Adjust Zonal Faull counter
Activate "System Fault" group
De-activate "System Fire" group
De-activate "System Alert" group Falling Edge Actions:
Adjust Zonal Fault counter
Deactivate "System Fault" group
EVAC (Not Marine]
Rising Edge Actions: GENERAL ALARM [Marine only]
Adjust zonal alarm counter
Activate "System Fire" group Rising Edge Actions:
Do "Bell Map" processing for "Evac" Adjust zonal alarm counter
lf"First Alarm" then adjust alann group cycle Activate "System Fire" group
Do "Bell Map" processing for "General Alarm"
Falling Edge Actions: lf'"First Alarm" then adjust alarm group cycle
De-activate "System Fire" group count
De-activate "System Evac" Activate "General Alarm" group
De-activate "System Fire" group
DISABLE
De-activate "General Alarm" group
"Disable" group associated with generated "Event"
Reset "Group(Count" (of associated Group] back to 0 DISABLE SECTOR (Marine only]
"Kill" any pending delay events belonging to Rising Edge Actions:
associated group Disarm all devices in zones specified in the
Disable Sector Map
Falling Edge Actions: Switch on Sector Disable Indicators
"Enable" group associated with generated "Event"
Ann all devices in zones specified in the
Disable Sector Map
Switch off Sector Disable Indicators
.,
Registered Offi<c: 19-21 0.nmark Street, Wokingham, Berk• RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
OCCUPIED PREMISES [Not marine] 4.7.4 GROUPS

Rising Edge Actions: 4.7.4.1 INTRODUCTION
Reduce sensitivity from configured level for all
sensors iii zones specified in the Sensitivity Each addressable device on a system may be assigned to one
Switching Map of a number of groups. The grouping of devices allows for a
limited amount of input/output correlation to be defined. It
Falling Edge Actions: is possible, for ex.ample, to enable a number [group] of
Set sensitivity to configured level for all detectors to cause an output to be activated. This may be
sensors in zones specified in the Sensitivity used to operate zonal alarms [ non-silenceable J, close vents,
Switching Map etc.
The grouping function is in addition to the sounder response
PRE-ALARM function described in para 4.6.5. The defined groups and
their functions· are described in the following
Rising Edge Actions: paragraphs. The code numbers shown after the group name
Activate "System Pre-alarm" group are entered on to the configuration forms [see para 4.7.3}.
Deactivate "Syslcm Pre-alarm·• group 4.7.4.2 INPUTS [NORMAL]
Addressable points which contain input devices [i.e.
PRINT detectors, DM520s, CP520s, etc.] may be assigned to these
groups. These groups provide most of the standard functions
required for a fire controller.
Send this "Event" to the printer
The "action" specified is the controller's response when the
device goes into its alarm state. Other device states [i.e.
None fault, pre-alarm, etc.] have actions which are independent of
the group.
The groups available are as follows:
OCCUPIED PREMISES
ALERT lNPUTS [code FIN00I)
Send "Low Sensitivity" to sensors specified by ACTlON:
··zonal Map" [any group) • Rings bells [i.e. "Silenceablc Alann
Falling Edge Actions: Sounders" group] in alert mode. This is
continuous OR pulsing, depending on the
Send "Normal Sensitivity" to sensors specified by
bell map.
"Zonal Map" (any group]
• For devices in ANY ZONE:
Switches ON devices in "Common Alann
SILENCE Lamp" group.
Rising EdgcActions: Switches ON devices in "Common Alarm
Update "Bell Map" output statuses Relay" group.
Falling Edge Actions: Switches ON devices in "Common Alann
None Sounder A" group.
Switches ON devices in "Common Alann
Sounder B" group.
SOUNDER_FAULT
Switches ON devices in "Inter-controller
Rising Edge Actions: Alarm Output" group for IO seconds.
Do "Fault's" rising edge special processing
• For devices in ZONE OF ORIGIN ONLY:
Activate "System Sounder Faul!" group
Switches ON devices in "Zonal Alann
Falling Edge Actions: Relay" group.
Do ''Fault's" falling edge special processing
Deactivate "System Sounder Fault" group Switches "Zonal Alarm Display" group
devices to PULSE.
• logs a 'Fire Alarm' event.
Note: This group can contain detectors, DM520

modules. etc. but NOT cal/points.
PAGE 46of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
EVACUATE INPUTS [code FIN002] BATTERY FAULT INPUT [code FIN038]

ACTION: ACTION:
As for 'Alert Inputs', but operates sounders etc. in Evacuate • Logs a 'Battery Fault' event.
mode.
• Other actions as for "General Purpose Fault
Input" group.
ALERT INPUTS [coinc] [code FIN028]
ACTION INTER-CONTROLLER ALARM INPUT [code FIN048]
• Before coincidence is reached, operates an ACTION:
"Alarm Warning".
• As for "Alert Inputs" group.
• Before coincidence is reached, send warning
pulses to the zonal alarm display.
Note: Typically this group will contain a contact
• On coincidence, activates "Evacuate monitor (e.g. a CM520J which monitors the
Inputs". relay contact of an RM520 in another
controller's "Inter-controller Alarm Output"
group.
EVACUATE fNPUTS [coinc] [code FIN029]
ACTION INTER-CONTROLLER FAULT INPUT [code FIN050)
• Before coincidence is reached, operates an ACTION:
"Alarm Warning". • As for "General Purpose Fault Input" group.
• Before coincidence is reached, sends
warning pulses to the zonal alarm display. Note: Typically this group will contain a contact
• On coincidence, activates "Alert Inputs". monitor [e.g. a CM520J which monitors the
relay contact of an RM520 in another
controller's "/ntercontroller Fault Output" group.
GENERAL PURPOSE FAULT INPUT [code FIN039]
ACTION:
4.7.4.3 OUTPUTS [NORMAL]
• logs a ·General Fault' event. These groups contain the physical output devices required
for a standard fire controller.
• Switches ON devices in "Common Fault
·' Lamp" group, The groups available arc as follows:
• Switches ON devices in "'Silcnccable Fault BELL MAP VISUAL 0/P [code FON 175]
Output" group, ACTION
• Switches ON devices in "Zonal Fault • ON when Alarm ---t Bell Map
Display'' group, IN THE SAME ZONE AS Configuration.
THE INPUT DEVICE.
• OFF on RESET only.
MAINS FAILURE INPUT [code FIN036]

BELL MAP ALARM SOUNDERS [code FON 186)
ACTION:
ACTION:
• logs a 'Mains Failure' event.
• ON or PULSE when Alarm occurs
• Other actions as for "General Purpose Fault [according to alarm level and bell map
Input" group. option].
• OFF after SILENCE.
CHARGER FAULT INPUT [code FIN037]
ACTION:
COMMON ALARM 0/P (code FONl90]
• logs a 'Charger Fault' event.
ACTION:
• Other actions as for "General Purpose Fault
Input" group. • ON when Alarm occurs.
• OFF after RESET.

Registered Office: 19-21 D•nmark Strttt, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A 'tqca INTERNATIONAL lTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
COMMON FAULT O/P [code FON222] The groups available are as follows:
ACTION: EVACUATE BUTTON [code F1S007)
• ON [activated] when a Fault occurs [if no ACTION:
Alanns are present].
• Ring bells [i.e. "Silenceable Alarm
• OFF [acti,·atcd] when last Fault in system Sounders" group in evacuate mode (i.e.
clears OR when an Alarm occurs. continuous].
• For devices in ANY ZONE:
FAULT 0/P SILENCEABLE [code FON218] Switches ON devices in "Common Alarm
Lamp" group,
ACTION:
Switches ON devices in "Common Alarm
• ON when Fault occurs [if no Alarms are Relay" group,
present).
• OFF after SILENCE OR when last Fault in Sounder A" group,
system clears.
Sounder B" group,
!NTERCONTROLLER ALARM O/P Switches ON devices in "lnter-contro\lcr
[code FON I 82} Alarm Output" group for 10 seconds.
ACTION:
• ON when an alarm occurs. • Logs a 'Fire Evacuate' event.
• OFF after a 10 second delay.

Note: These actions only occur when the group has
been enabled by the keyswitch [or "Front Panel
INTERCONTROLLER FAULT O/P [code ON214] KeyswitchH group).
ACTION:
• ON when a fault occurs (ifno alarm present]. SILENCE BUTTON [code FIS008]
• OFF when the last fault in the system clears ACTION:
OR an alann occurs.
• Switches OFF all devices in the following
groups:
ALARM SIGNALLING O/P (code ONI 88) "Silcnceable Alarm Sounders",
ACTION: "Common Alarm Sounder A",
• ON when alann occurs [premises "Common Alarm Sounder B''.
unoccupied OR sounder fault in system]. "Silenceable Fault Sounders".
• ON 60 seconds after an alarm [if premises
occupied AND no sounder faults].
• Switches OFF devices in the "Front Panel
• OFF after reset. Buzzer" group if the system is NOT in alarm,
OR to PULSE if the system IS in alann.
4.7.4.4 INPUTS [SPECIAL] • Switches any devices in the "Zonal Alarm

Display" group which are pulsing, to
Addressable poincs which contain input devices [detectors, continuous.
DM520s, etc.] may be configured to be in these groups.
• Enables the RESET function.
These groups can be used to provide functions for
customisation; however, many of them will not normally be • Logs a 'System Silenced' event.
used for any points other than those set in the default
configuration. Care should be taken not to change the Note: These actions only occur when the group has
defaults, as this may result in incorrect operation of the been enabled by the keyswitch {or "Front Panel
controller. Keyswitch" group).
The "action" specified is the controller's response when the
device goes into its alarm state. Other device states [i.e.
fault, pre-alarm, etc.] have actions independent of the group. RESET BUTTON [code FIS009]
PAGE48 of67
. EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ACTION: state when the fire door is open. These

devices only become armed in the event of a
• Performs a system reset.
fire alarm. Hence a "Fire Door Failure" is only
generated when a door fails to close during a
fire.
Note:
1) Output devices will not be switched OFF until
all input devices have been confirmed as clear. LOGGING INPUTS [code FIS04 I]
2) These actions only occur when the group has ACTION:
been enabled by the keyswitch [or "Front Panel
• Logs an "Input ON' event.
Keyswitch" group].
3) There is also an interlock with the "S11ence
Button Group", which prevents the group FAULT LOGGING INPUTS [code FIS040]
performing an action until a silence function
has been performed. This interlock is ACTION:
performed by the internal event action. • Logs a 'General Fault' event.
LAMP TEST BUTTON [code FIS0I0} SOUNDER TEST MODE I/P [code FIS0047]
ACTION: ACTION
• Switches ON devices in the following • ON generates Voice Module
groups for a few seconds, on the same "Test Message".
controller as the button pressed:
··zonal Alarm Display".
4. 7.4.5 OUTPUTS [SPECIAL]
·'Common Alarm Lamp''.
··common Fault Lamp". These groups contain:
''Common Isolate Lamp". I) Output devices configured by default [e.g.
front panel outputs]. These may be
·'Front Panel Buzzer".
mimicked by assigning other devices into
Any other lamps configured on that bus. these groups.
2) Output devices for customisation purposes
[e.g. plant control relays].
OCCUPIED PREMISES I/P [code FIS0l3]
ACTION:
These groups can be used to provide functions for
• Sends sensitivity switch commands to
customisation; however, many of them will not normally be
sensors according to the sensitivity
used for any point other than those set in the default
s_witching map.
configuration. As before, care should be taken not to change
Normal sensitivity [night] on the rising the default entries. as this may result in incorrect operation
edge. of the controller.
Low sensitivity [day] on the falling edge. The groups available are as follows:
ALARM POINT DISPLAY [code FOS 165]
• Sends "Group Activate" on rising edge to ACTION
"Alarm Signalling Control" Group [this
detennines the signalling delay]. • ON when a point in a Zonal Alann Display
group is in alann [for use with Digital 1/0.
FIRE DOOR MONITOR CONTACTS [code FIS051]

FAULT POINT DrSPLAY [coae FOS 166]
ACTION:
ACTION
• Generates a "Fire Door Failure" event.
• ON when a point in a Zonal Fault Display
group is in a fault condition.
Note: Typically this group will contain a contact RESET IN PROGRESS O/P [code FOS174)
monitor [e.g. a CM520], which is in its active

Rq:islered Orlice: 19-21 Denmark Stn,et, Wokingham. 11<,rks RG40 2QE
A tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
ACTION ACTION:
• ON during Reset Period. • ON in ZONE OF ALARM when an alarm
occurs.
FIRE DOOR RELAYS [code FOS248] • OFF after RESET
ACTION
• ON when fire alann occurs. COMMON PRE-ALARM O;P [code FOS205]
• OFF after RESET. ACTION:
• ON when pre-alarm occurs.
FRONT PANEL BUZZER [code FOS249]
• OFF after RESET.
ACTION
• ON when any event occurs.
FAULT SIGNALLING 0/P [code FOS221]
• OFF after SILENCE [if there arc no alarms
present). ACTION:
• PULSE after SILENCE [if alarms present). • ON when a fault occurs [if there are no
alarms present].
ZONAL ALARM DISPLAY [code FOSl91} • OFF when last fault in the system clears OR
when an alarm occurs OR immediately after
ACTION: reset.
• Pulse when input alarm level IN THE ZONE
increases [e.g. quiescent 10 alert, or alert to
evacuate]. COMMON ISOLATE 0/P [code FOS237]
• ON [if pulsing) alter SILENCE. ACTION:
• OFF after RESET. • ON when any point is isolated.
• OFF when all points de-isolated.
ZONAL FAULT DISPLAY [code FON223]
ACTION:
4.7.4.6 INTERNAL
• ON when fault occurs in the SAME zone [if
there arc no alarms present]. A number of internal groups exist. These are used by the
controller for its internal event action and devices SHOULD
• OFF when last fault in the zone clears OR NOT be assigned to these groups, otherwise the controller
when an alarm occurs. will not function correctly. The groups are:
• "System Fire Alarm" [code FEA0l7]
ZONAL ISOL:ATE DISPLAY [code FON239J • "System Pre-alarm·· [code FEA0l 9]
ACTION: • "System Fault" [code FEA020]
• ON when any point is isolated in the SAME • "System Isolate" [code FEA02 I]
zone.
• "System Walk Tesf' [code FEA024]
• OFF when any point is isolated in the SAME
zone. • "Zonal Alarm Control" [code FEA030]
• ''Zonal Fault Control" [code FEA031]
FRONT PANEL BUZZER [code FOS249) • "System Comms Fault" [code FEA0 15]
ACTION: • "System Sounder Fault" [code FEA016]
• ON when any event occurs. • "Silenceable Fault O/P Control" [code
• OFF after SILENCE [if there are no alarms FEA263]
present). • "Silence" [points in alarm] [code FEA264]
• PULSE after SILENCE [if alarms present]. • "Silence" [not in alarm] [code FEA265]
• "System Alert" [code FEA268)
ZONAL ALARM O/P [code FOSl83]
PAGE 50of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ISSUE No. 8:. DATE: 04 11/99
• "Fault O/P Control" [code FEA269] 4.7.4.9 ALL GROUPS

• ''lntcr-Control'r Alann Delay" [code All Groups, contains a list of all the above groups.
FEA272]
• "lnter-Control'r Fault Delay" [code FEA273]
4.7.5 NORMAL SOUNDER RESPONSE
• ·'Silence" [points isolated] [code FEA274]
4.7.5.1 TYPES OF RESPONSE
• "Silence" [no points isol.] [code FEA275]
The sounders may be configured to operate in one of three
• ·'Alarm Signalling Control" [code FEA276] ways:
• "Alarm Signalling Immediate" [code • Continuous tone, i.e. any device going into
FEA277] an Alarm condition will cause all the
• "Alann Signalling Delayed" [code FEA278) sounders to operate continuously,
• "System Evacuate" [code FEA279] • Pulsed tone, i.e. any device going into an
Alarm condition will cause all the sounders
• "Fire Door Delay" [code FEA280] to pulse.
• "Fire Reset" [code FEA286) • Customised. i.e. the sounders in any zone
• "Log Outstanding Fire Events" [code may be caused to operate in one of a number
FEA288] of ways when an event occurs in any other
zone.
• "Disable Fire Reset" [code FEA289]
Note:
• "Weekly Test Reminder" [code FEA311]
1) Cal/points may be configured to cause the
• "Occupied Premises CNTRL'' [code sounders to operate continuously [regardless of
FEA312] the default sounder configuration] by inserting
• ·'RBus Fault" [code FEA323] the appropriate resistor.
• "Controller Fault" [code FEA322] 2) Regardless of the default sounder

configuration, the common sounders will
• "Loop Fault" [code FEA324] ALWAYS sound continuously.
• "'Point Test Active" [code FEA328]
4.7.5.2 CUSTOMISED SOUNDER RESPONSE
4.7.4.7 SUPER GROUPS In order to provide complex sounder operation [e.g. to
achieve phased evacuation], it is possible to define the
• "'Bell Map Outputs SG" [code FSG082]
sounder response in any zone when an event occurs
:a ··Bell Map Visuals SG" [code FSG086j anywhere in the system.
• ··Fault Sdrs Walktest SG" (code FSG084] This is achieved by the use of one of two tables as follows:
• "Fire Alarm Sounders SG" [code FSG083] Default table
• '"Fire Reset Immune SG" [code FSG085] Event 0 L M H
• "Fire Sig O/Ps SG" (code FSG087]
ALERT p C
EVACUATE p C C
4.7.4.8 SYSTEM GROUPS
• "Dummy Group" [code SYS000] Custom table
• "Log outstanding Systm Events"' [code Event 0 L M H

SYS0J2]
ALERT p p
• "'Signalling Fault 1/P" [code SYS045] EVACUATE p p C
For both tables:

- No response
P Pulsed tone
C Continuous tone

Registered Orti,ce; 19-21 Denmark Street~ \Vo.ki-n~h.am, Ek-rks RG-10 2QE
A tqca INTERNATIONAL lTO. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
By way of illustration, assume that the following sounder 4.7.8 OPERATOR PASSCODES AND
response is required: ACCESS LEVELS
Event in zone I zone I zone 3 zone 8 4.7.8.1 INTRODUCTION
p In order to gain access to the control Ier functions, the operator

ALERT C
p enters a passcodc. There may be up to 31 passcodes per
EVACUATE C C
controller and each has an associated Access Level. The
Access Level defines the functions available.
The above response pattern may be achieved [using the
The passcodes are numeric and may consist of 4, 5 or 6
default table] as follows:
digits. There may only be a pre-defined number of each
Zone I - response H Access Level per controller.
Zone 3 - response M The Access Levels available are:
Zone 8 - response L • Customer Operator - [CUSTM'R OP'TR]
• Customer Manager - [CUSTM'R MGR]
Note: • Engineer - [ENG 'R]
1) Current fire regulations require the zone of • Marine Operator [I] - [MARINE OP'TR [I]
origin of the event to be evacuated [regardless marine versions only]
of the type of event].
• MINERVA Operator [F] - [MINERVA
2) If it is required to always evacuate a particular OP'TR]
area of the building [e.g. the basement] this
• Marine Operator [2] - [MARINE OP'TR[2]1
may be achieved by using the common
sounder outputs [which always sound • Engineer Supervisor- [ENG'R SUPV'R]
continuously].
4.7.6 LOCAL BUS CONFIGURATION The Access Levels together with the features available are
described in the following table.
As stated in para 4.3.4.1, up to 16 MPIMs may be connected
onto the local bus. Each of these boards must have its own
unique address and may be one of the following types:
• OIB-L,
• XBB-L,
• PIB-L, or,
• RBS
For an explanation of these mnemonics, refer to pam 4.4.1.
Note: Local bus address 00 is reserved for the MPIM

used on the front panel [O/8-LJ and CANNOT
be re-assigned.
This allows up to 15 additional boards to be attached to the

local bus [although it is unlikely that all 15 will be used].
4.7.7 REMOTE BUS CONFIGURATION

As stated in para 4.3.4.2, up to 16 MPIMs may be connected
onto the remote bus. Each of these boards must.have its own
unique address and may be one of the following types:
• 018-R,
• XBB-R, or
• PIB-R,
For an explanation of these mnemonics, refer to para 4.4.1.
PAGE 52 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ISSUE No. & DATE: 04 11/fffi
FAST
I MARINE
MINERVA
OP'TR [F)
ACCESS
CUST'R CUST'R
ENG'R ! OP'TR [1]
and
ENG'R
CODE
OP'TR MGR
I [Marine
only]
MARINE
SUPV'R
OP'TR [2]
-------------------+-_ _ _ _ __,__ _2:,--_ _,____2_ ___,___l_ ___,I;__ ----1-- .
NUMBER OF PASSCODES l
4 digiis 4 digits 5 digits •j 5 digits 6 digits 6 digits
PASSCODE LENGTH
MENU
Do you want to accept events'.' 0001 ., .,
View unrestored Events"! 0009 .,.. v' v'
Do you want to view rhe log? 0010 ., ., ., .,..
Oldesl event fi rsf' 0011 v'
., v' .,..
v' v
v' v'
View system heallh report"! 0016 v'

Do you want to sel the clock? 0020 v' v' v
-·---------~--~----------~-----+--------l-------'l-------+-----l-----------------------~--->-----------
Do you wanl to set the rime'.' 0021 V v' v'
Do you want to set the dah?-? 0022 V v' ! v v'
Do you want to test system? 0030 v' ., i v' v'
View system alarm cycle counf! 0031 v

Reset system alann cycle count"! 0032 I .,..
View system S/W initialisation counf' 0033 i v'
Reset system SIW initialisation count? 0034 t v v'
Do you want to walk test zone? 0035 v' v' v v'
Walk test sounders" [Nol Marine) 0036 v v

Reset point threshold compensation? 0037 i
.,..
Vie\v sys:tc1n issue: numbers:' 0039 v v v'
Do you wanl to isolate points"! 0040 .,.. i v' v'
Isolate zone'! [SENSORS ONL YJ 0041 .,.. v' .,.. v
Isolate zone [SOUNDERS ONLY) 0042 v v

lsola1e point? [ADDRESS LOOP ONLY] 0043 .,.. .,.. v v' v'
Engineer isolate? 0044
Do you want to de-isolate points? 0050 .,.. v' v
De-isolate zone? [SENSORS ONLY] 0051 v .,..
De-isolate zone" [SOUNDERS ONLY) 0052 v' .,..

De-isolate point 1 (ADDRESS LOOP ONL YJ 0053 v .,.. v' v'
Engineer de-Isolate" 0054
View point analogue values? 0060 v
Table. 4 Access Levels, Fast Access Codes and Menu Options

R~i,tered Office: 19-ZI Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

f"
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
MINERVA
MARINE
FAST OP'TR [F]
CUST'R CUST'R OP'TR [1] ENG'R
ACCESS ENG'R and
OP'TR MGR {Marine SUPV'R
CODE MARINE
only)
OP'TR [2)
Vlcw Point Statuses? 0061 .,. .,. .....
View loop analogue values? 0062 ..... ..... .....

·--·
View loop point counters'' 0063 ..... .,. .....
Do you want to view point or loop data'! 0064 .,. .....
Open VFP'! 0070 ..... ..... ..... II' v
Do you want to print data? 0080 ..... ..... v .,. v·
Prinl point analogue values'! 0081 II' v v

Print points isolated"? 0082 .,. .....
Print points u,ucsredlfailed"? 0083 v .,. v v .....
Print points oul of compensation'! 0084 ..... .....
Prjnt -it\·.:nt IL)g' hacktr.ack? 0085 ..... v II' ..... .....
Print poincs forced'! 0086 v II' ti'

Print :1c1i,·ation counts'! 0087 ..... ti' .....
Print ID rcst rcsult? 0088 II' II' II'
Do you want 10 force oulpuls'! 0090 II' II' ti'
' force point On"! 0091 II' II' .....
Force point off! 0092 II' ..... .....

Unforce point'' 0093 .,. ..... ti'
Do you want to set sensitivity? 0095 v II' II'
Poin( scnslti,·lty·! 0096 v II' ti'
Zone s~nsit•,·lty? 0097 II' II' v
----~--~-~--
View sysh:rn statuses'! 0100 II' .,. II' II' ti' ti'
Vic"' system zones alaml status'! 0101 II' ti' II' II' v v
View systiem zones fault status·! 0102 v v .,. .,. .,. .,.
View system zones isolated status'! 0103 .,. v II' .,. v ti'
------- -------- - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - -
View 5y:,tcm r;ouunon alann status·?

-------··
0104 ti' ti'
-· ·-
II' ti'
--· ·-
v .,.
View system common foul! slatus·' 0105 II' .,. II' v II' .,.
View system common disabled status'.' 0106 II' v v II' II' .,.
Do you want to walk test multi input poi111? 1030 v II' .,. .,. ti'
Do you wanl to commission system'' 1200 II' v .,.
Enable /Disable fost faull mode'.' 120] II' II' v
Enable /Disable fast open circuit scanning" 1202 II' II' II'
Disable /Enable rnle of rise processing? 1203 .,. .,. v
Shutdown loop'? 1204 II' II' .,.
Restart loop" 1205 v II' v
I Single address loop poll" 1206 v .,. ti'
Table. 4 Access Levels, Fast Access Codes and Menu Options
PAGE 54 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
. 4.8 COMPLETION OF CONFIGURATION 4.8.2 FORM 180[1A]

FORMS This form is used only for Land based systems and holds the
4.8.1 GENERAL general information about the system [location, size,
etc.]. The information required is as follows:
In order to document the configuration of a ·tvllNERVA' fire
controller system. the following: forms arc required: • Installation number - an 8-digit number
generated by FASS.
• FORM 180[IA] - I off [Land based systems
only]. • Description - the location [or other
descriptive text) up to 35 characters in length.
• FORM 180[ I B] - I off [Marine systems only].
• System type - 'FIRE'.
• FORM 180[2] - I off per zone [but sec sect
4.7.3]. • System size - '8', I 6E, or '80'[cross out
numbers which are not applicable].
• FORM 180(3] - I off.
• Number of loops - '2', '4', '6", '8' & '10'
• FORM 180[4]- I off. [cross out numbers which are not applicable].
• FORM 180[ 6] - I off for every three zones. • Zones per loop - no longer required, ignore.
• FORM I 80[9A] - I off [For both Land based • Points per zone - no longer required, ignore.
and Marine systems].
• Normal sounder response - choose required
• FORM 180[9B) - I off[Marinc systems only). type and cross out options not required.
• FORM 180[10/1) - I off per 3 event timers. • Prc-alann - if pre-alarm monitoring is
• FORM 180(10/2]- I off per 12 special days. required, place a tick in the appropriate box.
• FORM 180(1 \II to 11/4] - I set per MIPLOC • Detector condition monitoring - if detector
configuration. condition monitoring is required, place a tick
in the appropriate box.
• FORM 180(23)- I off
• Open circuit scanning - if open circuit
• FORM 180[24] - I off. scanning is required [normal condition],
place a tick in the appropriate box.
• FORM 180[25] - I off
• Set default sensitivity on reset - if set default
• FORM 180[30/I 10 30/4)- I set [controllers I to
sensitivity on reset is required, place a tick in
62].
the appropriate box.
• FORM 180(31/1 and31/2)- I set[controllers I
1062).
• FORM 180[32, I to 32.'4] - I set.
4.8.3 FORM 180(1B]
• FORM 180(33]/I & 33/2 - I set. This fonn is used only for Marine systems. Form 180[ 18]
contains all the sections as per Form I 80[ I A], differences
• FORM 180(34/1 & 34/2) - I set. apply in the section on sounder response where:
• FORM 180[35/I to 35/4) - 1 set. "TYPE I", "TYPE 2" and "TYPE 3" arc replaced
by ''TYPE A" and ''TYPE B"
• FORM 180(36/1 to 36/4]- I off[controllers I to
62). "EVAC" is replaced by "FIRE"
• FORM 180(37/1)- I off[controllcrs I to 62). "pulse" and "cont." arc both replaced by "ring"
These forms, once completed and signed, arc stored at the

Branch.

R,giSler«I Orfice: 19-21 Denmark Streel, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A t:qco INTERNATfONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.8.4 FORM 180[2] 4.8.7 FORM 180[6]

Each or these fonns is designed to contain the necessary This form holds the customised bell mapping requirements
information for one zone. There is space on each fonn for [see para 4.6.5.2]. Each form holds the information
up to 20 devices. If it is required to have more than 20 regarding the system sounder responses to events in three
devices in a zone, additional fom1(s) will be required. The zones.
infonm1tion required is as fi.1ltows:
At the top of the form, select the response table required
• Zone number-· 1• to ·s·. · 16·. or ·so·. [either default or custom] and place a tick in the appropriate
box.
• Description - up to 20 characters of
descriptive text [this will be displayed on the For each zone of origin, place the appropriate response code
LCD or the controller when an Alarm or number in the boxes for other zones as required.
Fault is raised in the zone].
4.8.8 FORM 180[9A)

For each device, the following infonnation is required:
This form holds the infonnation about the Access levels and
• Point number- "Al·. 'A96". etc. associated passeodes defined for the system. For each ID,
the infonnation required is as follows:
• Point description - up to 20 characters or
descriptive text [this will be displayed on the • The Access Level - one or the valid Access
LCD of the controller when the point is in levels as detailed in para 4.6.8.1.
alann or fault]
• The Passcode - a number consisting or the
• Device type - ·MR50J •. ·RM520". etc. correct number of digits as specified in para.
4.6.8.2 to 4.6.8.6.
• Mode- ·NORMAL', ·Grade 1·, etc. [used for
detectors].
• Group - the group code number as described Note: DO NOT exceed the maximum number of each
in para 4.6.3. Access Level as detailed in para 4.6.8.2 to
4.6.8.6.
4.8.5 FORM 180[3]

4.8.9 FORM 180(98}
This form holds the infonnation abom the MPIMs connected
to the local bus. The information required is as follows: This form is used only for Marine systems where additional
levels or Access Level codes are required. The information
• Board address - a number between OI and I 0
is entered as per Form 180[9B).
[00 being reserved].
• Board type - one of the \'alid ·Personalities'
listed in para 4.4. 4.8.10 FORM 180(10/1]
• Board configuration - either ·DEFAULT' or This form holds the information about Event Timers. Up to
"CUSTOM'. 24 Event Timers may be configured [3 per fonn]. For each
Event Timer, the information required is as follows:
4.8.6 FORM 180[4] • Event Timer number.

• Activation Type.
This fi.mn holds the information about the tvlPIMs [if any]
connected to the remote bus. The infonnation required is as • Month.
follows:
• Weekday.
• Board address - a number between 00 and
15. • Hour.
• For each Event Timer the information Board • Minute.

type- one of the valid 'Personalities' listed in • Event.
para 4.6.6.
• Group/Short Code.
• Board configuration - either ·DEFAULT' or
'CUSTOM'. • Zone.
PAGE 56of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
. 4.8.11 FORM 180(10/2) 4.8.16 FORM 180[23]
This form holds the infonnation about Special Days. Up to This form holds the Edit Events information required for
40 Special Days may be configured (12 per form]. For each configuring the trapped event and the group it is required to
Special Day, the information required is as follows: activate. Also the log acceptance options which can be
enabled/disabled, and the printer address.
• Special Day number.
• Month.
4.8.17 FORM 180(24)
• Day of Month
This form holds the infonnation required for configuring the
Supergroups. The form shows which group is assigned to a
4.8.12 FORM 180(11/1] Supergroup name.
This form holds the MIPLOC configuration information

[which should be supplied by the customer]. The form 4.8.18 FORM 180[25]
defines the data which will be sent to the MIPLOC.
This form holds the Zonal map information required for
configuring the zones with its associated sectors.
4.8.13 FORM 180(11/2)
This form is used to transfer rhe MIPLOC configuration 4.8.19 FORM 180(30/1 to 30/4)
requirement, (supplied by the customer in Form 180(11/1])
into the ·CONSYS' information. This form is required when using ThornNet, and holds the
infomiation required for setting the Net Module parameters:
• RS232 Baud rate [default setting at 4800]
4.8.14 FORM 180(11/3]
• Network Baud rnte [ variable by switch
This form holds event reporting defaults as follows: settings between 300 and 38400}
• Alarms - Enabled/Inhibited. • Ring delay [set in bytes of delay between
• Pre-alarms - Enabled/Inhibited. I and I 0.] The default and recommended
value is 4.
• Faults - Enabled/Inhibited.
• Peer limit [I - 62]. Used to specify the
• lnfonnation - Enabled/Inhibited. highest numeric addressed panel on the
• Isolates - Enabled/Inhibited. network. The default and recommended
setting is 30.
4.8.15 FORM 180(11 /4]

4.8.20 FORM 180(31/1 and 31/2]
This form holds the infonnation required for configuring the
look up tables that enables/disables the reporting of a This form is required when using ThornNer. and holds the
particular event type for each MINERVA point. The infonnation for setting the HBus parameters:
infonnation required is as follows: • Type - defines the panel as a network panel or
• Configuration Type. non-nct\vork panel.
• Location. • Address - the default address is set to I and

cannot be changed when Type is set to
• Point number. ThomNct.
• Alarms· Enabled/Inhibited. • Baud rate - set at 4800.
• Pre-alarms - Enabled/Inhibited.
• Faults - Enabled/Inhibited. 4.8.21 FORM 180(32/1 to 32/4)
• Infonnation - Enabled/Inhibited. This form is required when using ThornNet, and holds the
• Isolates - Enabled/Inhibited. infonnation for configuring the ThomNet Sub-net Map:
• The Node address [ I to 62] against the
corresponding panel connection.

Re~i,terl"<I Office: l?-2 I D,•nmork Slreei, Wokingham. Berk, RG~O ZQE

...
MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
4.8.22 FORM 180(33/1 and 33/2] 5. POWER SUPPLIES

This fonn is required when using ThornNet, and holds the The MINERVA Fire controller is operated from the a.c.
information for setting the Net Module fault reponing: mains supply. In addition, stand-by batteries are fitted.
• Common - Enabled/Disabled which are charged from the mains via an internal charging
unit (rated at 3A]. The batteries must be capable of operating
• Pon L Connection - Enabled/Disabled. the system in nonnal and alarm conditions for the length of
• Pon R Connection - Enabled/Disable. time specified in BS 5839 Part I.
• Network Ground - Enabled/Disabled. The required capacity of the batteries needs to be calculated
using the current consumption infonnation contained in para
• Data Transfer - Enabled/Disabled. 7, noting the requirements detailed above. Note that the
• Ring Continuity - Enabled/Disabled. standard options available are two 5. 7Ah l 2V batteries or
four l0Ah 6V batteries.
• Net Comms Failure - Enabled/Disabled.
Note: Certain ancillary devices [SM520, Pl521,

4.8.23 FORM 180{34/1 and 34/2] SO520 and DM520] require an additional 24 V
supply. This supply may either be obtained
This form holds the information required for configuring
from a separate 24V power supply unit or from
the Event Log reporting:
the controller itself. If they are to be powered
• For subheadings DESTINATION I, 2. and from the 24V supply in the controller, the
3, select the event priority from the key in additional load must be considered when
the Event Priorities table. Either, ·All". calculating battery capacity.
'None', or the Number [ I to 13) as
appropriate. If the calculated battery capacity is greater than that provided
• Panel Number select [I to 62) by the internal batteries, additional batteries and a charger arc
needed. These may be housed in a separate housing adjacent
• Re-Send Timeout, select [I to 99 seconds) to the controller.
4.8.24 FORM 180(35/1 to 35/4}

6. CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
This fonn holds the infonnation required for configuring
the ThornNct Broadcasts: 6.1 MINERVA CONTROLLER, POWER
BOX AND TERMINAL CHAMBER
• Incoming Events - Enabled/Disabled
The controller is housed in a steel back box, which is
• Outgoing Events - Enabled/Disabled provided with knockouts for cable entry. The die-cast front
• Outgoing Zonal Aiarms - Enabled/Dis,1blc<l panel assembly is fitted with hinges on the right-hand
side. The hinges engage with slots in the right-hand side of
• Outgoing Zonal Faults - Enabled/Disabled the back box and allow the front panel to open to
• Sole Supervisor and Timekeeper - Enabled/ 90°. Housings with knockouts arc fitted with a MINERVA
Disabled Eanhing Kit to provide a high integrity earth.
• Incoming and Outgoing Own Zones - The controller electronics arc supplied on separate circuit
Enabled/Disabled boards, that which are fitted onto a chassis plate which
mounts into the back box.
4.8.25 FORM 180(3611 to 3614}

Note: MINERVA T890 & T891 controller electronics
This form holds the Relevant Sectors information. are supplied fitted directly to the back box.
4.8.26 FORM 180(37} The die-cast front panel is fitted_ with the zonal display,
operator controls and indicator LEDs.
This fonn holds the Network string fetch information for
each panel [ I to 62). Refer to the figures for the overall and fixing dimensions of
controllers and accessories.
• Lowest Priority Requested.
• No Reply Timeout [seconds] [I to 15).
PAGE 58 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Battery fault limits: 22.SV d.c. battery fault.

23.5V d.c. battery fault clear.
[MINERVA CONTROLLER]
Battery discharged: 21.2V@ 20°C.
O,·erall Dimensions
'24V nominal' limits: 20.0 - 29.0V d.c.
Height: 320mm
Width: -1-10111111
Field Wiring Connections IMain Processor/
Depth: 140mm
Motherboard I:
All terminals accept solid/stranded conductors from
Weights 0.5 to 2.5 mm 2•
Controller 8/ 16E/80: 7kg {without batteries]
Controller T890: 14kg [without batteries] Outputs:
Contro lier T89 I: 13kg [without batteries] Sounder: 2 circuits rated 24V d.c.
nominal @ 0.85A max.
Power Box: 7. lkg[without batteries)
End of Linc Device, custom
Expansion Box: 6kg
part TSL stock code
Bulkhead Mounting Kit: 5kg 125.500.324.
lvlonitoring for open circuit,
Colour short circuit and missing
End of Line Device.
Casing: Dawn Grey [BS 4800 IOA-03]
Front Panel: Dawn Grey [BS 4800 IOA-03) Field supply: 24V d.c. nominal@ 0.85A
maximum, current Iimited.
En\'iro nmental
Common alam1 relay: I set of changeover contacts.
rated for I A @ 24V d.c.,
Storage Temperature: -20°C to +65°C maximum voltage 33\i d.c.
Operating Temperature: - I 0°C to +55°C Common fault relay: I set of changeover contacts,
Relative humidity: upto95% RH rated for IA @24V d.c.,
[non-condensing] maximum voltage 33V d.c.
Electrical Inputs:
Mains Supply: 220 to 240V a.c., rated Fault loop: Monitored for open circuit
operational range. Limits may be with )Ok ohm EOL, 6mA
exceeded by up to +10%, -15% in maximum @ 24 V d.c.
accordance with BS5839 Part 4. nominal.
-15-65Hz. Current draw 1 Amp max, Tamper loop: Monitored for open circuit
innish current 80A. with IOk ohm EOL, 6mA
Mains fuse: 3 Amp I" x 1/ 4 " HBC ceramic maximum @ 24 V d.c.
to 8S1632. nominal.
Terminal Occupied premises loop: 6mA maximum@ 24V d.c.
connections: Live, neutral and earth. nominal.
2-Way Circuits:
Equipment is Class I insulated and must have protective and
Addressable loop: Time division multiplexed
functional earths.
and communications
circuit. Up to 99 compatible
Battery supply: addressable detectors or
addressable ancillaries.
Charger current limit: 2.7A. 27V d.c. max.
Charger voltage: 27.6V d.c. ±0.1 @ 20°c, Up to maximum of50 type
temperature compensated. S25 I detectors per loop.
Compatible devices, TSL
Battery rating: 4.0 to IOAh in MINERVA
range ofM400, M500, M900
8/ I 6E/T89 I main housing.
and S251 detectors [sensors]
4.0 to IOAh in MINERVA 80/ and 520 ancillaries.
T890 battery housing.

Rogi,t..rod Oflict>: 19-21 O.,nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-D1
04 11/99
Remote Bus: Conforming to RS485 8.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

electrical specifications. Half
duplex, multi-drop, 4800 The Mimic must be driven from a Controller or Repeater via
baud. an Expansion [/0 Module [XIOM].
Connections between the Mimic and Controller arc made
Printer po11: Conforming to RS232 via plug PU, a 16-way Molex connector, the pinouts of
electrical which arc as follows:
specifications. Full duplex,
4800 baud. PIN SIGNAL
I D
2 Address AO
Current consumption [at 24V d.c. and 26V d.e] 3 Address Al
The quiescent and alarm load current consumption of 4 Address A2
MINERVA components under normal and mains failed 5 Address AJ
conditions is given in Tables 5 and 6. 6 Board Select 0
7 Board Select I
Battery capacity: 8 Board Select 2
9 Board Select 3
To calculate the battery capacity required for a system;
10 Board Select 4
Add the total load current [sec Table 5] 11 Board Select 5
Divide by I 000. 12 Reset
Multiply by 1.25 [battery factor] and 13 ov
round the figure up to the nearest battery 14 +5V
size. 15 Ident
16 +12V
8. 80-WAY MIMIC
8.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
8.1 GENERAL [SO-WAY MIMIC]
The 80-Way Mimic allows custom-made display and Overall Dimensions
presentation panels to be incorporated in 'T890'. It is
supplied as a single PCB, which may be mounted in an Height: 235mm
expansion box or on the rear of a free-standing panel, as Width: 190mm
required. It may be used to drive up to 80 zonal LED
indicators, arranged in any configuration, together with two
FIRE LEDs. one FAULT LED and one ISOLATE Environmental
LED. These indicators operate in the same manner as the
Storage Temperature: -20°C to +65°C
corresponding indicators on the 'T890' controller.
Operating Temperature: -I0°C to +55°C
Relative Humidity: up to95% RH
8.2 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS [non-condensing]
The 80-way Mimic comprises a single, unboxed PCB. No
mounting or fitting kit is provided, and allowance must be Note: At temperature extremes LCD display
made for securing the PCB in the design of the may be sluggish or fade, no permanent
mimic. Refer to Fig. 8 for mounting details. Each LED damage will occur.
used in the Mimic must be wired individually to the driver
circuits on the Mimic PCB, a two-way Molex connector
being provided on the PCB for each LED for this purpose. Electrical
+ 12V, +5V, 0V supplies from host Controller/Repeater
PAGE 60 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
.. PUBLICATION: 15A-02-D1
CURRENT CONSUMPTION OF MINERVA
ITEM
MIN 8/16E 211

MIN 804 LOOP 299
MIN 806 LOOP 392
MIN 808 LOOP 440
MIN 80 10 LOOP 488
REPEATER 115
MPIM 13
MAM [T890/T891 ONLY] 13
PM520 0.18 0.18

LI Mk 2 2 2
CM 0.18 0.18
OM 0.18 0.7
RM 0.18 0.18
SM 0.18 0.7
DETECTOR + BASE 0.27 0.28
CP520 0.18 0.18
CP920 250µA 300µA
Pl 0.5 0.5
SU 0.5 1.0
SD 0.25 0.25
OTHER LOADS
·24V:LOADS.i:r>;; -··
ACPM 36
OM 22
SM 8
SD 0
Pl 0 40mA per relay
MDM521 20 per zone 45 per zone
BELL 0 55
BANSHEE 0 17
BEDLAM 0 30
OTHER LOADS
Table. 5 Quiescent and Alarm Load Current Consumption of MINERVA Components Under Normal and Mains
Failed Conditions

Registered Ortice: 1\1-21 Denmack Ste.et. Wokingham. Berks RG~0 ZQE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
CURRENT CONSUMPTION OF
ADDRESSABLE MINERVA WITH LOOP POWERED SOUNDERS
MIN 80 2 LOOP 370

MIN 80 4 LOOP 390
MIN 80 6 LOOP 440
MIN 80 8 LOOP 480
MIN 80 10 LOOP 530
REPEATER 115
MPIM 13
MAM [T890/T891 ONLY] 13
LPBB520 0.52
LPS520 11
PM520 0.18
Ll520 MK2 2
CM 0.18
OM 0.18
RM 0.18
SM 0.18
DETECTOR + BASE 0.27
CP520 0.18
MDM521 20 per zone
CP920
SU QS
SD 0.25
OTHER LOADS
ACPM 36
DM 22
SM 8
Pl 0
SD 0
BELL 0
BANSHEE 0
BEDLAM 0
OTHER LOADS
Table. 6 Quiescent and Alarm Load Current Consumption of i\llNERVA

Components Under Normal and Mains Failed Conditions
PAGE 62 of 67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
9. ORDERING INFORMATION
MINERVA Plain Cover Assembly: 557-180-021
CONTROLLERS:
General Purpose Housing: 557-180-451
MINERVA-8 assembled [surface mtg]: 557-180-564
MINERVA Earthing Plate Kit: 557-180-064
MINERVA-8 assembled [flush mtg]: 557-180-565
MINERVA-8 Repeater
MINERVA Mounting Plate Kit: 557-180-054
assembled [surface mtg]: 557-180-566
MINERVA 16E Battery Fitting Kit: 557-180-055
MINERVA 80 Battery Fitting Kit 557-180-065
MINERVA-l6E assembled [surface mtg): 557-180-550
MINERVA-16E assembled [flush mtg]: 557-180-553
Marine Bartcry Fitting Kit [for
MINERVA-16E Repeater assembled
[surface mtg]: 557-180-554 T89 I ff 290/T29 I ] : 557-180-410
Bulkhead Mounting Kit: 557-180-454
MINERVA- I6E Repeater assembled 19 inch Rack Mounting Kit: 557-180-452
[flush mtg]: 557-180-555
MINERVA 16E Cover Assembly: 557-180-002 Ancillaries Stacking Kit: 557-180-095
MINERVA-SO 2-loop Controller Ancillaries Housing - 8: 557-180-096
assembled [surface mtg]: 557-180-556 Ancillaries Housing - 3: 557-180-097
MINERVA-SO 2-loop Controller

assembled [flush mtg]: 557-180-570 MODULES:
MINERVA 80 Cover Assembly: 555-180-003 MINERVA LCD Repeater
MINERVA-SO Repeater assembled 80 character: 557-180-035
[surface mtg]: 557-180-558 MINERVA 80 Mimic Module: 557- I 80-005
MINERVA Main Processor PCB
MINERVA-SO Repeater assembled [without soflware]: 557-180-200
(flush mtg]: 557-180-559
T890 Controller: 557-180-401 MlPLOC Main Processor PCB
T89 I Controller: 557-180-402 [with Vl.8 software]: 557-180-206
MINERVA ACIDC Power Module: 557-180-001
T290 Repeater: 557-180-403 MINERVA Addressable AC/DC
Power Module: 557-180-002
T29 I Repeater: 557-180-404
Power Unit T690 [used with T890]: 557-180-405
MINERVA DC/DC Converter: 557-180-051
MINERVA DC/DC Loop Powered
Terminal Chamber: 557-180-406
Converter [DCPM-LP): 557-180-205
MINERVA Addressable Loop
MINERVA Gen. Purpose Housing Expansion Module Loop Powered
[surface mtg]: 557-180-032 [ALXM-LP]: 557-180-203
MINERVA Gen. Purpose Housing
[flush mtg]: 557-180-033
MINERVA Addressable Loop Expansion
MINERVA Expansion Housing Module [ALXM): 557-180-014
[Power Box and Tenninal Chamber]: 557-180-034
T890 Marine Addressable Loop Expansion
Module [ALXM]: 557-180-424
Terminal Chamber (assembled]: 557-180-562 Marine Applications Module: 557-180-426
MINERVA Power Box addressable
[assembled): 557-180-560
MINERVA Expansion 1/0 Module
MINERVA Power Box non-addressable [XIOM): 557-180-016
[assembled]: 557-180-561

Registe,ed Offi<r: 19-21 Dennia,k St,ect, Wokingham, lk,ks RG411 2QE
A ~l/CD INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
MINERVA Multi-Purpose M F90 I Ion Chamber Detector: 516-051-00 I

Interface Module: 557-180-012 MD901 Heat Detector: 516-053-00 I
MINERVA Tem1inal Chamber M500 Detector Base and Skirt
PCB assembly: 557-180-022 [packed in 20s]: 517-035-00 I
MINERVA Network Processor
without Optics: 557-180-023
Heat Detector MD40 I: 5 16-025-00 I
Ion-chamber Detector M F40 I: 516-026-001
MINERVA Superlink PCB [Nine TilesJ: 557-180-028
Optical Detector MR40 I: 516-027-001
TLK Network Interface Module: 557-180-215

HPO Optical DetectorMR401T: 516-027-002
MINERVA Comms Drive Module: 557-180-025
Heat Detector MD50I: 5 I 6-03 3-00 I
CM520 Contact Monitoring Module: 555-180-021
Ion-chamber Detector MF501: 516-030-00 I
CP520 Master Callpoint: 514-00 1-046

Optical Detector MR50 I : 516-031-00 I
CP530 Weatherproof Master
Call point: 514-001-022 HPO Optical Detector MR50 IT: 516-03 1-004
CP920 Call point: 514-001-049 Infrared Flame Detector MS502Ex:: 516-032-001
DM520 Conventional Detector S251 f Flame Detector; 5 16-039-00 I

Module: 517-001-012 S251 i Flame Detector: 516-039-002
VESDA rn E70D Aspirating Detector: 516-017-003
Ll520 Linc Isolator Module: 545-001-007
RM520 Relay Module: 568-001-011 MISCELLANEOUS:
SM520 Sounder Module: 577-001-022
RS232 to RS422 Converter: 557-180-036
MINERVA Paging Transmitter: 577-002-00 I
SB520 Sounder Booster Module: 577-001-023
MINERVA Type 'A' Alarm Pager: 577-002-002
AM52 I Aspirating Interface Module: 546-0 17-00 I
MINERVA Type 'A' Maintenance

TM520 Timer Module: 557-180-423 Pager: 577-002-003
SU52 I Shop Interface Unit: 568-001-013 MINERVA Type 'B' Alarm Pager: 577-002-004
SD520 Smoke Damper Module: 568-001-014 MINERVA Type 'B' Maintenance
Pager: 577-002-005
Pl52 I Plant Interface Unit: 546-004-006
VM520 Voice Module: 577-001-102 MINERVA Standard Aerial 500m: 577-002-006
LPIM Linc Powered Insertion Module: 557-180-092 MINERVA 60dB Gain Aerial 1000111: 577-002-007
MINERVA Ten Metre Feeder Cable
for 60dB Aerial: 577-002-008
LPS520 Line Powered Sounder: 577-001-027
LPB852 I Loop Powered Sounder
Besson Banshee: 577-001-026 Ferrite Core Small: RS Code 239-056
Ferrite Core Large: RS Code 239-062
DETECTORS: MINERVA Printer Driver Kit: 557-180-052

M900 Base Assembly: 5 I 7-050-00 I Wall Mounted Printer: 557-180-076
MR901T HPO Sensor: 516-055-00 I
MR90 I Optical Detector: 516-057-001 Bezel [flush mtg] for Wall Mounted
Printer: 557-180-079
Printer Lead: 557-180-062
PAGE 64of67
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ISSUE No. &DATE: 04 11/99
Printer Lead Rt. Angled ·o· Type: 557-180-202

Computer Lead: 557-180-063
SI-IV gland kit SHV OI: 907-007-369

SHY gland kit SHV 02: 907-007-370
SHY gland kit SI-IV 03: 907-007-371
Base Locking Kit M500 series

[pack of 10 Base Locks and I Key]: 517-025-0 I 0
M900 series Detector Key
[packed in IOs]: 517-051-002
Configuration Dc\"iccs Pack [packed

in 10s - I device per controller}: 599-012-002
Address Labels - Loop ·A· [pack of 10]: 599-047-00 I

Address Labc ls - Loop · 8 · [pack of I OJ: 599-047-002
Address Labels - Loop ·c [pack of 10): 599-047-003
Address Labels - Loop ·o· [pack of 10): 599-047-004
,. Address Labels - Loop ·E' [pack of 10): 599-047-005
Address Labels - Loop T (pack of 10): 599-047-006
Address Labels - Loop ·G' [pack of 10): 599-047-007
Address Labels - Loop ·H' [pack of 10]: 599-047-008
Address Labels - Loop T [pack of IO]: 599-047-009
Address Labels - Loop T [pack of IO]: 599-047-010
Zone Labels - I to 16: 599-047-011

Zone Labels - I 7 to 32: 599-047-012
Zone Labels - 33 tu 48: 599-047-013
Zone Labels - 49 to 64: 599-047-014
Zone Labels - 65 Ill 80: 599-047-015

R•~i,tered Offico: 19-21 ~nnu,rk Str•ct, Wokingham, Berks RG-lO 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
10. RELATED PUBLICATIONS

I IA-01-XS' CONSYS' CONFIGURATION PROGRAM [VERSION IO.O] - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
0IA-03-D2 M500 BASE UNIT AND ACCESSORIES - SYSTEM DESIGN & APPLICATION
0SA-02-DI RM520 RELAY MODULE- PRODUCT APPLICATION AND DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D2 DM520 CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D3 CM520 CONTACT MONITORING MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION AND
DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-D6 SM520 SOUNDER DRIVER MODULE- PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D7 SB520 SOUNDER BOOSTER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D8 CP5 I0 SLAVE CALLPOINT - DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D9 CP520 MASTER BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08.-\-02-D\0 CP530 WEATHERPROOF ADDRESSABLE MASTER BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT -
PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-D 13 AM52 I ASPIRATING INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-Dl4 VM520 VOICE MODULE - PRODUCT APPUCATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D15 SU521 SHOP INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0RA-02-016 TM520 TIMER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-DI 7 SD520 SMOKE DAMPER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D18 PI521 PLANT INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-DI 9 LPS520 LINE POWERED SOUNDER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-020 ll520 MK 2 LINE ISOLATOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-D22 LPBB52 l LINE POWERED ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
0!-l.-\-02-025 MDM52 I MULTl-CIRCUIT CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN INFORMATION
08.-\-02-026 LPBD520 LOOP POWERED BEAM DETECTOR INTERFACE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-02-D27 CP920 ADDRESSABLE BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-02-D30 CP930 WEATHERPROOF ADDRESSABLE BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D3 l IF520Ex INTRINSICALLY SAFE HEAVY DUTY MANUAL PUSHBUTTON CALLPOINT - PRODUCT
APPUCATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D32 CP950Ex INTRrNSICALLY SAFE ADDRESSABLE BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT
APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-033 AM92 I ADDRESSABLE ASPIRATING INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-03-DI MINERVA REMOTE LCD REPEATER - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
PAGE 66 of67
... EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
0SA-04-DI MINERVA PAGER- PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION

07A-03-DI MINERVA NETWORK ATTACHMENT UNIT [MNAU] - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN INFORMATION
26A-02-DI INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS FOR USE IN LOW VOLTAGE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS
This document incorporates the following Techmcal Information Bulletins [TIBs):
TIB No TITLE DATE
0137 MINERVA Software Release Version IO.O 20th Feb 96

0140 MINERVA Software Release Version 10.1 19th Mar 96
0145 Suitability of Fire Resistant 'Foil and Drainwire' Type Cables 3rd May 96
--
0156 MINERVA Software Release Version I 1.0 4th Dec. 96
--- -------- -· -· j
JUim
I J1h Non:mbcr 1999

R~~iskred Offic,r: 19-2.1 lh·nmark Sfr-t:ei, \Vokingham, Berks RG-10 2Qt:
A ~lJCO INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 15A-02-11
'MINERVA' ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE CONTROL SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. GENERALINFORMATION 3 3.7 MOUNTING THE 'VESDA'
1.1 INTRODUCTION 3 GLAND BOX 17
1.2 SITING THE EQUIPMENT 3
1.3 MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS 3 3.8 MOUNTING THE VM520 BACK BOX 17
3.9 MOUNTING THE VESDA
LASERPLUS UNIT 19
2. CABLING 8
3.10 MOUNTING OTHER EQUIPMENT 20
2.1 CABLE REQUIREMENTS 8
3.11 WIRING FOR DEVICES 20
2.2 CABLE TYPES 8
3. 12 CABLING 20
2.3 CABLE TERMINATION 9
3.12.1 GENERAL 20
2.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS 10
3.12.2 MS00 DETECTOR BASE
2.5 EARTHING 8 / 16E I 80 10 CABLING 21
2.6 EARTHING T890 / T891 10 3. 12.3 M900 DETECTOR BASE
2.7 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT CABLES 10 CABLING 21
,, 2.7.1 POWER SUPPLY CABLES 3.12.4 ll520 Mk2 LINE ISOLATOR
(MARINE) 11 MODULE CABLING 21
2.7.2 REMOTE BUS CABLES 3.12.5 LPBB521 LINE POWERED
(MARINE) 11 SOUNDER MODULE 21
2.8 REPEATER, MIMIC, AND 3.12.6 S251/s251+ ADVANCED
PRINTER WIRING 11 FLAME DETECTORS 21
2.9 CABLE ROUTING 11 3.12. 7 CP520/CP530/CP20/
CP930/I F520E:x/CP950Ex/
CP510 CALLPOINT CABLING 21
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 12
3.12.8 DM520 CONVENTIONAL
3.1 PREPARING THE HOUSINGS 12 DETECTOR MODULE
3.2 MOUNTING THE HOUSINGS CABLING 22
(EXCEPT T890' AND T891') 12 3.12.9 RM520 RELAY MODULE
3.3 MOUNTING 'T890' AND T891' CABLING 23
CONTROLLERS, POWER BOXES, 3.12.10 SM520 SOUNDER DRIVER
TERMINAL CHAMBERS, MODULE CABLING 24
REPEATERS AND MIMICS 13
3.12.11 CM520 CONTACT
3.3.1 BULKHEAD MOUNTING 13 MONITORING MODULE 24
3.3.2 RACK/CONSOLE MOUNTING 14 3.12.12 SB520 SOUNDER BOOSTER
3.3.3 REPEATERS (T290/T291) 14 MODULE 24
3.4 MOUNTING THE MINERVA 3.12.13 PM520 ADDRESSABLE AC
REPEATER HOUSING 15 POWER MODULE CABLING 25
3.5 MOUNTING THE MINERVA 8 3.12.14 'VESDA' ASPIRATING
ANCILLARY HOUSING 15 DETECTOR/ AM521
3.6 MOUNTING THE MINERVA 3 ASPIRATING INTERFACE
ANCILLARY HOUSING 15 MODULE 25

Regist,r4'd Ortic,,: 19-21 l>enma<k Srrttt, Wokingham, Buk< RG40 2QE
A tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD, COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-11
04 11/99
3.12.15 VESDA LaserPLUS

ASPIRATING DETECTOR/
AM921 ASPIRATING
INTERFACE MODULE 25
3.12.16 VM520VOICE MODULE 25
3.12.17 Pl521 ADDRESSABLE PLANT
INTERFACE UNIT 26
3.12.18 SU521 ADDRESSABLE SHOP
INTERFACE UNIT 26
3.12.19 SD520 ADDRESSABLE
SMOKE DAMPER
INTERFACE 26
3.12.20 LPS520 LINE POWERED
SOUNDER MODULE 27
3.12.21 TM520 TIMER MODULE 27
3.12.22 S251 i / S251f DETECTORS 27
4. INSULATION AND CIRCUIT

TESTS 28
4.1 INSULATION TESTS 28
4.2 CIRCUIT TESTS 28
5. FINISHING OFF 28
6. ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS 29
PAGE 2 of 29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBUCATION: 15A-02-I1
1. GENERAL INFORMATION Note:
1.1 INTRODUCTION 1) The connection of electrical cables to internal

equipment is NOT a part of installation and
This document describes the procedure for installing the must not be carried out at this stage.
following ·MINERVA' fire control systems: Instructions for cable connection are given in
the appropriate commissioning instructions.
• MINERVA-8
2) It is recommended that on receipt of the
• MINERVA - 16E
controller and ancillary components. the units
• MINERVA - 80 be checked visually. Return damaged or
defective items for exchange.
• \IINERVA - T890
3) The mains supply must be in accordance with
• \IINERVA - T89I
Clause 16-2 of BS5839 Pt1 (1988). where
applicable.
The ·r-.-llNERVA' fire controller and ancillaries form fire 4) For installation of Intrinsically Safe equipment
Jc1.:c1ion systems and. where applicable. 1h.: ins1allation refer to Publication 26A-02-l 1 - Intrinsically
shou Id ct,n ti.Hill to either: Safe Systems for use in Low Voltage Fire
Detection Systems - Installation Instructions
• Bri1ish S1andard BS 5839 Part I ( 1988 \·Fire
Detection and Alarm Sys1cms in Buildings -
Code of Practice for System Design. 1.2 SITING THE EQUIPMENT
ln,wllation and Sen·icing ·.
All equipment must be sited and installed as detailed in the
or: specification and/or drawings for the system. To ensure
reliability and integrity, good installation practice such as
• S.O.L.A.S. and Marine Classificalion Rules
that laid down in the I.E.L ·Regulations for Electrical
and Regul a1ions for a T890 or T89 I.
Installations·or Ships equivaknt must be observed.
Reference should be made to Company standard documents
The majori1y of the instructions given in this document arc 05A-02-J I and the appropriate pans of 0SA-02-C I.
common to all the controllers in the range. any differences
being omlined as appropriate.
Installation of a "MINERVA' fire comrollcr system
1.3 MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS
comprises the following: The MINERVA controllers are supplied as complete items
• Preparing the eomrollcr/rcpcatcr housings Circuit boards and modules for 8/16E/80 arc fitted to a
for mounting, (unpacking and removal of chassis plate which is mounted in the controller housing.
electronic assemblies). · Circuit boards and modules for T890/T89 I arc fitted to the
backbox..
• Mounting the controller/repeater housings.
The MINERVA-SO, and ·T890' controllers consist of TWO
• Installation and fix.ing of cables. or THREE housings, according to system requirements,
• Cable continuity and insulation checks. which are nonnally mounted adjacent each other.
• Cable resistance, inductance and capaci- Only the housings for the controllers and any repeaters or
tance checks. mimics arc fitted at this stage, with the other items being
titled into the housings during commissioning.
Note: The controllers. repeaters, and mimics are not Ensure that the position in which the controller. mimic or
suitable for exterior mounting. repeater is to be fitted allows adequate clearance for cables
(sec Fig. I to 3) and for opening the front cover assembly
(which is hinged on the right and opens to 90°). Conduit
knockouts arc provided on the general purpose 'MINERVA'
housing (8/16E/80) for top and bottom entry. Gland plates
arc used for T890/T89 I .

R,gisle,ed omce: 19-21 D•nmark Sire~. \\'okini:ham, &rks RG~O 2QE
A t:qca /NTfRNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
440
220
320
200
6.4 DIA.
0
_,"JL._,_______·_E:'.Jl
____________
~_-o_l:_·--_--·---_11_ _- __._~} _
... •• 100
... 100
I
-----,-~----------------------------..---'---
20
140
ON TOP ONLY NOT ON TOP ON TOP ONLY
Fig. I 'MINERVA' Standard General Purpose Housing (Surface Mounting)

PAGE 4 of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 15A-02-I1
~I
380
200
6.401A.
.... 0 ~I
9-----·
j !E'.51 55
----,. ... 30
, ..,
100 100
_______________________!.__ _
130
~, 20
NOT ON TOP l
140
0
Fig. 2 'MINERVA' Standard General Purpose Housing (Flush Mounting)

lteg,istf"red Offitr: 19·21 De-nmark StR~C .. \\'okingh.am. Re..-ks H.G.io 2QE
A 'tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-11
04 11/99
--------------- 440----------------
320
CABLE GLAND MAXIMUM USABLE

PLATE AREA OF GLAND PLATE
t '-...... I
~ I
1-·
20
-
r
I
- -- -
-~-1- ------- ---,
I t t
135 80 125
I I
LJ
f 2.5
3.5 FOR POWER
I
L ----- -- ---------
- - - - - - - - - - - - 310 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I
----1-
il
AND EXPANSION
BOXES ------------ 356---------------
Fig. J T890ff891 Fire Controller Housing - Overall Dimensions
PAGE 6 of 29
. ,:
@
~
co
co
co KEY:
~
n ADET • ADDRESSABLE DETECTOR
0 DET • CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR
!!! LI· LINE ISOLATOR
-.
I'll
n
0
:,
(i'
PRINTER
(MAXIMUM OF 16 MPIMs)
CP - CALLPOINT
DM • CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE
RM • RELAY MODULE
SM· SOUNDER MODULE
.
~
0 .,, REMOTE + 1 - - - _ . ,
SB • SOUNDER BOOSTER MODULE
LPS • LINE POWERED SOUNDER MODULE
C.
~:-· BUS REPEATER
SU • SHOP INTERFACE UNIT
Pl. PLANT INTERFACE MODULE
-...
C
n J;:i,.
:r:
z-
(j)
"
1~, .;. SERIAL SERIAL (NOTE 2)
;; 0 EXPANSION PORT e----.-----! PAINTER
)> a. C
'ti BUS
t 0
3
"~
f"1
::i; CONTROLLER
\,, PAGER
TRANSMITTER EXTERNAL
8 ;. ~ EQUIPMENT
~ ~ ::!l
;;: C "'I
~ LI
~
~
)>
.
"
~
ii
("')
Q
230V a.e. - - - a...
CPI Pl
AR-t--t---~--:.,,---;;_:..----1..._ _,__"'--· .-.r----ic..,....-,-,--.....__.,.._..,......_..,..,
::! ~ =
~
0 "'~ 2.
,...~ .~ EXTERNA in C
"'C m
;;- 24V r----1+ V, t::>
,... PSU cc
~
i "'I
BATTERY REMOTE LCD C s
~ "'Cs::
~ REPEATERS m
= ~ IN POWER _I. ADDRESSABLE EOL :z;
I")
0 ",,. -=;:;· BOX CIRCUIT A EOL ~
~ m
p"
s: 0 z
(NOTES t AND 3)
i<: = ." ~
rJ; OCCUPIED
R<>
Cl ~
:-:l
-<: ~ '<
"' ----~~1 PREMISES
CONTACT
1 ~
.
:r:
::'l
~
;;-
3
1/P
CONTACT
r.,
C"'
,., r 2
=
'<
Q
C FAULT SU
1/P
MAXIMUM OF 6 SOUNDERS PER LPS520
ALARM &
SE100 FAULT EXTERNAL
RELAYS EOL EQUIPMENT
BT LINE/
EXCHANGE NOTES:
t. EACH CIRCUIT MAY BE FITTED WITH UP TO 99 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
2. EACH EXTERNAL MPIM MUST BE POWERED FROM A OCPM
3. ONLY ONE LOOP IS SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
2. CABLING For marine applications, 2-core or 4-core twisted pair,

ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulation and chloro-
2.1 CABLE REQUIREMENTS sulphanated polyethylene (CSP) sheath to BS6883 is to be
used, with a conductor size of I .5mm 2.
Cable requirements for all parts of an installation are
discussed in publication 05A-02-I2 which should be The addressable circuit cable screens must be joined within
referred to before installation is carried out. All cables each device on the loop to form a continuous cable screen.
should be specified and installed to meet the requirements
All other cables must be of a sufficient size not to cause an
of BS5839 Part I Subsection 17 or local equivalent
excessive voltage drop (max. I volt for a 24 volt circuit) for
standard.
the current required.
For the addressable circuit wiring, any type of screened
A schematic diagram for a typical system layout is shown in
cable that would normally be used on a fire protection
Fig.4.
system may be used with a 'MINERVA' fire
controller. Thus MICC, FP200 and SWA cables may all be
used, P.:roviding that the conductor size is not less than Note: It is an I.E.E. Regulation that fire alarm cables
l.5mm 2, and not greater than 2.5mm 2. be segregated from all other (non-fire alarm)
cables.
2.2 CABLE TYPES

The following cable types should be used 10 comply with EU EMC directive (89/336EEC):
Addressable loops: MICC, SWA (using a suitable termination gland) or any ·foil and
drain wire type' fire resistant cable (terminated with an SHV type gland or CXT
type gland).
Mains: Nonna! mains cable, M!CC, SWA (using a suitable termination
gland) or any ·foil and drain wire type' fire resistant cable (tenninatcd
with an SHY or CXT type gland). A ferrite bead must be fitted as shown.
Power box to Controller

(MINERVA 80/T890): T,vo 4-core screened cables (as above).
Remote Bus: MICC, SWA (using a suitable termination gland) or any ·foil and drain
wire type' fire resistant cable (terminated with an SHV or CXT type gland).
Network: MICC, SWA (using a suitable termination gland) or any 'foil and drain
wire type' fire resistant cable (terminated with an SHV or CXT type gland).
CABLE PARAMETERS BETWEEN TLK530s (Max length - 1200m)
9,600 and below Max resistance 75 ohms per conductor
Max capacitance I .2µF between conductors
The maximum distance, using shielded twisted pair cable with characteristics within
the parameters above, terminated with an SHV or CXT type gland, is 3000 metres.
Examples are Belden 9460 or 9574.
Serial output: Wall mounted printer (conduit/M[CC).

Remote LCDs (MICC, SWA (using a suitable termination gland)
or any 'foil and drain wire type' (terminated with an SHV or CXT type gland).
Ferrite beads are to be used at each Remote LCD as detailed in
the commissioning section.
Pager (conduit/MICC).
PAGE 8 of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
lSSUE No. & DATE: 04 11/99
The following 'foil and drain wire type' fire resistant cables are suitable:
DAETWYLER Lifeline
DELTA Firetuff
FABRICA CAVICEL Firecell
HUBER & SUHNER Radox FR
PIRELLI FP range
DRAKA CALFLEX Caltlam
RAYDEX FG950
GEC AEI Firetec
TRATOSCAVI Firesafe
ALCATEL pyrolyon
2.3 CABLE TERMINATION

All 'foil and drain wire type' fire resistant cable and Belden shielded twisted pair tcnninations MUST be made using a CXT
type gland shown in Fig. 5, or a SHV gland shown in Fig. 6.
CXT TYPE GLAND MANUFACTURED BYCMP PRODUCTS Ltd TELEPHONE: (019112657411 FACSIMILE: (019112650581
BELDEN CABLE MAY REQUIRE SLEEVING TO OBTAIN A TIGHT FIT.
DRAIN WIRE/SHIELD (MUST BE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND TERMI-

NATE OOTSID£ CONTROU.ER ltOUSING)
OUTSIDE
METAL WASHERS
CONTROLLER HOUSING
LOCKNUT
ORAIN WIRE SLOT

INSIDE
Min Cable Range Max
Metric PVC
Gland Thread 'B' Ac.-oss
thread Shroud
Size Length Comers
'C' Ref.
'D' Min Max Dia. 'E'
20/16 20 15 3.1 8.6 24.4 223
C 20S 20 15 6.1 . 11.6 26.5 223
FOIL MUST NOT EXTEND BEYOND GLAND
20 20 15 6.5 . 13.9 30.0 225
All Dimensions in Millimetres
Fig. 5 Cable Termination Detail

Re-giile-rrd Orfece: 19-21 Oenmar-k Slr-eet, \Vokingham..,. ~rks RGMI 2QE
,r
A "tqCO INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

----------------------------------------------------- ............. .
MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
SHV type glands are Stock Coded as follows:
INNER OUTER STOCK CODE

CABLE SIZE GLAND REFERENCE
SHEATH SIZES SHEATH SIZES NUMBER
I .Smm~ 1wo core 3.5-5.0mm 6.8-8.8mm SHVOI 901.007.369
2.5mm 2 two core 4.5-6.0mm 8.5- 10.8mm SHV02 901.007.370
I _Smm1 4 core 5.0 - 5.7mm 8.5- 10.8mm SHV03 901.007.371
2.6 EARTHING T890 I T891
BRASS
All exposed metalwork and cabling conduics must be
EARTHING returned to earth via a suitable copper conductor. All cable
FERRULE
RUBBER I screens are to be tenninated with a crimp tag and must be
COMPRESSION
"O"RING I NEOPRENE CO"IE (BRASS) long enough to connect to the gland plate earthing stud.
BUSH
System OV MUST NOT be connected to earth. The earthing
stud on the bonom of the T890 / T89 I controller MUST BE
connected to ship's earth.
THREAD
SECURl"IG Note: Earthing should be to I.E.E. Regulations.
SIZE"A' IAAl"I BODY CAP[BAASS(
[BRASS(
2.7 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT CABLES

Push earthing ferrule between braid and cable. Addressable devices may be wired onto the system in any
Run strain wire between braid and outer sleeve, order, (they do not have to be in address order). The wiring
terminate strain wire at earthing ferrule. may therefore follow the most economical route.
For loop circuits, a separate 2-core feed out and back MUST
be provided. A 4-core feed introduces unnecessary
Fig. 6 SHV Gland terminations, increased failures, and provides no better
protection than a single 2-core spur.
For the addressable circuit wiring, any type of screened
cable that would nonnally be used on a fire protection
system may be used on a 'MINERVA' fire control
system. Thus MICC, FP200 and SWA cables may all be
2.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS used, P-roviding that the conductor size is not less than
I .5mm 2 or greater than 2.5mm 2. Siecl conduit should
For cable requirements for Hazardous Areas, refer to always be bonded to earth.
Publication 26.-\-02-D 1 - Intrinsically Safe Systems for use
in Low Voltage Fire Detection Systems - Application and For marine applications, 2-corc or 4-core twisted pair,
Design Information. ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulation and chloro-
sulphanated polyethylene (CSP) sheath to BS6883 is to be
used, with a conductor size of I. 5mm 1.
2.5 EARTHING 8 / 16E / 80
Note:
All exposed metalwork and cabling conduits must be
returned ro earth via a suitable copper conductor. 1) The maximum permitted cable parameters are
as follows:
System 0V should NOT be connected to earth. Any links on
the PCB connec1ing 0V to earth should be removed. • Resistance 75 ohm
• Inductance 1.5 mH } measured
Note: Earthing should be to I.EE. Regulations. • Capacitance 0.5 µF at I kHz
PAGE 10 of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 1SA-02-11
These parameters give cable lengths of up to 2.8 REPEATER, MIMIC, AND PRINTER
2km with suitable cables. Reference should be WIRING
made to the cable manufacturers' data in order
to calculate cable lengths using the above Repeaters are connected to the controller's remote bus and
parameters. may be mounted up to l 200m away from the controller. The
cable used must not cause an excessive loss or attenuation of
2) The resistance quoted above is the TOTAL the signal. The recommended cables MICC or screened
resistance of the addressable circuit cable twisted pair (which will require additional protection in
including any L/520 Mk2 Line Isolator Modules order to comply with BS 5839 Part I).
fitted. Each of these modules has a resistance
of approximately 0.25 ohm and a MAXIMUM of Mimics are connected to the Expansion Bus of the
twelve may be fitted on a direct route between Controller via an Expansion 1/0 Module (XIOM) and may
any addressable device and the controller. be mounted up to 1200m away from the controller. Cabling
requirements are the same as for repeaters.
3) The WHOLE of any circuit that includes an
SM520 module must be wired in cables The 24V d.c. supply to the repeater (if supplied from the
designed to meet Subsection 17.2 of BS 5839 controller) should be provided via a separate cable
Part 1 (1988). complying with the requirements of BS 5839 Part I ( 1988)
Subsection 17.
If a separate supply is used, the OV line must be commoned
2.7.1 POWER SUPPLY CABLES (MARINE) with the Controller OV.
Two 4-core cables as described for the addressable circuit Printers arc connected to the controller using standard serial
cables must be used to supply the controller from the power or parallel cables (depending on printer type).
box.. using three cores of one cable and two cores in the
other.
2.9 CABLE ROUTING
2.7.2 REMOTE BUS CABLES (MARINE) It is important to ensure the correct routing of cab !cs in order
ro minimise coupling effects. In particular, power and
The remote bus is an RS485 differential wire pair ·MINERVA' signal cables should NOT be run in the same
communications bus. The cable used is the 4-core cable as conduit or trunking. Where it is unavoidable to run power
stated for the addressable circuits. {The maximum length of
and signal cables together, it is recommended that the
the cable is 1200m.) separation between them is not less than the minimum
values shown in Table I.
Note:
1) If it is necessary to cross signal cables over
power cables, the crossover should be made at
right-angles.
2) 'MINERVA· signal cables should also be
segregated from PA lines.
POWER CABLE VOLTAGE SEPARATION (m) POWER CABLE CURRENT SEPARATION (m)
115V 0.30 5A 030

240V 0.45 15A 0.35
415V 0.58 50A 0.50
3.3kV I. I I0OA 0.60
6.6kV 125 300A 0.85
I !kV 1.4 600A 1.05
Table l: Minimum Separations between Power and Signal Cables

Re-g:isl.f"r-ed Office: 19-2t 0('nrn:;1rk. S~ret'--1, \\'okin~harn 1 B...-.---ks RC·:IO 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CHASSIS PLAT£

FIXING SCREW CHASSIS PLATE
/
3.1 PREPARING THE HOUSINGS
D
To prepare the pre-assembled MINERVA Controller, D
~
Repeater, or Mimic, proceed as follows:
HANDLE
I) Remove complete assembly from package by
lifting handles on inner sleeve. Lay inner sleeve
on a flat surface with the handles to the right.
2) Open inner sleeve to reveal either a control unit
and loop label envelope or repeater unit, or
mimic.
Do
3) Place loop label envelope (where applicable)
along with one key fob in empty carton_ Fig. 8 Chassis Plate Fixing
4) Using hexagonal key (part of key fob). loosen the
front cover fixing - note screw is captivated -
place key fob in carton. 3.2 MOUNTING THE HOUSINGS
(EXCEPT 'T890' AND 'T891')
To mount the MINERVA Housing proceed as follows:
I) Prepare the housing, (refer to para 3.1 ).
2) Remove appropriate knockouts.
3) Ensure that the position in which the controller
or repeater housings are 10 be fitted allows
adequate clearance for cables and for opening
the front cover assembly (which is hinged on the
right and opens to 90° see Fig. 2)-
4) Detennine position for controller/repeater
housing on the wall, ensuring that the two
bottom fixing holes are horizontal, drill and plug
the keyhole and bottom fixing hole positions.
Fig. 7 Front Co\"er Remornl 5) Using suitable fixing screws for the mounting
location, put a screw in the centre keyhole
position, suspend the panel from the keyhole
screw and secure the bottom fixing hole
CAUTION: positions.
OBSERVE STATIC HANDLING
PRECAUTIONS. 6) Once mounted ensure that the housing is
physically secure.
7) Remove debris from housing.
5) Open front cover and disconnect the ribbon cable
8) Terminate cables as necessary leaving adequate
from the MP to the MPIM at plug PL I on the
free end tails. These tails should be brought
MPIM. Slide front cover upwards and lift away
forward and up to allow access for chassis plate
from the back box (see Fig. 7), store safely by
assembly.
placing front cover assembly on to the inner
sleeve. Place inner sleeve on top of envelope and 9) Assemble chassis plate into the housing,
key fobs in canon. reversing procedure detailed para 3. I (5) and
3.1(6).
6) The point fixing screw on chassis plate (sec Fig.
8) Loosen the screw, (DO NOT
REMOVE). Using handle provided and ACPM
cover, move entire chassis plate slightly upwards
and lift away from housing - store safely in
original carton.
PAGE 12 of 29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
ISSUE No_ & DATE: 04 11/99
3.3 MOUNTING 'T890' AND 'T891' 3.3.1 BULKHEAD MOUNTING

CONTROLLERS, POWER BOXES, Proceed as follows:
TERMINAL CHAMBERS, REPEATERS
I) Remove gland plates and drill as required,
AND MIMICS before replacing the gland plate ensure that
The T890 and T89 l controllers are supplied as complete the gasket is fitted.
assemblies. The Housings for 'T890' and T89 I may be 2) Either use the 'H' frame as a template or
mounted in one of two ways: refer to Fig. 9 for the layout dimensions of
• By the use of the 'H' frame bulkhead the fixing holes.
mounting bracket. 3) Mount each housing to its 'H' frame, using
• To a standard 19" rack/console by two rack- the IO screws supplied.
mounting brackets. 4) Mount the 'H' frame and housing to its
fixing holes using the nuts/bolts supplied.
520
-- 20
480
-CD-
I
f:;'
'0 0 0 0 © @) 0
!
NOTE: THE TWO OUTER HOUSING
SECURING HOLES ARE FOR
· .., ® USE WITH THE POWER BOX AND
EXPANSION BOX ONLY-
205 170
17.5
-( )--- © 0. 0 0 0 0,.......-o
l ~
""'
14 HOLESS.6
COUNTERSUNK
16.0 x 6.0 DEEP
(BULKHEAD MOUNTIHG BRACKET
TO MINERVA ENCLOSURES)
4HOLES
11.0
(BULKHEAD MOUNTING BRACKET
TO BULKHEAD)
Fig. 9 Bulkhead Mounting Bracket - Overall and Fixing Dimensions

Regi,t<rfll Office: 19-U O..nmark Street. Wokingluim. lk,rks RG40 2QE
A t:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD- COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
3.3.2 RACK/CONSOLE MOUNTING 3.3.3 REPEATERS (T290/T291)

Proceed as follows: Repeaters are mounted in the same housings as T891
controllers. Use the procedure as described in para. 3.3.1. or
I) Remove gland plates and drill as required, before
3.3.2.
replacing the plate ensure that the gasket is fitted.
2) Fit the two rack mounting brackets to the housing
as shown in Fig. I 0, using the 4 screws supplied
(the side mounting screws must be counter-
sunk).
3) Fit the housing to the specified position in the
rack/console and secure with the four bolts
supplied.
320
REAR OF BOX
139
i
. . . t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~.~~~. ~:~l~~:. . . . . . . . . . -r-____ '

I
l.
I ---------- - I I
~ - - - - - - - 270 ·------i __._ 90 --t-- 19.3~
170 j
-----------·~i
<~ REAR FIXINGS
75
1--~~=.=.. =
.. = ... ~..-..-.. -... -....-.·=···=···=···=-·-=·-·=···=··=···=···=---=···=···=···=···=····=··===-!--'-
... =
RACK FIXINGS
0
l------~------------
190.5 82,15
'
...:.
Fig. IO Rack Mounting Bracket for Controller Housing, Overall and Fixing Dimensions
PAGE 14 of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.4 MOUNTING THE MINERVA 3.6 MOUNTING THE MINERVA 3

REPEATER HOUSING ANCILLARY HOUSING
To install the pre-assembled MINERVA Repeater housing, To mount the MINERVA-3 Housing proceed as follows:
follow the procedure described in paras 3.1 and 3.2.
I) Insert the keys provided into the two locks
located at the top of the controller, and rum the
3.5 MOUNTING THE MINERVA 8 keys 90° downwards to open.
ANCILLARY HOUSING 2) Place the template, supplied with the panel,
squarely to the wall ensuring that the two bottom
The MINERVA 8 Ancillary Housing uses the MINERVA fixing holes are horizontal, (sec Fig. 12 for fixing
General Purpose Housing shown in Fig. I. and overall dimensions).
I) Using the Hexagonal key (taped to the rear of 3) Mount the ancillary housing. using the procedure
the box) undo the front fixing screws and lift described in para 3.2.
cover away, disconnect earth lead from housing
stud.
CHASSIS PLATE
AXING SCREW CHASSIS PLATE
COVER EARTH
TRANSIT SCREW CHASSIS PLATE

EARTH
fig. 11 Chassis Plate Detail

2) locate trans it and fixing screws in chassis plate,
sec Fig. 11. Remove and discard the transit
screw. loosen fixing screw. Disconnect chassis
plate earth from housing stud. Move chassis
plate slightly upwards and lift away from
housing.
3) Mount the ancillary housing using the procedure
described in para 3.2.
4) Assemble chassis plate into housing reversing
the procedure detailed in para 3.1(5) and (6).
·•

Re:gister-e-d Office: 19-21 Denn1~r-k Str"-ee,.. \Vokingham. Berk:s. RC-10 l(JE

MINERVA
15A-02-11
04 11/99
340
--
173
- -- ~
62
0 d
h
'
22
'
6mm
290
,..,
0
~
, '
37
_!_ . , . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
w f '
fig. 12 MINERVA 3 Ancillary Housing- Overall and fixing Dimensions
PAGE 16 of 29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
[SSUE No. & DATE: 04 11/99
·• 3.7 MOUNTING THE VESDA™ GLAND BOX 3.8 MOUNTING THE VM520 BACK BOX
To mount the VESDA Gland Box proceed as follows: To mount theVESDA Gland Box proceed as follows:
I) Drill holes and gland off as required (refer to the 1) Drill holes and gland off as required ( refer to the
system layout diagram). system layout diagram).
2) Mount the gland box in its selected position with 2) Mount the back box in its selected position with
suitable wall plugs and screws as necessary, (see suitable wall plugs and screws as necessary,
Fig. 13 and Fig. 14). (see Fig. 15).
3) Drill a hole in the rear cover of the VESDA 3) Mount the VM520 in the back box.
detector cover for cable entry ensuring no
internal components are damaged.
4) Mount the VESDA unit to the gland box.
--
~
---------------- ~
495 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
i~tt~3f:ft ~Wffkr-f{W\. ::· :,,:--.:::})r,'t. '.{:, \.lt:t~irti. tfrfHt?J,f!f!jt~:stiW:tf';:u~ ?1•F'·nM<BfiJg~~,i;

1
45 j
f
L. -+- -- - ·-·---·----------·-·----·--------------·-----8--
i
'
300
i t
L~~!:c:ii'licSt±i~ik~'·
T
_t.,.________________________
40
__J
Fig. 13 VESDA TM Gland Box Overall Dimensions

R•gi,rer•d Olfi<e: 19-21 Denmark Stn,•t, Wokingham. Bnu RG40 2QF.

MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
4x&
MOUNTING 0
HOLES
Fig. 14 VESDA™ Rear Cover
.
1
---------
l
:4--------·--·------_______20_0_ _ _ _ _ _ __
1:..-------·-
I~---------------------_,,
~
184
- - - - - - - - - "i
$
~Ii
20DIA
4.501A
ci' CL
' 0
!.______ .___ _ _ _
-'-------+---------------11-------.
-+--------------+-------_-J . . .0
·------'------f,1-------~I
R120.6 20 39-7
Fig. 15 VM520 Back Box Overall Dimensions
PAGE 18 of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
rSSUE No. & DATE: 04 11/99
3.9 MOUNTING THE VESDA®

LaserPLUS™ UNIT
To mount the VESDA® LaserPLUS' unit proceed as
follows:
l) Gland off as required (refer to the system layout
diagram).
2) Mount the unit in its selected position with
suitable wall plugs and screws as necessary, (see
Fig. 16).
3) Mount the VESDA unit to the gland box.
DETECTOR
MOUNTING
BOX
AM921
ASPIRATING
INTERFACE
MODULE
FILTER
FRONT COVER
(THE FOUR COYeR RETAINING SCREWS
ARE BENEATH THE INDIVIDUAL COVERS
ON THE FRONT PANEL)
Fig. 16 Exploded View of the VESDA
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group

PAGE 19 of29
Rogist..R<I Oflk.. , 19-ZI Denmark Slrttl, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
3.10 MOUNTING OTHER EQUIPMENT Note:
Referring to the installation drawing, fit boxes at appropriate 1) Up to ten CP510 Slave Ca/lpoints may be
positions to house MSOO detector bases and all other M520 connected to a CP520 Master Callpoint to
series modules as described in publication OSA-02-11. extend the area covered.
2) L/520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Modules may also be
connected onto the addressable circuits to
3.11 WIRING FOR DEVICES
provide short-circuit protection, although they
The types of devices that may be interfaced to a 'MINERVA' are not themselves addressable.
fire controller are as follows: 3) Line Isolator Modules are also required to divide
• MSOO Addressable Detector Base. the addressable circuits into notional zones to
comply with the requirements of BS 5839
• M900 Addressable Detector Base. Part 1.
• CM520 Contact Monitoring Module.
• CP520 Master Callpoint. 3.12 CABLING
• CP530 Master Callpoint (weatherproofCP520).
3.12.1 GENERAL
• CPS IO Slave Callpoint.
It is recommended that a tenninal block, wired as shown in
• DM520 Conventional Detector Module. Fig. 17 be provided for each device. These blocks fit freely
inside the device housings and maintain loop continuity.
• PM520 Addressable AC Power Module.
The procedure for cabling a system is as follows:
• RM520 Relay Module.
a) Run the cables as required.
• SM520 Sounder Driver Modu_le.
b) At the system housings, feed cables through
• S8520 Sounder Booster Module.
knockouts or gland plates. as applicable.
• AM521 Aspirating Interface Module with a leaving cable tail lengths of 600mm. Fit and
VESDA ni Aspirating detector. connect earthing cable at each housing.
• AM92 I Aspirating Interface Module with a c) For all other components, refer to Figures 16
VESDA !!:· LaserPLUSTM Aspirating detector. to 33 and proceed as follows:
• TM520 Timer Module. i) Draw cables through knockouts.
• SU52 I Shop Interface Unit. ii) Gland off as required.
• SD510 Smoke Damper Interface. iii) Strip outer insulation back to 150mm.
iv) Strip individual core insulation back to
• PI52I Plant Interface Unit. 25mm.
• LPS520 Loop Powered Sounder Module v) Connect the four loop cores to the terminal
• Ll520 Mk2 Linc Isolator Module block as shown.
• VM520 Voice Module

• LPBB52 I Loop Powered Besson Banshee Note:
• CP920 Callpoint 1) At a VESDA™ detector, leave cable tail lengths

ofBOOmm.
• S25 I Advanced Flame Detector
2) It is ESSENTIAL that continuity of each
• CP930 Callpoint addressable circuit be maintained at all
• CP950Ex Intrinsically Safe C~llpoint
times. DO NOT cut or disconnect the wire loops
or make any other connections at this stage.
• MDM521 Multi-circuit Conventional
Detector Module
• LPBD520 Linc Powered Beam Detector Due to the multiplexed nature of the installation, any faults on
the addressable circuits arc difficult to locate. The
• IFSOOEx Addressable Interface Module circuits MUST be checked and found to be free from earth
faults, leakages, etc. using the procedure described in para 4.
• IFS20Ex Addressable Callpoint
• Ll530Ex Intrinsically Safe Line Isolator
• CP540Ex Monitored Callpoint
PAGE 20of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.12.2 M500 DETECTOR BASE CABLING c) Connect the 2-core cable to the sounder
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12. I (c). circuit, ensuring correct polarity, see Fig. 17.
LOOP d} Do not make any other connections at this
IN OUT stage.
..
. ----..-- ---------, 3.12.6 S251/S251+ ADVANCED FLAME
I
DETECTORS
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c}.
TERMINAL.: b) Mount the detector(s) if not already fitted in
BLOCK
the required positions.
c) Connect the 2- core cable to the circuit,
I RED BLACK ensuring correct polarity, see Fig. 17.
d) Do not make any other connections at this
I
stage.
----------------------·
Fig. 17 Cabling for a MSOO Detector Base, an 3.12.7 CP520/CP530/CP920/CP930/IF520Ex/
Ll520 Mk2 Module, and LPBB521 Module,
CP950ExCP510 CALLPOINT
CABLING
al Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c) for
each CP520/CP530/CP920/CP930/
3.12.3 M900 DETECTOR BASE CABLING IF520Ex/CP950Ex.
The M900 base may be wired directly to the installed bl If CP5 IO slave call points are to be fitted,
cabling. alternatively the base can be wired as for a M600 install a 2-core cable as shown but do not
base using the terminal block and loops shown in Fig. 17. make any connections at this stage.
Draw cables through knockouts.
TO
bl Gland off as required. CP510 LOOP
c I Strip outer insulation back to 150mm. IN OUT
d) Strip individual core insulation back to

25mm.
c) Fit the M900 base to the back box as ,.. - --..------- -
necessary. 'I
,+ -
f) Connect the four loop cores to the terminals, I
I
L (-ve) and LI (+ve) in the M900 base as TERMINAL,
BLOCK
shown in Fig. 17.
Do connect not any of the other terminals.
3.12.4 ll520 Mk2 LINE ISOLATOR MODULE

CABLING
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c). For
------------------------------
connections refer to Fig. 17. Fig. 18 Cabling at a CP520/CP530/CP920/CP930
Callpoints
3.12.5 LPBB521 LINE POWERED SOUNDER
MODULE
Note: CP920/CP930//F520Ex/CP950Ex do not allow
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c). connection of a CP510.
b) Mount the sounder(s) (if not already fitted)
in the required position(s).

Rogi•t•r" Offoce: 19--21 Dtennurk Stroot. \\okinglu11n, lkrks RG40 2QE
A 1:qca INTERNATIONAL I.TD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-11
04 11/99
· 3.12.8 DM520 CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR

MODULE CABLING 4K7 EOL
3.12.8.1 DETECTOR TYPES A

1
CONVENTIONAL
Depending on their type, the detectors that can be attached DETECTOR
to a DM520 module may draw their power either from the CIRCUIT
20V local circuit or from the 24V 'DSUP' output from the
DM520. In either case, a 24V d.c. supply must be provided
for the DM520. This may be drawn from the contro!ler or
from a separate local 24 V power supply.
3.12.8.2 'LINE' POWERED DETECTORS

PSU
''
11 LOOP
(M300 SERIES) 24V IN OUT
A 'Line' powered detector (MJ00 Series) derives its power

from the 20V supplied by the DM520 module. r - ---------.,
I
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 ( c ).
I
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit (ifrequired) in •+ +
a convenient position but do not apply mains
power or fit batteries. TERMINA~
BLOCK ,
c) Mount the conventional detectors in the
required positions.
d) Connect the 2-core cable to the detector
circuit. ensuring correct polarity.
e) Do not make any other connections at this
stage.
L--------------------------~------J
Fig. 19 Cabling at a DM520 Module for 'Line'
Powered Detectors
3.12.8.3 'LINE' POWERED DETECTORS

(M600 SERIES)
A 'Line' powered detector (M600 Series) derives its power
from the 20V supplied by the DM520 module.
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c).
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit (ifrequired) in
power or fit batteries.
c) Mount the conventional detectors in the
required positions.
circuit, ensuring correct polarity.
Do not make any other connections at this stage.
PAGE 22of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
4K7 EOL
r9
I
I
I
I
CONVENTIONAL CONVENTIONAL
DETECTOR DETECTOR
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
L1
TO
POWERED PSU
LOOP
IN OUT
DETECTORS 24V
II
II LOOP
PSU
24V IN OUT I
I
I
l
r- -..-------.,, I TERMINAL
1 I BLOCK
IO.SUP TEST
I RED BLACK
I I
,+ + I
I
TERMINA~ I
BLOCK , I
I
Fig. 21 Cabling at a Dl\'1520 for an 'Externally'

Powered Detector
3.12.9 RM520 RELAY MODULE CABLING

Fig. 20 Cabling at a DMS20 Module for 'Line' a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c}.
Powered Detectors
b) Connect the 2-core cable to the external
circuit.
c) Do not make any other connections at this
stage.
3.12.8.4 'EXTERNALLY' POWERED
DETECTORS
EXTERNAL LOOP
An ·Externally' powered detector derives its power from the SWITCHED IN OUT
24V ·DSUP' output from the DM520 module. CIRCUIT
a) Refer to Fig. 21 and follow the procedure in

para 3.12.1 (c). r----- ----------.
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit{ifrequired) in
power or fit batteries. I
TERMINAL,
c) Mount the conventional dctector(s) (if not BLOCK
already titted) in the required position(s).
stage.
Fig. 22 Cabling at an RM520 Module
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE23 of29

R.,:,,,1.,,..i OITK<t: 19-U D<tnmark Sln,rl, Wokingham, Bub RC4CI 2QE
A 1:qC::D INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-11
04 11/99
3.12.10 SM520 SOUNDER DRIVER MODULE

CABLING LOOP MONITORED
IN. OUT CONTACT
The SM520 modules require a 24V d.c. supply. This may be
supplied from the conttoller or from a separate local 24V
power supply.
r-- -1
b) Fit the 24 V power supply unit (if required) in I
a convenient position but do not apply mains I
I
TERMINAL :
c) Mount the sounder(s) (if not already fitted) BLOCK
I
in the required position(s). RED BLACK I
I
d) Connect the 2-core cable to the sounder I
circuit, ensuring correct polarity. I
l
e) Do not make any other connections at this 1
_______________ !
stage.
Fig. 24 Cabling at a CM520 Module
3.12.12 S8520 SOUNDER BOOSTER

I
1SOUNOER
MODULE
J CIRCUIT
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit (if required) in

LOOP
PSU IN OUT
24V c) Mount the soundcr(s) (if not already fitted)
in the required position(s).
d) Connect the 2-core cable to the sounder
r-
I e) Do not make any other connections at this
I stage.
I
1
l TERMINAL
BLOCK
l FROMSM520 24V SOUNDER
I RED SLACK OR CONTROLLER IN OUT
I
I
I
I
l
l
----~~~-------------------
Fig. 23 Cabling at a SM520 Module
3.12.11 CM520 CONTACT MONITORING

MODULE
b) Connect the 2-core cable to the monitored
contact.
c) Do not make any other connections al this
stage. Fig. 25 Cabling at a S8520 Module
PAGE 24of 29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.12.13 PM520 ADDRESSABLE AC POWER b) Fit the 24V power supply unit in a
MODULE CABLING convenient position but do not apply mains
The PM500 Addressable AC Power Module may be used to
provide local power to such devices as the SM520 and c) Connect the 2-core cable to the next detector
DM520. (iffined).
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c). d) Do not make any other connections at this
stage.
LOOP 24V
IN OUT OUT
PSU NEXT LOOP

24V VESOA IN OUT
r-- -,
I I
I I
I I
I TERMINAL : I
: BLOCK I I
I
I RED BLACK I I
I I TERMINAL!
l I BLOCK I
I I I
I I RED BLACK I
l I I
!_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,
I
Fig. 26 Cabling at an Addressable AC Power Module I
I
I
3.12.14 VESOATM ASPIRATING DETECTOR Fig. 27 Cabling at a VESDATM Aspirating Detector

(E70D)/
AM521 ASPIRATING INTERFACE
3.12.16 VM520 VOICE MODULE
MODULE
• a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c).
The VESDA Aspirating Detector requires an external 24V
supply, up to two detectors may be supplied from one b) Fit the 24V power supply unit (if required) in
PM520 Addressable AC .Power Module. a convenient position but do not apply mains
a) Follow the procedure of para 3.12.1 (c)..
c) Mount the speaker(s) (if not already fitted) in
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit in a
the required position(s).
convenient position but do not apply mains
power or tit batteries. d) Mount the message switch(es) (if not already
fitted in the required position(s).
c) Connect the 2-corc cable to the next detector
(if titted). e) Connect the 2-core cable to the speaker
stage. f) Connect the 2-core cable(s) to the message
switch circuit(s).
3.12.15 VESDA® LaserPLUS™ ASPIRATING g) Do not make any other connections at this
stage.
DETECTOR/
AM921 ASPIRATING INTERFACE
MODULE
The VESOA® LaserPUJSTM Detector requires an external
24 V supply, up to two dc·tectors may be supplied from one
PM520 Addressable AC Power Module.
a) Follow the procedure of para 3.12. l(c)..

R"gist.,rod Orl",ct>: 19-11 Dt>nmark Strttt, Wokingham. Berkii RG40 ZQE
A 'tl/C:U INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
3.12-18 SU521 ADDRESSABLE SHOP

UPTO3
EXTERNAL PSU MESSAGE LOOP INTERFACE UNIT
SPEAKERS 24V IN OUT
SWITCHES
b) Connect the 2-core cable to the external
circuit(s) as required.
r ---1
I
c) Connect the 2-core cable to the monitored
I contact(s) as required.
I
I d) Do not make any other connections at this
I
I stage.
I
I
I
I UPT03 UPT06
I EXTERNAL EXTERNAL LOOP
I CIRCtlfTS EQUIPMENTS IN OUT
______________________________ II
Fig. 28 Cabling at a VM520 i\lodule
3.12.17 Pl521 ADDRESSABLE PLANT r I

INTERFACE UNIT I I
I I
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c). I I
I I
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit (if required) in I I
I I
a convenient position but do not apply mains I
power or fit batteries. I
I I
I I
c) Connect the 2-core cable to the external I I
circuit(s) as required. I I
I I
d) Connect the 2-core cable to the monitored I I
contact(s) as required. I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - J
Fig. 30 Cabling at a SU52 l Module

stage.
UPTO3 UPTO 6
PSU EXTERNAL EXTERNAL LOOP 3.12.19 SO520 ADDRESSABLE SMOKE
24V CIRCUllS EQUIPMENTS IN OUT DAMPER INTERFACE
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12. l (c).
b) Fit the 24V power supply unit (if required) in
---1
l
I
I c) Connect the 2-core cable to the external
I circuit(s) as required.
I
I d) Connect the 2-core cable to the smoke
I damper circuit.
I
I e) Do not make any other connections at this
I
I stage.
I
I
I
-----------------------------
Fig. 29 Cabling at a Pl521 Module
PAGE 26 of 29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATlON: 15A-02-I1
b) Run a 2-core cable to the controller or a

LOOP CM520 as required.
PSU EXTERNAL SMOKE
24V CIRCUIT DAMPER IN OUT
c) Do not make any other connections at this
stage.
PSU CONTROLLER
24V ORCMS20
____________________________ J
Fig. 31 Cabling at a SD520 Interface
3.12.20 LPS520 LINE POWERED SOUNDER

MODULE L _________ J
a) Follow the procedure in para 3.12.1 (c). Fig. 33 Cabling at a Tl\1520 Module
b> Mount the soundcr(s) (ifnot already fitted) in
the required position(s).
c> Connect the 2-core cable to the sounder
circuit. ensuring correct polarity.
stage.
LOOP
SOUNDER
CIRCUIT IN OllT
r-- ----- ---,

I I
l I
I I
I I
I .----.r-----+------>r---',._____, l
I l
I I
I I
I --+----+--+--+--' I
I l
I l
l I
I I
I __________________ !
Fig. 32 Cabling at a LPS520 Module
3.12.21 TM520 TIMER MODULE

a) Fit the 24V power supply unit (if required) in
power or fit batleries.

Regislerro Office: 19·21 Oenmark Street, Wokingham, lkrks RG40 2QE
A tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD .. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-I1
04 11/99
4. INSULATION AND CIRCUIT c) Measure the loop inductance (at !kHz).

A measured loop inductance of less than
TESTS 1.SmH is acceptable.
4.1 INSULATION TESTS d) Measure the loop capacitance (at I kHz).
A measured loop capacitance of less than
WARNING: O.SµF is acceptable.
BEFORE USING A HIGHNOLTAGE Note: Steps (c) and (d) are only necessary when
INSULATION TESTER, SUCH AS A testing addressable circuits.
MEGGER, ENSURE THAT NO DEVICES ARE
FITTED TO THE CIRCUIT UNDER TEST.
e) If any faults are found or unacceptable
readings obtained, check the wiring and
repair as necessary.
For each cable installed, carry out high-voltage insulation
and resistance checks as described below, firstly between O Repeat steps (a) to (e) as necessary until the
each pair of conductors and secondly between each installation has been proved satisfactory and
conductor and earth. A SOOY insulation tester should be all faults have been eliminated.
used. g) Remove the shorting wires titted for the
a) Check that the insulation resistance exceeds above checks.
1M ohm, (It is recommended that the reading h) Leave a copy of the readings obtained in the
obtained should be 30M ·ohm or greater for controller housing.
MICC. The MINERVA will operate with a
cable insulation resistance of 1M ohm, but if
a reading of less than 30M ohm is obtained 5. FINISHING OFF
then re-check the cable for deterioration or
damage). a) At the controller housing(s) and at all
ancillary components, ensure that metal
b) Reverse the polarity of the tester and repeat chippings, cable snippets, etc., are cleared
the check. away.
c) Locate and rectify any faults found. If b) At each device or other sensor, refit the cover
necessary, renew any low-insulation cable. plate with the screws provided (where
d) Record the final readings obtained and lea\·e applicable).
a copy of the records inside the controller c) Ensure that copies of the cable routing
housing. diagrams and copies of ALL circuit and
insulation tests are left in the controller
4.2 CIRCUIT TESTS housing.
ln order for the system to function correctly, the values of the

resistance, inductance and capacitance of the addressable
circuits MUST be lower than those outlined in para 2.3.
The resistance of all other circuits must be sufficiently low
to limit the voltage drop to I volt at the maximum
anticipated current consumption.
In order to check these parameters, an LCR meter should be
used, as follows:
a) Short circuit each conductor pair in tum at
one end of the circuit.
b) Measure the loop resistance. A measured
loop resistance of less than 75 ohm is
acceptable for each addressable
circuits. The resistance for other circuits
should be low enough to prevent a voltage
drop greater than that described above.
PAGE 28 of29
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
6. ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS
05A-02-Dl LOW VOLTAGE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS - GENERAL DESIGN INFORMATION
. 05A-02-Il
05A-02-Cl
LOW VOLTAGE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS - GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION
LOW VOLTAGE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS - GENERAL COMMISSIONING INFORMATION
I0A-02-Cl 'MINERVA-80' FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
08A-02-ll 520 SERIES - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
08A-02-Cl 520 SERIES - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
26A-02-lt INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS FOR USE IN LOW VOLTAGE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS
26A-02-Dl INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS FOR USE IN LOW VOLTAGE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS
JM/jm
I 7 th November 1998
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE29 of29

Registered Omer: 19-21 Drnmark Sln,ei, Wokingllam, ~,ks RC40 ZQE

EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
DOCUMENT CONTROL NUMBER I
'MINERVA' ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE CONTROLLERS
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 3 3. CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS 12

1.1 STANDARD FEATURES 3 3.1 GENERAL 12
1.2 OPTIONAL FEATURES 3 3.2 ACCESS LEVELS 12
3.2.1 GENERAL 12
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5 3.2.2 CUSTOMER OPERATOR 12
2.1 OPERATOR'S CONTROLS ANO 3.2.3 CUSTOMER MANAGER 12
INDICATORS 5 3.2.4 ENTERING A PASSCODE 12
2.2 NORMAL OPERATION 6 3.3 FAST ACCESS CODES 12
2.2.1 INITIAL CONDITION 6 3.3.1 ENTERING FAST ACCESS
2.2.2 EVENT MONITORING 6 CODES 12
2.2.3 EVENT DISPLAY 6 3.4 MAiN MENU 14
2.3 OPERATION IN ALARM 7 3.4.1 SELECTION OF MAIN
MENU OPTIONS 14
2.3.1 SYSTEM RESPONSE 7
3.5 VIEW UNRESTORED EVENTS 14
2.3.2 SOUNDER SILENCING 7
3.5.1 SELECTION OF UNRESTORED
2.3.3 EVENT ACCEPTANCE 8
EVENTS 14
2.3.4 RESETTING THE
3.6 VIEW LOG MENU 15
CONTROLLER 8
3.6.1 SELECTION OF MENU 15
2.3.5 MULTIPLE EVENTS 9
3.6.2 NEWEST EVENT FIRST 15
2.3.6 PRE-ALARM WARNINGS 9
3.6.3 OLDEST EVENT FIRST 15
2.4 OPERATION IN FAULT
CONDITION 9 3.6.4 HIGHEST PRIORITY EVENT
FIRST 15
2.4.1 SYSTEM RESPONSE 9
3.7 VIEW SYSTEM STATUSES MENU 16
2.4.2 OPERATOR ACTION 10
3. 7 .1 SELECTION OF MENU 16
2.5 FIRE CONTROL KEYS 10
3.7.2 VIEW ZONES ALARM STATUS 16
2.5.1 GENERAL 10
3.7.3 VIEW ZONES FAULT STATUS 16
2.5.2 EVACUAfE or FIRE ALARM 10
3.7.4 VIEW ZONES ISOLATE
2.5.3 TEST 11
STATUS 17
2.6 AUXILIARY DISPLAY DEVICES 11
3.7.5 VIEW COMMON ALARM
2.6.1 GENERAL 11 STATUS 17
2.6.2 REPEATERS 11 3.7.6 VIEW COMMON FAULT
2.6.3 PRINTERS/MONITORS 11 STATUS 17
2.6.4 REMOTE: LCD REPEATERS 11 3.7.7 VIEW COMMON DISABLED
2. 7 SECTOR DISABLE [Marine Only] 11 STATUS 17
2.7.1 TM520 TIMER MODULE 11 3.8 SET CLOCK MENU 17
2.7.2 NORMAL. OPERATION 11 3.8.1 SELECTION OF MENU 17
2.7.3 _RESET 11 3.8.2 SET TIME 18
2.7.4 EXTENDING OPERATION 11 3.8.3 SET DATE 18

Ret:i•Cff'NI OfTice, 19-21 lHnmark Slrttt, \\l,,jdngbam, B«ks RC4G ZQE
A 1:qca INrERNATTONAl lTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
3.9 TEST SYSTEM MENU 18

3.9.2 WALK TEST ZONE 19
3.9.3 WALK TEST POINTS 19
3.9.4 WALK TEST SOUNDERS 20
3.10 ISOLATE MENU 20
3.10.2 ISOLATE ZONE
[SENSORS ONLY] 21
3.10.3 ISOLATE POINT
[ADDRESSABLE LOOPS
ONLY] 21
3.11 DE-ISOLATE MENU 23
3.11.2 DE-ISOLATE ZONE
[SENSORS ONLY] 23
3.11.3 DE-ISOLATE POINT
{ADDRESSABLE LOOPS
ONLY] 23
3.12 VIRTUAL FRONT PANEL {VFP] 25
3.12.1 SELECTING THE 'VFP'
OPTION 25
3.13 PRINT DATA MENU 25
3.13.2 PRINT WALK TEST POINTS
NOT TESTED/FAILED 25
3.13.3 PRINT EVENT LOG
BACKTRACK 26
4. ROUTINE CHECKS 28
4.1 GENERAL 28
4.2 DAILY CHECKS 28
4.3 WEEKLY CHECKS 28
5. RECOMMENDED SPARES 28
PAGE2of28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 STANDARD FEATURES 1.2 OPTIONAL FEATURES
The instructions given in this document are common to all In addition to the standard features described in para I. I, a
the 'MINERVA' range of fire controllers, any differences 'MINERVA' fire controller can also be:
being outlined as appropriate.
• Connected to a 'ThomNet' communications
This document is written for firmware version I 1.0. system which allows Peer-to-Peer
communications between MINERVAs.
The 'MINERVA' fire controller.
Connects to "ThomGraph', a PC based
• Displays pre-programmed diagnostic event Graphical User Interface [GUI).
messages cm the integral alphanumeric
display, with precise identification of
detectors.
• Connected to one or more serial or parallel
• Provides computer-controlled output signals printers or a monitor.
[programmable logic control mechanism].
• Connected to remote repeaters/operator's
• Provides custom programming panel[s], or mimic panels.
[configuration] for inputs and outputs on the
• Connected to a pager transmitter.
two circuits to satisfy the specific
requirements of each customer/building. • Interfaced to a monitoring station either via
the Public Switched Telephone Network
• Provides monitoring of the addressable
[PSTNJ, a direct line or a local [site] line.
circuit for open and shon circuit faults.
• Allows selected inputs and outputs to be
isolated, for example, for maintenance.
• Provides an event log of significant system
events and faults.
• Provides walk-test facilities.
• Allows monitoring of fire doors for correct
operation.
• Provides reduced zonal detection sensitivity
when the protected premises are occupied.
• Number of devices per loop,
MINERVA-8 addresses up to 99 devices.
• MINERVA-I 6E/T89 I addresses up to 198
devices,
MINERVA-80 /T890 addresses up to 990
devices,
The devices being specifically MSOO and

M600 range of analogue addressable fire
detectors and M500 range of ancillary
devices. ·
.,

Rrgiotrrfll Offi.:o; 19-21 Denmark Street, Woklngh-, Berk, RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
MINERVA MARINE FIRE CONTROLLER
8$-Sl3t~PMT4:1tN
Fig. I 'M[NERVA-T890' Controller - Front Panel Layout
A. 'FIRE' LED - RED L. 'POWER FAIL' LED - YELLOW [T890/T891

ONLY]
B. 'FIRE' LED - RED
M. NUMERIC KEYPAD
C. 'FAULT' LED - YELLOW
N. [!l!JiiKEY
D. 'DISABLED' LED - YELLOW
E. 'FIRE ZONE' LEDs - RED 0. lffl.iM-J=l--1#1 KEY
P. KEYSWITCH
F. LARGE ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
G. IM•JJ•)#l!=U§ KEY
Q. l:U;J:f-1!-1;M• KEY@#i•t-ii=I MINERVA
8/16E/80)
H. l§t•m•J!l!Jp A KEY
R. ©l•=l~Mi KEY
I. _...,..,.,,,...,.,,,.,,..,,, T KEY S. 1:):@:jj KEY
J. r.i:Jffl=Hii=t;J KEY T. 1'-1M=li=l--ii KEY
K. 'POWER ON' LED-GREEN
PAGE4 of28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS • Ht•ff •1311§ii=i key, used in data entry mode

to aid line editing by providing a backspace
The instructions given in this document are common to all and delete function. -Alternatively, used in
the ·MINERVA' range of fire controllers, any differences response to a displayed query to provide a
being outlined as appropriate. 'No/negative' response .
• SCROLL DOWN T key, used to scroll
2.1 through a display or log one entry at a time.
OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND
This key will auto-repeat [i.e. holding the
INDICATORS key down will scroll continuously].
All operating procedures are carried out using the front panel • @M;J•J•IIJ:J A key, used to scroll
controls of the fire controller. through a display or log one entry at a
The front panel ofa ·MrNERVA-T890' controller is shown time. This key will auto-repeat.
in Fig. I. • [!1!JII key, used to tenninate and exit from
The front panel of a 'MINERVA' controller or repeater the current command or display.
contains the following controls and indicators: • jt...,;..if-1fi=l*1 key, used to access a
• A two-position keyswitch, with positions system option quickly, without needing to
"nonnal', and 'enable', used to enable the use the menus. After pressing this key, a
three fire control keys: numeric code is entered, corresponding to
Either; the option required.
J=W4IIJ4ili~ @Hl:IO[M=i and ld=M=ii~

• m m.
The numeric keys to used for entering
access codes, general data, etc.
[MINERVA 8/16E/80] or:
• A four line alphanumeric LCD display, used
lill;J=t.;1f4;J®I-- Mll=ilM:fi and ld::@t=il to provide date/time and system status
messages. This is backlit to allow it to be
[T890/f89 I]
viewed under low-light conditions [the ligh!
In the 'normal' position the key may be is only operational when the key is insened
removed. and set to ·Enable'].
• In the 'enable' position the key is retained in • A green LED - ·POWER', used to indicate
the switch. the presence of system power.
• Two red LEDs - 'FIRE', used to indicate the
presence of a Fire condition.
Note: The positions of the keyswitch are not marked
on the front panel but are as follows: • A yellow LED - 'FAULT', used to indicate
the presence of a system, sensor or loop
fault.
'nonnal' - "9-o'clock"
• 'enable' - "12-o'clock" • A yellow LED - 'DISABLED', used to
indicate the disabling of a circuit/detector
[e.g. 'ISOLATE'].
• jj.tJ;.1911. .11:1 or l#O;J#f;.1!;.1;Jlf key, used • 8 red LEDs - 'FIRE ZONES', used to
to activate the sounders. [The FIRE ALARM indicate an alarm in the relevant zone,
legend is used on T890 and T89I only]. (MINERVA-SJ.
• Ml•~lfi=i key, used to silence the sounders • 16 red LEDs - 'FIRE ZONES', used to
and internal buzzer. indicate an alarm in the relevant zone,
• j:J::@t#il key, used to reset the system after [MINERVA-l6E and T891J.
an alarm or event has occurred. • 80 red LEDs - 'FIRE ZONES', used to
indicate an alarm in the relevant zone.
• lf-tlla•:::f,..i• key, used to test that the front [MINERVA-80 and T890}.
panel indicators and internal buzzer are
working correctly. • A yellow LED - 'POWER FAIL', used to
indicate the loss of mains power, [T890 and
• •·•:::f,..1Uilii=i~ key, used in data entry mode T891 only].
to terminate a list of numeric characters and
thus enter a command into the
controller. Alternatively, used in query
mode to provide a 'Yes/positive' response.

R.-gist~l'N O~; 19-21 Dmmark&tttd, Wokingham, 8ttks RG40 lQE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
2.2 NORMAL OPERATION The events are stored in chronological order with unaccepted
events are marked as outstanding. The event log may hold
2.2.1 INITIAL CONDITION up to 550-events; in the unlikely occurrence of the log filling
At initial power-up, the display will show the following: up, the lowest priority events will be lost. If the log then fills
up with high priority events, the newest events will not be
Minerva 8 stored until space is made available by the clearing
initialising ... [acceptance] of existing events.
until the power-up sequence is completed.

2.2.3 EVENT DISPLAY
In normal operating conditions {i.e. when there are no events
present in the system], the display will show the date and The contents of the event log may be displayed either
time.e.g.: chronologically or by priority. The priority order is as
follows:
23 Jan 90 22:17:02
l) First FULL ALARM or ALERT receivea. ·
Time is shown in the format hour:minute:seconds. The 2) All other FULL ALARMS or ALERTS
clock has automatic leap-year correction until the year 2040. received since last reset.
3) First FAULT received.
2.2.2 EVENT MONITORING 4) All other FAULTS received since last reset.
The term 'event' is used to describe a change in system 5) First WARNING received.
status that must be acknowledged and/or generates an 6) All other WARNINGS received since last
output. reset.
Examples of events include:
• Mains failure
• Detection of a fire condition
• Operation on=W4i!M1=1 t liliJ:f+1 1 4ilM
All events trigger a response, the classification of which
depends on the event type and will be one of the following:
• Full Alarm [EVACUATE), or
[FIRE ALARM]
• ALERT
• FAULT
• PRE-ALARM WARNING
• General event
When an event occurs, it is stored in the event log. The

contents of this log may be displayed in two formats:
• Unaccepted events only, and,
• All events in chronological order of
occurrence.
PAGE6of28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
2.3 OPERATION IN ALARM The message will continue to be displayed as shown until the
intervention of an operator.
2.3.1 SYSTEM RESPONSE.
When a fire condition is detected, the system will respond as
follows:
2.3.2 SOUNDER SILENCING
a) The internal buzzer will sound in a When a FIRE ALARM is received, investigate the cause of
continuous tone. the alarm. Once the cause of the alarm has been dctennined
and all appropriate action has been taken, silence the
b) Both red 'FIRE' LEDs will light. sounders as follows:
c) The appropriate! 'FIRE ZONE" LED will a) Insert the key into the front panel keyswitch
flash. · and tum it clockwise to the 'enable' position.
d) · For MINERVA 8, 16, and 80 controllers. the
sounders, and any other configured outputs
b) Press Ml•l=l~f!J#i.
will be activated.
e) The LCD will display a message in the
fonnat; WARNING:
FlREALARM WHEN SEARCHING AN AREA FOR THE SOURCE

Main Workshop OF A FIRE ALARM SIGNAL, WHERE A FIRE
Welding Area ALARM HAS BEEN INITIATED BY A 'CARBON
MONOXIDE' FIRE DETECTOR, IT MUST BE
Zone 4 A48 001
REMEMBERED THAT A CARBON MONOXIDE
DETECTOR MAY GENERATE AN ALARM BEFORE
f) For 'T890', and 'T89 I ' controllers, the OTHER FIRE INDICATORS (SUCH AS SMOKE) ARE
sounders, and any other configured outputs PRESENT.
wi II be activated. If the alarm is not
accepted with:in the pro~rammed delay THIS OCCURS MOST NOTABLY IN DEEP SEATED
period by pressing the @Jil3~@:f key, all FIRES IN DENSELY PACKED MATERIALS, AREAS
other sounders will be activated. WHERE ARES MAY OCCUR IN CUPBOARDS AND
STOREROOMS REMOTE FROM DETECTORS, AND
g) The LCD will display a message in the WHERE SMOKE IMPERVIOUS BARRIERS EXIST
format: BETWEEN THE SEAT OF THE FIRE AND THE
FIRE ALARM DETECTOR (SUCH AS WITHIN WALL
CAVITIES). THESE FACTORS SHOULD BE
No4 Deck
CONSIDERED CAREFULLY BEFORE DECLARING
Cabin 4028 SAFE ANY AREA WHERE A CARBON MONOXIDE
Zone 4 A48 001 FIRE DETECTOR HAS RAISED AN ALARM.
The message format is as follows:

The system will respond as follows:
The top line shows the type ofalann.
i) The internal buzzer will change to a
The second line shows the zone intermittent, pulsing tone.
identification message [defined at ii) The appropriate 'FIRE ZONE' LED will
configuration]. light continuously.
The third line :shows· a description of the iii) The sounders will be silenced.
point in alarm.
iv) All other outputs will remain activated.
The bottom line: shows the zone, loop and v) The LCD display will remain showing the
point number for the device in alarm, type of alarm and the full zone
followed by the number of outstanding identification.
events [including the current one), in this
example 00 I.
Note: By llessinl either the@!J;t•J•••l@ A

or JJ.t•)Ji•X•Wtfl T keys, the system
status may be viewed.

R~isC4'ttd Ofl",tt: 19--Z( ~amork Strcct., Woldn:ham, krk1 RG40 2QE
A tqco /NffRNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
2.3.3 EVENT ACCEPTANCE 3} If the displayed event is not accepted within

approximately 2 minutes, the LCD reverts to
Once the cause of the alarm has been dealt with and the llJe four-line alarm message originally
·sounders have been silenced, the event[s] should be displayed.
accepted.
Proceed as fol lows: d) Press [!l!li]. The display will now revert to
a) Key in your &asscode [see section 3) and the date/time reading [unless there are
press •·4:fflj::( 11=1:l further events to accept].
The LCD will display: e) Tum the key anti-cltXkwise to the 'nonnal'
position.
Do you want to
accept events?
2.3.4 RESETTING THE CONTROLLER
b) Press f441HUii=l;l again. Note:
The LCD will display a message in the 1) The controller cannot be reset until the
format: sounders have been silenced.
FIRE ALARM 2) The controller should also NOT be reset until

Main Workshop the source of the alarm has been determined
by the Fire Brigade or the cause otherwise
Zone 4 A48 001 found (and the condition removed].
accept (YIN)?
Once the notes above have been observed, press 1;J%f#H.

or, for ·TS90' and 'T89 l' versions: The system will respond as follows:
FIRE ALARM a) The LCD will display:
No 4 Deck
Resetting ...
Zone 4 A48 001
countdown 30
accept (YIN)?
b) The counter will count down to zero [the
A flashing black square [the cursor] draws attention to the length of the count is indicated by the
fact 1ha1 an operator entry is required. number on the LCD and is system-
configurable], the controller will reset and
the LCD will di.splay:
Note: The top line shows the type of alarm.
The second line shows the zone identification reset completed
message, which may be a point string if
configured.
The third line now shows the zone, loop and Note: During the reset sequence, any outputs are left
point number for the device in alarm, followed in their activated state and only de-activated at
by the number of outstanding alarms, as the end of the sequence, once all inputs have
before, but the bottom line changes to a query been proved clear.
message which requires an operator response.
c) If there are no faults or other events present

c) Press h41J=IHi:f;l to accept the event. in the system, the LCD will revert to the
date/time display.
The LCD will display:
ennt accepted
Nole:
1) If there had originally been a fault present
Note: [which would have been overridden by the
1) If the event dilled is NOT to be accepted, alarm], the controller will now respond as in a
press Ht•1'•l=l~_L and the display will show fault condition, {see section 2.4].
the next event [if any]. 2} Fault indications may occur up to 1 minute after
2) Pressingl§Ie:l:t•J••I)~ A or SCROLL DOWN a reset.
T will move the display through alf the out-
standing [unaccepted] events.
PAGES of28
i~ MINERVA
If, EQUIPMENT:
2.3.5 MULTIPLE EVENTS 2.3.6 PRE-ALARM WARNINGS

In the 'MINERVA' controller, alarms have priority over If the LCD shows a message including a -warning"
faults. If a fault is present in the system when a Fire alarm is indication, a pre-alarm condition has been detected by the
received, the system will n:spond as follows: controller. This may be indicated for example, if a detector
identifies a build-up of smoke or heat that might result from a
a) The 'FAULT' LED will go out.
fire, but the alarm threshold has not yet been reached. The
b) The system will I hen respond to the alarm as internal buzzer will sound but the sounders and visual fire
described in section 2.3. indicators will remain inactive at this stage. Proceed as
follows:
Once the alann has been cleared, as described above, the
system will respond to the fault. a) Accept the event, as described in section
2.3.3, noting the location of the event.
If, when in alann condition, a fault is received, the system will
not respond to it until the alarm has been cleared. b) Initiate action to deal with the condition
indicated, taking care to determine if the
If, when in alarm condition, a second alarm is received, the
warning was initiated by a fire condition or by
system response is dependent on the nature and source of the
a system fau It.
second alarm as follows:
a) If the sounders have NOT been silenced, the
following will occur: If the detector subsequently shows an alann condition, an
alarm will be generated, regardless of whether the pre-alarm
i) The appropriate 'FIRE ZONE' LED will
warning was accepted.
flash.
ii) The internal buzzer will continue to sound
without interruption. 2.4 OPERATION IN FAULT CONDITION
iii) The LCD will continue to display the alarm
2.4.1 SYSTEM RESPONSE
message for the FIRST alann.
iv) The "outstanding events" count will be When a Fault condition is detected, the system will respond
incremented. as follows:
b) If the sounders HAVE been silenced and the a) The internal buzzer will sound in a continuous
alarm is in the SAME zone as the first alarm, tone.
the following will occur, b) The yellow 'FAULT' LED will light.
i) The ..outstanding events" count will be c) The LCD will display a message m the
incremented. following format:
ii} The sounders will NOT be re-operated.
NO RESPONSE
Main Workshop
Note: If the second alarm is an 'EVACUATE' or 'FIRE Welding Area
ALARM', the sounders and internal buzzer will Zone 6 A 98 001
be re-operated and the appropriate 'FIRE
ZONE' LED will flash.
The message fonnat is as follows:
The top line will indicate the type of fault. The
c) If the sounders HAVE been silenced, and the second line will show the zone identification
alarm is in a DIFFERENT zone co the first message.
alarm, the following will occur. The third line shows a descriptive message
i) The appropriaite 'FIRE ZONE' LED will relevant to the point in fault
flash. The bottom line shows the zone and point
number of the device in fault, followed by the
ii) The internal buzzer will sound number of outstanding events.
continuous) y.
iii) The sounders will be re-operated.
iv) The "outstanding events" count will be Note: ~ ~ressint. either the f§M:!•)•11):l A or
incremented. ~-C•1•••JWW T keys, the system statuses
may be viewed.
I.
I
The message will continue to be displayed as shown·until the
intervention of an operator.
R~isl<~ Om«: 19-11 o,,..,,ark S!r«i, Wokini:h•m. B<d,s RG40 2Q£
A 1:lfC:0 INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
·2.4.2 OPERATOR ACTION Note:

When a Fault condition occurs, proceed as follows: 1) If the event dis,ayed is NOT to be accepted,
a) Tum the key in the keyswitch clockwise to
press l~l•D•l::11 1:1 and the display will show
the next event [if any].
the 'enable' position.
2) Pressing1,."@;t•1•1QJ$ .._ or SCROLL DOWN
b) Press Ml!=iftM#i. T will move the display through all the out-
The internal buzzer will now be silenced but standing [unaccepted] events.
the LED and LCD display will continue to 3) If the event is not accepted within
operate as described above. approximately 2 minutes, the display reverts to
c) Investigate and cure the source of the fault. that in section 2.4.1.
h) Tum the key anti-clockwise to the 'nonnal'

Note: If the fault cannot be cured, contact your position.
supplier and arrange for a service visit.
2.5 FIRE CONTROL KEYS

Once the fault has been cured, proceed as follows: 2.5.1 GENERAL
d) Key in your passcode [see section 3] and
There are four fire control keys on the front panel of the
press •1::f.iJ=lfli=li1- 'MJNERVA', namely:
The LCD will display:
• l=W4tJ!J.1j::1. or l@jij=f-,W4tJMI
Do you want to
accept events?
• @111:fl[eJ=i.
• ld:@t=il and~
• ii3ii.
e) Press f4¥fJ::jfH::t:~ a.gain.
The LCD will display a message in the Note: The first three of these keys are only active
fomtat: when the keyswitch is in the 'enable' position.
NO RESPONSE
Main Workshop The functions of@11•::ff@:1 and - have already
Zone 4 A48 001 been described. The functions ofl • I • i:I
and iE§i
accept (YIN)? are described in the following paragraphs.
A flashing cursor draws attention to the fact 2.5.2 EVACUATE or FIRE ALARM
that an operator input is requiied. Once enabled by the keyswitch, pressing l:lfkleIIF!.U::I or
liliJ::f4'4iJ51 will cause the following:
Note: The top line shows the type of fault. a) The internal buzzer will sound continuously.
The second line shows the zone identification b) The red "FIRE' LEDs will light.
message.
The third line shows the zone, loop, and point c) The sounders and any other configured
number for the device in fault, followed by the outputs will be activated.
number of outstanding events, as before, but d) The LCD will display the following mes-
the bottom line shows query message which sage:
requires an operator response.
FIRE EVACUATE
System Zone 0
f) Press n:::l§JJ::jfll:::f;~ to accept the event. Non-Addressable Point
The LCD will display: LBO SI 001
Event accepted Note:

1) The bottom line shows the absolute •tem ad-
g) Press C!l!Jii. The display will now revert to dress of the 14¾1i!Mi=Ckey orj~;J7it4iJfti.
the date/time reading {unless there are key followed by the number o outstanding
further events to accept]. events. ·
PAGE 10 of28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
2) The default Evacuate button message is will be shown on the displays of all other panels
shown. The text of this may be changed during on the system and access is denied to any
system configurc1tion. other operator, except to view events. A brief
description of the function being performed at
3) Br.l~ressi~I either the J§lij;t•l•••J:1 .A. or the controller in use is also displayed on the
@Ii;)J1l•)WJII T keys, the system status others.
may be viewed.
2.6.3 PRINTERS/MONITORS
The message will be displayed and the outputs continue to
Refer to the manual supplied with the printer or monitor for
operate until the system is silenced and reset as described in
operating instructions.
sections 2.3.2 to 2.3.4.
2.6.4 REMOTE LCD REPEATERS

2.5.3 TEST
Refer to the Remote LCD Repeater documentation
Pressing BJ causes all the LEDs and the internal buzzer [Publication 0SA-03-O1).
to be operated for a few seconds. If the system includes
repeater panels, only the panel containing the iissi) key
operated is activated. 2. 7 SECTOR DISABLE [Marine Only]
2.7.1 TM520 TIMER MODULE
Note: A TM520 Timer Module allows selected detectors to be
1) This key is always active, irrespective of the disabled for a predetermined time e.g. ferry car decks/
position of the keyswitch. loading bays whilst loading/unloading is in progress.
2) Multiple presses of this key will cause the test
to be carried out repeatedly. 2.7.2 NORMAL OPERATION
To operate the TM520, insert the key [see Fig. 2} and tum
clockwise. The yellow TIMING LED will flash I second
2.6 AUXILIARY DISPLAY DEVICES ON I second OFF. At the end of the deactivation period, a
2.6.1 GENERAL safety timeout period of S minutes is initiated. The red
TIMEOUT LED will light, the yellow TIMING LED will
Depending on the configuration of the system, there may be continue to flash and an internal buzzer will sound
one or more auxiliary display devices fitted. These devices synchronously with the TIMING LED. At the end of the
may be of the following types: safety timeout period the TMS20 will reset.
• Repeaters
2.7.3 RESET
• Printers/monitors
• Remote LCD repeaters The TM520 may be reset at any time during operation by
tuming the TIMER OFF key to the OFF position.
The functions of and operating instructions for these devices

are given in the following paragraphs. 2.7.4 EXTENDING OPERATION
The time period may be extended by turning the RESET key
2.6.2 REPEATERS to the OFF position and then to the ON position within
3 seconds. The original time period will then start again.
A repeater al lows the controller to be operated from a remote
location and provides remote indications of the state of the
controller. The front panel of the repeater is identical to that
of the controller [see Fig. l] and all controller operations
RED LED---- _
may be perfonned at the repeater panel. TM520
---V TIME OUT
YELLOW LEO--..O TIMING
Note: If an operator has gained access to the @ @

controller functions by entering a passcode at TIMER OFF~
either the controller or a repeater, the
message:
Remote Lock
Fig. 2 TM520 Timer Module - Front Cover
Rezisterrd Offoc:e: 19-Z I Denmark Strwt, Woklngluun, Bttks RG40 ZQE
A t:qcu /NT'ERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
1 _ .- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ·
MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
3. CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Isolate/de-isolate points

Isolate/de-isolate zone
3.1 GENERAL [sensors only}
Isolate/de-isolate point
The 'MINERVA' fire controller has a large number ofbuilt- (address loop only]
in functions. These functions allow system parameters to be Open VFP
viewed and changed. Print data
As the functions allow access to system parameters, it is Walk test multi input point
necessary to restrict the use of these functions to authorised
staff. This is achieved by the use of passcodes. Each
controller may have up to 27 passcodes which afford access 3.2.4 ENTERING A PASSCODE
to particular functions .. In order to gain access to the
To enter a passcode proceed as follows:
controller functions, the appropriate passcode must be
entered via the front panel keypad. The function is then a) Check the LCD is displaying the date and
selected from the sequence of menus presented. time.
b) Enter your 4-digit passcode.
[The display changes from date and time
Note:
to: Passcode : and an asterisk [*I is
1) Pressing [!1!1ii at any time w17I return to the displayed as each digit is entered}.
immediately preceding menu step or function.
c) Press •·4:@J:HH#t;t and the Main Menu is
2) If a menu option does not appear on your displayed. To access the menu options refer
display, then you have an earlier version of to section 3.4.
firmware.
3.3 FAST ACCESS CODES

3.2 ACCESS LEVELS
The controller's built-in functions may be accessed by
3.2.1 GENERAL entering Fast Access Codes.
The access levels available are as follows: Table I lists the all Fast Access Codes for a Minerva fire
controller. The codes for each function are listed in the
• Customer Operator appropriate paragraphs.
• Customer Manager
3.3.1 ENTERING FAST ACCESS CODES

These access levels are described in the following
paragraphs. The functions are described in section 3.3. In order to avoid repetition, however, the general procedure
for entering a Fast Access Code is described as follows:
a) Enter your passcode.
3.2.2 CUSTOMER OPERATOR
b) Pres~ , ...4:f..1J1Hl=!i
Number per system: 25
Passcode length: 4 digits c) Press FAST ACCESS
Functions available: Accept events d) Enter the appropriate 4-digit number and
View system statuses
press i'il:f.."'l:lfll:li•- (access will now be
View unrestored events afforded to the function requested).
e) Pres.c l...4:f.."'1=!111:U to confirm selection.
3.2.3 CUSTOMER MANAGER
Number per system: 2 Note: Pressing all at any time. will return to the
Passcode length: 4 digits next function [or menu step] backwards in the
Functions available: All of Customer Operator system hierarchy.
View the log
Set the clock
Test system
Walk test zone
Walk test sounders
PAGE 12 of28
!
r EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
I. PUBLICATION: 15A-02-O1
FAST ACCESS CUSTOMER CUSTOMER

MENU
CODE OPERATOR MANAGER
Do you want to accept events? 0001 .,. .,,
View unrcstored Events? 0009 .,, .,,
Do you want to view the log? 0010 .,.
Oldest event first? 0011 .,,
Newes! event first? 0012 .,,
High.est priority event first? 0013 .,.
Do you want to set the dock? 0020 .,,
Do you want to gt the time"! 0021 .,,
Do you wam lo set the date? 0022 .,,
Do you want to test system'! 0030 .,,
Do you wam 10 walk test zou~?
-----------
0035
--· . ·--~-
.,,
Walk test sounders? (Not Marin<!I 0036 .,,
D,, you wanl 10 isola1e poin!S'! 0040 .,,
~---·-
1,.._,1a1e zone·! (SENSORS ONL YI
-·
00-11 .,,
1$4.llate point? (ADDRESS LOOP ONL YI 00-13 .,.
Do you wan1 to de-isola1e poims'.' 0050 .,,
De-i.olate zone'! (SENSORS ONLY) 0051 .,,
De-i,ofa1e poin1'.' (ADDRESS LOOP ONLY) 0053 .,,
Open VFP? 0070 .,.
Do you want to print data? 0080 .,.
Print poin1s untested/failed'.' 0083 .,,
Print ~-e~1 log backtrack'! 0085 .,,
View system statuses'.' 0100 .,. .,.
View system :zones alann status? OIOI .,. .,,
View system :zones fault status? 0102 .,. .,,
View system :zones isolated status? 0103 .,, .,,
View system common alann status? 0104 .,. .,,
View system common fault status? 0l05 .,, .,.
View system common disabled status'! 0106 .,. .,,
Do you want to walk test multi input point? IOJO .,.
Table. I Access Levels, Fast Access Codes and Menu Options

Registued Oflico: 19--21 O.,nmartr. StrNt, Wokiagham. Berks RG40 2QE
i. A tqca fNrERNAT/ONAJ.. LTD. COMPANY
I
I
1-
MINERVA
15A-02-01
04 11/99
3.4 MAIN MENU 3.4.1 SELECTION OF MAIN MENU

OPTIONS
When the system is in quiescent mode [i.e. displaying the date
and time), entering a passcode affords the user access to the To select the option required, either:
Main Menu. The menu structure is shown diagramatically in
I) Move through the ~d!II the
Fig. 3.
stm1ijk~s. Press
when the required option is displayed, or.
T
2) enter the Fast Access Code for the required

... option [see Table I], using the procedure
Unrostored Evonts described in section 3.3.1.
Men"
Nonr
Log Menu
3.5 VIEW UNRESTORED EVENTS
... No,...,.
y An unrestored event is an event logged when the system, or
St•tusMenu
a device in the system, is not in its nonnal state.
... Nor..,.
If this abnormal state has not been corrected, [superseded by
Clock Menu
a nonnal event] then the event is said to be "Unrestored", and
... Nor•
y
will be displayed in the unrestored events log. An unrcstored
event may, or may not, have been accepted.
Te-sl Menu
... NorT
y
When selected, this option will display any Unrestored
events present in the system in chronological order of their
Isolate Mc,niu
occurrence.
... NorY
y
Oe--Jsorate men-u
3.5.1 SELECTION OF UNRESTOREO
... Nor..-
y
EVENTS
... Nor..,.
y
VF.Pff'Ml!nu I) Either select the 'View Log' option from the
Main Menu, or enter Fast Access Code 0009.
Pr•nl Menu
2) An Unrestored event is displayed in the
... Nor ....
following fonnat:
PRINTER OFFLINE
System Zone
Fig. 3 'MINERVA' Controller Main Menu 12:00:16 28 Jan
Zn 0400 LB00 RO4
Note: Menu options marked • are only available at

Customer Manager access level and are not 3) Press SCROLL DOWN T to move
seen at Customer Operator access level. through the log forwards.
Menu option marked # is available with
networked version only. 4) Press f§tet;J•1•••)@ A to move through
the log backwards. When either the
Each of these options leads to further menus which are beginning OR end of the log is reached, the
described in the following paragraphs. display will show:
Endoflog!
Note: If there are any unaccepted events [i.e. alarms
or faults] present in the system, these should be
accepted before the Main Menus accessed. It is and the internal buzzer will beep twice.
possible, however. to access any menu step If there are no Unrestored events in the log
directly by means of the Fast Access the display will show:
Codes. However, the user will always be drawn
to the "Accept Events" menu step if he attempts No Events in log!
to quit while there are still unaccepted events
outstanding.
PAGE 14 of 28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.6 VIEW LOG MENU -3.6.3 OLDEST EVENT FIRST

3.6.1 SELECTION OF MENU .When this option is selected, the contents of the Event Log
I) Either select the 'View Log' option from the will be displayed in chronological order of the occurrence of
Main Menu. The menu shown in Fig. 4 will the events.
be displayed. The menu options are selected I) Either select the option from the View Log
as described in section 3.4. l. or, menu, or enter Fast Access Code 0011.
2) enter Fast Access Code 00 IO. Entry of Fast
Access Codes iis described in section 3.3.1.
The events are displayed as described in section 3.6.2.
2) Press Y to move
Ooya11wa111I0 through the log forwards.
Vi&WU,elc9?
y
. 3) Press l§ti;J•l••'1=1 A to move through
the log backwards.
When either the beginning OR end of the log is reached, the
LO<;I Oisplay
display will show:
End oflog !
Hiottest pricirity V
even1 firs1l?
log Oisplay
NorY
and the internal buzzer will beep twice.
View System
Statuses? 4) Press [!1!lii to ex.it the function.
Fig. 4 'MINERVA' Controller - View Log Menu
3.6.4 HIGHEST PRIORITY EVENT FIRST
When this option is selected, the contents of the event log
3.6.2 NEWEST EVENT FIRST
will be displayed in priority order as follows:
When this option is selected, the contents of the Event Log • FIRE [EVACUATE]
will be displayed in reverse chronological order of the
occurrence of the events. • FlRE [ALERT]
I) Either select th<: option from the View Log • WARNlNGS
menu, or enter Fast Access Code 0012.
• FAULTS [SYSTEM]
• FAULTS [ADDRESSABLE POINTS]
The events are displayed in the following fonnat: • FAULTS [CLEAR)
SYSTEM RESTART
• RESET/SILENCE
Logical Zone 0
12:00:16 2-8 Jan • PRINTER OFF LINE
SUP LBO S2
To enter the Highest Priority Event First option:
I) Either select the option from the View Log
Note: The bottom line of the display shows the
absolute system address of the source of the
event.
The events are displayed as described in section 3.6.2.
2) Press Y to move
2) Press SCROLL DOWN y to move
through the log forwards.
through the log forwards.
3) Press i§Jtl;l•Pl•••il A to move through
3) Press (§ltJ;(•)I.IJil A to move through the log backwards.
the log backwards. When either the
beginning OR end of the log is reached, the
controller will respond as in section 3.5.1. When either the beginning OR end of the Jog is reached, the
controller will respond as in section 3.5. I.
4) Press l!1!Jii to exit the function.
4) Press [!1!JD to exit the function,

1«1,ist~r«I Offoa.: 19-21 lkamark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 ZQE
A 1:qc:a INrERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
3.7 VIEW SYSTEM STATUSES MENU The display for-an 8-zone controller is in the following
format:
3.7.1 SELECTION OF MENU
Zones Alarm St.
I) Either select the 'View System Statuses' op- 1-8 0100 0000
tion from the Main Menu. The menu shown
in Fig. S will be displayed. The menu op-
tions are selected as described in section The display for a 16-zone controller is in the following
3.4.1,or, format:
2) enter Fast Access Code 0100. Entry of Fast Zones Alarm St.
Access Codes is described in section 3.3.1. 1- 8 0100 0000
9- 16 0000 0000
vi-ay&lem
Statusa?
... y
y
The display for an BO-zone controller is in the same fonnat
as that for a 16-zone. Pressing T will
Status Display
bring up the display for the next sixteen zones as follows:
... NO<Y
y
Zones Alarm St•
Statuo Display
17-24 0000 0000
.... Nor..,. 25- 32 0000 0000
y
Slot~& Display
... NorY
Use f§t•t:J'.•J•UJ:I Ao. or SCROLL DOWN T to select
si,,tus Display the displays for the remaining zones.
.... Nor..,.
For each display a 'I' indicates that a zone IS in alarm, a 'O'
Slat us Display indicates that it is not. Thus, for the example given, zone 2
...
Viewsyst..,. Y
is in alarm .
Pressing [!l!]ij moves to the option described in
Slalus Display
Common Oise. St? section 3.7.3.
Nor,..
Doyoqwar,,110
set the clock?
3.7.3 VIEW ZONES FAULT STATUS
Fig. 5 'MINERVA' Controller - View System When this option is selected, the Fault/Clear status of each
Statuses Menu zone may be viewed.
Either select the option from the View
System Statuses menu, or enter Fast Access
Note: Code 0102.
1) The Zonal Fault and Zonal Isolate displays are
likely to be the most useful. The other displays The display is in the followi_ng format:
are described here for completeness.
Zones Fault St.
2) The statuses may also be checked when the
controller is in the quiescent state [i.e. l- 8 0000 1000
displaying date and time] by using the scroll up
/down keys.
A 'I' indicates that a zone IS in fault, a 'O' indicates that it
is not. Thus, for the example given, zone 5 is in fault.
3.7.2 VIEW ZONES ALARM STATUS Pressing [!1Dii moves on to the option described in section
3.7.4.
When this option is selected, the Alann/Clear status of each
zone may be viewed.
Either select the option from the View
System Statuses menu, or enter Fast Access
Code 0101.
PAGE 16 of28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.7.4 VIEW ZONES ISOLATE STATUS The display is in the following format:
When this option is selected, the Isolated/De-isolated status . Common Fault St.
of each of the zones may be viewed. 0
Either select the option from the View System
Statuses menu, or enter Fast Access Code
0103. A 'I' indicates a that Common Fault exists, a 'O' indicates
that it does not.
The display for an 8-zone controller is in the following

Pressing ml will move on to the option described in
section 3.7.7.
format:
Zones lsol.. St.
1- 8 1000 0000 3.7.7 VIEW COMMON DISABLED STATUS
When this option is selected, the Common Disabled status of
The displays for a 16-zone, or 80-zone controller is in a the system may be viewed.
format similar to those shown for View Zones Alarm Status Either select 1he option from the View
[see para. 3.7.2} and are accessed in the same manner. System Statuses menu, or enter Fast Access
Code0I06.
For each display a 'I' indkates that a zone [or a point in the
zone] IS isolated, a 'O' indlicates that it is no!. Thus, for the The display is in the following fonnat:
example given, all [or part] of zone I is isolated.
Common Disa. St.
Pressing C!l!Jii will move on to the option described in 0
section 3. 7.5.
A ·1 • indicates that a Common Disabled condition exists
[i.e. a point is isolated or a function is disabled), a 'O'
3.7.5 VIEW COMMON ALARM STATUS
indicates that it does not.
When this option is select,ed, the Common Alarm status of Pressing [!g will move on to the option described in:
the system may be viewed.
section 3.8 if Customer Manager,
Statuses menu, or enter Fast Access Code or section 3.9 if Customer Operator
0104.
3.8 SET CLOCK MENU
The display is in the following format: 3.8.1 . SELECTION OF MENU
Common Alarm SL I) Either select the 'Set Clock' option from the
0 Main Menu. The menu shown in Fig. 6 will
be displayed. The menu options are selected
as described in section 3.4.1, or,
A ' I ' indicates that a Common Alarm exists, a ·o· indicates 2) enter Fast Access Code 0020. Entry of Fast
that it docs not.
Access Codes is described in section 3.3.1.
Pressing [i1!lii will mov1~ on to the option described in
section 3. 7.6.
3.7.6 VIEW COMMON FAULT STATUS

When this option is selected, the Common Fault status of the
...
0o,.....wamta
Oateset1.ing
system may be viewed. ..Cthc ...... ?
Na,..-
Statuses menu, or enter Fast Access Code
0105.
Fig. 6 'MINERVA' Controller - Set Clock Menu
© 1999 Tyco Electronic: Product Group PAGE 17 of28

Rq:ister«I Office: 19-21 Denmarl<Srr..,1, WokiAgham, Berks RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
3.8.2 SET TIME 3) · Enter the number corresponding to the required

da9: from the following table and press
When this option is selected, the system time may be set.
,. =N#lfii=t:1-
l) Either select the option from the 'Set Cloc~- Number
Day
The display will show: Sunday I
Monday 2
Enter time as:- Tuesday 3
HHMMSS Wednesday 4
Thursday 5
Friday 6
where: Saturday 7
HH = Hours [00 to 24]
MM = Minutes
Note: If an error is made, pressing ~ will allow the
SS = Seconds
option to be exited and restarted. Take care not
to rest fingers on keys, as characters will be
generated repetitively.
followed by a flashing cursor to indicate that
an operator entry is required.
2) Enter a time a few seconds in advance of the 3.9 TEST SYSTEM MENU
correct time (using leading zeros where
necessary]. 3.9.1 SELECTION OF MENU
3) When the actual time corresponds with the When selected, the options in this menu allows devices to be
entered time, press h@#tHUUl tested without raising a full alann.
I) Select the ·Test System' option from the main
menu. The menu shown in Fig. 7 will be
Note: If an error is made,pressing C!l!JD will allow the displayed. The menu options arc selected as
option to be exited and restarted. Take care not described in section 3.4.1, or
to rest fingers on keys, as characters will be
generated repetitively. 2) enter the Fast Access Code 0030. Entry of fast
Access Codes is described in section 3.3.1.
The system will now move to the ·Set Date' option.

Oo you w••lt to
IK1 •yslem?
y
A
3.8.3 SET DATE
Zonal walk 1est
When this option is selected, the system date may be set. A
I) Either select the option from the 'Set Clock' P04nt walk lest
menu, or enter Fast Access Code 0022. A
The display will show: Wolklest Sounder walk lest
sounde,s?
Enter date as:- Nor...-
DDMMYY Doy""w•ntto
isolate polnts?
where:
DD= Day Fig. 7 'MINERVA' Controller - Test System Menu
MM= Month
YY= Year
2) Enter the dale in the format required, using

leadinj zeros where necessary, and press
•1@ fii=t:J.
The display will show:
Sun=l ••• Sat=7
Enter day:
PAGE 18 of 28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
,.
3.9.2 WALK TESl" ZONE 6) Once all devices have been tested, press
When selected, this option allows the detectors and callpoints
C!lml-
The- display will show a summary in the
in a zone to be checked! for correct operation WITHOUT fonnat:
raising an alann.
00-0 points untested
001 points in Alarm
print data?
WARNING:
THIS FUNCTION WILL DISABLE THE ZONE[$] If it is required to print details of missed and
UNDER TEST. faulty points, press N=f..iJ=iH•::fS.
then refer
to section 3.13.2. Ifa printout is selected, the
LCD displays:
Proceed as follows: print initiated
I) Select the 'Walk Test Zone• option from the
test system menu, or enter Fast Access Code
0035. Note:
The display will show: 1) The walk test function will be automatically
Zone no. : terminated one hour after the last device is
( Quit to eJ:it) tested, if not terminated manually.
2) If the walk test function is exited whilst devices
are still in alarm [i.e. the key has not been·
A flashing cursor indicates that an operator entry is required. removed from a cal/point or detectors still
contain smoke], the controller will immediately
signal an alarm. Always wait five minutes aft.er
2) Enter the number of the required zone. testing the last device to allow any smoke to
The display will :show: clear from the detectors. Alternatively, wait until
the Points in alarm counter on the LCD reaches
< zotte 11u111e >
zero {the counter is only updated by dearing it,
Zone no.·: then re-selecting the display, using DI!J and
( VI N / UP/DOWN ) ? li1DU respectively}.
3) 3.9.3 WALK TEST POINTS

When selected, this option allows the multiple contact
detectors [ie DMs], and callpoints in a loop to be checked
individually for correct operation WITHOUT raising an
alann.
walk test active
000 pnts tested
exit with quit WARNING:
THIS FUNCTION WILL DISABLE THE

4) Walk round the zone in any order, setting ZONE[S] UNDER TEST.
detectors, callpoir1ts, etc. into alarm.
5) The LEDs on the last five devices tested should
always be lit and the ·points tested' count on Proceed as follows:
the LCD should increment each time a point is I) Select the •walk Test Points' option from the
tested. test system menu, or enter Fast Access Code
1030.
Note: If a printer is attac:hed [and on-line], details of the
points will be printed out as they are tested. For a Loop : A
description of the print-out, together with how to (YIN)?
print details of twlty and missed points [see ( Quit to exit )
below], refer to section 3. 13.2.

Regi,tc,red Offoc:e: 19-ZI Denmark Strttt, Woking.ham, Bttks RC40 lQE
A 1:qc:D 11\ffERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
A flashing cursor indicates that an operator entry is required. Note: Entering zone ·o· will cause only the common
sounders to be tested.
2) Enter the letter for the required loop.
Point no.: 2) Enter the number of the required zone and
( Quit to exit ) press ···:@~=1011::lii-
3) Select the number of the required point, by <zonenan,e>

~ressing the relevant numeric keys and press Zone no.:
i:@~:llll#;l ( Y / N /UP/DOWN) ?
< poi11t name> 3)
Point no.:
( Y / N / UP/DOWN ) ?
4)
Sounders in
walk test
exit with quit
Walk test active All sounders [in the selected zone) will operate for
000 activations approximately 2 seconds every 30 seconds.
41 Walk round the site, checking for correct
exit with quit operation of the sounders.
5) When all !he sounders have been proved,
5) Set point into alarm. press [!l!(ii.
6) Check the LED on device lights after it has 6) The display will show:
been tested.
Walk test
7) Once point has been tested, press t!l!Jii- terminated
Note:
3.9.4 WALK TEST SOUNDERS
1) The function will automatically terminate after
When selected, this function allows sounders to be tested one hour.
without first raising an alann. It is possible to test either
ALL the sounders or the sounders in ONE zone only. 2) If an alarm occurs during the walk test, the
function will be automatically terminated and
the controller will respond as described in
Note: The Walk Test Sounders facility is available in section 2.3. 1.
marine applications. however it is not used, as
the sounders are not pulsed but sound
continuously. 3.10 ISOLATE MENU
Proceed as follows: When selected, the options in this menu allow devices to be
isolated [i.e. not respond to an alarm). This must NOT be
I) Select the 'Walk Test Sounders' option from
used when work is physically being carried out on the system
the Test System menu, or enter the Fast
- in this instance, the system must be powered down.
Access Code 0036.
The display will show: Proceed as follows:
Zone no.: I) Select the ·Isolate' option from the Main
(Yes= all) Menu. The menu shown in Fig. 8 will be
displayed. The menu options are selected as
A flashing cursor indicates that an operator input is required, described in section 3.4.1, or
2) enter the Fast Access Code 0040.
PAGE 20 of28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
The controller will pause briefly and then

display:
Do you want to
Isolate points? Isolate
y
successful
y _.. Zonal Isolation
... Nor"""
5) The •rnSABLED' LED will light and the
y • Point Isolation
internal buzzer will sound
.... Nor.,,.
intennittently. The display then returns to
SATURN Group y • (Aoallable I paMl ls part the .. Isolate zone [sensor onlyJ" display,
laolate clMr? of a SATURN n-":}
allowing a further zone to be isolated.
Do you want to
de-lt10late poinls?
Note:
1) If a non-existent zone number is entered, the
Fig. 8 'MINERVA' Controller - Isolate Menu display will show:
Point(s)
not found
3.10.2 ISOLATE ZONE [SENSORS ONLY]
When this option is selected, all sensors [detectors] may be 2) If an attempt is made to isolate a zone which is
isolated in a selected zone. This must NOT be used if work already isolated. the display will show:
is physically being carried out on the system - in this
Point(s) already
instance, the system must be powered down.
isolated
Proceed as follows:
I) Select the 'lsolat,~ Zone' option from the The 'DISABLED' LED and the buzzer will
above menu, or enter Fast Access Code continue to operate as a warning that the zone
0041. is isolated.
The display will show: 3) If a printer is connected and on-line, each zone
Zoneno. : disabled will be logged in the format shown in
(Yes"" all) Fig. 9. In this example, Zone 1 {all points] has
been isolated.
Flashing cursor indicates that an operator input is required. 3.10.3 ISOLATE POINT [ADDRESSABLE
LOOPS ONLY]
2) To isolate all zones press f,l=@j::jHl::I;~. When this option is selected, individual devices may be
The controller will pause briefly and then isolated using their addresses:
display: Proceed as follows:
Isolate I) Select the 'Isolate Point' option from the
successful "Isolate" menu, or enter Fast Access Code
0043.
3) To isolate a specific zone, enter the number
of the retluired zone and press Loop: A
N=!-1A=iH•=t. . (YIN)?
<zone name> 2) If the device to be isolated is on loop A, press
Zone no.: n=t.""1#11113~ and proceed.
( Y / N / UP/:OOWN ) ? 3) Pressing il(•ff•Jij1:j1ij: has no effect.
4) Once the correct loop has been chosen, the
4) display will show:
Point no. :
( Yes= all)

Rq:islend Orftct: 19-U Dr,.rnark Strttt, Wokingham. ll«l<s RG40 2QE
A "tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
5) Enter the address of the required device and Note:

press n@=tlii=t;1- 1) If a non-existent address is entered, the display
rhe display will show: will show: ·
< point name > Point(s)
Point no.: not found
( Y / N I UP/DOWN ) ?
2) If an attempt is made to isolate a device which
6) is already isolated, the display will show:
Point(s) already
then press isolated
The controller will pause briefly and then
display:
The 'DISABLED' LED and the buzzer will
Isolate continue to operate as a warning that the zone
successful is isolated.
3) If a printer is connected and on-line, each point
The 'DISABLED' LED will light and the disabled will be logged in the format shown in
internal buzzer will sound Fig. 10. In this example, Points A2 and A3 in
intermittently. The LCD will return to the Zone 1 have been isolated.
"isolate point? [addr. loop only]" display,
allowing a further point to be isolated.
ISOLATE WARNING Zone One 02:24:22 01 Jan 93

Zone 01 A I
Zone 01 A 4
POINT ISOLATED Zone One 02:24:22 01 Jan 93
Non Addressable Pnt. A
Fig.9 •isolate Zone• Option - Example Printout

IZone I (all points) lsolatedl
POINT ISOLATED All Zones 02:24:22 01 Jan 93

A 2
SYSTEM ISOLATE All Zones 02:24:22 01 Jan 93
Non Addressable Pnt.
Zone0I A 3
POlNT ISOLATED All Zones 02:24:22 01 Jan 93
A J
Fig. to •isolate Point• Option - Example Printout

IPoints A2 and A3 in Zone I Isolated]
PAGE 22of 28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.11 DE-ISOLATE MENU The controller will pause briefly and then
display:
De-isolate
When selected, the options in this menu allow devices to be successful
de-isolated [i.e. respond to an alarm].
I) Select the 'De-isolate' option from the Main
Menu. The menu shown in Fig. 11 will be 4) The 'DISABLED' LED will go out and the
displayed. The menu options are selected as internal buzzer will cease sounding, if no
described in sec:tion 3 .4.1, or further zones are isolated. The LCD will
return to the "de-isolate zone [sensors only)"
2) enter Fast Access Code 0050. Entry of fast display, allowing a further zone to be
Access codes is described in section 3.3. I. enabled.
Note:
1) If a non-existent zone number is entered, the
display will show:
Point(s)
Zona1 de-isolalion
not found
!ilor...,.
De--i-solatfll p0int':~ Y
Point dc-i-sofalion 2) If an attempt is made to de-isolate a zone
(add,. loop only)
Nor ..,.
which is already de-isolated, the display wifl
show the following:
Ope~VFP?
Point(s) already
de-isolated
Fig. 11 'MINERVA' Controller - De-isolate Menu
3) If a printer is connected and on-line, each zone
enabled will be logged in the format shown in
Fig. 12. In this example, Zone 1 [all points]
3.11.2 DE-ISOLATE ZONE [SENSORS have been enabled.
ONLY]
When this option is selected, previously isolated sensors 3.11.3 DE-ISOLATE POINT [ADDRESSABLE
[detectors] in a selected zone may be de-isolated. LOOPS ONLY]
Proceed as follows: When this option is selected, previously isolated individual
I) Select the 'De-ii;olate Zone' option from the devices specified by displayed addresses may be de-isolated.
above menu, or enter Fast Access Code Proceed as follows:
0051.
The display will show: I) Select the 'De-isolate Point' option from the
above menu, or enter Fast Access Code
Zone no. : 0053.
(Yes= all) The display will show:
Loop : A
2) Enter the numbc:r of the required zone and (YIN)?
press r441::j~j@:l.
The display wiU show:
2) If the device to be de-isolated is on loop A,
<;.one name> press •·U:t~i,=iHi=ti~
and proceed from para
Zone no.: [d].
( YIN I Ur/DOWN ) ? 3) Pressing IM•n•J=H=ii=i has no effect,
4) Once the correct loop has been chosen,
3) Press i*43§fHUiEffi to confinn the selection the display will show:
or •
Point no. :
( Yes= all)
1. © 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 23 of28

II - R•;;i,lorrd Office: 19-21 D•nmark Slrltt. Wokingham, Brrb RC40 ZQE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
5) Enter the address of the required device and Note:

press •·•Mf=tfH:j;t 1) /fa non-existent address is entered, the display
will show:
< point name >
Point(s)
Point no.:
not found
( Y / N I UP/DOWN ) ?
2) If an attempt is made to de-isolate a device
6) which is already de-isolated, the display will
show the following:
Point(s) already
then press
The controller will pause briefly and then de-isolated
display:
3) If a printer is connected and on-line, each point
De-isolate de-isolated will be logged in the format shown
successful in Fig. 13. In this example, Points A2 and A3 in
Zone 1 have been de-isolated.
System De-isolate is only printed when the last
The 'DISABLED' LED will go out and the internal buzzer isolated point is de-isolated.
will cease sounding, if no further points are isolated. The
LCD will return to the "'de-isolate point [addr. loop only]"
display, allowing a further point to be de-isolated.
POINT ENABLED 3rd Floor 12:44:22 23 Jan 93

Non Addressable Poe.Zone 01 All 001
Fig. 12 De isolate Zone !Sensors Onlyl Option - Example Printout

IZone I (all points) Enabled)
POINT ENABLED All Zones 02:24:22 01 Jan 93

A 2
POINT ENABLED All Zones 02:24:22 01 Jan 93
A 3
SYSTEM DE-ISOLATE All Zones 02:24:22 01 Jan 93
Fig. 13 'De-isolate Point• Option - Example Printout
PAGE 24 of 28
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
3.12 VIRTUAL FRONT' PANEL [VFPJ 8) Press l'!.1!lii again, the display will show:
This option [available on network systems only] allows Open VFP:
access to the front panel controls of any controller from
another on the ThomNet network. Thus the front panel of
one controller becomes the Virtual Front Panel of the 9) Press C!l!Ji again, to exit the VFP option and
other. When selected, all the functions of the Main Menu restore the front panel displays to their
normal mode.
can be accessed remotely.
3.12.1 SELECTING Tt-lE 'VFP' OPTION 3.13 PRINT DATA MENU

To select the 'VFP' option and access another controller 3.13.1 SELECTION OF MENU
proceed as follows: When selected, the options in this menu allow the contents of
I) Either select the 'Open VFP' option from the Event Log or the results of a walk test to be printed.
the Main Menu or enter Fast Access Code I) Either select the 'Print Data' option from the
0070. Main Menu. The following menu will be
The display will show: displayed. The menu options are selected as
VFP into Panel : described in section 3.4. I, or
2) enter the Fast Access Code 0080. Ent1y of
A flashing cursor draws attention to the fact that an operator Fast Access Codes is described in section
entry is required. 3.3.1.
2) Enter the Node address [between I and 30)

of the controller you want to view and press Oo you want lo
•••:f-.1l#Hii#it print data?
y
The display scrolls through the following
two messages: Y Print points
unlestedlfailed?
Requesting VFP into panel ... N-or Y
Print e¥fl!'11 Y Print even1

log hClctntek? log bad<tt..O~
VFP Session Opened
Nor ...
the LCD will show i:hc Date I Time message

and then: Fig. 14 'MINERVA' Controller - Print Data Menu
VFP open to Panel :
3) Enter passcode for the controller selected. 3.13.2 PRINT WALK TEST POINTS NOT
TESTED/FAILED
4) Press •1:f-.1~=HH:f;f and all the Main Menu
options as described in para 3.3.1. arc When this option is selected, a printout may be obtained of
available. all points missed during a walk test, or which failed to
5) Press [!1!ID to exit the current option respond correctly.
displayed. Proceed as follows:
6) Press OOJDj again, the display will show: I) Either select the 'Print Points untested/failed'
VFP open to Panel : option from the Print Data menu, or enter
Fast Access Code 0083.
7) Press [!I!Iij again, the display will show:
Zone no. :
Quitting VFP ... (Yes= all)
then:
2) Enter the number of the required zone and
VFP into panel ; press n:@1::jHl::j;l.

R~i,1,.-.d Off~: 19-U Denmark Str-ttt. Wokingham, S.,rks RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
The display will show: For non-addressable points, the information logged is:
Zone no.: Event message, zone no, time & date, location, point/type
<:;;one name> no.
( YI NI UP/DOWN ) ?
Note:
1) The MAXIMUM number of events that the Jog
3)
can hold is 550. Asking for more than this
number will cause the controller to display:
invalid, try again
The printer will produce a list of all points for which no
response was detected during the previous walk test of the 2) The printout will only contain events
selected zone[s] or were found to be faulty, together with any appropriate to the access level of the user.
available parameters. 3) If there are less events in the log than the
The controller LCD will show: number requested, the controller will print out
the entire log [but see Note 2].
Print initiated
4) Events followed by the letter 'R' have been
recycled following an event log overflow.
3.13.3 PRINT EVENT LOG BACKTRACK
When this option is selected, a printout of all [or part] of the
Event log may b.;: obtained. The selection may also be
made by the type of event [ All, Alarm or Fault].
Proceed as follm\·s:
I) Either scl.;:cc the 'Print Event log Backtrack'
option from the Print Data menu, or enter
Fast Acc.;:ss Code 0085.
Ewnt Type ?
.-\II
Use the
iM•n•J=I
i,f•)••ll:,J A orSCROLL DOWN T or
to move through the event types. When the
required event type is shown, press •1=¥m=tfii#:l~-
The display will show
Enter No. events
2) Enter th.;: number of events required for

printing [e.g. 20], and press n:@Jgfjj:::t;t
Print initiated
3) The controller will print out the [20] most

recent e\"cnts in the log in the form shown in
Fig. 16.
For addressable points, the information logged is:

Event message, location, time and date, point description,
zone no., loop no., point no.
PAGE 26 of28
EQUIPMENT: MI.NERVA
15A-02-O1
I. PUBLICATION:
TEST STARTED Zone4 13:55:07 30 Jan 90

Non Addressable Pnt. Zone4
POINT TESTED Zone 4 Zone 04 JO Jan 90
TEST FINISHED All Zones 14:34:09 JO Jan 90
Zone A Points Untested/Failed

Address Dev. Con. Id. LT.A\' Inst. Cnfm. Status
Zone 4 A6 34 7.6 11.2 7.lmA Norm Norm

etc.....
- ·- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Fig. 15 "Print Points Untested Failed' Option - Example Printout
Events will be printed in the format shown in Fig. 15.

The first three entries abo,ve will be produced when the walk test is initiated, when each point is tested and when the walk test
is concluded. respectively. These entries will therefore already be on the printer before the print option is selected. The entries
in the summary table contain the following parameters:
Address - the zone, loop and point number Dev - the device type code number
Con - the current condition in mA Id - the identity current in mA
LT. A\'. - the long term average current in mA Inst - the instantaneous point status, i.e. Norm, Fault, Alann, etc.
Cnfm. - the confirmed point status.
Event fog backtrack

FIRE EVACUATE Factory ll:57:01:30 JO Jan 90
Ceiling Rose Zone OS Al
SYSTEM SILENCE System Zone 11:57:24:00 JO Jan 90
Non Addressable Pnt. LBOS2
SYSTEM RESET All Zones 11:57:48:32 JO Jan 90
Non Addressable Pnt. MP
Fig. 16 'Event Log Backtrack' Option - Example Printout

Rtgi$t~rN Ofl'i<:e; 19-U Denmark Strttl, Wokingham. Buks RC40 2QE
A t:qco l/\ff£RNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA
15A-02-O1
04 11/99
4. ROUTINE CHECKS • The two red 'FIRE' LEDs on the controller

front panel light.
4.1 GENERAL • The appropriate red 'FIRE ZONAL' LED
In order to comply with the requirements of British Standard flashes (if configured). Normally a remote
BS 5839 Part I [ 1988], the installation must be checked on a function.
regu Jar basis by a responsible member of staff to confirm • The general and zonal sounders operate.
that the controller and all ancillary devices are operating • The alphanumeric display gives the
correctly. The required routine checks are described in the location of the alam1.
following paragraphs.
For marine systems carry out routine checks in accordance d) Record the device used to initiate the test in
with the customer's own procedures. the site log book and reset the controller.
e) Check the condition of the printout on any
printers attached to the system and replace
4.2 DAILY CHECKS
the ribbon if it is beeomi ng fci nt.
Proceed as follows: f) Ensure that each printer has an adequate
a) Ensure the front panel of the controller is supply of paper.
indicating a normal condition [ie, no alarm
or fault LEDs are lit and the LCD is
displaying the date and time].
5. RECOMMENDED SPARES
Note: If the panel is not indicating a normal condition
record the condition in the log book and take a
The following is recommended spare for a 'MINERVA'
any necessary action. tire controller system:
Callpoint Glasses Clear (pack of 5): 515.001.025
b) Check that any fault recorded on the
previous day has received attention.
JM/jm
22 nd November I999
4.3 WEEKLY CHECKS
These checks would normally be carried out by a responsible
member of the customer's staff
WARNING:
WARN ALL PERSONNEL THAT THE

SOUNDERS ARE ABOUT TO BE TESTED.
Proceed as follows:
a) Jf necessary, clean the front ·panel of the
controller with a suitable cleansing agent_
b) Using the walk test function (see sections
X.X.Xand X.X.X), check the operation of at
least one zone. If a printer is available, print
out the results of the walk test (sec section
3.18.4).
c) Set one device (either a callpoint or detector)
from one zone into alann and check that the
system responds as follows:
• The controller's internal buzzer sounds in a
continuous tone.
PAGE 28 of28
T891
FIL 0025
001 1/94
LEAFLET S/C 120-415-205
NEW SUPPLEMENTARY PLATE TO BE ADDED TO THE MINERVA

MARINE T891 AND MINERVA MARINE REPEATER PANEL BATTERY
FITTING KIT
1. INTRODUCTION 3) Place batteries on supplementary plate and

secure with clamp.
The supplementary plate is used lo ensure that the baltcrics do
not move around in the Minc1Ta Marine units. It fits between
the batteries and packing plate. If necessary a maximum or Note: Battery terminals must face inwards.
three plates may be used to en sun: lhc ballcrics do not ha1 c
any 111m'c111t.:nt with in the Mincn·a J\farinc unit.
4) If batterics <ire st ii I able 1, 1 llHl\ c rcmm ~·
damp and batteries and place anothcr supple-
2. INSTALLATION mentary plate on top or thc suppkmcntar~
plate.
Install supplementary plate as liillows
5) Repeat step 4 if batteries arc still ahk 10
I) Place packing platc 11110 ldi-hand side 01· move.
housing.
2) Place supplementary plate 011 top of packing
plate.
CLAMP
FRONT VIEW WITH FRONT PANEL REMOVED
UC 25th January 1994
© 1994 THORN Security Limited PAGE 1 of 1
I.
EQUIPMENT: M900 SERIES
PUBLICATION: 01 B-03-D1

M900 SERIES ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE DETECTORS
PRODUCT APPLICATION AND DESIGN INFORMATION

1. INTRODUCTION The description of fires as fast and slow burning can be
misleading as some 'slow' burning fires may reach a hazardous
1.1 FIRE PHENOMENA scale faster than some 'fast' burning fires and they can often be
more life threatening due to high levels of toxic fumes. It
There arc several types of phenomena associated with fires,
should be noted ·that unwanted fires are usually complex
some which contribute to its destructive nature, and others
systems combining elements of both fire types and although
which are simply by-products generated by the fire. Destructive
there arc situations where the early stages of a fire are purely
effects such as charring, distortion and cracking of·matcrials,
slow burning, it is more unusual for a fast burning fire not to
very high temperatures, and superheated poisonous smoke tend
spread quickly to adjacent material that yields visible and toxic
to occur too late in a fire to be of use in preventing loss oflife or
smoke products as it burns.
property.
Chemical fires that are restricted to a single fuel type will often
Thc intention of all fire detection is to sense the early products
contradict these general patterns for example phosphorus is
of fire, before the destructive force of the fire prevents any
extremely fast burning, but generates a very dense visible white
remedial action. Unfortunately there is no unique fire product
smoke. In these cases there may be need to take specialist
that is common to the early stages of all types of fire that could
advice in choosing the most appropriate detector type.
be used as a target for a ·universal' fire detector. Each type of
fire will generate different initial products. The fire products
that can be produced at early stages of fires are aerosol
combustion products, flames (burning vaporized fuel], smoke 2. SMOKE DETECTION
particulates, poisonous gasses, and heat, mostly as convected PRINCIPLES
hot gasses, but with an increasing radiated element.
2.1 OPTICAL
Optical smoke detectors may operate by using several of the
1.2 FIRE TYPES optical scattering or obscuration properties of smoke, however
It is possible to categorise types of fire that are likely to occur in by far the most common principle used is that of Rayleigh
each environment and from this to determine the fire products [forward] scattering of light from smoke particulates. This
that will provide the earliest detection. Fires can be divided into effect is the most useful as it detects light that has been
two main types - Fast burning, which are characterised by a scattered from its original path by a fairly small angle, which is
flaming phas~ very soon after ignition, and Slow considerably higher in intensity than light that has been
burning. These arc characterised by an initial phase which may scattered through a large angle, with the result that detectors
not flame at all but is likely to be very smoky. These main types arc sensitive to very low levels of smoke particulates.
of fire can be further subdivided by the type of ignition, The design of Rayleigh scatter optical smoke detectors is to
combustibility of material ignited, and relative availability of have a fairly narrow band light source, and a receiver filtered to
oxygen and fuel. only see that light band. The optics are arranged so that there
Not all of the early fire products are present in all fire types, but is no direct path of light from the source to the receiver and
fast burning fires arc typically rich in aerosol combustion only scattered light can be detected. The optics have to be
products, flames, and heat. The smoke will tend to be less enclosed within a chamber [often known as a labyrinth] where
visible, and may appear as a "haze" above the fire, where it is smoke can enter, but stray external light cannot. In addition the
visible it will often be dark in colour, especially with liquid chamber has to be designed such that internal reflections of
hydrocarbon or plastic foam free fuels. light from the source cannot reflect from the walls into the
receiver as this would lead to false alanns.
Slow burning fires tend to have higher levels of visible smoke
particulates and poisonous gasses and much lower levels of hot This type of detector is very effective in detecting very low
gas and radiant heat. The smoke may vary in colour, but for levels of visible smoke particulates often at levels where they
most solid hydrocarbon fires it is likely to be a white colour are not visible to the naked ·eye. Invisible smoke aerosol
initially. products cannot however be detected using current optical
smoke detectors as these aerosols do not scatter or obscure
light. This means that optical detectors favour the type of fire
that we have described as slow burning.
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE1of9

Regiitered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A -tqc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D1
04 4/99
Although this is true, some smouldering materials such as the external environment. This results in the cell output
rubber will produce a predominantly black smoke, which being a function of concentration in the surrounding
has less scattering properties than white smoke and will be atmosphere, rather than rate of gas movement past the
detected later than an equivalent density of white smoke. detector.
Although carbon monoxide can be used for most types of
2.2 IONISATION hydrocarbon fire, the greatest advantage can be seen in slow
burning fires, where thern1al uplift carrying smoke products
Ionisation chamber detectors operate due to air within the to the detector is low. Under these conditions conventional
chamber being ionised by a very small americium source smoke detection will happen after levels of poison gas are
thus enabling a current to flow between two electrodes. This dangerously high. Due to the high gas mobility, carbon
current will reduce by a measurable level when combustion monoxide detectors do not require a similar thermal uplift to
aerosols enter the chamber and bind to the ionised air. transport the fire products to the detector.
In practice the chambers are usually divided into two parts Carbon ffionoxide fire detection is resilient towards false
which have similar conduction characteristics, but are not alarms and effective for most hydrocarbon fires. It is
equally accessible to smoke. The imbalance between the unsuitable in areas where the main risk is electrical
chambers is what is measured, as this is more reliable than fire. Although carbon monoxide is produced in fires
using a simple chamber. involving electrical equipment, the visible decomposition
Detectors based on the ionisation chamber principle respond products produced prior to combustion make this risk best
best to the invisible smoke combustion aerosols i.e. those suited to optical or high sensitivity smoke
produced by the faster burning type of fire. detection. Included in this category are areas where battery
powered equipment such as fork lift trucks or milk floats are
charged as charging gives rise to high levels of hydrogen
2.3 HEAT which may cause false alanns.
Heat detectors fall into two main categories: Those that go In areas where the main risk is from highly flammable
into alarm once a certain detector temperature has been chemicals, especially liquid fuels, a fire is likely to generate
reached, and those that go into alarm if the rate of high temperatures, a strong smoke plume and initially only
temperature increase is above a certain level. moderate levels of carbon monoxide. These risks are
Usually the design of heat detectors uses a combination of usually better suited to smoke detection or heat detection if
rate of rise and fixed temperature sensing elements. This the environment is unsuitable for smoke detectors.
allows fire detection from low temperatures. where rate of It is not envisaged that the CO detector will not be used in
rise sensing would give an earlier alarm than a fixed environmental conditions where an unusually high
temperature, but the fixed element provides a backstop for concentration of the following gasses is present:
fires where the temperature builds up gradually.
Hydrogen
Heat detection is not as fast as smoke detection in most fires
as early stages of a fire tend to bum less hot than the later Carbon Dioxide
stages. However, hostile environments where aerosols, dust. Ammoni~
smoke or even extremes of temperature are normally
present, preclude the use of smoke detectors as a fire Halogens
indicator. In these cases a heat detector may provide an Hydrocarbon Compounds
acceptable, though less sensitive alternative. Heat detection
is also often used where the risk of fires or the consequences
of fire arc considered low, as heat detection is generally
cheaper than smoke detection. 3. M900 SERIES DETECTORS
3.1 MF901
2.4 CARBON MONOXIDE
The MF90 I operates as an analogue addressable type smoke
Carbon monoxide detectors operate on the principle of the detector using the well proven ionisation chamber
oxidising of carbon monoxide gas to carbon dioxide. This technology as the sensing element. The detector contains
oxidation reaction involves several chemical steps that occur both 0-20mA sensing circuitry and the signalling circuitry
on catalytic surfaces within a sensing cell. The reactions necessary for communication with the Minerva range of
require exchange of electrons in order to proceed and this analogue addressable controllers. The MF90 I has been
now of electrons generates a small electrical current within designed to meet the satisfy the coriditions ofEN54 Pt 7.
the cell.
The response of an ion-chamber detector is normally
The gas entry to the sensing cell is restricted in order to measured with reference to the response of a standard
ensure that all carbon monoxide adjacent the catalyst surface Measuring Ionisation Chamber [MIC]. Smoke density is
is continuously oxidised. This means that the rate of measured as a "y-value", calculated from the change in MIC
transportation of carbon monoxide to the catalytic surface is current, which is proportional to smoke density.
detennined by the concentration gradient between there and
PAGE 2 of 9
'
PUBLICATION: 01 B-03-O1
The condition current of the MF901 is a linear function of MIC 3.3 MD901
current, such that the change in condition current is
approximately a quarter of the percentage change in MIC current, The MD901 acts as an analogue addressable type heat
for currents less than 20mA. detector incorporating both rate of rise and fixed
elements. This means that slowly changing
This is shown graphically in terns ofy value in Fig. I. temperatures generate an analogue output directly
CURRENT
mA
related to temperature whilst rapidly changing
20 temperatures produce higher outputs giving the
19 I advantage of a rate of rise type detector.
I
18
17
----------------L- By correct choice of threshold within the control unit,
I
16
the MD90 I can be made to behave as a Grade I, Grade
15
2, Grade 3, or Range 2 detector as defined in EN54 Pts 5
14 and 8.
13
12
11 3.4 MU901
10
9 The MU90 I detector operates as an analogue
8 addressable carbon monoxide fire detector. The
7
detector contains all circuitry necessary for
6
communication with the Minerva range of analogue
4
addressable controllers.
3 The 0-20mA condition signal is normally 7.5mA and
2
gives an increase in output proportional to the carbon
0
monoxide concentration. When this is set to normal
threshold level within the controller the alarm is raised
0 0.5 1.0 before the carbon monoxide concentration reaches a
SMOKE DENSITY ( y-value ) level of 50ppm. [Which corresponds to the 8 hour
occupational exposure limit].
Fig. I Condition Current vs Smoke Density
Although under normal conditions the current will be
7 .5mA, this may change with local variations of
[n clean air conditions [y = 0] the value of condition current pollution levels. However, under non fire conditions it is
indicates the quiescent condition of the chamber. Any deviation unlikely to move significantly.
from 7mA will indicate a change in the ambient conditions. This
may be caused by pressure or by a drift in the chamber operating
point. In either case, the deviation may be used in the control 4. SENSOR SUITABILITY
equipment to correct the alann threshold kvc!.
Within an analogue addressable detection system, the
When interrogated the detector provides a condition output to the detectors arc acting as transducers relaying information
controller that is directly related to the "y" value. on the parameter or combination of parameters that they
The MF901 design has improved performance in high aif flows arc measuring to the control unit. The control unit then
over previous ion chamber detectors and is suitable for underfloor processes this information either in isolation, or in
applications. conjunction with information from other detectors to
determine the appropriate response and ultimately
makes the decision whether or not to raise an alarm.
3.2 MR901/MR901T The most straightforward [and most commonly used]
processing involves comparing the analogue signals
The MR901 and MR901T detectors both provide the function of from the detector with a set of fixed levels which
analogue addressable type optical smoke detectors based on the represent Fault, Normal, and Alarm conditions. The
Rayleigh forward scatter principle. The MR90 I is the standard choice of Alarm level, and any Time Delay which may
model and satisfies the conditions of EN54 Pt 7. However the be deliberately introduced, will determine the overall
internal design is of a sufficiently high quality to enable a system response to fires .. The Alarm level and Time
considerable increase in sensitivity without noise problems. The Delay can, in theory be allocated any value, but in
MR90IT makes use of this by incorporating an enhancement practice, it is sufficient to choose levels which give
system where the sensitivity is increased when there are rapid responses similar to those of conventional bi-state
temperature rises that could be due to a fire. Both these devices detectors.
provide the same 0-20rnA output and signalling circuitry
necessary for operation with the Minerva range of analogue
addressable controllers.

Regiitered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-O1
04 4/99
Alarm Threshold
Compensation
200mA~-----~---------,---------,
Alarm
_ __,__ _ _ _ _---t---------
Pre-Alarm
c
-:' ------+--------
•e
0
" Normal
Analogue Output,'
OmA
Fig. 2 Sensor Alarm Threshold Compensation
End ol Threshold
Compe~sation
t.
Alarm Threshold
Compem;;atlon DCM Fault
200mA~-----__;~==:'::===~+-------!--~ Alarm
~--:------:----t--------
Pre-Alarm
''
------+--------,-----
' '' Detector Condition
Monitoring Threshold
Normal
'
Analogue Output' '
OmA
Fig. 3 Detector Condition Monitoring
'' Pre ,
Alarm'
, Fire
; Alarm
200mA~-~=~-c'-'=~-------------,
Alarm
Pre-Alarm
-------L-- ' .• -----------1--l"!:'r_~~o~d__ _
---~---- ----~
Normal
OmA
Fig. 4 Pre-Alarm Threshold
PAGE 4 of 9
I,

ISSUE No. &'DATE: 04 4/99
The use of more complex processing algorithms such as 4.3 PRE-ALARM

requiring an Alarm level from at least two detectors before
alann is indicated, or threshold compensation for dirt build Quite often in the early stages of a fire there is a slow build-
up, arc available depending on the configuration and the up of smoke before open burning takes place. With
controller used. analogue addressable smoke detectors, the analogue value
rises as the smoke builds-up in the detector's sampling
chamber. At a certain threshold level. that is the pre-alarm
4.1 ALARM THRESHOLD level [see Fig. 4], the controller can give a visual indication
COMPENSATION and audible warning of this pre-alarm condition before a
full-scale evacuation of the premises is required and before
As detectors age and become contaminated with dust and
the Fire Brigade is called. This situation allows the possible
dirt, their perfonnance begins to deteriorate, such that their
cause of the pre-alarm to be investigated prior to a full alarm
propensity to go into an alarm condition is much higher,
condition. It also allows for primary fire fighting
thus resulting in false alanns. The nuisance factor caused
procedures [using portable extinguishers] to be put into
by false alarms is a serious problem for users and Fire
effect.
Brigade services alike.
Since the analogue value of each detector is checked by the
controller over 30 times a minute, the slow build-up of Configurable fixed thresholds are as follows:
contaminants in the detector is reflected by a slow increase
in the analogue value. As this occurs the controller can MF901:
alter the alarm [and pre-alarm] threshold in order to High Sensitivity MF90I [HJ
compensate for this phenomenon [sec Fig. 2]._ This feature High Sensitivity with Delay MF90I [HD]
maintains the system at an optimum performance level and
extends the life of each analogue addressable detector. Nonna! Sensitivity MF90 I [NJ
Nonna! Sensitivity with Delay MF901 [ND]
The threshold compensation is not adjusted every time
there is a minor fluctuation in the detector's analogue Low Sensitivity MF90I [LJ
output, however the controller docs take an average of the
analogue value over the preceding hour and alters the
threshold accordingly. MF901 High Altitude:
Nonna! Sensitivity MF90I [AH]
Due to the sensitivity to slow build up fires and resistance
to dirt aging, alann threshold compensation is not used with
the MU90 I detectors. MR901:
High Sensitivity MR901 (HJ
4.2 DETECTOR CONDITION Nonnal Sensitivity MR90I [NJ
MONITORING Low Sensitivity MR901 [LJ
See Fig. 3. In accordance with the threshold compensation,
there comes a time in the life of a detector when it would be MR90IT:
unwise to raise the alarm threshold any further as doing so High Sensitivity MR90IT [HJ
would desensitise the detector too much and cause it to
operate incorrectly. When this occurs, the controller senses Nonna! Sensitivity MR90IT (NJ
the detector has reached the end of its operational life, and Low Sensitivity MR90IT [L]
indicates a detector condition monitoring fault.
When a detector condition monitoring fault is indicated, the MD901:
detector must be replaced by a new one and the threshold
compensation for the detectors address must be Grade I MD90I [GI]
reset. Typically this point will only be reached after several Grade 2 MD90I [G2]
years of operation Grade 3 MD901 [G3]
Range 2 [High Tcmpcranirc] MD901 [G4]
MU901:
High Sensitivity MU90I [HJ
Nonna! Sensitivity MU90I [NJ
Low Sensitivity MU901 [L]

Registerffi Office: 19-21 Oenmllrk Street, Wokingham, Berks RC-10 2QE
A 1:qc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

'"-.>·.· ,, ,, >>;"'"""·-<7'"- ,. -, YA.,"1 "S"S·-,·,c,_-, l""""'"''"'"""""' -~•c••,... '."'-•"""'* .,0 ,·, ,-s,;<'T • ·,.~e ·~•·,~-\"''!-'!'>~:- ,_.-_,..~,...,,,,,,,..,.... ~., ,.,, "' .""~"-""'""'''~-""'~'-•"'!',_,'"<''~'-"'""""'·' "'"'"""'"·-"''-~-'''· ,, :'"'' .,,,, ..,.,..,.,..~,~.. 7,-"'f>'-~"' '""~"Y'-'"·•"W· •=•vc--•;-·:,·""~ -=~<"·"1·-~·,.,u ,,,-~,-,;-·~_.,,..,.,.,.,,,,,,,, •.,.,,_, ''-"''·'"·~·-r-,.,,~v,4s,--,•,.,•w,,,f"",-.-,.,,,,... =·:·"''"'''"'"'-""" ~, ''<' e;;=~."" ,,.,~,_._._.,_,._ ~~.,,-,.,_,..,,,,,...,'1',.
j BENIGN
O
-"' O
~
3:
Gl VERY CLEAN HOT
m ENVIRONMENT
MODERATELY CLEAN
DIRTY. SMOKY
DUSTY ANO/OR Cll (0
ANO DRY REGULATED ANO OPEN AREAS
HUMID 60
"'!a. TEMPERATURE SMOKY
(;J 0
LOADING BAY/ -"' 0' en
<D
CLEAN ROOM
OFFICES,
LIGHT INDUSTRIAL,
WAREHOUSE WITH
LIVESTOCK PEN
ATRIUM, co
(!)
~
m
DIESEL FORK-LIFTS etc. KITCHEN, THEATRE,
FOR EXAMPLE DATA
PROCESSING
HOSPITALS,
RESIDENTIAL,
MILL,
LAUNDRY,
ENGINE ROOM, HANGER. :;o
HEAVY INDUSTRIAL TEST BEDS OIL RIGS,
SUITE
PASSENGER
ACCOMMODATION
CHANGING ROOM
TURBINE HALL m
FERRY (CAR DECK)
en
FIRE LOADING PROBABLE RISK
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT CABLE PYROLOSIS
(TOXIC FUMES)
ASPIRATED
ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL ARCS MR901(H/N)
MR901(H) FLAME
(IGNITION SOURCE) MR901T(H) MR901(L)
MR901T(H) BEAM
ELECTRIC MOTORS MF901(H)
MF901(H)
ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL
CABLE CONDUIT DANGERS
FABRICS, CLOTHES
SOFT FURNISHINGS SMOULDERING

(DIFFICULT TO LOCATE.
PAPER, CARDBOARD TOXIC FUMES) MU901(N)
MU901(L) MU901(N) MU901(H)
MR901T(N) MU901(L)
PLASTIC FOAMS LIKELIHOOD OF MR901(L) MR901(L) BEAM
FLASHOVER (BACK- MR901(N)
ANIMAL BEDDING DRAUGHT)
WOOD SHAVINGS etc.
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS FLAMING FIRE
(RAPID BUILD-UP OF FLAME FLAME
PAINTS, DENSE SMOKE)
MF901(H) MF901(N) FLAME
SOL.VENTS HIGH TEMPERATURE
FLAME FLAME
MR901T(H) MR901T(N) MF901(L) FLAME
FUMES MU901(L) MD901
FLAMMABLE GASSES MR901(H) MR901(N) MU901(L)
ASSOCIATED EXPLOSION MU901(H) MU901(N)
UNSTABLE CHEMICALS DANGERS
FOODSTUFFS
SMOKE ANO FLAME MU901(N)
GENERAL ORGANIC WASTE
MU901(L) MU901(N)
ANIMAL FODDER
INITIALLY FAIRLY SLOW MR901T(N) MD901 MU901(H)
BUT HIGH TEMPERA- MR901T(L) MR901(L)
MR901(N) MU901(L) FLAME
WOODEN STRUCTURES TURES ONCE ESTAB- MD901 MD901
LISHED MF901(N)
SOLID FUELS
PLASTIC, CHEMICALS MU901(N) MU901(L)
TYPE OF FIRE RISK ASPIRATED
MACHINERY MAY VARY AS CAN THE MR901T(N) MR901(L) MU901(N) FLAME
MU901(H) MD901
TYPE OF FIRE MF901(N) MF901(L) MR901(L)
BUILDING MATERIALS MR901(H) MU901(H)
(MAY REQUIRE A MIX OF MU901(L)
DETECTION TYPES) MD901 FLAME FLAME BEAM
UNKNOWN CONTENTS MF901(H)
FLAME MD901
Table. 1 Application of M900 Series Sensors

Emboldened types face indicate the most suitable - other types indicated may not be optimum for reasons of performance or cost, but real situations may require
a combination to cover likely risks. Sensitivity settings (in brackets) apply to all types and are only a guideline.
5. SPACING AND SITING OF 5.2.3 SMOKE DETECTORS

DETECTORS The greatest concentration of smoke from fires is usually
lifted by thennal convection currents to the highest point of
The spacing. siting and zoning of detectors should be in an enclosed area. It follows therefore that a smoke detector
accordance with the recommendations of BS5839: Pt I: should normally be sited in that position.
1988. The main poin1s arc summarised below.
Under normal conditions, the base should be mounted so
that the detection element of the detector is within the limits
5.1 SPACING of 25mm and 600mm below the appropriate ceiling height
The floor area which lies below a flat roof, and which is given in BS5839 Pt I. As with heat detectors special
covered by a single smoke detector, should not exceed arrangements must be made for mounting detectors to
IOOm 2; the floor area beneath a flat roof, and which is sloping roofs. Sensors should ideally be mounted with the
1
covered by a single heat detector, should not exceed 50m-. bases in a horizontal position for best performance and ease
of maintenance.
Refer to BS 5839 Pt I Sections 12 & 13 for details of the
maximum permissible horizontal distances between It is not recommended that the MR901T be installed in areas
detectors and/or between detectors and walls etc. These will where it is likely to be regularly enhanced, since in this
vary depending whether the installation is for life or property condition the detector is extra sensitive and there is a
protection. possibility of unwanted alarms from low ambient smoke
levels.
No detector should be mounted where it may be subjected to
adYcrsc environmental conditions. The MR901T enhancement becomes operational by
detecting a rapid temperature rise in air moving across the
detector. Siting detectors in positions where air is being
5.2 SITING OF DETECTORS blown through the detector should therefore be avoided
5.2.1 HEAT SENSORS IN NORMAL where possible, e.g. close to ceiling ducts or ceiling mounted
industrial heaters; or areas of forced ventilation, such as
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
ducts and underfloor voids of computer suites.
Under normal conditions the base should be mounted Also not recommended are areas ope_n to the outdoors, such
directly to the ceiling of the protected area. This will place as cargo loading bays, or areas where the detector may
the detection clement within the limits of 25mm and 150mm become contaminated, or in applications where a heater
given in BS 5839 Pt I. Special arrangements must be made jacket is required. In effect the MR90 IT is primarily aimed
for mounting detectors to sloping roofs. Detectors should at benign environments and if there is some question of the
ideally be mounted with the base in a horizontal position site an MR901 should be chosen in preference.
with the detector below the base to allow for fast detection
and case of maintenance.
The threshold setting chosen will depend on the ceiling 5.2.4 CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORS
height and the environmental conditions which surround the
These detectors are less sensitive to mounting position than
detector. In g~nerai, 9m is th.: maximum Ct!iling height for
other detectors. The spacing on a ceiling should be similar
an MD90 I set to Grade I, 7.5m when set to Grade 2, and 6m
when set to Grade 3. Provided that the detection system is to that used with smoke detectors. However, restrictions to
airflow across ceilings do not present a barrier to carbon
automatically connected to the fire brigade or to a Central
Station [Remote Manned Centre] and that the fire brigade monoxide. These detectors may also be mounted in
can guarantee attendance within 5 minutes, heat detectors positions where thermal barriers to smoke plume
propagation could exist.
nay be fitted to ceilings with maximum heights of 13.5m,
12m, and 10.5m for Grades 1,2, and 3 respectively.
5.2.5 LANTERN LIGHTS AND AREAS
5.2.2 HEAT DETECTORS FITTED INTO BELOW FLAT ROOVES
AREAS OF RAPID HEAT VARIATION On sunny days, a hot layer of air may be trapped just below
the ceiling, forming a thermal barrier to smoke
In some applications such as kitchens, furnace and boiler
houses, rapid increases in temperature may be considered to transport. Under these conditions smoke transport to
detectors is hindered and the fire may need to be
be normal. [Heat detectors fitted into lantern lights must be
considerably larger in size before the thennal lift is sufficient
protected from direct sunlight, but even then they fall into
this category]. In these cases false alarms can usually be to get fire products to the detector. These situations favour
the use of MU90 I detector as the carbon monoxide gas is
eliminated by using Grade 2 or Grade 3 settings. If however,
able to penetrate through this barrier where smoke
ambient temperatures are low, it may be necessary to use a
cannot, [Detectors should however be sited out of direct
fixed temperature detector in conjunction with a DM520
module. sunlight or where the temperature will exceed operating
limits].

Rl"gislered Office: 19--21 Denmark Street, Wokingh.am, Berks RG40 2QE
A -tqcu INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

M900 SERIES
018-03-D1
04 4/99
6. DETECTOR IDENTIFICATION
The detectors are identified by a unique colour coded logo
label in the centre of the detector cover, the colour codes
are as follows [Figure 5].
~ WHITE
I
f
\
\ ~COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
MD901
RED
COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
MF901
BLUE
COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
MR901
GREEN
COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
MR901T
~ YELLOW
\ ~
\
COMPANY
----~---- IDENTIFIER
MU901
Fig. 5 Detector Identification
PAGE 8 of9
0IB-0J-D2 DESIGN INFORMATION M600/M900 UNIVERSAL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
0IB-03-DJ DESIGN INFORMATION MF901 ION CHAMBER SMOKE DETECTOR
0 I B-0J-D4 DESIGN INFORMATION MR901T HIGH PERFORMANCE OPTICAL SMOKE
DETECTOR
0IB-03-DS DESIGN INFORMATION MD901 HEAT DETECTOR
0IB-0J-D6 DESIGN INFORMATION MR900 OPTICAL DETECTOR
0IB-0J-D7 DESIGN INFORMATION MU901 CO DETECTOR
JM/jm
16th April 1999

Registered Office: 19~21 DE-nmark Street, \Vokingham. Berks RG40 2QE

EQUIPMENT M900 SERIES

M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE AND ACCESSORIES
AS USED WITH THE M900 SERIES DETECTORS
1. INTRODUCTION 2.1 DETECTOR BASE
The M600/M900 Universal Base is common to the M600 The detector base is made of fire resistant FR I IO
Detector Range and the M900 Detector Range. This document 'BAYBLEND'.
describes the base and accessories as used with the M900 Series The base may be fixed directly to either a British, European
Detectors. The Base is common to all types of plug-in ceiling- conduit box or MK Red Alert back box. Knockout points are
mounted detectors in the M900 series. Thus an addressable provided on the outer flange of the base to enable electrical
ceiling-mounted detector will comprise a specific detector type, connection to be made when the detector is surface
plus an M600/M900 Universal Base. The range is intended for mounted. For case of fixing, there is an enlarged hole on one
two-wire operation. of the fixing slots, which allows the first fixing screw to be
inserted loosely. the base is then fitted to the screw.
2. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION The base accepts a srnartcard and address label carrier from the
detector when it is fitted to the base. The base also has four
Sec Figs. I and 2. electrical contacts which align with the contacts on the detector
once the latter is fitted and fully latched into position.
An external rib mou ldcd into the base indicates the position
98
which will be assumed by the detector alarm LED once the
detector is fitted. The rib must be aligned so that it is visible
22! ,---'rr-----~! from the search route. This is to satisfy the BS5839 Part I
definition of a zone.
--------1fos 109
Loop cabling may be connected to base terminals L and LI in
any order as the detector bridge circuit makes it polarity
insensitive.
Fig. I Overall Base Dimensions A drive is provided for a remote indicator connected between
loop positive and terminal R, therefore at a detector where a
remote indicator is connected, the polarity of the loop must be
known.
LOCKING
DEVICE
FITTED SMARTCARD
HERE
LABEL
CARRIER
TEMPORARY
PARK
PLUNGER
Fig. 2 Detector Base

Reghtered Orlice: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG-'O 2QE
i
M900 SERIES
01B-03-D2
03 4/99
2.2 ADDRESS LABEL CARRIER

The address label carrier is made of fire resistant FR 110
'BAYBLEND·.
The address label carrier [sec Fig. 3] is fitted to the detector
before mounting on the base. When the detector is mounted
to the base, and turned clockwise until fully located on the
base, the address label carrier is transferred to the base. If Fig. 4 Locking Device fnot to scale)
the detector is removed the address label carrier remains on
the base [refers].
2.5 TEMPORARY PARK PLUNGER

A temporary park plunger is fitted to all bases and enables
ADDRESS the detector to be mounted in a park position once mounted
EPROM 'SMAATCAAO' on the base. This allows the detector to be turned
anticlockwise past the location position to break electrical
contact with the base. This means that the cabling of the
loop may be tested with the detector mounted to the base.
2.6 DETECTOR CHANGER

RECESS FOR
PRE·NUMBERED The detector Changer [Fig. 5] is used to remove/replace
ADDRESS LABELS detectors from/to a detector base. It is also used to remove
the dust cover and engage the temporary park
SPRUE
plunger. Extension poles are available which permit the
detector to be inserted or removed from high sitings.
The metal slides arc retained by wing nuts and are used in
two positions, fully up and fully down. In the fully up
position it is used to remove/replace a detector. In the fully
ADDRESS down position it is used to remove the dust cover and to
LABEL
CARRIER
engage the temporary park plunger.
Fig. 3 Smartcard and Address Label Carrier
2.3 SMARTCARD
The smartcard is made of fire resistant FR 110
"BAYBLEND·.
The smartcard [sec Fig. 3] which contains a pre-
programmed EPROM is fitted to the detector before
mounting on the base. When the detector is mounted to the
base, and turned clockwise until fully located on the base,
the smartcard is transferred to the base. If the detector is
removed the smartcard remains on the base [Fig. 2 refers].
2.4 LOCKING ARRANGEMENT

The detector may be locked in position by inserting the
optional locking device [Fig. 4] in the base before fitting the
selected detector. The detector may then only be removed
by inserting the unlocking tool into the hole on the detector
METAL SLIDES ATTEO HERE
cover [ an example of a simple locally manufactured detector
unlocking key is shown in Fig. 8]. This depresses the Fig. S Detector Changer
locking arrangement allowing the detector to be removed.
PAGE 2 of6
2.7 SHORTING ADAPTOR 2.9 LOCALLY MANUFACTURED LOCK

The shorting adaptor [Fig. 6] is used to short terminals Lad
RELEASE TOOL
LI to allow cable resistance, capacitance and inductance A lock release tool for the detector can be locally
checks to be carried out. manufactured, Fig. 8 gives the dimensions for the tool. The
example shown is an R.S. Components screwdriver part
number 544-689.
~------
a:
w
>
cc
;;::
w
a:
0
CJ)
..J
<l
z
:E
a:
w
I-
7irf1\
END GROUND DOWN
I
22.0 o_+0.5
0 _5
Fig. 6 Shorting Adaptor

PERPENDICULAR
TO SHAFT
· ... '
3.1 max.
2.8 DUSTCOVER
The dust cover [Fig. 7] forms part of the detector Fig. 8 Locally Manufactured Unlocking Tool
packaging. When the detector is removed from the
packaging the top of the packaging is also removed.
Fig. 7 Dust Cover

Registered Office: 19-21 Dt-nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A tqco INTERNATIONAL UD. COMPANY

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D2
03 4/99
2.10 DHM69 DECKHEAD MOUNTING The Deckhead Mounting Kit comprises:
The Dcckhcad Mounting Kit is designed to be used with the a) A housing having 20mm breakouts for
M900 Series detectors when fitted in particularly damp or conduit connection,
dirty environments.
b) two M4 x 12mm long, pan head, zinc plated
The housing is to be secured with two No. 8 x 1 1/~ inch and passivated steel screws to secure the
countersunk zinc plated and passivated steel screws [or detector base.
equivalent] at the fixing centres shown in [Fig. 9]. The
c) an M4 x 8mm long pan head, zinc-plated
surface chosen for the mounting should be flat over the area and passivated steel screw with a brass cup
of the underside of the housing to ensure a stable fixing and washer and a brass plain washer.
strong enough to take the weight of the mounting, detector
base and sensor.
Item c) is provided for the earth terminal.
Note: The deckhead housing is aligned so that the

arrow which is embossed in the bottom is in
line with the direction required for visual
inspection of the sensor LED.
ALIGNMENT ARROW
DETECTOR BASE
MOUNTING
145.5 DIA
!
~ - - - - - - - - - EARTHING POINT
I I
Fig. 9 DHM69 Deckhead Mounting
PAGE 4 of 6
2.11 DETECTOR PROTECTIVE CAGE Temporary Park

Position Plunger: Acctal
The detector cage [Fig. 10] is designed to be fitted in areas
where there is a high risk of mechanical damage to a Address Carrier: FRI 10 'BAYBLEND
detector. The cage baseplate which is in two halves may be Flame Retardant
fitted after the detector base has been wired in Label Carrier: FRI 10 'BAYBLEND
Flame Retardant
WEIGHT
0
Base: 0.07kg
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating Temperature: -20°C to + 70°C
=-0= 3.2
Storage Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
-25°C to +80°C
95% non-condensing
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Through supply voltage: 28V d.c. max [not polarity
conscious]
The Base has four contacts
0 R Remote LED connector
L Linc B IN/OUT
LI Line A IN/OUT
I
LZ Switched output ( for
future use]
4. CABLING
71mm
Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication
05A-02-D I. Only Two loop connections L and L 1 are
provided on the base itself, the input and output connection
1 being made at the same terminal. The monitoring system

will allow 'teed' or 'spur' junctions which may be used to
I-+---- 79mm - - - - . j simplify the installation cabling. However, a maximum of
two I .5mm 1 cables may be connected at any one
terminal. End of line devices are not required on
Fig. IO Dete-ctor Protective Cage addressed circuits, see Figs. 11 and 12.
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
3.1 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIMENSIONS "
Fig. I refers. l
0
"
MATERIAL
Base: FRI 10 'BAYBLEND 0
Flame Retardant R
Base Contacts: Stainless steel

Base screws: Steel/Zinc plated
Detector Lock: Nylon Fig. JI Terminal Designations

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, ~rks RG40 ZQE
A tqca fNTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

M900 SERIES
018-03-D2
03 4/99
MINERVA
CONTROLLER
L1
0 0 0
L2 L2 L2
R R
0
TO-+VE
TERMINAL
Lor L1
,,
L1 L1
L
0 0
L2 L2
R R
0 0
Fig. 12 Simplified Circuit Diagram
5. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 6. ORDERING INFORMATION

The base is compatible with the complete range of M900 Universal Base [packed in 10s]: 517.050.001
plug-in detectors and M52x series of ancillary units. Detector Locking Device
The base is used in conjunction with the following [packed in l0s]: 517.050.005
moummgs: Smartcard and Address Label
• BESA junction box. Carrier [pack of IO with address
labels and fitting instructions: 517.051.002
• European junction box.
Head Removal Tool: 517.050.004
• MK Red Alert back box. Lock Release Tool: Local Manufacture
• DHM69 Dcckhcad mounting kit. Shorting Adaptor: 517.050.002
DHM69 Deckhead Mounting Kit: 5I7.001.23 I
Protective Cage: 517.050.008
0IB-03-DI DESIGN INFORMATION M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D3 DESIGN INFORMATION MF901 DETECTOR
0IB-03-D4 DESIGN INFORMATION MR901T DETECTOR
01 B-03-D5 DESIGN INFORMATION MD900 DETECTORS
01 B-03-D6 DESIGN INFORMATION MR901 DETECTOR
JM/jm
I 6th April I 999
PAGE6of6
PUBLICATION: 01 B-03-I1
I•

M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE
AS USED WITH THE M900 SERIES DETECTORS
1. INTRODUCTION
The M900 Series Detectors, as supplied, use a common base
SCREW
assembly. Guidance on mounting and wiring is given below.
LOCATING
HOLE
2. DETECTOR LOCATION
The location of each detector should have been determined at
the system design siagc in accordance with the site plan. The
detector bases must be mounted in accordance with this
plan. If problems arise then reference to the system designer
must be made.
The detector base is to be fitted with the alignment indicator, a
rib forming part of the detector base moulding, directed towards
the search route to facilitate visual inspection of the detector
-.-~---
14 46
- . ..;
14
LEDs [Fig. I refers}
Fig. 2 Fixing Dimensions for Detector Base
PROTECTED AREA
3.2 RED ALERT BACKBOX
0 0 0 The detector base is to be secured with t\VO M4 x I inch pan
head steel screws zinc plated and passivated or equivalent at
the fixing centres shown in Fig. 2
0 3.3 DHM69 DECKHEAD MOUNTING

The Dcckhead Mounting Kit is d_esigncd to be used with the
M900 Series detectors when fitted in particularly damp or
~ / '--,L_______\__AL_I_G-NM..:E_N_T_l_~_I_C_AT_O_R_,
(TYPICAL) dirty environments.
The housing is secured with two No. 8 x 1 1/, inch counter-
Fig. I Alignment Indicator Diagram
sunk zinc plated and passivated steel screws [o~ equivalent] at
the fixing centres shown in [Fig. 3]. The surface chosen for
3. FIXING THE DETECTOR BASE the mounting should be flat over the area of the underside of
the housing to ensure a stable fixing and strong enough to take
3.1 TO A CONDUIT BOX the weight of the mounting, detector base and sensor.
The detector base is to be secured directly to the conduit box The Deckhcad Mounting Kit comprises:
with two M4 pan head steel screws, zinc plated and a) A housing having 20mm breakouts for
passivated. The fixing slot allows the mounting to be fitted to conduit connection,
both B.E.S.A. conduit boxes having fitting points at 50mm cen-
tres and European conduit boxes with fitting points at 70mm b) two M4 x 12mm long, pan head, zinc plated
centres. One of the fixing slots has an enlarged end, to allow a and passivated steel screws to secure the
screw to be loosely placed in the conduit box, to allow easy lo- detector base.
cating of the base to the mounting holes. c) an M4 x 8mm long pan head, zinc-plated and
passivated steel screw with a brass cup washer
and a brass plain washer.

Registered Office: 19-21 Dcnm:ar-k Street, Wokingham, Ber-ks RG40 2QE
A 1:qc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-I1
03 4/99
AUGNMENT ARROW
DETECTOR BASE
MOUNTING
128.5 PCD FIXING CENTRES
·f
I i
Fig. 3 Fixing Dimensions for DHM69 Deckhead Mounting
hem c) is prO\'ldcd for the earth terminal.
The deckhead housing is aligned so that the arrow 4. DETECTOR BASE WIRING
which is embossed in the bottom is in line with the di-
rection required for visual inspection of the sensor Detectors will nonnally be connected in zones. All detec-
LED tors on a zone arc connected in parallel and some fonn of
end-of-line device, fitted at the last detector must be used to
monitor line continuity. The number of detectors pcnnit-
3.4 TO OTHER SURFACES tcd per zone and the type of end-of-line device are depend-
ent on the type of controller installed.
The detector base is to be secured with two No. 8 x 1/? inch
pan head steel screws zinc plated and passivated or equiva- The detector base is to be wired as shown in Fig. 5 and with
lent at the fixing centres shown in Fig. 2. The surface cho- reference to publication 05A-02-ll.
sen for the mounting should be flat over the area of the base A maximum of two 1.5 2mm cables may be connected at
to ensure a stable fixing. any one tenninal. A remote LED should be wired if
specified. Breakouts are provided at the outer flanges for
surface cable mounting.
3.5 DETECTOR PROTECTIVE CAGE
The detector cage [Fig. 4] is designed to be fitted in areas
-vhcre there is a high risk of mechanical damage to a
Jetector. The cage baseplate which is in two halves may be
fitted after the detector base has been wired in.
PAGE2of3
'E
'
PUBLICATION: 018-03-11
4.1 INITIAL WIRING CHECKS

Carry out continuity and insulation tests in accordance with
0 publication OSA-02-1 I. Use the shorting plug to check the
cable parameters.
4.2 CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION

R Remote LED connector
L Line B IN/OUT
LI Line A IN/OUT
L2 Switched output [for
future use]
0 JMijm
I 6th April 1999
k------ 146mm ~ - - - - - - -
I
71mm
l I.-- 79mm----<o,
Fig. 4 Detector Protective Cage
MINERY,~
CONTROLLER
L1 L1
0 0 0
L2 L2 L2
R R
0
TO+VE
TERMINAL
l Of L1
,,
L1 L1
L
0 0
L2 L2
R R
0 0
Fig. 5 Simplified Circuit Diagram

Registered Offict: 19--21 01.'nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE:

PUBLICATION: 01B-03-C1

M900 DETECTOR BASE AND ACCESSORIES
COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
1. INTRODUCTION 2. FITTING THE SMARTCARD AND
Note: It is essential that the installation is thoroughly LABEL CARRIERS
checked before proceeding with commissioning.
Refer to Figs I and 2. The address information for the
detector is stored in an EPROM on a separate address
Before connecting the zone wiring to the control equipment a smartcard with an associated label carrier which is used to
general inspection of the system should be carried out. In identify the address and zone of the detector. The smartcard
particular the position of the detector bases must be checked to and label carrier are supplied as shown in Fig. I. The
ensure that the requirements given in OIB-03-ll M900 Series smartcard is pre-programmed with the address of the detector
Detector Base and Accessories are met. via "CONSYS' version 9.1 or later. The smartcard and label
carrier arc then detached from the sprue and fitted to the
ADDRESS bottom of the detector [Fig. 2]. When the detector is fitted to
EPROM ~ ·sMARTCARD' the base and turned until fully located the srnartcard and label
carrier an: then transferred to the base. If the detector is
removed from the base, the smartcard and label carrier remain
with the base.
Fit the smartcard and address label carrier to the detector:
RECESS FOR
PAE-NUMBERED -.:;:
a) Check that the address labels are correct and
ADDRESS LABELS the that the detector is the correct device type,
SPRUE - - - b) remove the smartcard and address label carrier
from the sprue and fit to the detector as shown
in Fig. 2.
ADORES$
LABEL
CARRIER
Fig. I Smartcar-d and Address Label Carrier
~ "U"SHAPED
CHANNEL
~~ CONNECTOR 'O'SHAPEO
\\ BLOCK PART
MOUNTING
~- RECESS
LOCATING
POSTS
OVERHANGING
FEATURES
Fig. 2 Fitting Smartcard and Address Label Carrier

Registl."red Office: l,._21 Denmark StrN.>t, Wokingham, Berks RG-10 2QE
M900 SERIES
01B-03-C1
03 4/99
3. FITTING AND COMMISSIONING LOCKING

THE DETECTORS ~ DEVICE
'
Fit the detectors as follows:
c) Remove the shorting adaptor if fitted.
d) place the specified detector onto the base and
turn until it locates on the base, then turn
clockwise until fully located [the raised ribs
aligned],
e) ifa locking key [Fig. 3] has been inserted the
detector may now only be removed by
inserting an unlocking tool and depressing
the key prior to turning the detector TEMPORARY
anticlockwise. The unlocking tool [locally PARK
manufactured] is described in Publication PLUNGER
0 I B-04-D2.
Fig. 3 Locking Device
CAUTION:
ENSURE THAT ALL DUST COVER ARE

REMOVED FROM DETECTORS BEFORE
4. HANDOVER TO CUSTOMER
COMMISSIONING. Hand the installation over to the customer in accordance
with Company recognised procedures which includes
guidance on preventing false alarms. Ensure that the
customer knows how to use and care for the equipment. If
ion-chamber smoke detectors are fitted, ensure that he is
aware of the official regulations should one be lost or
damaged.
JM/jm
16th April I 999
PAGE 2 of 2
M900 SERIES
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···-
EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION: 01 B-03-S1
11111 SECURITY ISSUE No. & DATE: 001 01/96

M900 DETECTORS AND BASE
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

1. INTRODUCTION Note: The return of Ion Chamber Detectors [MF901 is
to be carried out in accordance with the latest is-
This publication details the various checks recommended for sue of Publication TG 10.4 Company Standing
keeping the detectors in good working order. Carry out main- Instructions for the Handling and Transportation
tenance on control equipment and auxiliary equipment as laid of Radioactive Materials.
down in the relevant publication.
1.2 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE

WARNING:
a) Para I. I a)-c),
ANY AUXILIARY UNITS WHICH ARE b) Smoke Detectors [MF90I, MR901 and
CONNECTED MAY OPERATE DURING THE MR901TJ arc to be removed and a replace-
FOLLOWING PROCEDURES UNLESS ment inserted when indicated by the Minerva
DISABLED BY WITHDRAWING FUSES ETC. control Ier,
ATTENTION IS DRAWN TO PUBLICATION c) check each detector for correct

05A-03-S1 IF THE: SYSTEM INCLUDES AN operation. Then as described in Para 1.1 t).
ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED GAS
EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM.
JM/jm
23rd January 1996
1.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION
a) Ensure that there have been no structural chang-
es which may require a change of
protection. Any such changes must be the sub-
ject of a report to the Service Department,
h) check that no physical dmnagc has occ~irrcd to
the detectors, and that stability and alignment
arc not disturbed,
c) check that the interconnecting cables arc un-
damaged and secure,
d) check Heat Detectors [MD900 Series] and
Smoke Detectors [MF901, MR90I and
MR90 IT] to confirm that a clear space of at least
600mm radius is preserved in all directions be-
low the mounting plane of the detector,
c) check Smoke Dclectors [MF901, MR901 and
MR90IT] to confinn that the passage of smoke
into the detector i:s not obstructed by surround-
ing objects,
f) check those detectors as required in the servic-
ing schedule for correct operation. Detectors
which fail to operate satisfactorily must be re-
moved, a replacement inserted and the zone re-
commissioned. Do not attempt to disassemble
or repair a detector but return it to the factory for
disposal.
© 1996 Thorn Security Limited PAGE 1 of 1
Registered Office: Securit)' House The Summit H~nworlh Road Sunbnry-on-Thames 1\liddle~ex TWl6 508

MF901 ION CHAMBER ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTOR
1. INTRODUCTION 2.1 CHAMBER

The MF90 I Ion-Chamber Smoke detector forms part of the The MF90 l uses an ionisation chamber to detect the presence
M900 Series of Analogue Addressable Fire detectors. The of aerosol combustion products generated in fires, ionised air
detector is intended to plug into an M600/M900 Universal base within the chamber is affected by these products such that an
to form an analogue addressable detector. The detector is imbalance occurs increasing the potential of the collector. The
designed to transmit, to a remote control equipment, analogue chamber is represented diagrammatically in Fig. I.
signals which represent the state of the sensing chamber.
The small radioactive source [<33.3kBq of Americium 241]
ionises the air within the volume enclosed by the slotted outer
cover. The ionisation causes a small current to flow between
the source and the cover which have a fixed voltage applied
WARNING: between them.
THESE DETECTORS CONTAIN A SMALL Within the chamber is a perforated electrode known as the
AMOUNT OF RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL collector. This electrode will. under clean air conditions,
[Americium 241). DETECTORS ARE SAFE assume a certain potential relative to the outer cover. This
UNDER THE PRESCRIBED CONDITIONS OF potential is due to the radioactive emissions ionising the air and
USE BUT MUST NOT BE DISMANTLED BY is relatively stable.
UNAUTHORISED PERSONS. TRANSPORT
If smoke/aerosols arc introduced into the chamber they effect
AND STORAGE OF DETECTORS MUST BE
the ionised air such that an imbalance occurs increasing the
ARRANGED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
potential of the collector. The magnitude of this potential can
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.
be used to indicate the smoke density see Fig. 2. The current
that flows across the chamber is very small and the device used
to sense the potential of the collector must therefore be of very
high impedance.
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE
d,\_ -=~l'' 1
:HAMBER BALANCE
10
;,?E=LE=C=T=R=O=D=-E-~ COLLECTOR
+11_ ..,.. POTENTIAL

V
--t--
/'/1'\I
Ir u
5
____ _J Jill ·--- CHAMBER

~~---COVE;,B__
0 0.5
SMOKE/AEROSOL DENSITY
Fig. I Representational Diagram of Ion-Chamber "y"
Fig. 2 Graph Showing Collector Potential

Relative to Smoke/Aerosol Density
To ensure high stability and resistance to corrosion all metal

parts of the chamber are of stainless steel and the critical
insulators are of P.T.F.E.

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmnk Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE:

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D3
03 4/99
SWITCHED BASE
OUTPUT
OL2
REMOTE
INDICATOR
A
L1
LINE IN
AMPLIFIER
ADDRESS
,.",~
_,._ ..._ - .!. - _... _...
{>- '' BRIDGE
VREF
: S1
CURRENT 8
'
SINK
~-r.------+-oL
LINE IN
Fig. 3 Simplified Block Schematic Diagram of Detector
2.2 CIRCUIT 3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION

! 2.2.1 STANDARD DETECTOR The major components of the detector are:
A simplified block schematic of the circuit is given in Fig. 3. • Body Assembly
The voltage at the collector electrode of the chamber is fed • Printed Circuit/Chamber Assembly
to a high impedance amplifier which buffers and scales the
voltage signal. This voltage. and a fixed reference voltage • Baille and Closure Ring
Vrct: is fed to the electronic changeover switch SI. • Outer Cover
The switch SI, under the control of the logic circuit,
switches either the modified chamber voltage or the An exploded view of the detector is given in Fig. 4.
reference voltage to the input of the voltage-controlled,
current sink. The logic circuit responds to the state of the
input Signal Processing input which operates by decoding 3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY
signals from the line and comparing them with a pre- The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which
programmed address cede. This then sends signals to the arc secured the four detector contacts which align with
logic switch SW I (toggling between ident and condition contacts in the M600/M900 Universal base. The moulding
current). SW2 (connecting or removing current sink from
incorporates securing features to retain the detector in the
line) and the two auxiliary outputs.
base.
! The currents drawn by the current sink arc measured and
processed at the Control Unit, [ where any appropriate action
The PCB is fastened to the body by four screws which screw
!
~-
is taken].
into the four base contacts through holes in the body. These
screws both hold the assembly together mechanically and
provide electrical contact between the contacts and the PCB.
The Analogue Output current flows through the internal
LED indicator which lights each time the detector is polled.
3.2 FINAL ASSEMBLY
2.3 WIRING The assembly described above in Para 3. t is, in effect, a
complete detector but the remaining components provide
Loop cabling may be connected to base terminals Land LI further protection against external influences.
in any order as the detector bridge circuit makes it polarity
insensitive. The insect screen is fitted over the outer cover of the
chamber to prevent the entry of insects which could cause
A drive is provided for a remote indicator connected false alarms. The baffle, in conjunction with the outer cover,
between loop positive and tenninal R, therefore at a detector is carefully designed to allow easy entry to smoke and, at the
where a remote indicator is connected, the polarity of the same time, to minimise the effects of wind on the
loop must be known. chamber. Both the baffle and the insect screen are retained
by the outer cover which is a snap fit onto the body assembly.
PAGE2of8
LOGO LABEL
BAFFLE
IONISATION CHAMBER
PCB
BODY
G§l
BODY___..-
PRESSINGS
CONNECTOR
BLOCK
i
Fig. 4 Exploded View of MF90 I Detector

Reghten"ll Office: 19-21 Denmark Street. Wokingham, lk-rks RG40 2Q£
A -tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D3
03 4/99
43
J
/az:;:;::=----------------l=~,==c?:+= TYPICAL 0.5
10
_ _ _ _ _ __..IT0.5
109
Fig. 5 Overall Dimensions of MF901 Detector
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 4.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

4.1 MECHANICAL EMC: Equals or exceeds the
requirements of
Dimensions BS EN 50081-1 and
The o,·crall dimensions are shown in Fig. 5. BS EN 50082-1.
Materials
Note: The above standards fulfill the requirements
Body and cover: FRI 10 'BAYBLEND' of the European Directive for EMC
flame retardant. (89/336/EEC).
Chamber Components: Bright Stainless Steel to

BS 1449: P1. 2 Grade 316 4.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
S 16. PTFE, and
polycarbonate. The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and
supply voltage of24V unless otherwise specified.
\\'eight
Detector: 0.137kg Characteristic Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Detector + Base: 0.206kg Loop Voltage 18 24 32 V
Quiescent Current 100 120 200 µA
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL !dent Current 10.8 11.2 11.6- mA
Condition Current 2.5 7 24 mA
Temperature
Table. I Electrical Characteristics
Operating: -20°C to+ 70°C
Storage: -25°C to +80°C
Note: Operation below Ci'C is not recommended

unless steps are taken to eliminate
condensation and hence ice formation on the
detector.
Relative Humidity 95% [ non-condensing]

Shock:
Vibration: To BS 5445: Pl. 7
Impact: [EN54-7]
Corrosion:
PAGE 4 of 8
4.5 PERFORMANCE In clean air conditions [y = O] the value of condition current

CHARACTERISTICS indicates the quiescent condition of the chamber. Any
deviation from 7mA will indicate a change in the ambient
The MF90I, with the M600/M900 base, forms an analogue conditions. This may be caused by pressure or by a drift in
addressable detector which transmits, to a remote the chamber operating point. In either case, the deviation
equipment, signals representing the state of the sensing may be used in the control equipment to correct the alann
chamber. The control equipment evaluates these signals threshold level.
against predctcrminc·d criteria and decides when an
ALARM condition should be signalled. The information
given below therefore relates to the performance of the 4.5.2 EFFECT OF AIRFLOW ON
MF90 I simply as a transducer, since the system alarm SENSITIVITY
response is determined by the control unit.
The signal status of the MF90 I detector has been
4.5.1 RESPONSE TO SMOKE specifically designed to insensitive to abnormal air
velocoties.
The effect of normal air velocities upon sensitivity is
measured with reference to the response of a standard
negligible, however if the air normal velocity is known to be
Measuring Ionisation Chamber [MIC]. Smoke density is
above 4m/sec, then the alarm threshold should be set
measured as a "y-value", calculated from the change in MIC approximately I mA lower.
current, which is proportional to smoke density.
The condition current of the MF90 I is a linear function of
MIC current, such that the change in condition current is 4.5.3 THE EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON
approximately a quartetr of the percentage change in MIC SENSITIVITY
current, for currents less than 20mA.
The detector incorporates temperature compensation and its
This is shown graphicall'y in tenns ofy value in Fig. 6. condition current will be substantially constant over its
CURRENT specified operating range.
mA
20
19 I
I 4.5.4 THE EFFECT OF ATMOSPHERIC
18
17
----------------~- PRESSURE ON SENSITIVITY
I
16 The working point of the chamber will vary with
1S atmospheric pressure and also therefore with altitude. The
14 relationship between air pressure and condition current [in
13 clean air] is given in Fig. 7.
12
The change caused by normal variations in atmospheric
11
10-
9
/ pressure is insignificant. However, for installations at
altitudes of 1500m or more, the alann threshold should be
•
7
set to allow for the modified working point .
6
s
4
3
2-
0 o.s 1.0
SMOKE DENSITY ( y-value}
Fig. 6 Condition Current vs Smoke Density

Rt'"gistered Office: 19-21 Denmark Stret""t, Wokingham, Berks RG40 ZQE

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D3
03 4/99
CONDITION CURRENT
INmA
10
6
-- t---- t----
1--_
- ----- - ---- r---

f-.__
4
0
-1000 -500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 HEIGHT METRES
830 760 0 550 ATMOSPHERIC
I . I
1.------.j NORMA:·:ARIATION IN ATM0:: HERIC
PRESSURE AT SEA LEVEL
PRESSURE mm Hg
Fig. 7 Change in Detector Condition Current Against Atmospheric pressure
. 4.6 RESPONSE TO FIRE TESTS Recommended threshold currents and delays are given in
Table 2 for the MF90 I detector.
' The response of an ionisation detector to a particular 'real'
t. fire will depend, to a large extent, on the aerosol content of Guidance on the choice of threshold sening and delay is
f the smoke produced in the fire. However other factors such given in publication 018-03-01 but it is necessary also to
!
consider the effects of air movement and altin1de.
I' as the detector smoke entry characteristics, the development
:,f the fire and the thermal lift produced by the fire arc also
important. In order to evaluate the response under realistic
In general, in areas where continuous forced ventilation
exists, it is recommended that:
conditions, detectors are subjected to test fires which cover
a range of fire types. These tests are defined in BS 5445 : Pts a) A High sensitivity setting should be used if
7 and 9 [EN54 Pts 7 and 9] and include mandatory fire tests, the airflow exceeds 4m/s unless there is a
which arc: likelihood of spurious alam1s.
b) Low sensitivity setting should only be used
TF2 smouldering pyrolysis when the airflow is less than 4m/s.
TF3 glowing smouldering (cotton)
TF4 open' plastics (polyurethane foam) THRESHOLD
TF5 liquid (n-heptane) EQUIVALENT y CURRENT (MA) DELAY
SENSITIVITY VALUE (SEC)
MF901
Fire tests have shown that the MF90I passes the above tests High 0.4 12.5 6
with the Minerva Analogue Addressable Controller High with Delay 0.4 12.5 24
configured to MRF0I Nonnal or High sensitivity settings.
Normal 0.75 14.5 6
Normal with 0.75 14.5 24
4.7 CHOICE OF ALARM THRESHOLD Delay
Low 1.1 18.0 6
The Minerva Analogue Addressable Controllers have three
sensitivity settings for the MF90I [sec Table 2]. Low with Delay - NOT RECOMMENDED
For the vast majority of installations, the MF90 I should be Table. 2 Recommended Threshold Currents
configured to normal sensitivity. High sensitivity should
only be used in installations where very early fire detection Sensitivity of the MF90 I reduces ·with increasing altitude
is required and where the environment is benign and clean, and it is recommended that:
eg computer suites. Low sensitivity should only be used
where delayed detection is acceptable or desirable or a) For installations sited above 1500m, the
possibly where an installation is prone to false alarms. High sensitivity setting should be used.
b) The Low sensitivity setting should not be
used for installations sited above I 000m.
PAGE 6 of8
4.8 APPROVALS detector [Fig. 9]. When the detector is fitted to the base and
turned until fully located the smartcard and label carrier are
At LPCB, the MF90l has been subjected to extensive then transferred to the base. If the detector is removed from
electrical, environmental and fire tests to EN54 Pts 7 and 9 the base. the smartcard and label carrier remain with the
and the detector is LPCB approved for use on MF90 l base.
Nonna! and High sensi1'ivity controller setting.
ADDRESS
EPROM
CAUTION:
ONLY DETECTOR SENSITIVITY MF901

'HIGH' AND MF901 'NORMAL SET IN THE
CONTROLLER BY CONSYS HAVE BEEN
ASSESSED AND APPROVED BY LPCB.
RECESS FOR
PRE-NUMBERED
ADDRESS LABELS
SPRUE
5. SMARTCARD AND ADDRESS

LABEL CARRIER
ADDRESS
Refer to Figs 8 and 9. The address information for the LABEL
detector is stored in an EPROM on a separate smartcard with CARRIER
an associated label carrier which is used to identify the
Fig. 8 Smartcard and Label Carrier
address and zone of the detector. The smartcard and label
carrier arc supplied as shown in Fig. 8 and arc ordered
separately from the detector. The smartcard is pre-
programmed with the address of the detector via 'CONSYS •
\"Crsion 9.1 or later. The smartcard and label carrier are then
detached from the sprue and fitted to the bottom of the
II
---d~ 'U'SHAPEO
CHANNEL
~~ CONNECTOR "D'SHAPED
II BLOCK L-_J,-sccl-.1--- PART
~- MOUNTING
RETAINING RECESS
PIMPLES
OVERHANGING
FEATURES

Registered Office: 19-21 Denm2rk Stre-et, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE:

M900 SERIES
01B-03-D3
03 4/99
The detector is identified by the logo label colouring as
shown in Fig. IO.
Fig. to Detector Identification
MF90 I detector: 516-051-001
Smartcard and Address Label Carrier: 517-051-002
M600/M900 Universal Detector Base: 517-050-001
0 I B-03-D2 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL BASE AND ACCESSORIES, PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
0IB-03-11 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
0IB-03-CI M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
16th April 1999
r-
'
I
'''I
PAGE 8 of 8

MR901 OPTICAL ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTOR

1. INTRODUCTION 2.2 FEATURES OF MEASURING CHAMBER
The MR901 optical smoke detector forms part of the M900 The MR90 I uses a unique measuring system shown in Fig.
Series Analogue Addressable fire detectors. The detector plugs 2. Unlike most other optical scatter detectors the MR901 docs
into the M600/M900 Universal base to form an analogue not use vertical chevrons to exclude ambient light, but uses
addressable detector which transmits analogue signals concentric baffles. This approach gives a better signal to noise
representing the state of the detector chamber to a remote ratio The chamber is the subject of a patent application.
control equipment.
Smoke incident on the detector is channelled into the detector
by the cover fins and pass through the insect screen which will
exclude most insects. Some of the smoke passes into the
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE scatter volume before passing out the other side of the detector.
The MR901 operates by sensing the optical scatter from smoke The emitter [sec Fig. I] is a GaAIAs solid state type operating
particles generated in a fire. in the near infra-red at 880nm, while the detector is a matched
silicon photodiode. These devices together with their
associated lenses are held in place by the labyrinth
2.1 OPTICAL SYSTEM mouldings. The design of the labyrinth is such that the
presence of small insects such as thrips should not cause false
The MR901 detects Yisiblc: particles produced in fires by using alanns.
the light scattering properties of the pa11icles. The detector uses
the optical arrangement shown in Fig. I.
The optical system consists of an emitter and detector, with a
lens in front of each, so arranged that their optical axes cross in
the sampling volume. The emitter, with its lens, produces a
narrow beam of light which is prevented from reaching the
detector by the baffles. When smoke is present in the sampling
volume a proportion of the light is scattered, some of which
reaches the detector. For a given type of smoke, the light
reaching the detector is proportional to the smoke density. The
output from the detector is converted into an analogue electrical
signal and transmitted to the Fire Controller.
PHOTO DETECTOR
SAMPLING VOLUME
Fig. I Optical Chamber Schematic

Rt>gistered Officl': 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QF.

'I
!
M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D6
03 4/99
INSECT
SCREEN
SMOKE PATH
/ INSECT
SCREEN
FINS
SAMPLING
VOLUME
LABYRINTH
Fig. 2 Measuring Chamber Showing Smoke Flow Path
2.3 CIRCUIT OPERATION The signal processing decodes the signals from the line and
compares them with a detector address code. On receiving
A simplified block schematic of the detector is given in Fig. a correct address the logic circuit then switches S2 to supply
3. voltage to the current sink, and SI to the reference voltage
The emitter is pulsed every I Os to reduce quiescent for idcnt current pulse and then to the stored reference
current. The optical pulse signal. as received by the voltage output from the synchronous detector to give a
photodctcctor, is amplified and fed to the synchronous condition current pulse. The logic circuit also controls the
detector. This detector is provided with a reference signal switched output and remote indicator output.
from the timer/oscillator and gives an output proportional to The currents drawn by the current sink are measured and
the phorodctcctor signal which is stored on a 'memory' processed at the control panel, where alarm and fault
:::apacitor. The voltage on the capacitor is updated every I Os decisions arc made.
when the emitter pulses.
The analogue output current flows through the internal LED
The signal voltage, together with a reference voltage, is fed indicator which lights every time the detector is polled. In
to the electronic changeover switch SI. alarm the LED is polled continuously and the LED appears
permanently ON.
BASE
LINEIN
-------------<,--.---<>---..------1'---,----,p---j-0L
TIMER/
OSCILLATOR
STATUS~-~~
"" ADDRESS
SYNCHRONOUS
DETECTOR
""'
""'"'
SENSOR
' "
"' LEO
0-----+-ou
llNEIN
'------------o----/-<>L2
SWITCHED
OUTPUT
'--------------0---1-0R
REMOTE
INDICATOR
Fig. 3 Block Schematic of detector
PAGE 2 of7
2.4 WIRING 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Loop cabling may be connected to base terminals L and LI 4.1 MECHANICAL
in any order as the deteclor bridge circuit makes it polarity
insensitive. Dimensions
A drive is provided for a remote indicator connected The dimensions of the MR901 detector are shown in Fig. 5.
between loop positive and terminal R, therefore at a detector
where a remote indicator is connected, the polarity of the
loop must be known. Materials
Body and cover: FR 110 '"BAYBLEND"'
Fire Resistant
3. MECHANICAL
Weight
CONSTRUCTION
detector: 0.112kg
The major components of the detector are:
detector plus base: 0.190kg
• Body and Contacts
• Printed Circuit
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
• Labyrinth
Operating Temperature: -20°C to+ 70°C
• Outer Cover - but sec note belO\v.
Storage Tempcrnture: -25°C to +80°C
An exploded view of the detector is given in Fig. 4.
Note: Operation below Cf'C is not recommended
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY condensation and hence ice formation on the
The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which detector.
arc secured four detector contacts which align with the
contacts in the M600/M900 Universal base. The moulding
incorporates securing features to retain the detector in the Relative Humidity: 95% non-condensing
base.
The PCB is fastened to the body by four screws which screw Shock: J
into the four base contacts through holes in the body. These Vibration: J To BS 5445:Pt 7
screws both hold the assembly together mechanically and Impact: ) [EN54-7]
provide electrical contact between the contacts and the PCB. Corrosion: )
3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/OPTICAL ARRAY 4.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

ASSEMBLY EMC: Equals or exceeds the
All electronic components arc fitted to the PCB including
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
the Alam, LED, the JR emitter and the photo-diode. The
floor of the labyrinth clips into three holes on the PCB, the BS EN 50082-1.
upper and lower labyrinth parts clip onto the labyrinth floor.
of the the European Directive for EMC
3.3 TEST AND FINAL ASSEMBLY (89/336/EEC).
The detectors arc fully functionally tested and their
sensitivities set in a smoke tunnel to ensure correct
calibration. The sealing ring and labels are then fitted to
complete the detector assembly.

Re~istered Office: 19--21 Denmark Stn!el, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D6
03 4/99
LOGO LABEL
CLOSURE RING
LABYRINTH
. "
PCB
.
.
"
Fig. 4 MR901 Optical Smoke Detector - General Assembly
' PAGE 4 of7

43
10
t 1•---------------------~To.s
109
' + ' TYPICAL 0.5
Fig. 5 MR901 - Overall Dimensions
4.4 ELECTRICAL. CHARACTERISTICS The condition current of the MR90 I is a linear function of
obscuration for a giwn type of smoke. For grey smoke the
The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and current is given by:
with supply voltage of24V unless otherwise specified.
Characteristic Min. Typ. Max. Unit CONDITION CURRENT (le)= 8.8 + 50 x 'm' mA
Loop Voltage 18 24 32 V
Quiescent Current 150 240 300 µA This is shown graphically in Fig. 6.
ldent Current 8.5 9.0 9.5 mA
Average Condition Current 7.8 8.8 9.8 mA
Table. I Electrical Characteristics CONDITION
CURRENT
mA
20
19
4.5 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 18
17
The MR 90 I detector, with the M900 Base, forms an 16
15
analogue addressable detector which transmits signals
representing the detector analogue current levels to a remote "
13
12
I
I
control unit. The control unit evaluates these signals against 11
I
I
pre-determined criteria and decides when an alarm condition 10
I
has occurred. The information given below therefore relates 9
I
8
to the performance of the MR90I as a transducer only, since 1 I
I
the system alarm response is detennined by the control unit. 6
I
s
4 I
3 I
2 I
4.5.1 RESPONSE TO SMOKE 1fmdB/m)
1 011 0.2 0.3
0
The response of an optical smoke detector is normally 0 2 [%Im) 4 6
measured with reference to the obscuration produced by
smoke. Obscuration is measured in percent per metre, or in OBSCURATION
dB per metre. The latter unit is used in BS 5445 Pt 7 and is
designated 'rn'.
Unfortunately, there is no fixed relationship between optical
!Grey Smoke)
scattering and obscuration, the ratio between them being
dependent on the type of smoke. For convenience, 'grey' Normal Alarm threshold= 0.12 dB/m or 2.7%/m typical,
smoke is normally used but white and black smokes give which corresponds to an alann threshold of 14.SmA.
more or less scattered light respectively for a given
obscuration level.

Registeri:-d Office: 19-21 Denmark St~et, Wokingham, Berks RG"O 2QE

M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D6
03 4/99
Nominal Nominal Nominal Smoke

Panel Panel
No Smoke Alarm Lift Sensitivity (Grey Smoke)
Setting Threshold
lcoN mA %/m dB/m
High 8.8 13.6 4.8 2.2 0.10
Normal 8.8 14.8 6.0 2.7 0.12
Low 8.8 18.0 9.2 4.1 0.18
Table. 2
4.6 RESPONSE TO FIRE TESTS

CAUTION:
The response of an optical scatter detector to a particular
·real' fire will depend, to a large extent, on the colour of the ONLY DETECTOR SENSITIVITY MR901
smoke produced in the fire. However other factors such as "HIGH' AND MR901 'NORMAL: SET IN THE
the detector smoke entry characteristics, the development of CONTROLLER BY CONSYS HAVE BEEN
the fire and the thennal lift produced by the fire are also ASSESSED AND APPROVED BY LPCB.
important. In order to evaluate the response under realistic
conditions. detectors arc subjected to test fires which cover
a range of fire types. These tests arc defined in BS 5445 : Pts
7 and 9 [EN5..J. Pts 7 and 9] and include mandatory fire tests,
which arc:
5. 'SMARTCARD' AND ADDRESS
TF2 smouldering pyrolysis
LABEL CARRIER
TF3 glowing smouldering (cotton)
Refer to Figs 7 and 8. The address information for the
TF4 open plastics (polyurethane foam)
detector is stored in an EPROM on a separate smartcard with
TF5 liquid (n-heptanc) an associated label carrier which is used to identify the
address and zone of the detector. The smartcards and label
carriers arc supplied as shown in Fig. 7 and are ordered
Fire tests have shown that the MR90I passes the above tests separately from the detector. The smartcard is pre-
with the Minerva Analogue Addressable Controller programmed with the address of the detector via 'CONSYS'
configured to MR901 Normal or High sensitivity settings. version 9.1 or later. The smartcard and label carrier are then
detector [Fig. 8]. When the detector is fitted to the base and
4.7 CHOICE OF ALARM THRESHOLD turned until fully located· rhe smartcard and label carrier are
then transferred to the base. If the detector is removed from
The Minerva Analogue Addressable Controllers have three the base, the smartcard and label carrier remain with the
sensitivity settings for the MR90 I [see Table 2]. base.
For the vast majority of installations, the MR90 I should be
configured to normal sensitivity. High sensitivity should ADDRESS
only be used in installations where very early fire detection EPROM 'SMARTCARD°
is required and where the environment is benign and clean,

cg computer suites. Low sensitivity should only be used
where delayed detection is acceptable or desirable or
possibly where an installation is prone to false alanns.
RECESS FOR
PRE-NUMBERED
4.8 APPROVALS ADDRESS LABELS
At LPCB, the MR901 has been subjected to extensive SPRUE

electrical, environmental and fire tests to EN54 Pts 7 and 9
and the detector is LPCB approved for use on MR901
Nonna! and High sensitivity controller settings.
ADDRESS
LABEL
CARRIER
PAGE 6 of7
~~
'U'SHAPED
CHANNEL
CONNECTOR 'D'SHAPEO
\\ BLOCK PART
~
MOUNTING
RETAINING RECESS
OVERHANGING
FEATURES
Fig. 8 Fitting Smartcard and Address Label Carrier to detector
sho\rn in Fig. 9.
BLUE
- - - - - - - COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
Fig. 9 lktector Identification
MR901 detector: 516-057-001
M600/M900 Universal Detector Base: 517-050-001
Address and Label Carrier: 517-051-002
0 I B-03-D2 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL BASE AND ACCESSORIES - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN 11\FORMATION
01 B-03-I I M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
0 I B-03-CI M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
JM/Jm
16th April 1999

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

''
'
i
r
t-

MR901T HIGH PERFORMANCE OPTICAL [HPO]
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTOR
1. INTRODUCTION 2.1 OPTICAL SYSTEM
The MR90IT high performance optical smoke detector fonns The MR901T detects visible particles produced in fires by us-
part of the M900 Series Analogue Addressable fire ing the light scattering properties of the particles. The detector
detectors. The detector plugs into the M600/M900 Universal uses the optical arrangement shown diagrammatically in Fig. I.
Base to form an analogue addressable detector which transmits The optical system consists of an emitter and detector, with a
analogue signals representing the state of the detector chamber lens in front of each, so arranged that their optical axes cross in
to a remote control equipment. the sampling volume. The emitter, with its lens, produces a
narrow beam of light which is prevented from reaching the de-
tector by the baffles. When smoke is present in the sampling
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE volume a proportion of the light is scattered. some of which
reaches the detector. For a given type of smoke, the light
The MR90IT operates by sensing the optical scatter from reaching the detector is proportional to the smoke density. The
smoke particles generated in a fire. While the optical scatter de- output from the detector is converted into an analogue electri-
tector can give good detection pcrfonnance for the majority of cal signal and transmitted to the Fire Controller.
fires, some fast burning fires produce little visible smoke and
some produce very black smoke, neither of which arc easily de-
tected by the optical scatter detector. (Such fires are represented
in EN 54 Part 9 by Wood Crib and Heptane type fires
2.2 FEATURES OF MEASURING CHAMBER
respectively). These fires do however produce high heat out- The MR90IT uses a unique measuring system shown in Fig.
puts with an associated rise in air temperature. 2. Unlike most other optical scatter detectors the MR901T
The HPO detector has been designed to offer improved detec- does not use vertical chevrons to exclude ambient light, but
tion of such fires by detecting the rapid rate-of-rise of air tem- uses concentric baffies. This approach gives a better signal to
perature and under these conditions increasing the smoke noise ratio and allows the detector to be used in its high sensi-
detection sensitivity. This gives an earlier detection of such tivity enhanced mode. The chamber is the subject of a patent
fires and a broader detection capability than a standard detector. application.
The HPO detector has two sensing systems as follows:

• An optical chamber with associated electronics
to mcasu1e the presence of smoke by light scat-
ter.
• A thermistor bridge with its associated electron-
ics to detect the presence of hot air draughts.
~ -"' ,/"/
PHOTO DETECTOR
BAFFLE BAFFLE
SAMPLING VOLUME
Fig. 1 Optical Chamber Schematic
© 1999 Tyco Electronic: Product Group PAGE 1 of 8

Rl'gistl'red Officl': 19-21 Dl'nmark Strl'l'I, Wokingham, Bl'rks RG.i0 2QE

M900 SERIES
01B-03-D4
02 4/99
INSECT
SCREEN
/
SMOKE PATH
INSECT
SCREEN
FINS
SAMPLING
VOLUME
LABYRINTH
Fig. 2 Measuring Chamber Showing Smoke Flow Path
Smoke incident on the detector is channelled into the detec- 2.3 THERMAL MEASURING SYSTEM
tor by the CO\"Cf tins and pass through the insect screen which
will exclude most insects. Some of the smoke passes into Refer to Fig. 3.
the scatter YOlumc before passing out the other side of the This is designed to detect the presence of horizontally mov-
detector.
ing hot air draughts moving across the ceiling which occur
The emitter [sec Fig. I} is a GaAIAs solid state type operat- in a fast burning fire.
•,,.•. ing in the n~ar infra-red at 880nm, \Vhilc the detector is a
The measuring system consists of two fast responding nega-
matched silicon photodiode. These devices together with
'' their associated lenses are held in place by the labyrinth
tive temperature thcnnistors. A sensing thennistor is locat-
ed above the labyrinth under the cover in the airstream and
t mouldings. The design of the labyrinth is such that the pres-
ence of small insects such as thrips should not cause false
will detect any sudden changes in the air temperature or
draughts of hot air moving across the ceiling. The second
alarms. thermistor is located out of the airflow within the smoke lab-
yrinth and has a longer time constant and is used as a tem-
perature reference to compare the sensing thermistor
against. At a given temperature differential between the two
thermistors the comparator will switch and increase the gain
of the amplifier thereby increasing the sensitivity of the
detector. Fins located on the top of the labyrinth are de-
signed to increase air turbulence and the efficiency of the
sensing thcm1istor.
INSECT
SCREEN REFERENCE
INSECT
SCREEN
SENSING
AIR
FLOW
FINS
FINS
LABYRINTH
Fig. 3 Thermal Measuring System
PAGE 2 of 8
BASE
TIMER/
OSCILLATOR
REFERENCE
COMPA,llATOR
>--+--;_-::.~-=--=-~t-:=i7 GAIN
SENSING AMPLIFIER SYNCHRONOUS

Tt1ERMISTOR OETECTOFI
""
DIODE
SENSOR
LINE IN
"
l2
SwrTCHEO
OUTI><rr
R
""'°''
INDICll,TOR
Fig. 4 Block Schematic of detector

2.4 CIRCUIT OPERATION The analogue output current flows through the internal LED
indicator which lights every time the detector is polled. In
A simplified block schematic of the detector is given in Fig. alann the LED is polled continuously and the LED appears
4. to be permanently ON.
The GaAIAs emitter is pulsed only every IDs to reduce qui-
escent current. The pulse signal, as received by the photode-
tcctor, 1s amplified and fed to the synchronous 2.5 WIRING
detector. This detector is provided with a reference signal
from the timer/oscillator and gives an output proportional to Loop cabling may be connected to base tenninals Land LI
the photodctector signal! which is stored on a 'memory' in any order as the detector bridge circuit makes it polarity
capacitor. The voltage on the capacitor is updated every I Os insensitive.
when the emitter pulses. A drive is provided for a remote indicator connected be-
The gain of the optical system is fixed at two settings. On tween loop positive and terminal R, therefore at a detector
the nonnal setting when the comparator is off because there where a remote indicator is connected, the polarity of the
is not a large enough temperature differential between the loop must be known.
reference and sensing th::rmistors. This is the normal non-
enhanced state. The second more sensitive level is when
there is a significant temperature differential between the 3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
reference and sensing thermistors. When this occurs the
sensitivity of the detector is increased and the detector is said The major components of the detector are:
to be enhanced • Body and Contacts
When the detector is in !he 'Enhanced Mode', the detector • Printed Circuit
will only alarm if a smoke signal is present. The presence
of rising temperature alone cannot cause an alarm. • Labyrinth
The signal voltage, together with a reference voltage, is fed • Outer Cover
to the electronic changeover switch SI.
The signal processing decodes the signals from the line and An exploded view of the detector is given in Fig. 5.
compares them with a detector address code. On receiving
a correct address the logic circuit then switches S2 to supply
voltage to the current sink, and S 1 to the reference voltage
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY
for ident current pulse and then to the stored reference volt-
age output from the synchronous detector to give a condition The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which
current pulse. The logic circuit also controls the switched are secured four detector contacts which align with the con-
output and remote indicator output. tacts in the M600/M900 Universal base. The moulding in-
The currents drawn by the current sink are measured and corporates securing features to retain the detector in the base
processed at the control panel, where alarm and fault deci- and the connector block to connect between the address key
sions are made. and the circuit.

i Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
I
M900 SERIES
01 B-03-O4
02 4/99
LOGO LABEL
t .,
/,o=,5,.---,~---PCB
' "
"e
"
C§)
BODY~
PRESSINGS CONNECTOR
BLOCK
Fig. 5 MR901T High Performance Optical Smoke Detector - General Assembly
PAGE 4 of8
PUBLICATION: 01B-03-O4
ISSUE No. & DATE: 02
The PCB is fastened to the body by four screws which screw 4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
into the four base contacts through holes in the body. These
screws both hold the assembly together mechanically and Operating Temperature: -20°C to+ 70°C - but see note
provide electrical contact between the contacts and the PCB. below.
Storage Temperature: -25°C to +80°C
3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/OPTICAL ARRAY
ASSEMBLY Note: Operation below (/' C is not recommended un-
All electronic components are fitted to the PCB including less steps are taken to eliminate condensation
the Alarm LED, the JR emitter, the photo-diode and the and hence ice formation on the detector.
thcnnistors. The floor of the labyrinth clips into three holes
on the PCB, the upper and lower labyrinth parts clip onto the Relative Humidity: 95% non-condensing
labyrinth floor.
Shock: }
Vibration: } To BS 5445:Pt 7
3.3 TEST AND FINAL ASSEMBLY
Impact: } [EN54-7]
The detectors are fully fi.mctionally tested and their sensitiv- Corrosion: }
ities set in a smoke tunnel to ensure correct calibration. The
scaling ring and labels are then fitted to complete the detec-
tor assembly. 4.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
ESD: To IEC801-2 1991, Level 3
4. TECHNICAL. SPECIFICATION Radiated To ENV50140 1993

Magnetic IOV/m@20- 1000MHz
4.1 MECHANICAL
Fields: 80% modulation@ !kHz AM
Dimensions I Hz Pulse Modulated
The dimensions of the MR901T detector is shown in Fig. 6.
Fast Transient: To IEC801-4, Level 3
Materials
Slow High Energy: To ENV50142 1994@±1kV
Body and cover: FR I IO "BAYBLEND"'
Fire Resistant
\Veight
detector: 0.124kg
detector plus base: 0.192kg
43
~!-~-
1
Jaz::;::;:::Z.---------------l==,=='~~ TYPICAL 0.5
t --------.jTo.s 109
Fig. 6 MR901T - Overall Dimensions
© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE Sot 8

i Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street. Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
I
M900 SERIES
01B-03-D4
02 4/99
4.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS CONDITION

CURRENT
The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and mA
20
supply voltage of24V unless otherwise specified. 19
18
17
Typ 16
Characteristic Min. Max. Unit 1S --------
14
I
13
Loop Voltage 18 24 32 V I
12
I
11
Quiescent Current 150 240 300 µA 10
I
I
9
!dent Current 17 18 19 mA 8
I
7
I
Average Condition Current 7.8 8.8 9.8 mA 6 I
5 I
Table. 1 Electrical Characteristics 4 I
3 I
2 I
(mdBJm]
1 0.1 1 0.2 0.3
0
4.5 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 0 2 (%Im] 4 6
The MR90 IT detector, with the M600/M900 Universal base. OBSCURATION

forms an analogue addressable detector which transmits sig-
Fig. 7 Condition Current \'S Smoke Density
nals representing the detector analogue current levels to a re-
(Grey Smoke]
mote control unit. The control unit evaluates these signals
against pre-determined criteria and decides when an alann
condition has occurred. The infonnation given below there- 4.5.2 RESPONSE TO RATE OF CHANGE OF
fore relates to the performance of the MR901T as a transduc-
TEMPERATURE
er only, since lhc system alam1 response is dctcm1incd by the
·::ontrol unit. The detector will not be enhanced by slow rates of change of
temperature or negative rates of change of temperature. The
detector is designed to detect sudden horizontal draughts of
4.5.1 RESPONSE TO SMOKE hot air produced by fast burning fires. The enhancement
switching point has been set to allow the detection ofTFI
The response of an optical smoke detector is nonnally meas- type fires.
ured with reference to the obscuration produced by
smoke. Obscuration is measured in percent per metre, or in Normal response threshold= 0.12 dB/m, 2. 7%/m typical.
dB per metre. The latter unit is used in BS 5445 Pt. 7 and is Fully Enhanced threshold= 0.05 dB/m, 1.1%/m typical.
designated ·m ·.
Unfortunately, there is no fixed relationship between optical 4.6 RESPONSE TO FIRE TESTS
scattering and obscuration, the ratio between them being de-
pendent on the type of smoke. For convenience. 'grey' The response of an optical scatter detector to a particular 're-
smoke is normally used but white and black smokes give al' fire will depend, to a large extent, on the colour of the
more or less scattered light respectively for a given obscura- smoke produced in the fire. However other factors such as
tion level. the smoke entry characteristics of the detector, the develop-
ment of the fire, and the thermal lift produced by the fire are
The condition current of the MR901T is a linear function of important. In order to evaluate the response under realistic
obscuration for a given type of smoke. For grey smoke the conditions, detectors are subjected to test fires which cover
current is given by: a range of fire types. These tests are defined in BS 5445:
Pt.9 [EN54 Pt.9].
CONDITION CURRENT (le)= 8.8 + 50 x 'm' mA The MR90IT with the Controller set to normal sensitivity
passes the following Test Fires.
TFI open cellulosic (wood-flaming)

This is shown graphically in Fig. 7. TF2 smouldering pyrolysis
TF3 glowing smouldering {cotton)
TF4 open plastics {polyurethane foam)
TFS liquid (n-heptane)
Table. 2 Response to Fire Tests
PAGE6of8
PUBLICATION: 01B-03-O4
Note: TF2 to TF5 are mandatory test fires required to 6. SMARTCARD AND ADDRESS
meet 8S5445 Pt 7 [EN54 Pt 7].
LABEL CARRIER
The MR90JT will give an earlier detection of TFS fires than Refer to Figs 8 and 9. The address information for the de-
the MR90 I due to its thermal circuit detecting the heat gen- tector is stored in an EPROM on a separate smartcard with
erated by this test fire. For the same reason the MR901T an associated label carrier which is used to identify the ad-
will detect TFI which is not the case for ordinary optical dress and zone of the detector. The smartcard and label car-
detectors. This test fire is representative of fast burning fires rier arc supplied as shown in Fig. 7 and are ordered
which produce mainly invisible particles and are difficult to separately from the detector. The smartcard is pre-pro-
detect by optical detectors, but may be detected by the grammed with the address of the detector via 'CONSYS'
MR90IT demonstrating its wider detection capability. The version 9.1 or later. The smartcard and label carrier are then
MR90 IT does not respond to TF6 liquid [methylated spirit] detached from the sprue and fitted to the bottom of the de-
which although having a rapidly rising temperature, does not tector [Fig. 8] .. When the detector is fitted to the base and
generate any optical scattering. This shows that the detector turned until fully located the smartcard and label carrier are
will not respond to hot .air draughts without the presence of then transferred to the base. If the detector is removed from
smoke. the base, the smartcard and label carrier remain with the
base.
5. INSTALLATION ADDRESS
RECOMMENDATIONS EPROM
It is not recommended that the MR90 IT be installed in areas

where it is likely to be regularly enhanced since in this con-
dition rhe detector is extra sensitive and there is a possibility
of unwanted alarms from low ambient smoke levels.
RECESS FOR
The MR90IT is designed to become enhanced by detecting PRE-NUMBERED
a rapid temperature rise [>10°C] in air moving horizontally ADDRESS LABELS
across the ceiling. Siting detectors in positions where air is SPRUE
being blown through the detector should therefore be partic-
ularly avoided, cg close to ceiling ducts or ceiling mounted
industrial heaters; or areas of forced ventilation, such as
ducts and under floor voids of computer suites.
Also not recommended are areas open to the outdoors, such ADDRESS
LABEL
as cargo handling bays, or areas where the detector may be- CARRIER
come contaminated.
Fig. 8 Smartcard and Address Label Carriers
The MR901T is not recommended for use in applications
where a heater jacket is required.
The MR90 IT is primarily aimed at benign environments.
u~!~~~o
"O"SHAPEO
PART
MOUNTING
RETAINING RECESS
PIMPLES
LOCATING
POSTS
OVERHANGING
FEATURES
Fig. 9 Fitting Smartcard and Address Label c_arrier to de-


M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D4
02 4/99
The detector is identified by the logo label colouring as shown in Fig. 10
REEN
COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
Fig. 10 Detector identification
MR901T detector: 516-055-001
Address and Address Label Carrier: 517-051-002
M600/M900 Universal
Detector Base: 517-050-001
0 I B-03-D2 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL BASE AND ACCESSORIES - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN INFORMATION
01 B-03-11 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
01 B-03-C I M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
JM/jm
161h April 1999
PAGE 8 of 8
PUBLICATION: 018-03-05

MD901 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTOR
1. INTRODUCTION sensing thermistor will be unable to follow rapid changes in

temperature such as those which can occur in fires. Under
The MD901 heat detector fonns part of the M900 series of An- these conditions the temperature of the thermistor is no longer
alogue Addressable detectors. The detector plugs into the a simple indication of the air temperature.
M600/M900 Universal base to form an analogue addressable
detector which transmits analogue signals representing temper- The rapid change in temperature does however cause a temper-
ature conditions to the remote control equipment. ature difference to be established between the sensing and ref-
erence thermistors. This imbalance adds to the bridge voltage
and compensates for the finite response time of the sensing
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE thermistor.
The MD90 I uses two malchcd thcnnistors in a bridge configu- The output of the differential amplifier is thus a function of ab-
ration to give a response which depends both on absolute tem- solute temperature and rate of change of temperature. This
perature and rate of change of temperature. The thermal and signal voltage, together with a reference voltage, is fed to the
electrical characteristics are designed in such a way that the de- electronic changeover switch SI.
tector can be made to emulate many types of heat detector with-
The switch SI. under the control of the logic circuit, switches
out the use of complex processing of the analogue output. either the modified differential voltage Vsie: or the reference
voltage to the input of the voltage-controlled.~current sink. The
2.1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION logic circuit responds to the state of the input Signal Processing
input which operates by decoding signals from the line and
A block schematic of the detector is given in fig. I. comparing them with a pre-programmed address code. This
The negative temperature coefficient thermistors, Rscns and Rrcf, then sends signals to the logic switch SW I (toggling between
are connected in a bridg,..: circuit as shown. One thermistor. idcnt and condition current), SW2 (connects or removes cur-
Rs.:ns• is exposed to the air while the other. Rrcf, is thermally rent sink from line) and the two auxiliary outputs.
lagged inside the detector body. The out-of-balance voltage of The current drawn by the current sink {ANALOGUE OUT-
the bridge is buffered and amplified by the differential amplifier, PUT] is evaluated by the control unit which takes the appropri-
/\. ate action.
If the temperature is constant, or changing only slowly, the ther- The ANALOGUE OUTPUT current flows through the internal
1nistor temperatun.:s \\ ill track the air kmpcrature and the bridge LED indicator which lights each time the detector is polled.
voltage will be a function of air temperature. However, even the
SWITCHED BASE
OUTPUT
OL2
REMOTE
INDICATOR
R
L1
LINE IN
R,_,
Rsens
.
'
DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIER
"
Vslg
ADDRESS
vref
; St
CURRENT
SINK
8+
' Le->------,.Ol
LINE IN
Fig. 1 Detector Block Schematic

Regisfl'rl'd Officl': 19-21 Dl'nmark Strl'l't. Wokingham, Berk§ RG40 2QE:

M900 SERIES
01B-03-O5
02 4/99
0---LOGOLABEL
...---- COVER
HEAT
DISTRIBUTION
COVER
0 0
___
..,.C§:§J .....- BODY
BODY
PRESSINGS
4f
CONNECTOR/
BLOCK
Fig. 2 MD901 Heat Detector- Exploded View
PAGE2of5
PUllLICATION: 01 B-03-O5
2.2 WIRING 3.2 FINAL ASSEMBLY
Loop cabling may be connected to base terminals Land LI The detector housing is fitted to the body assembly. Finally,
in any order as the detector bridge circuit makes it polarity the outer cover is snapped into position on the body to pro-
insensitive. vide mechanical protection to the otherwise exposed sensing
thcnnistor. ...
A drive is provided for a remote indicator connected be-
tween loop positive and terminal R, therefore at a detector
where a remote indicator is connected, the polarity of the 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
loop must be known.
4.1 MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION Dimensions

3.
The overall dimensions are shown in Fig. 3.
The major components of the M090 I range of detectors are:
• Body Assembly Materials
• PCB Assembly
Body and cover FRI 10 "BAYBLEND"
fire resistant.
• Detector Housing
• Outer Cover Weight
Detector: 0.114kg
An exploded view of the complete detector is given in fig. 2. Detector + Base: 0.18kg
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY
Temperature
The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which -25°C to +80{'C
Storage temperature:
arc secured the four detector contacts which align with the
contacts in the M600/M900 Universal Base. The moulding Long-tenn -20°C to +70°C
incorporates securing foatures to retain the detector in the Short-term [<3 min] -40°C or + 120°c
base.
The PCB is fastened to the body by four screws which screw Note: The extreme temperatures quoted are those at
into the four base contacts through holes in the body. These which the detector may sustain permanent
screws both hold the assembly together mechanically and damage. Maximum ambient temperatures at
provide electrical connection between the contacts and the which detectors may be used, without high
PCB. false alarm rates, are dependent upon detector
type.
43
10
~?"~-----------~==,=~~= TYPICAL 0.5
t .-----------------..IT0.5 109 I
Fig. 3 MD901 Overall Dimensions

Registered Office: 19-21 Oi,-nmar-k Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A -tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

M900 SERIES
01B-03-D5
02 4/99
Relative Humidity 95% non-condensing 4.5 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Shock
4.5.1 GENERAL
Vibration To BS 5445 Pts 5 & 8
Impact [EN54-5] The performance of heat detector is defined within the Unit-
Corrosion ed Kingdom and most other European countries by the har-
monised European standard EN54, published in the UK as
BS5445 : Parts 5 and 8 of this standard arc relevant: Part 5
4.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY for detectors for normal ambients and Part 8 for high
ambients. Within part 5 and 8 are a number of response
ESD: To IEC80l-2 1991, Level 3
grades which define the limits of response of the detectors.
It must be remembered that the alarm threshold for the
Radiated To ENV50140 1993 MD901 will be set in the control unit. With the range of
Magnetic Fields: IOV/m@20 - 100MHz Minerva Analogue Addressable controllers the MD90 I is
80% modulation @ I kHz AM able to provide response characteristics complying with all
I Hz PM Grades specified in Part 5 plus response Range 2 in Part 8.
Fast Transient: To IECSOl-4, Level 3

ADDRESS
Slow High Energy: To ENV50142 l994@±1kV EPAOM 'SMARTCARD"
4.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and
supply voltage of24V unless otherwise specified.
Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Loop Voltage 18 24 32 V SPRUE
Quiescent Curren! 150 240 300 µA

Identity Current 5.4 mA
Conditional Current 0 6 28 mA
AOORESS
Table. I Electrical Characteristics LABEL
CARRIER
LOCATING
POSTS
OVERHANGING
FEATURES
PAGE 4 of 5
PUBLICATION: 01B-03-D5

LABEL CARRIER
Refer to Figs 4 and 5. The address information for the de-
tector is stored in an EPROM on a separate address smart-
card with an associated label carrier which is used to
identify the address and zone of the detector. The smart-
card and label carrier are supplied as shown in Fig. 4 and
are ordered separately from the detector. The smartcard is
pre-programmed with the address of the detector via
'CONSYS" version 9.1 or later. The smartcard and label
carrier are then detached from the sprue and fitted to the
bottom of the detector [Fig. 5]. When the detector is fitted
to the base and turned until fully located' the smartcard and
label carrier are then transferred to the base. If the detector
is removed from the base, the smartcard and label carrier
remain with the base.
6. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
Thi: detector is compatible with the Company's range of an·
alogue addressable conlrollers.
MD901 Heat detector: 516-053-001
M600/M900 Detecitor Base: 517-050-001
Smartcard and Label Carrier: 517-051-002
The detector is identifi,ed by the logo label colouring as
shown in Fig. 6.
----WHITE
~COMPANY
IDENTIFIER
01 B-03-D2 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL BASE AND ACCESSORIES - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
DESIGN INFORMATION
0 I B-03-11 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
0 I B-03-C I M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
JM/jm
16th April 1999

Registered Office: 19·21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RC-iO 2QE

i
''
r
't
'
PUBLICATION: 01B-03-D7

MU901 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CARBON MONOXIDE FIRE DETECTOR

1. INTRODUCTION The cell itself has a diffusion limiting component to ensure that
all carbon monoxide in the area proximate to the sensing
The MU901 carbon monoxide fire detector forms part of the electrode is continuously oxidised. This means that the rate of
M900 Series of Analogue Addressable Fire detectors. The transport of carbon monoxide to the cell is directly
detector is intended to plug into an M600/M900 Universal· proportional to the external concentration and independent of
base to form an analogue addressable detector. The detector air-speed.
is designed to transmit, to a remote control equipment,
analogue signals which represent the status of the sensor cell.
2.2 CIRCUIT
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE 2.2.1 STANDARD DETECTOR
2.1 SENSING CELL A simplified block schematic of the circuit is given in Fig. 2.
The current through the cell circuit is mirrored by the current
The MU901 uses an clctrochcmical cell to detect the build up
mirror, and added to a fixed baseline voltage Vbase· This is fed
of carbon monoxide gcncrnted by fires. The cell operates by
to a current to voltage converter amplifier which buffers and
oxidising carbon monoxide on a platinum sensing electrode.
scales the signal. The resultant voltage is fed to the electronic
On a corresponding counter electrode the other half of the
changeover switch SI.
rcacticin takes place. The Sensing Cell is represented
diagrammatically in Fig. I.
When this reaction takes place the potential across the cell
tries to change and this causes a current to flow within the
circuit around the cell. The current is mirrored into a current
to voltage conversion circuit the resulting output is directly
proportional to the carbon monoxide concentration.
- - - - - DIFFUSION
BARRIER
-
«!7/21///,/,,j L -- SENSING ELECTRODE

co+ H2o--.co2 +2H\2e
S...11----- CONTACT P I N S - - - - - - - ! ~
Fig. 1 Representational Diagram of CO Sensing Cell

Registl'rl.'d Office: 19--21 Denmark Street, \VokinAham, Berks RG40 2QE
A 'tqc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
I
M900 SERIES
01 B-03-D7
02 4/99
SWITCHED BASE
OUTPUT
,-------------------------O----tOL2
REMOTE
INDICATOR
,------------------------0---+oR
.-O---+ol1
LINE IN
S2
---------•
ADDRESS
e
CURRENT 'l'TO'V' BRIDGE
MIRROR CONVERTER
: S1
+
V REF CURRENT
'
BASELINE SINK
~o----+ol
LINE IN
Fig. 2 Simplified Block Schematic Diagram of Detector
The currents drawn by the current sink arc measured and An exploded view of the detector is given in Fig. 3.
processed at the Control Unit, (where any appropriate action
is taken].
The switch SI, under the control of the logic circuit 3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY
-;witches either the modified cell output voltage or the The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which
reference voltage to the input of the voltage-controlled, are secured the four detector contacts which align with
current sink. The logic circuit responds to the state of the contacts in the M600/M900 Universal base. The moulding
input Signal Processing input which operates by decoding incorporates securing features to retain the dt:tector in the
signals from the line and comparing them with a pre- base.
programmed address code. This then sends signals to the
logic switch SI [toggling between idcnt and condition The PCB is fastened to the body by four screws which screw
current]. S2 [connecting or removing current sink from into the four base contacts through holes in the body. These
line] and the two auxiliary outputs. screws both hold the assembly together mechanically and
provide electrical contact between the contacts and the PCB.
The Analogue Output current flows through the internal
LED indicator which lights each time the dctccto1 is polled.
3.2 FINAL ASSEMBLY
2.3 WIRING
The assembly described above in Para 3. I is, in effect, a
Loop cabling may be connected to base terminals Land LI complete detector·but the remaining components provide
in any order as the detector bridge circuit makes it polarity further protection against external influences.
insensitive. A drive is provided for a remote indicator
The closure, in conjunction with the outer cover, is carefully
connected between loop positive and terminal R, therefore at
designed to protect the cell and screening can and allow for
a detector where a remote indicator is connected, the polarity
future possible heat enhancement options. The closure is
of the loop must be known.
retained by the outer cover which is a snap fit onto the body
assembly.
3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
• Body Assembly
• Printed Circuit/Chamber Assembly
°ఞ Cell
• COC!osure
• Outer Cover
PAGE2of6
LOGO LABEL
. . - - COVER
co
CLOSURE
co
SENSOR
0 0
......-------- PCB
, . . - BODY
BODY ----CJrtiJ
PRESSINGS
Fig. 3
CONNECTOR/
BLOCK
Exploded View of MU901 Detector

"
Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokinghllm, Bl'rks RG40 2QE
i
M900 SERIES
01 B-03-O7
02 4/99
43
t
/aZ:;:;=JZ>..----------------~==,=~+= TYPICAL 0.5
10
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ .~to.s
t 109 1
Fig. 4 Overall Dimensions of MU901 Detector

r
''I.
C
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Shock:
4.1 MECHANICAL
Dimensions
Vibration:
lmpact:
Corrosion:
} To BS 5445 : Pt. 7
[EN54-7]
The overall dimensions arc shown in Fig. 4.

4.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
\laterials
Body, cover, and closure: FRI 10 'BAYBLEND' EMC: Equals or exceeds the
flame retardant. requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1.
\Veight
Detector: 0. I 37kg
Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements
Detector+ Base: 0.206kg of the European Directive for EMC
{89/336/EECJ.
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
Temper-a tu re 4.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating: 0°C to +50°C The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and
supply voltage of 24V unless otherwise specified.
Storage: -25°C to +S0°C
Note:
Characteristic Min. Typ. Max. Unit
1) The detector may be operated for short periods
between the limits of Cf'C to -2Cf'C but with Loop Voltage 18 24 32 V
reduced performance. Quiescent Current 100 120 200 µA
2) The detector may be operated for short periods Iden! Current 2.8 3.6 4.4 mA
between the limits +5Cf'C to +lff'C, prolonged Condition Current 5.0 7.5 24 mA
use between these limits will degrade the
performance and shorten the life of the Table I: Electrical Characteristics
detector.
Relative Humidity 95% [non-condensing]
PAGE4of6
4.5 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 4.7 CHOICE OF ALARM THRESHOLD

The MU90I. with the M600/M900 base. fonns an analogue At the system design stage it is important that the correct
addressable detector which transmits, to a remote threshold setting is chosen for each detector. The optimum
equipment, signals representing the state of the sensing settings will depend very largely upon the type of equipment
cell. The control equipment evaluates these signals against and fire risk present. Although it is possible to set any
predetermined criteria and decides when an ALARM cu1Tcnt as an ALARM Inc-I it is recommended that only
condition should be signalled. The information given below three possible levels are used. These levels should give
therefore relates to the: performance of the MU90 I simply as alarm thresholds equivalent to High, Nonna! and Low
a transducer, since the system alann response is determined sensitivities. Recommended threshold currents are given in
by the control unit. Table 2 for the MU90 I detector. Guidance on the choice of
threshold setting and delay is given in publication 01B-03-
D I but it is necessary also to consider the effects of possible
4.5.1 RESPONSE TO CARBON MONOXIDE pollutants in the environment.
The response to carbon monoxide is an increase of0.175 mA In general, it is recommended that:

for every part per million increase of carbon monoxide in the
a) A High sensitivity setting should be used if
atmosphere. In clean air conditions the value of condition
there is little likelihood of spurious alarms,
current indicates the quiescent condition of the cell. Any
such as store rooms and non smoking
deviation from 7.5mA will indicate a change in the ambient
offices.
conditions. This may be caused by pollution or extreme
environmental conditions. In either case, the deviation is b) Low sensitivity setting should be used when
unlikely to be significant compared with the alarm threshold there arc possible false alarm sources eg in
level. plant rooms, or areas where there are many
smokers.
4.5.2 EFFECT OF AIRFLOW ON

SENSITIVITY THRESHOLD
EQUIVALENT CURRENT
The signal status o,f the MU90 I detector has been
specifically designed to be insensitive to abnormal air SENSITIVITY VALUE [mA]
velocities. The effect of nonnal air velocities upon [ppm]
sensitivity is negligible. MU901
High 23 11.5
Normal 40 14.5
4.5.3 THE EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON
SENSITIVITY Low 66 19.0
The detector incorporates temperature compensation and its Table. 2 Recommended Threshold Currents
condition current will be substantially constant over its
specified operating range.
LABEL CARRIER
4.5.4 THE EFFECT OF ATMOSPHERIC
PRESSURE ON SENSITIVITY Refer to Figs 5 and 6. The address information for the
detector is stored in an EPROM on a separate smartcard with
The sensitivity of the detector is not effected by changes in an associated label carrier which is used to identify the
atmospheric pressure unless they happen very quickly ie address and zone of the detector. The smartcard and label
explosions. carrier arc supplied as shown in Fig. 5 and are ordered
separately from the detector. The smartcard is pre-
programmed with the address of the detector via 'CONSYS'
4.6 RESPONSE TO FIRE TESTS version 9.1 or later. The smartcard and label carrier are then
The response of the MU90 I detector to real or large-scale detector [Fig. 6). When the detector is fitted to the base and
test fires will be partly dependent upon the threshold set in turned until fully located the: smartcard and label carrier are
the control unit. Other factors, however, such as the rate of then transferred to the base. If the detector is removed from
development of the fire, and relative oxygen supply are also the base, the smartcard and label carrier remain with the
important. The fire tests defined in BS 5445: Pt. 9 which are base.
intended for ionisation and optical detectors are less
appropriate for carbon monoxide fire detectors as their
design means that they produce significant levels of carbon
monoxide only in their later stages.


M900 SERIES
01 B-03-O7
02 4/99
ADDRESS
EPROM
shown in Fig. 7.
/ YELLOW
I
I
RECESS FOR
PRE-NUMBERED I
ADDRESS LABELS \ COMPANY
SPRUE IDENTIFIER
ADDRESS 7. ORDERING INFORMATION

LABEL
CARRIER MU90 I detector: 516-059-00 I
Fig. 5 Smartcard and Label Carrier Smartcard and Address Label Carrier: 517-051-002
M600/M900 Universal Detector Base: 517-050-00 I
'U'SHAPEO
CHANNEL
'D'SHAPED
PART
LOCATING
POSTS
OVERHANGING
FEATURES
....
OIB-03-D2 M600/M900 UNIVERSAL BASE AND ACCESSORIES, PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
0 IB-03-I I M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
OIB-03-CI M600/M900 UNIVERSAL DETECTOR BASE-COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
JM/jm
I 6th Apri I I 999
PAGE 6 of 6
=====THC)RN
11111 SECURITY
EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M900F
01 B-01-G2

M900F SMARTCARD STAND-ALONE PROGRAMMER
OPERATOR'S INSTRUCTIONS
1. INTRODUCTION
/
The M900F Stand-Alone Smartcard programmer is used
to program the address of an M900 series detector into a
'Smartcard' [Fig. I].
I I
ADDRESS
EEPROM~ 'SMARTCARD'
""=THORN M900 F~
11111 SECURlTY
RECESS FOR
PRE·NUMBERED
ADDRESS LABELS
SPRUE - -
ON/PROG DOWN
• • • UPl
ADDRESS
LABEL
CARRIER
Fig. I
Fig.2
The programmer has a four digit LCD di5play and three

MESSAGE ADDRESS
control buttons [see Fig. 2]. FIELD FIELD
The display format is shown in Fig. 3. The message field

may display the following:
p
E
Ready to program
Smarteard Programmed
Error
8888
L Low battery Fig.3
The address field can be set from I to 126 using the UP/
DOWN black scroll buttons. The third button ON/PROG
[red] has two functions; the first function switches on the
programmer, the second function programs the Smartcard.
The programmer switches off automatically after one
minute ifno button has been pressed or a 'Smartcard' read
operation has been performed.
Regislered Oftice: Securit)· House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury--0n-Thames l\liddlt>sex TWl6 SDB
M900F
01 B-01-G2
01 11/96
Fig. 4
2. PROGRAMMING OPERATION 6) Close the lid and press down. the letter
'p• will be displayed in the message field
To program a 'Smartcard', proceed as follows: when the 'Smartcard" has been
programmed.
CAUTION: 7) Affix the correct pre-numbered address
labels to the 'Smartcard' and Address
WHEN HANDLING SMARTCARDS Label Carrier to the locations shown in
OBSERVE NORMAL ANTI-STATIC Fig. t.
PRECAUTIONS.
To read the address of a 'Smartcard'. proceed as

follows:
I) Remove the 'Smartcard" to be I) Press the 'ON/PROG" button if the
programmed from its packaging and programmer is not already on, open the
separate from the sprue, remove any cover and place the 'Smartcard" on the
burrs. programmer, close the cover and press
2) On the programmer. press the 'ON/ down.
PROG" button. the display will show 2) The 'Smartcard" address will be
address ' I •. displayed if the 'Smartcard' has already
3) Select the required address using the been programmed.
scroll 'UP/DOWN" buttons [holding
down a scroll button causes the lfan 'E" is displayed it may have been caused by:
programmer to speed up the address
selection]. i) Insufficient or discontinuous pressure
applied as the cover is closed - please
4) Open the cover of the programmer and try again.
place the 'Smartcard" onto the
ii) Attempting to read a 'Smartcard' that
programmer as shown in Fig. 4 with the
has not previously been programmed.
Address EEPROM face-up.
5) Press the 'ON/PROG" button. the ,_.
will appear in the message field. JM/jm
22nd November 1996
PAGE 2 of 2
EQUIPMENT: M900C
::::::: THC)RN PUBLICATION: 01 B-01-G3
11111 SECURITY ISSUE No. &DATE: 01 11/§6

M900C CONSYS 'SMARTCARD' PROGRAMMER
OPERATOR'S INSTRUCTIONS
1. INTRODUCTION
The M900C Smartcard programmer is used to program
the address of an M900 series detector into a 'Smartcard'
[Fig. !]referred to in 'CONSYS' as a key or device key.
ADDRESS
EEPROM~ 'SMARTCARD'
eTilaTHORN M900C
11111 SECURITY
RECESS FOR
PRE-NUMBERED
ADDRESS LABELS
SMART CARD
ADDRESS PROGRAMMER
LABEL
CARRIER
Fig. 1 SI-COLOUR
Fig.2
"'
2. COMPATIBILITY
3) Check that the programmer battery is
The 'Smartcard' programmer is compatible with fitted.
'CONSYS' version 10.0 upwards and with the following
computers: 4) Connect the programmer to the computer
via the 25-pin parallel port, (if not in use
• Toshiba Tl850 the programmer should be
• Toshiba Tl 9 I0 disconnected from the computer to
conserve the life of the battery),
• Toshiba T2 I 00
• Toshiba T2 I IO
3. PROGRAMMING THE
'SMARTCARD'
To program a 'Smartcard', proceed as follows:
I) Load the site project data disk using the
'Old' option from the file menu.
2) Select the 'Device Key Programmer'
option from the Transfer menu, then select
the 'Program Device Keys' option from
the sub-menu.
Re~istered Office: Security Housl.' The Summit Hanworth Road Sunhury--on-Thames J\liddlesex TWl6 508
M900C
01 B-01-G3
01A 11/96
Bl-COLOUR
LED
Fig.3
5) The 'Smartcard' should be 9) Close the lid and press down firmly.
programmed using the 'Program from
Configuration' option but it may also IO) If programming is successful, the
be programmed using the 'Manually programmer green LED will light and
specify point' method (this method the following message will be
should only be used if a 'Smartcard is displayed:
lost or found to be corrupt). Select the Programmed device key
method required. with address XX
6) Address selection is automatic when
us,ng the 'Program from l l) When the key has been successfully
Configuration' option, press 'W', the programmed, remove the key from the
following message will be displayed: programmer, affix the correct address
Waiting for key to be INSERTED labels as shown in Fig. I.
Press <Esc> to Cancel 12) If programming fails, the red LED will
light and can only be extinguished via
the keyboard. This must be done
CAUTION: promptly to conserve battery life.
13) Table I details other messages that may
WHEN HANDLING SMARTCARDS appear and their meanings.
OBSERVE
NORMAL ANTI-STATIC PRECAUTIONS. 14) The 'Read Device Keys' option allows
the address of a 'Smartcard' to be read.
15) The 'Reset Consys Key History'
7) Remove the 'Smartcard' to be option allows the device configuration
programmed from its packaging and to be cleared [ie all M900 detectors set
separate from the sprue, remove any
to 'X' on the screen].
burrs.
8) Open the cover of the programmer and

place the 'Smartcard' onto the
programmer as shown in Fig. 3 with the
Address EEPROM face-up.
PAGE 2 of 3
''
M900C
-···-
-···-TJHORN EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
11111 SEClJRITY ISSUE No. & DATE:
01 B-01-G3
01A 11/96
The Key Contains Valid Data The key has already been programmed.
Key Programming FAILED An option to retry is then presented.
ESCAPE pressed Operation aborted Self explanatory.
Waiting for key to be CHANGED Does not allow a key programmed with the previous
Press <Esc> to Cancel address in the configuration to be overwritten.
Battery too low or key contains corrupt data a) Possible low battery.
(occurs when a key READ option fails) b) EPROM corrupted.
c) Smartcard made poor contact with
programmer.
Please wait Appears briefly on screen when programming 'Smartcard'.
No programmed devices in current You have requested to clear memory which is already
configuration clear.
Confirm request to clear key data from The progress of a task is remembered ie information
project about which keys have been programmed. This would
clear memory and allow the task to be restarted, ie if all
keys are lost.
WARNING: Key Programmer Battery LOW Battery requires changing.
Looking for key programmer Checking to see if the programmer is connected to the
Press <Esc> to Cancel computer
All keys have been produced Configuration complete.
for this key configuration
No devices after cursor position The highest address for an M900 detector has been
require programming programmed. Lower addresses may require
programming if the cursor has been manually moved
between addresses.
The configuration does not contain any No M900 detectors have been configured.
devices that require programming
Unable to read key
The key is blank Unprogrammed key shown when using the 'Read Device
Keys'.
Table I:
JM/jm
22nd November 1996
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE 3of 3
Regislert>d Office: Security House The Summit Han worth Ro.ad Sunbur)'-{)n-Thames Middlrsex TWl6 5D8
EQUIPMENT: MS00 SERIES
::::: THC)RN PUBLICATION: 01A-03-D1
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE DETECTORS,

MS00 SERIES
1. INTRODUCTION 2. TYPES OF SENSOR IN THE
The M500 Analogue Addressable Detector Series comprises SERIES
five detector types each of which responds to a different product
As no one type of sensor alone is eminently suitable for
of fire. Each detector is made up of two parts, a sensor and an
protecting every type of risk, the MSOO Series includes smoke,
addressable base. The M500 Base is common to all sensor
heat and flame sensors.
types and allows the sensor fitted to communicate with a
suitable control unit. Three types of Smoke Sensor are offered. The first is the Ion
The five sensor types presented are: Chamber [MF50 I) the operation of which is based upon the
fact that the current which is made to flow through an
I) the MF50 I Ion-chamber Smoke Sensor, ionisation chamber will reduce when combustion particles
enter the chamber. The second is the Photoelectric [MR50 I]
2) the MR50I Photoelectric Smoke Sensor,
which is based upon the scatter of light caused when smoke
3) the MR50IT Thermally Enhanced Photoelectric particles enter a light beam. The third is the MR50IT which is
Smoke Sensor, a photoelectric detector whose sensitivity is enhanced in the
presence of a rapid rate-of-change of temperature.
4) the MD50 I Heat Sensor and
The Heat Sensor [MD50 I) uses a thermistor bridge
5) the MS502Ex Infra-red Flame Sensor. arrangement which responds to temperature and rate-of-
change of temperature. The MD50 I sensor can be made to
emulate many different types of heat detector.
Since the alann thresholds and the time delays in analogue
addressable systems are set by the Control Unit software, The Infra-red Flame Sensor [MS502Ex] is only available in an
sensors hm:ing differing sensitivities or time delays are not Intrinsically- Safe form and is equally suitable for use in safe
required. The range is limited, therefore, to one standard sensor or hazardous areas. It is able to detect the flickering infra-red
of each type and an intrinsically-safe version of each for use in radiation that is given off by a flame, within a carefully
hazardous atmospheres. The MSOO Base is to be used for all controlled frequency range. This, together with the narrow
standard sensors and the MSOOEx Base for the intrinsically- safe optical bandwidth used, makes the sensor particularly immune
types. to interfering sources of infra-red.
The MSOO Addressable Detector Base may also be used with the
following M400 Series of bistate fire detectors when the 3. USE OF SENSORS
analogue capability of the MSOO Series sensor is not required:
3.1 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS
I) MF40 I Ion-chamber Smoke Detector,
Each type of sensor responds to a particular •fire product'. The
2) MR401 Photoelectric Smoke Detector, relative speeds of response of the five types will therefore
3) MR40 IT Thermally Enhanced Photoelectric depend upon the type of fire being detected. Smoke is present
Smoke Detector, at an early stage in most fires and, for general use, the smoke
sensor [ either Ion chamber or High Performance Optical] is the
4) MD40 I Heat Detector. most useful type available for early warning.
Most fires will, in their later stages, emit detectable levels of
The M400 Series are very similar to the MSOO Series and will heat and, in those areas where rapid fire spread is unlikely and
not be described separately. where environmental conditions preclude the use of a smoke
sensor, the heat sensor will probably prove an adequate
Each Base features a ·skirt' which must be fixed in a specific alternative.
radial position as defined by the particular' type of Sensor to be
installed. Only one type of Sensor can then be fitted into the Where the burning material is a liquid, e.g. alcohol, paint
Base. Once fixed into place, the skirt cannot be removed thinner, etc., flame is likely to be the first indication of fire. For
without the use of a special tool. these applications an infra-red flame sensor should be
incorporated within the system. Although both heat and smoke
sensors are suitable for use inside most buildings, a flame
sensor may be used to supplement these, where
Registered Office: Mcurity House The Summit Hanwor1h Road Sunbury--on-Thames Middlesex TWl6 5D8
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D1
02 3/97
necessary. This sensor needs an unobstructed line-of-sight, 3.3 HEAT SENSOR

its greatest use being for such special applications as the
supervision of an outdoor storage area or an area where If environmental conditions rule out the use of smoke
processes which involve the use of a flammable liquid are sensors, then the MD50 I heat sensor may provide an
taking place. acceptable, though less sensitive, alternative.
For the majority of installations, the divisions are not so The MD501 sensor responds both to absolute temperature
simple. Thus, when specifying a sensor, it is necessary to and to rate of change of temperature in such a way that it can
take into account not only the size and shape of the area to provide rapid detection over a wide range of ambient
be protected but also the content of each part of the temperatures. For slowly changing temperatures the
area. Additionally the various processes which may be analogue output is directly related to temperature whilst
under- taken in the area [e.g. arc-welding, steam-handling, rapid changes produce higher outputs, thereby allowing
etc., any of which may cause the sensor to give a spurious improved response.
response] must also be taken into account. By correct choice of threshold within the control unit, the
MD50 I can be made to behave as a Grade I, Grade 2 or
Grade 3 detector [as defined in BS5445 Pt.5] or as a Range
3.2 SMOKE SENSORS 2 [high temperature] detector as defined in BS5445 Pt.8.
Most fires produce smoke from their earliest stages but, as
we know from everyday experience, the density and colour
of smoke depends very much upon the material burned and 3.4 FLAME SENSORS
the conditions of burning. The differences between smokes Flame sensors, unlike smoke and heat sensors, do not rely on
are to a very large extent caused by the variation in size of convection to transport the fire products to the sensor nor do
the particles that make up the smoke. they rely on a ceiling to trap the products. They can,
As a general rule, the hotter the fire the greater the number therefore, be used to protect large open areas without
of very small [invisible] smoke particles. On the other hand, sacrificing speed of response to flaming fires. In order to
low temperature smouldering will produce proportionally ensure full coverage, however, flame sensors do require
more, large [visible] particles. direct line of sight to all parts of the protected area.
Of the two types of smoke sensor, the ion chamber sensor Infra-red flame sensors such as the MS502Ex are designed
[type MF50 I] will respond very quickly to smoke composed to respond rapidly to fires which involve clean-burning fuels
of very small particles- even those invisible to the naked eye such as alcohol or methane, i.e. fires which would not be
- but may respond appreciably slower to dense smoke detected by smoke sensors.
composed of large particles. The photoelectric scatter type The MS502Ex Flame Sensor, by virtue of its operating
of sensor [MR50 I] will respond quickly to large particle wavelength and flicker discrimination, is insensitive to
smoke and possibly ignore the small particle smoke. In the normal environmental influences. For outdoor use however,
majority of cases, however, the particle sizes are such as to or in the presence of very strong infra-red sources, a solar-
permit the use of either type of detector. blied detector [e.g. the type SI I! or the S121] should be
The MR50 IT has been developed to overcome the slower used. Flame detectors should, normally, only be used inside
response of the optical sensors to hot burning fires, by buildings to supplement heat and smoke detectors.
increasing the sensitivity of the optical sensor when it is
associated with a rapid change in temperature. In this way it
is intended to become a sensor which can cover some of the 3.5 SENSOR SUITABILITY
risks currently covered by ion chamber sensors.
It will be realised that in an analogue addressable detection
The analogue outputs of these sensors are directly related to system, the sensors are simply acting as transducers which
the smoke in their respective sampling chambers. These relay information on temperature, smoke density, etc., to the
outputs are used in the control equipment both to monitor the control unit. It is the control unit that processes this
environment for smoke and also to monitor the sensors. information and ultimately makes the decision whether or
not to raise an alarm.
Smoke sensors will not respond to burning alcohol or other
clean-burning liquids which do not generate smoke The most straightforward processing involves comparing
particles. the analogue signals from the detector with a set of fixed
levels which represent FAULT,. NORMAL and ALARM
A smoke sensor should not be used to protect an area where
conditions. The choice of ALARM level, plus any time
processes that themselves produce smoke or fumes capable
delay which may be deliberately introduced, will determine
of operating that type of smok:e sensor are, or may be,
the overall system response to fires. The ALARM level and
performed.
Time Delay can, in theory, be allocated any value but, in
practice, it is sufficient to choose those levels which give
responses similar to those of conventional [two-state]
detectors.
PAGE 2 of 5
MSOO SERIES
::::: TH<)RN EQUIPMENT:
11111 SEClJRITY ISSUE No. &.DATE:
02 3/97
The combinations recommended are as follows: MDSOI:

MFSOI: Grade I MD501 (GI)
High Sensitivity MFS0I (H) Grade 2 MD50I (G2)
High Sensiti\'ity with Delay MFS0I (HD) Grade 3 MD501 (G3)
Nonna! Sensitivity MFS0I (N) Range 2 [High Temperature] MD50I (G4)
Nonna! Sensitivity with Delay MFS0I (ND)
Low Sensitivity MFS0I (L) The MS502Ex requires special processing in order to retain
the very fast response inherent in flame detection and it is not
MRSOI: possible to select different sensitivity levels at the control
unit.
High Sensitivity MRS0I (H)
Nonna( Sensitivity
The ability of any particular sensor to respond to various
MRS0I (N)
classes of fire whilst tolerating different types of environment
Low Sensitivity MRS0I (L) depends upon the operating principle and on the sensitivity
chosen. Table 1 is given as a guide to the suitability of
different types and settings.
MRSOIT:
High Sensitivity It must be stressed that the design of a fire detection system
MR50IT(H)
. must take into account many factors which are outside the
Nonnal Sensitivity MR501T (N) scope of this document. The infonnation given herein is
Low Sensitivity MR50IT (L) necessarily simplified and is intended as a guide to the M500
Series for those trained in the design of fire detection
systems.
VERY MOD'LY
MOD'LY DIRTY/
~
CLEAN DIRTY/
CLEAN DIRTY/ SMOKEY
E CLEAN SMOKEY
SMOKEY HOT
. LOADING
CAR PARK/ KITCHEN
E CLEAN ROOM OFFICE AREA/W'HSE
WAREHOUSE LIVESTOCK OR
E D.P. SUITE HOTEL +DIESEL
FORK LIFTS
PEN LAUNDRY
OVERHEATING Mfill!.!.tl MfillW',I MfillW',I Mfill!1L
e.g. electrical
/electronic MF501H MF501H MF501N
equipment
SMOULDERING Mfil!W:i MfilQlli ~ MBaQ1l.
e.g. wood, paper MEiQlli ME,J!lli
fabric, ME.5!111:i MEallll.
plastics M501HD MF501ND
FLAMING Mfill:!l.I MEiQlli MEiQlli MEallll. MSJQ2Ex MSJ02Ex
e.g. wood, paper ME.5!1.lli MR501N MR501N MS502Ex
fabric. plastic, MRSCI1H MS502Ex MS502Ex
PETROL MS502Ex MR501T MF501ND
FLAMING with ~lli ME!i!llli ME!i!llli MEallll. MQSOlQl MQ~lGl

high HEAT o/p !,1fil!l1I Mfil!l.1I MD501G1 MQSOl~l MS502Ex MOSOl~2
e.g. late stage MS502Ex MD501G1 MR501T MS502Ex MQSOlG3
FLAMING MS502Ex MS502Ex M050lr~
MS5Q2Ex
FLAMING-CLEAN
BURNING
e.g. alcohol & MS502..Ex MS5Q2Ex MS502Ex MS502Ex MS502Eis MS502Fx
other solvents,
NATURAL GAS.
Table. I Application of MSOO Series Sensors

Underlined types are Considered most suitable for detecting the given class of fire in the particular environment. Other
type:1. are acceptable but are not optimum for reasons of performance or cost.
© 1997 Thom Security Limited PAGE 3of 5
Re-ibtered Office; Security Hou~ The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Th.amn Middlnu; TWl6 5D8
f.
'
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D1
02 3/97
4. SPACING AND SITING OF 4.2.1.2 SENSORS FITTED INTO AREAS OF

RAPID HEAT VARIATION
DETECTORS
In some applications such as kitchens, furnace and boiler
The spacing. siting and zoning of detectors should be in
houses, rapid increases in temperature may be considered
accordance with the recommendations of BS 5839: Part I:
normal. Heat sensors fitted into Lantern Lights must be
1980. The main points are summarised below. protected from direct sunlight but are still subject to rapid
temperature changes. False alarms can usually be
eliminated in such cases by using a Grade 2 or Grade 3
4.1 SPACING setting. If, however, ambient temperatures are low, it may
The floor area which lies beneath a flat roof, and which is be necessary to use special processing in the control unit to
covered by a single smoke detector, should not exceed reduce the rate ofrise sensitivity of the MD501 sensor.
I 00m2; the floor area beneath a flat roof, and which is
covered by a single heat detector, should not, however,
exceed 50m2. 4.2.2 SMOKE SENSORS
Refer to BS 5839 Pt. I 1980 Sections 12 & 13 [Amdmt 4 at The greatest concentration of smoke from any fire will
least] for details of the maximum permissible horizontal normally collect at the highest part of any enclosed area. It
distances between detectors and/or between detectors and follows, therefore, that a smoke sensor should nonnally be
walls, etc. These will vary depending whether the sited in that position.
installation is for Life or Property protection. Under nonnal conditions, the base should be mounted so
No detector should be mounted where it may be subjected to that the detection element of the sensor is within the limits
adverse environmental conditions. of 25mm and 600mm below the appropriate ceiling height
given in BS 5839. As with heat sensors, special
arrangements must be made for mounting sensors to sloping
4.2 SITING OF DETECTORS roofs. Sensors should ideally be mounted in a vertical
position for best perfonnance and ease of maintenance.
4.2.1 HEAT SENSORS
4.2.1.1 NORMAL MOUNTING CONDITIONS
4.2.3 FLAME SENSORS
Under normal conditions. the detector base should be
In contrast to the smoke sensor, which has to wait until the
mounted directly to the ceiling of the protected area. This products of combustion reach it by air movement, a flame
will place the detection element within the limits of 25mm
sensor responds to radiation from a fire in negligible time,
and 150mm given in BS 5839 Pt. I. Special arrangements regardless of the distance - provided that a direct line-of-
must be made for mounting detectors to sloping sight exists. The amount of infra-red radiation received
roofs. Detectors should ideally be mounted in a vertically will, however, be diminished by distance and a larger fire
downward position to allow fast detection and easy removal
will be required to prodt!ce a rt>sponse.
for maintenance.
The 'angle-of-view' of the MS502Ex sensor is 100
The threshold setting chosen will depend upon the ceiling
degrees. The area covered by a sensor is therefore
height and the environmental conditions which surround the
dependent upon the height at which it is installed, viz.
detector. In general, 9m is the maximum ce~ling height for
an MD50 I set to Grade I, 7.5m for an MD50 I set to Grade
2 and 6m for an MD50 I set to Grade 3. Provided that the
detection system is automatically connected to the fire
brigade orto a Central Station [Remote Manned Centre) and
that the fire brigade can guarantee attendance within 5
minutes, heat detectors may be fitted to ceilings with a
maximum height of 13.5m, 12m or IO.Sm for Grades I, 2
and 3 detectors respectively.
·1 1
Dia. of Protected Area for- Ht. 2
1
I
Dia. of Protected Area for Ht.1
PAGE4of5
===== TH()RN PUBLICATION: 01A-03-D1
11111 SEClTRITY ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 3/97
5. SENSOR TYPE-MARKS Example a
The type-mark of each sensor is composed of six parts as

shown:
I. 'M'
Type Identifier
2. A letter to denote the type: I.R. Flanrie
Series 500
F = Ion-Chamber Smoke Sensor Mechanical Build
Electrical Bui Id
Intrinsically-Safe
R = Photoelecitric Smoke Sensor
S = Infra-red Flame Sensor
D = Heat Sensor
Example b
3. ·s· for the Series
4. A digit to denote the mechanical build
5. A digit to denote the electrical build
Type Identifier
6. A letter or letters to denote special characteristics. I on Cha,.ber
Series 500
Mechanical Build
Electrical Build
0 I A-03-D2 DESIGN INFORMATION M500 ADDRESSABLE BASE AND ACCESSORIES.
0IA-03-D3 DESIGN INFORMATION MF500 JON CHAMBER SMOKE SENSOR RANGE.
0IA-03-D4 DESIGN INFORMATION MR500 OPTICAL SMOKE SENSOR RANGE.
0IA-03-DS DESIGN INFORMATION MS502Ex INFRA-RED FLAME SENSOR RANGE.
0IA-03-D6 DESIGN INFORMATION MD500 HEAT SENSOR RANGE.
0IA-03-D7 DESIGN INFORMATION MF40I JON CHAMBER SMOKE DETECTOR.
0IA-03-D8 DESIGN INFORMATION MR40I OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR.
0IA-03-D9 DESIGN INFORMATION MR401T HIGH PERFORMANCE OPTICAL SMOKE
DETECTOR.
0IA-03-DI0 DESIGN INFORMATION MD40I HEAT DETECTOR.
0IA-03-DI I DESIGN INFORMATION MR501T HIGH PERFORMANCE OPTICAL SMOKE
DETECTOR
0IA-03-11 INSTALLATION M500 SERIES DETECTOR BASE
0IA-03-CI COMMISSIONING M500 SERIES DETECTOR BASE
LJC/jm
6th February 1997
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE Sof 5
Registered Office: S«urity House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVl6 508
===== THC)RN EQUIPMENT: MS00 SERIES
11111 SECURITY PUBLICATION:
ISSUE No. & DATE:
01A-03-D2
02 4/97
DOCUMENT CONTROL NUMBER
MS00 ADDRESSABLE BASE AND ACCESSORIES
1. INTRODUCTION 2. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION

The Addressable Base and its accessories form part of.the M500 2.1 ADDRESSABLE BASE AND SKIRT
Series of Addressable Sensors. The Base and Skirt are common
to all types of plug-in ceiling-mounted sensors in the M500 se- The Addressable Base and Skirt are separate impact-resistant
ries but their unique polarisation feature is used to make the plastic mouldings which may be assembled together in any one
Base specific to any one sensor type. Thus an addressable ceil- of four positions to allow insertion of one of the four basic,
ing-mounted detector will comprise a specific sensor type, plus plug-in, fire detection sensor types to be found in the M500 se-
a common Addressable Base and skirt. The range is intended for ries, Fig. I refers.
two-wire operation.
Fig. I Base and Skirt

Registered Office: ~curity Houw The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Midd~wx TIVl6 SDB
MSOO SERIES
01A-03-D2
12 4/97
Fig.2 Protection Plug
The Base may be fixed directly to either a British or a Euro- 2.2 PROTECTION PLUG
pean conduit box. Knockout points are provided on the inner
and outer flanges of the Base to enable electrical connection The Protection Plug should be used between the installation
and the commissioning procedures to provide protection to
to be made when the detector is surface mounted. The cen-
tral section of the Base is fitted with an Address Unit znd the fitted Base from dust and inquisitive fingers prior to the
filled with an epoxy-resin. The Address Unit includes sensor being fitted. [Fig.2 refers]. The Plug may be inserted
in one of two positions. A removal tab is provided which
among the various components mounted on its printed cir-
cuit board, a custom chip and the 7-way DIL switch which permits the plug to be easily removed with a suitable tool
prior to fitting the sensor.
is used to define the electrical address of the sensor. The
Base also has four electrical contacts which align with the
contacts on the sensor once the latter is fitted and fully
latched into position. 2.3 RECESSED MOUNTING KIT
An external rib moulded into the Base indicates the position The Recessed Mounting Kit allows a Base to be flush-fitted
which will be assumed by the detector alarm LEDs once the into a false ceiling so that only the sensor protrudes into the
sensor is fitted. The rib must be aligned so that it is visible protected area. A clip-on bezel is provided to cover any fix-
from the search route. This is to satisfy the BS5839 Part 1 ing screw heads, [Fig.3 refers].
definition of a zone.
The inner circular moulding of the Skirt shows the four sen-
2.4 DECKHEAD MOUNTING KIT [DHM35]
sor types in symbolic form. When fitting the Skirt to the Ad-
dressable Base, the chosen type symbol is. to be placed Although originally designed for use in marine applications,
adjacent to the arrow head moulded into the top of one of the the Deckhead Mounting Kit can be recommended for use in
electrical contact pillars. The legs of the Skirt are then insert- particularly damp or dirty areas on land, [Fig.4 refers].
ed into the location slots in the Base and the Skirt turned
;Jockwise until fully home. Once the Skirt is fully home in
the chosen position. it may only be removed with the aid of
a Skirt Changer Head, Para 2.6 refers
© THORN Security Limited 1997 PAGE2of7

11111 SECURITY ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 4197
150 Dia
135 PCD FIXING CENTRES
l'ff" .I
115 Dia.
1• I I : I I :
11111 1 < +-'-tSj•<,---

1 ' ,1,11!11 :
UtLJiL---t---JfUtLJ l
• I FALSE CEILING 48.S
I I
) I
I I i
•
.
I
•
I
.
I
I "\ !
I I "'-
I
155 Dia.
l"---BEZEL 3.5
-q>-
~ - - - - CONDUIT BREAKOUT
ALIGNMENT ARROW
,... ,...., -
·-{----~---~---~---~·-·-•--
I • I
,, ....
,
..... ,
\ f
,, ... .....
\
' I ' / \ I
., . '-..+..-" ' . . _ .. ,
EARTHING STRAP
FIXING
NOTE: BEZEL REMOVED FOR CLARITY
Fig. 3 Recessed Mounting Kit

Registered Offit:e: ~turity House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesn TWl6 5Db
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D2
')2 4/97
41.5
I
-1,,
I'
128.5 PCO FIXING CENTRES

.I
145.5 Dia.
- - - - - - - - - - EARTHING POINT
~ - - - - - - - ALIGNMENT ARROW
_ _ _ _ _ _ DETECTOR BASE
MOUNTING POINT
OECKHEAO
MOUNTING POINT
113 bia.
Fig. 4 Deckhead Mounting Kit (DHM35(

2.5 LOCKING ARRANGEMENT

When the selected sensor is fitted into the Base it may option-
ally be locked in position by a small plastic clip. The locking
facility should only be ne·cessary if the sensor is easily acces-
sible. Once a sensor is locked into position. a key [Fig.5 re-
fers] must be used to remove it from the base.
Fig.6 Skirt Changer Head

1
/ ]
17
40
j
Fig. 5 Lo<'.k Insertion and Ke~· I' 103 Dia.
• I
Fig. 7 Addressable Base and Skirt
2.6 SKIRT CHANGER HEAD Overall Dimensions
The Skirt Changer Head Fig.6) is used to remove a Skirt from

a detector base. Extension poles are available which pemlit Addressable Base
the Skirt to be inserted or removed from high sitings. Screws: Steel/Zinc plated
Recessed Mounting
Kit: "BAYBLEND"
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION [Polycarbonate
3.1 DIMENSIONS [Fig.7 refers.) /ABS alloy] - UL94 - VO
white
3.2 MATERIAL Deckhcad Mounting
Addressable Base: "BAYBLEND"' Kit [DHM35]: Dough Moulded
[Polycarbonate Compound, Glass Filled
/ ABS alloy] and Skirt Flame Polyester [Thenno
retardant - UL94-VO white set] self-coloured white
Protection Plug: Polymide 6.6 [Nylon] -
yellow
Addressable Base:
Terminals and Grade SNIAMID [KNF]
Contacts: Nickel/Silver NS I 03
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE5of7

i Registettd Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesei.: TWl6 5D8
I·
i
MSOO SERIES
01A-03-D2
12 4/97
3.3 WEIGHT
Addressable Base and Skirt: 0.15kg
I
Recessed Mounting Kit: 0.15kg
Deckhead Mounting Kit DHM7: 0.25kg
Skirt Changer Head: 0.37kg
•
Protection Plug: 15g
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature [Operational]: -20°C to + 70°C
Temperature [Storage]: -25°C to +8o0 c
Humidity: 95%max,
non-condensing

Fig. 8 Terminal Designations
Through Supply Voltage: 28V d.c.Max.[polarity
conscious]
4. CABLING
3.6 INTRINSIC SAFETY
The intrinsically-safe version of the detector base is de- 05A-02-D I. Only two connection terminals [ + and -] are
signed to be used in conjunction with a zener safety barrier provided in the Base itself, the input and output connection
_n a certified intrinsically-safe system. The intrinsically-safe being made at the same terminal. The monitoring system
version will be identified by the BASEEFA mark. will
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CO:-ITROLLE~
MSOO SERI ES
DETECTOR
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L- - - - · - - - - ~ ~ - - ---------!>---'
Fig. 9 Simplified Zone Circuit Diagram
© THORN Security Limited 1997 PAGE 6 of 7

pennit "teed" or ''spur" junctions which may be used to sim- 6.2 ACCESSORIES
plify the installation cabling. However, a maximum of two
l.5mrn2 cables may be connected at any one tenninal. End- Packed singly
of-Line devices are not required on addressed circuits, see Recessed Mounting Kit: 517-025-022
Figs.8 & 9.
Deckhead Mounting Kit [DHM35]: 517-001-191
Skirt Changer Head: 517-025-026
5. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT Set of three Extension Poles
The addressable base and skirt are compatible with the com- in Carrying Case: 590-001-0 I I
plete range of the M500 series of ancillary units and plug-in Pack of ten locks and one Key: 517-025-0 IO
sensors.
The base is used in association with the following mountings:
• BESA junction box
• European junction box
• Recessed mounting kit
• Deckhcad mounting kit
6.1 ADDRESSABLE BASES
M500 Addressable Base and Skirt
[packed in 10s]: 517-035-001
M500Ex Addressable Base and Skirt

(packed in IOs): 517-035-002
Protection Plugs
(packed in 25s]: 517-035-006
0IA-03-D3 DESIGN INFORMATION, MF500 SENSOR RANGE

0IA-03-D4 DESIGN INFORMATION, MR500 SENSOR RANGE
0IA-03-DS DESIGN INFORMATION, MS500 SENSOR RANGE
0IA-03-D6 DESIGN INFORMATION, MD500 SENSOR RANGE
01 A-03-11 ADDRESSABLE BASE AND ACCESSORIES, M500 SERIES - INSTALLATION
0IA-03-CI ADDRESSABLE BASE AND ACCESSORIES, M500 SERIES - COMMISSIONING
JM/jm
6th February I 997

Registered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury--on-Th.ames Middlesex TIV16 5D8
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT: MS00 SERIES
ISSUE No. & DATE:
01A-03-I1
02 07/97
MS00 SERIES DETECTOR BASE
INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
The M500 Addressable Detector Base is used with the M400
and MS00 Series of plug-in sensors. Guidance on mounting
and wiring is given below.
1.1 DETECTOR BASE LOCATION

The location of each detector should have been determined at
the system design stage in accordance with the site plan. The
detector bases must be mounted in accordance with this
plan. If problems arise then reference must be made to the sys-
tem designer. 10 10
50
1.2 FIXING THE DETECTOR BASE Fig. 2 Fixing Dimensions for Detector Base
The Detector Base has an alignment indicator moulded into its 1.2.2 FIXING WITH A RECESSED MOUNTING
rim which must be directed towards the search route. This is KIT
to facilitate visual inspection of the detector LEDs. [Fig I
refers]. The indicator takes the form of a small vertical rib. The Recessed Mounting Kit allows a Detector Base to be flush-
fitted into a false ceiling so that only the sensor protrudes into
PROTECTED ARE:A the protected area. The recessed housing has provision for
three 20mm conduit connections and arrows provide an align-
0 0 0 ment indication to ensure correct positioning of the detector

LED.
Secure the housing in position with four No.8 x I inch counter-
sunk zinc plated and passivated steel screws, [or equivalent] at
the fixing centres shown in fig. 3 overleaf.
·, 0 D -0 The surface chosen for the mounting should be flat over the
area of the flange to ensure a stable fixing and strong enough to
\ ZALIG1'11ENT INDICATOR take the weight of the mounting. detector base and sensor.
(TYPICAL>
\
The kit comprises:
SEARCH ROUTE a) A housing with bezel to cover the fixing
screws,
Fig. I Alignment Indicator
and passivated steel screws to secure the detec-
1.2.1 FIXING TO A CONDUIT BOX tor base,
The Detector Base is to be secured directly to a conduit box with c) an M4 x 8mm long, pan head, zinc-plated and
two M4 pan head steel screws. zinc plated and passivated. The passivated steel screw with a brass cup washer
fixing slot allows the mounting to be fitted both to and a brass plain washer.
B.E.S.A. conduit boxes having fitting points at 50mm centres
and European conduit boxes having fitting points at 70mm cen-
tres.
© THORN Security Limited 1997 PAGE 1 of4

MSOO SERIES
01A-03-I1
)2 07/97
1.2.3 FIXING WITH A DECKHEAD the underside of the housing to ensure a stable fixing and
MOUNTING KIT strong enough to take the weight of the mounting, detector
base and sensor.
Originally designed for use in Marine applications, the
Deckhead Mounting Kit may be fitted in particularly damp
or dirty environments on land.
The housing is to be secured with two No. 8 x 11/ 2 inch
countersunk zinc plated and passivated steel screws [or
equivalent) at the fixing centres shown in fig. 4. The sur-
face chosen for the mounting should be flat over the area of
150 Dia
,.
135 PCD Fixing Centres
115 Dia
I. ; •I
I"'[~tU1L---t---Jf~t~
"-·-+->- "ii'"' ___
' I I I :
I II II I I ' I I 11 I II I :
l FALSE 48.5
' I CEILING
I
; ! i
I'
I'
'
I
I
I
! \ !
I
I
I '
~BEZEL
hs
155 Dia
-q)-
- - - - - CONDUIT BREAKOUT
ALIGNMENT ARROW
,,,.. "',
I
,. .... ... ,
·-~---·~·-·~·-·~--
, I
, • \
' I \ , I
'.... ., ~ ..... ..J_ . . . '
EARTH STRAP
FIXING
I
-@-
NOTE: BEZEL REMOVED FOR CLARITY
Fig. 3 Recessed Mounting Kit
© THORN Security Limited 1997 PAGE 2 of 4

EQUIPMENT: MS00 SERIES
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···- PUBLICATION: 01A-03-I1
11111 SEClJRITY ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 07/97
The Deckhead Mounting Kit comprises: Note: Align the deckhead mounting housing so that
the arrow which is embossed in the bottom is
a) A housing having 20mm breakouts for con-
at g(j> to the direction required for visual in-
duit connection.
spection of the sensor LED.
and passivated steel screws to secure the de-
tector base.
c) an M4 x 8mm long pan head, zinc-plated and
passivated steel screw with a brass cup washer
and a brass plain washer.
ALIGNMENT ARROW
DETECTOR BASE
MOUNTING
128.5 PCO FIXING CENTRES
~ - - - - - - - - EARTHING POINT
_______.........,,
...,_
ill
Fig. 4 Fixing Dimensions for DHM69 Deckhead Mounting Kit

MSOO SERIES
01A-03-I1
12 07/97
1.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

Refer to the relevant Installation document for the System
Controller.
A maximum of two 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any
one terminal on the ancillary modules. When installing de-
tector bases leave cable tails of 250mm.
1.3.1 CABLE ENTRY

Cable entry to the detector base is via the cable spaces pro-
vided.
1.4 INITIAL CABLE CHECKS

Carefully perform the cable insulation and continuity checks
given in the relevant System Controller installation docu-
mentation.
CAUTION:
THE DETECTOR BASES DO NOT CARRY

ANY "OVER-VOLTAGE" OR "REVERSE-
VOLTAGE" PROTECTION DEVICES. IT IS
THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT ANY CABLE
CHECKS WHICH ARE MADE AFTER THE
BASES HAVE BEEN CONNECTED ARE
MADE AT A VOLTAGE WHICH IS LOWER
THAN 10V.
JM/jm
3rd June 1997

=====lJHORN
-···- SECURITY EQUIPMENT: MS00 SERIES
11111 PUBLICATION:
ISSUE No. & DATE:
01A-03-C1
02 7/97
MS00 SERIES DETECTOR BASE
COMMISSIONING
1. GENERAL
CAUTION:
Note: It is essential that the installation is thoroughly IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ALL INSTRUMENTS
checked before proceeding with Commissioning. ARE REGULARLY CALIBRATED.
Before connecting the basJ! to the addressable circuit, a general

inspection of the system should be carried out. In particular
the position of the detector base must be checked to ensure that
the requirements given in publication 0 I A-03-11 - M500 Series
1.1 ADDRESS SETTING
Detector Base - Installation, have been adhered to. The address for each module is set up on a 7-way OIL switch
Repeat the cable insulation and continuity checks performed in marked I to 7. The switch positions that must be selected for
the Installation section as detailed in the relevant System Con- each specific address are shown in Table I.
troller documentation.
An insulation tester and a multimeter rated in excess of 20k
ohm/volt are required for commissioning.
SWITCHES 5, 6, 7
1,2,3,4 xoo oxo xxo oox xox
0000 16 32 48 64 80
xooo 1 17 33 49 65 81
oxoo 2 18 34 50 66 82
xxoo 3 19 35 51 67 83
ooxo 4 20 36 52 68 84
xoxo 5 21 37 53 69 85
OXXO 6 22 38 54 70 86
xxxo 7 23 39 55 71 87
ooox 8 24 40 56 72 88
xoox 9 25 41 57 73 89
oxox 10 26 42 58 74 90
xxox 11 27 43 59 75 91
ooxx 12 28 44 60 76 92
xoxx 13 29 45 61 77 93
oxxx 14 30 46 62 78 94
)()()()( 15 31 47 63 79 95
Table. I Address Setting Switch Positions
© THORN Security Limited 1997 PAGE 1 of2

MSOO SERIES
01A-03-C1
12 7/97
1.2 PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING

Do not fit sensors into the M500 bases at this stage.
1.3 M500 DETECTOR BASE

COMMISSIONING
a) Remove the Skirt. Do this by fitting the
bell-shaped slider guide of the Skirt Changer
Tool over the Skirt. Tum and press the tool
until the spigot visible through the bell-
shaped slider guide is fully home. Turn the
whole assembly until the skirt is released,
b) set the correct address on the switches and
wire the module into the loop [fig. I],
,u, +UE
LOOP IN LOOP OUT
D Fig. 2 Lock Insertion and Key
Note: If the lock has been fitted, the sensor may now
LOOP IN LOOP OUT only be removed after first inserting the key
~ ~E
provided into the hole in the skirt until the lock
is depressed and then turning the sensor anti-
Fig. I Connection of MS00 Base clockwise.
c) fit the sensor as follows: d) carry out the commissioning procedure as

detailed in the System Controller documen-
i) if the sensor is to be locked in position fit
tation.
the lock to the skirt as shown in Fig. 2;
ii) the Skirt must be replaced in the correct
position for the sensor type specified in the JM/ljc
site plan. To do this, hold the Skirt in the
Skirt Changer tool and align the specified 3rd July 1997
sensor type symbol [printed on the skirt] to
the black arrow printed on the detector
base pillar. Depress the Tool and Skirt on
to the Base and tum them clockwise until
the Skirt is fully home;
iii) place the specified sensor onto the Skirt
and tum it clockwise until it moves into the
Skirt. Continue to tum the sensor until it
is fully home;

M500 SERIES
01A-03-S1
001 12/91
M500 SERIES DETECTOR AND BASE
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
1. GENERAL e) check Heat Detectors [MD500 Series] and

Smoke Detectors [MF500 and MR500 Series J
This publication details the various checks recommended for to confirm that a clear space of at least 600mm
keeping the detectors in good working order. Carry out main- radius is preserved in all directions below the
tenance on control equipment and auxiliary equipment as laid mounting plane of the detector,
down in the relevant publication.
f) check Smoke Detectors [MF500 and MR500
Series] to confirm that the passage of smoke
into the detector is not obstructed by surround-
WARNING:
ing objects,
g) check-those detectors as required in the servic-
ANY AUXILIARY UNITS WHICH ARE ing schedule for correct operation. Detectors
CONNECTED MAY OPERATE DURING THE which fail to operate satisfactorily must be re-
FOLLOWING PROCEDURES UNLESS moved. a replacement inserted and the zone re-
DISABLED BY WITHDRAWING FUSES ETC. commissioned. Do not attempt to disassem-
ble. or repair a detector but return it to the fac-
ATTENTION IS DRAWN TO PUBLICATION tory for disposal.
05A-03-S1 IF THE SYSTEM INCLUDES AN
ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED GAS
EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM. Note: The return of Ion Chamber Detectors {MFSOO Se-
ries is to be carried out in accordance with the lat-
est company standing instructions for the
transportation of Radioactive materials.
1.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION

a) Ensure that there have been no structural chang- 1.2 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
es which may require a change of a) Para I.I a)-f),
protection. Any such changes must be the sub-
ject of a report to the Service Department, b) Smoke Detectors [MF500 and MR500 Series]
are to be removed at two year intervals and a
b) check that no physical damage has occurred to replacement inserted,
the detectors, and that stability and alignment
are not disturbed, c) check each detector for correct
operation. Then as described in Para 1.1 g).
c) check that the interconnecting cables are un-
damaged and secure,
d) check Flame Detectors [MS500 Series] for the 1.3 FLAME DETECTOR CLEANING
following:
Use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment or a stiff bristle
i) to confinn that the windows of the detectors [not wire] brush to remove dirt that has accumulated on or
are not blocked by dirt, oil, grease etc. Clean if around the detector, skirt and base. The plastic may be
necessary as described in Para 1.3, cleaned with a damp cloth. If the plastic is severely stained a
ii) to confirm that· no physical obstruction has cloth made damp with dilute detergent and water may be
been placed in the line of sight between the de- effective. Solvents should not be used unless previous testing
tector and the protected area, has proved they do not affect the material used in construction.
© 1991 THORN Security Limited PAGE 1 of2

M500 SERIES
01A-03-S1
'l01 12/91
Note: The act of cleaning or polishing the face or win-

dow ofa flame detector may cause the detector
to produce an alarm. It is important therefore
that BEFORE THE WINDOW IS CLEANED,
THE DETECTOR IS ISOLATED, either by iso-
lating the zone at the control equipment or by
temporarily removing the detector. If the latter
method is used a fault will be generated, and
care should be exercised to ensure that the
electrical contacts are kept dry. Reset the
zone at the control equipment on completion of
cleaning the Flame detector.
PY/kdh/J6- l 4[7]
14th November 1991
PAGE2of2
=====
-···- rr,HORN
lJ
ISSUE No. & DATE:
01A-03-D3
02 2/97
ION CHAMBER SMOKE SENSORS, MF500 RANGE
1. INTRODUCTION 2.1 CHAMBER
The MF500 Range of lon--Chamber Smoke Sensors forms part Sensors in the MF500 range use an ionisation chamber to
of the M500 Analogue Addressable Fire Detection detect the presence of both the visible and the invisible
System. The sensor is intended to plug into a ceiling-mounted particles [aerosols] produced in fires. The standard and the
Base [type M500] to form an analogue addressable LS. sensor both use the same chamber which is represented
detector. The detector is designed to transmit, to a remote diagrammatically in Fig. 1.
control equipment. analogue signals which represent the state of The small radio-active source [<33.3kBq of Americium 241]
the sensing chamber. Intrinsically-safe versions are available ionises the air within the volume enclosed by the slotted outer
for use, in conjunction with the M500Ex Base, in hazardous cover. The ionisation causes a small current to flow between
atmospheres. the source and the cover which have a fixed voltage applied
between them.
Within the chamber is a perforated electrode known as the
WARNING: collector. This electrode will, under clean air conditions,
assume a certain potential relative to the outer electrode/
THESE SENSORS CONTAIN A SMALL
screen. This potential is largely unaffected by the strength of
AMOUNT OF RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL the source or by temperature, pressure and humidity.
[Americium 241). SENSORS ARE SAFE
UNDER THE PRESCRIBED CONDITIONS OF If smoke/aerosol is introduced into the chamber, however, as
USE BUT MUST NOT BE DISMANTLED BY shown in Fig. 2, the potential of the collector will increase and
UNAUTHORISED PERSONS. TRANSPORT the magnitude of this change in potential can be used to
AND STORAGE OF SENSORS MUST BE indicate the smoke density. The current that flows across the
ARRANGED IN ACCORDANCE WITH chamber is very small and the device used to sense the
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REGULATIONS AS potential of the collector must therefore be of very high
SUMMARISED IN COMPANY PUBLiCATIONS imped'1nce.
GWI010/3 AND GWI010/4
RESPECTIVELY. THORN SECURITY PROVIDE
A DISPOSAL SERVICE FOR THE SENSORS.
COLLECTOR
POTENTIAL
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE
COU&£!:Q!!
0 SMOHE.l'AEROSOL DENSITY
'T"
I
I
I
u
l' Fig. 2 Graph Showing Collector Potential Relative to
......... Smoke/Aerosol Density
To ensure high stability and resistance to corrosion all metal

parts of the chamber are of stainless steel and the critical
insulators are of P.T.F.E.
Fig. 1 Representational Diagram of Ion-Chamber

Registered Office: Security House The Summit Haaworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVl6 5D8
M500 SERIES
01A-03-O3
•2 2/97
,-------------....-------------0Vs +12V
r.::::::J Uc
~ - - - - - - - - - - < 0 CONTROL
Temperature I VA ANALOGUE
Comperisatlon Oln'Plfl'
Anopl iFier
-------------<{>-~
Chamber
- - .----I
Sl
© Current
Sink
Fig. 3 Simplified Block Schematic Diagram of Sensor
2.2 CIRCUIT intrinsic safety is maintained under nonnal conditions and

with any two circuit faults. Because of the limitations
!.2.1 STANDARD (SAFE AREA) SENSOR
imposed by the zener safety barriers used, the ANALOGUE
A simplified block schematic of the circuit is given in Fig. 3. OUTPUT currents are reduced to half those values used in
the standard sensor.
The voltage at the collector electrode of the chamber is fed
to a high impedance amplifier which buffers and scales the
voltage signal. This voltage, and a fixed reference voltage
Vref, is fed to the electronic changeover switch SI. 3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
The switch SI, under the control of the logic circuit, The major components of the sensor are:
switches either the modified chamber voltage or the • Body Assembly
reference voltage to the input of the voltage-controlled,
current sink. The logic circuit responds to the state of the • Printed Circuit/Chamber Assembly
'CONTROL' input to the sensor so that when ·CONTROL' • Baffle and Insect Screen
is LOW, the current sink is·equal to the fixed 'IDENTITY'
current and when 'CONTROL'· is HIGH the current • Outer Cover
represents the state of the chamber, [CONDITION current].
The MS00 Addressable Base provides the 'CONTROL'
An exploded view of the sensor is given in Fig. 4.
input and allows the current sink to draw current from the
detector loop wiring in response to the address programmed
into the base. The currents drawn by the current sink are
measured and processed at the Control Unit, [ where any 3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY
appropriate action is taken]. The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which
The ANALOGUE OUTPUT current flows through the are secured the four sensor contacts which align with
internal LED indicator which lights each time the sensor is contacts in the M500 Base. The moulding incorporates
polled. securing and polarising features to retain the sensor in the
base.
The inside surface of the moulding is metallised to provide
2.2.2 INTRINSICALLY-SAFE VERSION OF shielding against EMI [Electro-Magnetic Interference]; the
THE SENSOR connections between the contacts and the PCB are made
using feed-through capacitors.
fhe MF501Ex is identical in principle to the standard [safe-
area] version but has small circuit changes to ensure that
PAGE 2of 8
EQUIPMENT: MSOO SERIES
::::: THC)RN PUBLICATION: 01A-03-O3
If Ill SECURITY ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 2/97
Fig. 4 Exploded View of Type MFSOI Sensor

Registered Office: Seturity House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Mkldlnu TWl6 SDB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D3
'2 2/97
3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/CHAMBER 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

ASSEMBLY
4.1 MECHANICAL
All electronic components, including the LED indicator and
FET buffer are mounted on a single printed circuit Dimensions
board. The complete chamber assembly is also mounted The O\'erall dimensions are shown in Fig. 5.
on the PCB although its cover is removable to facilitate
routine factory cleaning. Materials
The printed circuit/chamber assembly is fitted inside the Body and cover: "'BAYBLEND" ABS/
body assembly and secured to the feed-through Poly-carbonate alloy
capacitors. All external connections to the circuit are Thenno-plastic,
therefore provided with EMI filtering.
self-colour white.
The body assembly is then filled with an epoxy resin so that
all critical components and conductors are encapsulated as a Chamber Components: Bright Stainless Steel to
protection against corrosion and mechanical shock. BS 1449: Pt.2 Grade 316
S 16, PTFE, and
polycarbonate.
3.3 FINAL ASSEMBLY
The assembly described above in Para 3.2 is, in effect, a Weight
complete sensor but the remaining components provide Sensor: 0.21kg
further protection against external influences.
Sensor+ Base: 0.33kg
The insect screen is fitted over the outer cover of the
chamber to prevent the entry of insects which could cause
false alarms. The baffle. in conjunction with the outer 4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
·over, is carefully designed to allow easy entry to smoke
<lnd, at the same time, to minimise the effects of wind on the Temperature
chamber. Both the baffle and the insect screen are retained
Operating: -20°C to+ 70°C
by the outer cover which is a snap fit onto the body assembly.
Storage: -25°C to +80°C
Note: Operation below O"C is not recommended

detector
102.6 Dia.
----.--..-!6==='==-~!
.
38 S
\ ,
90
\._
----·r---
---- I ~
1--_
I
20 SLOTS
- - - - EQU I -SPACED
AJlOUND COVER
51.5
?1.3
I
20 90
- --------------------------·-
' CLEARANCE FOR flD10VAL
Fig. 5 Overall Dimensions of MFSOO Range of Detectors
PAGE4of8
_,,,_UHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D3
Relative Humidity 95% [non-condensing] 4.5 PERFORMANCE

CHARACTERISTICS
Shock
Vibration
Impact
Corrosion
} To BS 5445: Pt. 7 [EN54-7]
The MF501, with the M500 Base, forms an analogue
addressable detector which transmits, to a remote
equipment, signals representing the state of the sensing
chamber. The control equipment evaluates these signals
against predetermined criteria and decides when an
ALARM condition should be signalled. The information
EMI: Equals or exceeds the given below therefore relates to the performance of the
requirements of MF50I simply as a transducer, since the system alarm
BS EN 50081-1 and response is determined by the control unit.
BS EN 50082-1
4.5.1 RESPONSE TO SMOKE
The following characteristics [Table I J apply at 25°C and measured with reference to the response of a standard
with VS= VA= +12.4V [sec Fig. 3] unless otherwise Measuring Ionisation Chamber [MIC]. Smoke density is
specified. measured as a '"y-value", calculated from the change in MIC
current, which is proponional to smoke density.
Characteristic Min Typ. Max. Unit The condition current of the MF500 range is a linear
Operating Voltage [VS) 11.5 12.4 13 V
function ofy (smoke density] such that:
Quiescent Current [Pin] - - 100 µA
Control Voltage - HIGH 8 - VS+0.5 V Condition Current (le)= 7 + 10 x 'y' mA
(VCJ-LOW 0 - 4 V For IS20 mA
Analogue Output (VA] 9 - VS+0.5 V
Output Resistance This is shown graphically in Fig. 6.
[Analogue Output)
200 - - Kn
CURRErfl"
Identity Current [VC<4] 10.2 10.4 12.6 •A
mA 20
Identity Current (VC<4] Ex' 5.1 5.2 6.3 mA 19
18
Condition Current [VC>8] 0 - 28 mA l?
16
Condition Current [VC:>8] Ex 0 - 14 mA 1S
14
Table. I Electrical Characteristics 13
12
11
* Sec Para 4.5. I. 10
9

•
?
6
s
The MF501Ex sensor. when used with the M500Ex Base, is 4
designed to comply with BS 5501: Pt. 7 [EN 50 020] for 3
2
intrinsically safe apparatus. It is certified 1
0
0 o.s 1.0
E Ex ia IICTS
SMOKE DENSITY <~-v«lue)
under BASEEFA certificate number 89C2200X and is used in Fig. 6 Condition Current vs Smoke Density
conjunction with a suitable zener safety barrier in a certified In clean air conditions [y = O] the value of condition current
intrinsically-safe system. indicates the quiescent condition of the chamber. Any
Electrical and performance details are generally the same as deviation from 7mA will indicate a change in the ambient
for the MF50 I sensor. The following additional information conditions. This may be caused by pressure, wind, etc., or
is applicable to the MF50 I Ex: by a drift in the chamber operating point. In either case,
the deviation may be used in the control equipment to
Maximum Voltage [for safety]: 28V correct the alarm threshold level.
Maximum Power Input: IW
Equivalent Inductance: 0 Note: Current levels in the MFSO 1Ex sensor are
Equivalent Capacitance: 1.5nF exactly half those given above for the MF501
sensor.
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE 5 of8

Reg,istcred Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TWJ6 SOB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D3
'2 2/97
4.5.3 THE EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON

SENSITIVITY
CONDITION
CURRENT The sensor incorporates temperature compensation and its
MA
condition current will be substantially constant over its
8 specified operating range.
4.5.4 THE EFFECT OF ATMOSPHERIC

• PRESSURE ON SENSITIVITY
z The working point of the chamber will vary with
oL----'---....L_ _ _..,__ _ _,_ atmospheric pressure and-also therefore with altitude. The
n Z 3
• relationship between air pressure and condition current [in
clean air] is given in Fig. 8.
Al R UELOCITV
Fig. 7 Effect of Air Velocity Upon Condition The change caused by normal variations in atmospheric
Current pressure is insignificant. However, for installations at
altitudes of 1500m or more, the alann threshold should be
set to allow for the modified working point.
4.5.2 EFFECT OF AIRFLOW ON
SENSITIVITY
The signal status of the MF500 range of sensors has been
specifically designed to move away from the alarm The response of the MF501 sensor to real or large-scale test
condition when the sensor is subjected to abnormal air fires will be partly dependent upon the threshold and the
velocities. The relationship between condition current and response delay that are set in the control unit. Other
·ir velocity [in clean air] is given in Fig. 7. factors, however, such as the smoke entry characteristic of
the detector and the rate of development of the fire, the
The effect of normal air velocities upon sensitivity is thermal lift of the fire and the type of smoke it produces, are
negligible, however if the air velocity is known to be above also important. For this reason, smoke detectors are
2m/sec. then the alarm threshold should be set accordingly. subjected to test fires covering a range of fire types. These
tests are defined in BS 5445: Pt. 9 which also defines the way
in which detector sensitivity is classified. Three classes are
used: A, Band C, where A is the highest sensitivity. If the
detector does not respond. or responds inadequately to a test
fire it is not classified, i.e. [NJ.
CURRENT
I ti ,nA
10
•
z
-
0 '
-1000 '
1000 I
1500
'
2000 I
2500
'
3000 HEIGHT IN METRES
830 090 620 550 ATMOSPHERIC

PRESSURE 1nm Hg
NORMAL VARIATION IN ATMOSPHERIC

PRESSURE AT SEA LEVEL
Fig. 8 Change in Sensor Condition Current Against Atmospheric pressure
PAGE6of8
_,,,_UHORN
-···-
-···- SECURITY
EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D3
11111 ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 2/97
Typical test results for the MF501 sensor, with the control unit
alann threshold set to 14.5mA [y = 0.75], and with a time THRESHOLD
CURRENT (MA) DELA
delay of5 seconds, are given in Table 2. EQUIVELENT y
y
SENSITIVITY VALUE
MF50 MF501E (SEC)
1 X
DESIGNATION TYPE CLASSIFICATION

Normal 0.75 14.5 7.3 6
TF1 open cetlulosic A Normal with 0.75 14.5 7.3 24
[wood flaming]
Delay
TF2 smouldering pyrolysis C low 1.1 18.0 9.0 6
[wood]
Low with Delay - NOT RECOMMENDED
TF3 glowing smouldering B
[cotton]
Table. 3 Recommended Threshold Currents
TF4 open plastics A
[polyurethane foam]
a) A High sensitivity setting should be used if
TF5 liquid {n-heptane] B the airflow exceeds 4m/s.
TF6 liquid N b) A Nonnal sensitivity setting may be used
[methylated spirit] for airflow up to 4m/s.
Table. 2 Typical Results of MFSO Sensors c) A Low sensitivity setting should only be
used when the airflow is less than 2m/s.
4.7 CHOICE OF ALARM THRESHOLD Sensitivity of the MF50 l reduces with increasing altitude
and it is recommended that:
At the system design stage it is important that the correct
threshold setting and delay is chosen for each sensor. The a) For installations sited above 1500m, the
optimum settings will depend very largely upon the type of High sensitivity setting should be used.
equipment and fire risk present.
b) The Low sensitivity setting should not be
Although it is possible to set any current as an ALARM level used for installations sited above 1OOOm.
it is recommended that only three possible levels are
used. These levels should give alarm thresholds equivalent
to those given by conventional detectors having High, Normal 5. ORDERING INFORMATION
and Low sensitivities. Similarly, only two time delay values
arc recommended, corresponding to No1mal and Delayed Jl,ff501 Standard Sensor: 516-030-00 I
conventional detectors. MF501Ex Intrinsically-Safe Sensor: 516-030-002
Recommended threshold currents and delays are given in M500 Detector Base: 517-035-001
Table 3 for the MF50 I and MF50 I Ex sensors.
Guidance on the choice of threshold setting and delay is given
in publication OI A-03-D I but it is necessary also to consider
the effects of air movement and altitude.
ln general, in areas where continuous forced ventilation
exists, it is recommended that:
THRESHOLD
CURRENT (MA) DELA
EQUIVELENT y y
SENSITIVITY VALUE
MF50 MF501E (SEC)
1 X
High 0.4 12.5 6.3 6
High with Delay 0.4 12.5 6.3 24

Registered Office: Stturity House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVJ6 SOB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D3
'2 2/97
0IA-03-D2 MS00 SERIES, BASE AND ACCESSORIES, PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
0IA-03-11 MS00 SERIES DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
0IA-03-Cl 500 SERIES DETECTOR BASE - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
JM/jm
6th February 1997
PAGE 8 of8
M500 SERIES
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···-
EQUIPMENT:
11111 SECURITY ISSUE No: & DATE: 02 2/97
OPTICAL SMOKE SENSORS, MR500 RANGE
1. INTRODUCTION 2.2 FEATURES OF MEASURING CHAMBER
The MR500 mnge of optical smoke sensors forms part of the In order to make a practical smoke sensor which uses the type
M500 Analogue Addressable fire detection system. The sensor of optical system described, great care is needed in the design
plugs into the MS00 Base to fonn an analogue addressable de- of the housing. Both the optical components and the sampling
tector which transmits analogue signals representing the state of volume must be protected from the environment but still allow
the sensor chamber to a remote control equipment, An intrinsi- smoke to enter freely into the sampling volume. The housing
cally-safe version is available for use, in conjunction with the is also designed in such a way that dust settling on its surface
M500Ex Base, in hazardous atmospheres. will not scatter so much light into the photodetector that mis-
leading signals are generated.
The emitter is a Gallium Arsenide [GaAs] solid state type op-
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE erating at a wavelength of 0. 94µm; the photodetector is a sili-
con photodiode. These devices with their associated lenses arc
2.1 OPTICAL SYSTEM held within the optical array which also provides the baffles of
Fig. I. The design of this assembly is such that the presence of
Sensors in the MR500 range detect visible particles produced in
very small insects [e.g. thrips] will not cause false alanns.
fires by using the light scattering properties of the particles. All
sensors in the range use the same optical principle which is
shown diagrammatically in Fig. I.
The optical system consists of an emitter and photodetector with
a lens in front of each, so arranged that their optical axes cross
in the centre of the sampling volume. The emitter, with its lens,
produces a narrow beam oflight which is prevented from reach-
ing the photodctector by the baffles. When smoke is present in
the sampling ,olume a proportion of the light is scattered, some
of which reaches the photodetector. For a given type of smoke,
the iight reaching the photodctector is proportional to the smoke
density and is converted into an analogue electrical signal for
transmission to the fire control unit.
LENS...,,/" --- LENS
Fig. I MRS00 Sensor Range, Optical System
Registered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TWl6 SDB
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D4
02 2/97
OPT! CAL ARRAY
SNOHE PATH
Fig. 2 Measuring Chamber, Showing Smoke Flow Path
Sensors in the MR500 Range use the unique measuring The design of the measuring chamber is the subject of Euro-
chamber shown in Fig. 2. pean and US Patent Applications.
fhc Sampling Volume is enclosed within a measuring cham-
ber formed by conical labyrinth mouldings. The optical de-
sign of the chamber provides a very low background signal 2.3 CIRCUIT OPERATION
in clean air conditions even when the chamber is contami- A simplified block schematic of the detector is given in
nated by white dust. This high tolerance to dust is improved
even further by an aerodynamic design which encourages Fig. 3.
dust settlement to occur on the less critical optical surfaces.
--.------------------.----------()u,
Timerl'
Osei l lator
Analogue
Amplifier S':,!nchronous:
Output
$1
Emitter Detector
Current
Sink
Photo--
Detector
--4----4-----+-------+------<>-------.I~-----{') OU
Fig. 3 Schematic Diagram of Detector
PAGE 2 of7
M500 SERIES
-···-
11111 SECURITY ISSUE No. &.DATE: 02 219r
2.3.1 STANDARD (SAFE AREA) SENSOR 3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY

The GaAs emitter is pulsed every IOs to reduce quiescent The body assembly consists ofa plastic moulding to which
current. The pulse signal, as received by the photodetector, is are secured four detector contacts which align with the con-
amplified and fed to the synchronous detector. This detector tacts in the M500 Base. The moulding incorporates secur-
is provided with a refen!nce signal from the timer/oscillator ing and polarising features to retain the detector in the base.
and gives an output proponional to the photodetector signal
which is stored on a ·memory' capacitor. The voltage on the
shielding against Electro-Magnetic Interference [EMI]; the
capacitor is updated eve1y 1Os. connections between the contacts and the PCB are made us-
The signal voltage, together with a reference voltage, is fed ing feed-through capacitors.
via the electronic changeover switch Stoa voltage-controlled
current sink. The logic circuit responds to the state of the 3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/OPTICAL ARRAY
CONTROL input so that when CONTROL is LOW the cur-
rent sink is equal to the fixed IDENTITY current. Converse- ASSEMBLY
ly, when the CONTROL is HIGH the current represents the All electronic components, including the LED alarm indica-
photodetector signal, that is its CONDITION current. tor, are mounted on a single printed circuit board. The Op-
The MSOO addressable base provides the CONTROL input tical Array Assembly is also mounted on the PCB. The
and allows the current sink to draw current from the detector combined assembly is fitted inside the body and connected
loop wiring in response to the address programmed into the to the feed-through capacitors. All external connections to
base. The current drawn by the current sink [ANALOGUE the circuit are thereby provided with EMI filtering. The
OUTPUT] is measured at the control unit which then takes Body Assembly is then filled with epoxy to provide me-
the appropriate action. chanical strength and to protect circuit components against
corrosive atmospheres.
THE ANALOGUE OUTPUT current flows through the inter-
nal LED indicator which lights every time the sensor is
polled. 3.3 FINAL ASSEMBLY
The two labyrinth mouldings are fitted on the encapsulated
2.3.2 INTRINSICALLY-SAFE VERSION body and the smoke entry is sealed by a wire mesh to keep
out larger insects. The labyrinth is retained by the outer
Operation of the MR50 I Ex sensor is identical in principle to cover which is a snap fit on the body.
that of the standard version but has small circuit changes to
ensure that intrinsic safety is maintained with any two circuit
faults. Because of the limitations imposed by the zener safety
barriers used. the ANALOGUE OUTPUT currents are re-
duced to half the \·alues used in the standard sensor. 4.1 GENERAL
Two sensor types are offered within the MR500
3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION Range. The technical specifications of these are very simi-
lar and the details given below are applicable to both unless
The major Components of the detector are: otherwise stated.
• Body Assembly
• Printed Circuit/Optical Array Assembly 4.2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
• Labyrinth and Insect Screen Dimensions
• Outer Cover The overall dimensions are shown in Fig. 5.
Materials
An exploded view of the sensor is given in Fig. 4. Body and Cover: "BAYBLEND" ABS/poly-
carbonate alloy Thermo-
·plastic, self-colour white.
Weight
Sensor: 0.21kg
Sensor+ Base: 0.33kg
Rt~istend Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlnu TWl6 SOB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D4
02 2/97
Fig. 4 Expo
I ded View
. of the MRSOO TyP e Sensor
PAGE 4 of 7
M500 SERIES
-···-
102 6 DI a.
I
!
I
38.5
I
96
' i
I
,I
~~~-~~
7?.3
57.5
30 SLOTS
EQUI-SPACED
...._ AROUND COVER
I
20 90
- --
L...
---- - -----
CLEARAN CE
--- ---- - - -- --- -
FOR REM OVAL
Fig. 5 Overall Dimensions of the MRSOO Range D~tector/Sensor
4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL Charactc..-istk Min. Typ. Max. Unit

Temperature Operating Voltage [VS} 11.5 12.4 13 V
Operating: -20°C to + 70°C Quiescent Current [Pin] - - 120 µA
Storage: -25°C to +80°C Control Voltage - HIGH 8 - VS+0.5 V
[VC]- LOW 0 - 4 V
Analogue Output [VA] 9 - VS-+0.5 V
Note: Operation below Cf' C is not recommended un- Output Resistance 200 - - k!l
less steps are taken to eliminate condensation, [ Analogue Output)
and hence ice formation, on the sensor. ldcn1i1y Current [VC<4] 16.0 18.0 20.0 mA
IJcn111y Current [VC<4] Ex· 8.0 9.0 10.0 mA
Relative Humidity 95% non-condensing

Condition Current (VC>B] 0 - 28 mA
Condition Current [VC>B) Ex· 0 14 mA
Shock Table. 1 Electrical Characteristics .

Vibration To BS 5445: Pt. 7 [EN54-7]
Impact 4.5 INTRINSIC SAFETY
Corrosion
The MRS0 I Ex Sensor, when used in the M500Ex Base, is
designed to comply with BS 5501: Pt. 7 [EN 50 020] for in-
EMI: Equals or exceeds the trinsically safe apparatus. It is certified
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1 E Ex ia IIC TS
under BASEEFA certificate number 89C2200X and is used

4.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS in conjunction with a suitable zener safety barrier in a certi-
fied intrinsically-safe system.
The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and
with VS= VA= +l2.4V unless otherwise specified.
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE 5of7
Registered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thamn Middlesex TIVl6 SOB
MSOO SERIES
01A-03-D4
02 2/97
Electrical and performance details arc generally the same as

for the MR501 Detector. The following additional informa- CURRENT
tion is applicable to the MR50 I Ex detector: ••
20
19
Maximum Voltage [for safety]: 28V 18
17
Maximum PO\ver Input: 0.58W 1&
15
Equivalent Inductance: 0 14
13
Equivalent Capacitance: l.5nF 12
11
10
9
4.6 PERFORMANCE •
7
CHARACTERISTICS •
5
The MR501 sensor, with the M500 Base, forms an analogue •
3
addressable detector which transmits signals representing 2 (m dB/m)
1 o. 1
the level of the photodetector signal to a remote control 0
0 2 0 3
unit. The control equipment evaluates these signals against
pre-determined criteria and decides when an ALARM con-
0 2 [z/m) 4
•
OBSCURATION
dition should be signalled. The infonnation given below
therefore relates to the performance of the MR50 I as a trans- Fig. 6 Condition Current vs Smoke Density
ducer only, since the system alarm response is determined by (Grey Smoke!
the control unit.
4.6.2 EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE
The sensor incorporates temperature compensation and its
4.6.1 RESPONSE TO SMOKE condition current will be substantially constant over its spec-
,~he response of an optical smoke detector is normally meas- ified operating range.
ured with reference to the obscuration produced by
smoke. Obscuration is measured in percent per metre, or in
dB per metre. The latter unit is used in BS 5445 Pt. 7 and is 4.7 CHOICE OF ALARM THRESHOLD
designated ·m·.
At the system design stage it is imponanr that the correct
Unfortunately, there is no fixed relationship between optical threshold setting is chosen for each sensor. Although any
scattering and obscuration, the ratio between them being de- current level can be chosen in the control unit as an ALARM
pendent on the type of smoke. For convenience, 'grey' level, it is recommended that only three possible levels are
smoke is normally used but white and black smokes give used. These levels should give alarm thresholds equivalent
more or less scattered light respectively for a given obscura- to those given by conventional detectors having High, Nor-
tion level. mal and Low sensitivities.
The condition current of the MR501 is a linear function of Recommended threshold currents for the MR50 I and
obscuration for a given type of smoke. For grey smoke the MR501Ex sensors are given in Table 2.
current is given by:
Guidance on the choice of threshold setting is given in Pub-
lication 0IA-03-DI.
CONDITION CURRENT (le) - 8.8 + 40 x 'm' mA
For le :520 mA EQUIVELENT THRESHOLD CURRENT
SENSITIVITY (MA)
This is shown graphically in Fig. 6.

dB/m %Im i\lRSOI MR501Ex
High 0.12 2.7 13.6 6.8

Note: The current levels in the MR501 Ex are half
those given above for the MR501. Nonna! 0.15 3.4 14.8 7.4
Low 0.23 5.2 18.0 9.0
PAGE6of7
_,.,_TJHORN
-···-
-···-
EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D4
4.8 RESPONSE TO FIRE TESTS It will be noted that the MR50l is not classified forthe open
[flaming] wood fire TF l. This test fire is typical of the fast-
The response of the MR501 to 'real' or large-scale test fires burning fire which produces mainly invisible particles
will depend. largely, upon the threshold setting in the control which are difficult to detect by optical scatter.
unit. Other factors however, such as the colour of the smoke
and the smoke entry characteristics of the sensor, will affect
the bcha\'iour. Note: The MR501 complies with BS5445 : Pt 7
In order to evaluate the response under realistic conditions, [EN54: Pt 7] 'FIRE SENSITIVITY' when used
detectors arc subjected to test fires which cover a wide range with its LPCB approved controller set to the
offire types. These tests are defined in BS 5445: Pt. 9 [EN54 'Normal' and 'High' sensitivity settings only.
Pt. 9] which also defines the way in which detector sensitivity
is classified. Three classes are used: A, B and C, where A is
the highest sensitivity. If the detector does not respond or re- 5. ORDERING INFORMATION
sponds inadequately to a test fire it is not classified, i.e. [N].
MR50 I Standard Sensor: 516-031-00 I
Typical results for the MR501 with Nonna! threshold setting,
are given in Table 3. MR50!Ex Intrinsically-Safe Sensor: 516-031-002
OESIG;'\1.-\TION TYPE CLASSIFICATION
TFI open ccllulosic N

[wood naming]
TF2 smouldering pyrolysis A

{wood}
TF3 glowing smouldering A

[conon}
TF> open pla:.tics C

{polyurc1hane foam}
TF5 liquid (n--heptanc] C
TF6 liquid N
[methylated spirit]
Table. 3 Typical Results ofMFS0I & MF401 Sensors
0IA-03-02 M500 SERIES, BASE AND ACCESSORIES, PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
0IA-03-11 M500 SERIES DETECTOR BASE - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
0IA-03-CI M500 SERIES DETECTOR BASE - COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
JMijm
6th February! 1997
Registered Office: Security House The Summit H.anworth Ro.ad Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVl6 5D8
MSOO SERIES
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···-
EQUIPMENT:
HIGH PERFORMANCE OPTICAL SMOKE SENSORS, MR500T RANGE

1. INTRODUCTION 2.1 OPTICAL SYSTEM
The MRS00T range of high perfonnance optical smoke sensors The MRS0 IT detects visible particles produced in fires by
fonns part of the MS00 Analogue Addressable fire detection using the light scattering properties of the particles. The sensor
system. The -sensor plugs into the MSOO Base to fonn an uses the optical system which is shown diagrammatically in
analogue addressable detector which transmits analogue signals Fig. I.
representing the state of the sensor chamber to a remote control The optical system consists of an emitter and sensor. with lens
equipment. An intrinsically-safe version is available for use in in front of each, so arranged that their optical axes cross in the
conjunction with the M500Ex Base, in hazardous atmospheres. sampling volume. The emitter, with its lens, produces a narrow
beam of light which is prevented from reaching the sensor by
the baffles. When smoke is present in the sampling volume a
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE proportion of the light is scattered, some of which reaches the
sensor. For a given type of smoke, the light rl!aching the sensor
The MRS0IT, as the MRS00, operates by sensing the optical is proportional to the smoke density. The output from the
scatter from smoke particles generated in a tire. While the sensor is converted into an analogue electrical signal and
optical scatter detector can give good detection performance for transmitted to the Fire Controller.
the majority of tires. fast burning [open] fires produce little
visible smoke and arc not easily detected by optical scatter.
These fires do howe\·er produce high heat outputs with an
associated rise in air temperature.
2.2 2.2 FEATURES OF MEASURING
CHAMBER
To overcome this fundamental problem, the High Performance
Optical sensor works on the principle that the sensitivity to In order to make a practical smoke detector which uses the type
smoke is increased by the presence of rising air temperature. of optical system described above, great care is needed in the
The degree to which the sensitivity is increased is fixed to a design of the housing. Both the optical components and the
maximum limit and is independent of absolute temperature. sampling volume must be protected from the environment but
Falls in air temperature or very slow increases in air temperature still allow_smoke to enter freely into the sampling volume. The
do not affect the sensitivity of the detector to smoke. housing must also be designed in such a \Vay that dust settling
on its surfaces will not scatter so much light into the sensor that
The high Performance Optical sensor consists of two basic false alanns are generated.
measuring systems as follows:
The MRSO IT uses the unique measuring chamber shown in
• Optical System Fig. 2.
• Temperature Increase System
LENS
Fig. I MRS00 Detector Range, Optical System
Rq:istered Office: Se<:urity House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVl6 SDB
MSOO SERIES
01A-03-D11
02 2/97
OPTICAL ARRAY
....-····· ,,..,,,...-
····················...
SMOKE PATH
Fig. 2 Measuring Chamber Showing Smoke Path
The emitter is a Gallium Arsenide [GaAs] solid state type 2.3 TEMPERATURE INCREASE
operating at a wavelength of0.94µm: the sensor is a silicon MEASURING SYSTEM
photodiode. These devices with their associated lenses are
held within the optical array which also provides the baffles Fig. 3 shows the diagram of the Temperature Increase
of Fig. I. The design of this assembly is such that the Measuring system. The Temperature Increase Measuring
presence of very small insects [e.g. thrips] will not cause System works on the principle of detecting the difference in
false alarms. temperature between two temperature sensors: one ·open' to
the environment, the other ·c1osed' and used as a reference.
The Sampling Volume is enclosed within a measuring The design of these two sensors is such that the measuring
·hamber formed by conical labyrinth mouldings. The optical system only determines the presence of rate of rise in air
Jcsign of the chamber provides a very low background temperature above a fixed limit defined by the response of
signal in clean air conditions even when the chamber is the reference temperature sensor. Hence, absolute
contaminated by white dust. This high tolerance to dust is temperature does not affect the measuring system.
improved even further by an aerodynamic design which
encourages dust settlement to occur on the less critical The temperature sensors used are negative temperature
optical surfaces. The design of the measuring chamber is coefficient Thermistor Beads. Both sensors use the same
the subject of European and US Patents. type of device which has a short response time to rapidly
changing air temperature. The ·open' sensor is mounted in
such a way as to maintain its short response time while the
'closed', or reference sensor has a much longer response
tim:!. The actual response times being dependent upon the
rate of air movement.
Fig. 3 Temperature Increase Measuring System
PAGE 2 of 7
MSOO SERIES
-···-
SUPPLV
Ttbler/
OPEN
SENSOR Osei I lator
STATUS
LED
S~,mchronous
Detector LATCH
CLOSED
SENSOR
THRESHOLD
Fig. 4 Block Schematic of Sensor
2.4 CIRCUIT OPERATION The M500 addressable base provides the CONTROL input
and allows the current sink to draw current from the detector
A simplified block schematic of the sensor is given in Fig. 4. loop wiring in response to the address programmed into the
base. The current drawn by the current sink [called the
ANALOGUE OUTPUT) is monitored by the control unit
2.4.1 GENERAL which decides if a fault or alarm condition has
occurred. THE ANALOGUE OUTPUT current flows
The GaAs emitter is pulsed every l0s to reduce quiescent
through the internal LED indicator which lights every time
current. The pulse signal,. as received by the photo-detector,
the sensor is polled.
is amplified and fed to the synchronous detector. This
detector is provided with a reference signal from the timer/
oscillator and gives an output proportional to the photo-
detector signal which is stored on a 'memory' capacitor. The 2.4.2 INTRINSICALLY-SAFE VERSION
voltage on the capacitor is updated every 10s. The MR50 ITEx is identical to the MR50 IT except for:
The gain of the initial amplifier is controlled by the • Small changes to ensure that intrinsic safety
Temperature Increase Measuring System consisting of the is maintained with any two circuit faults.
'open' and 'closed' thermistors. When the temperature Because of the limitations imposed by the
differential between the 'open' and 'closed' sensors exceeds zener safety barriers used, the ANALOGUE
a certain amount the amplifier increases its gain. The OUTPUT currents are reduced to half the
amplifier increases its gain by an amount proportional to the values used in the standard sensor.
di fferencc in temperature between the sensors. Once the gain
has reached a defined maximum it remains constant even • The MR50 ITEx circuit is potted.
though the temperature differential may still be increasing.
Under these conditions the High Performance Optical sensor
is more sensitive to the presence of smoke and is said to be 3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
'Enhanced'.
When the sensor is ·Enhanced', an increase in the analogue
current will only occur when smoke is present. The sensor • Body Assembly
does not respond to an increase in temperature alone, only to • Printed Circuit Optical/Array Assembly
a combination of smoke and temperature.
• Labyrinth and Insect _Screen
The signal voltage, together with a reference voltage, is fed
via the electronic changeover switch S to a voltage- • Outer Cover
controlled current sink. The logic circuit responds to the
state of the CONTROL input so that when CONTROL is
LOW the current sink is equal to the fixed IDENTITY An exploded view of the sensor is given in Fig. 5.
current. Conversely, when the CONTROL is HIGH the
current represents the sensor CONDITION current.
Registered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVJ6 SDB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D11
02 2/97
Fig. 5 General Assembly, MR501T High Performance Optical Smoke Detector
PAGE 4 of7
_.,,_lJHORN
-···-
-···-
EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D11
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY 4.2 MECHANICAL

The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which Dimensions
are secured four detector contacts which align with the The dimensions of the MRS00T detector are shown in Fig. 6.
contacts in the M500 Base. The moulding incorporates
securing and polarizing features to retain the detector in the
base. The inside surface of the moulding is metallised to
Materials
provide shielding against Electro-Magnetic Interference
EMI]; the connections between the contacts and the PCB are Body and cover: "BAYBLEND" ABS/
made using feed-through capacitors. Polycarbonate alloy
Thermo-plastic, self-colour
white.
3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/OPTICAL ARRAY
ASSEMBLY Weight
All electronic components, including the LED alarm MRSOO MRSOITEx

indicator, are mounted on a single printed circuit board. The Detector: 0.17kg 0.21kg
Optical Array Assembly and Temperature Sensor are also
mounted on the PCB. The combined assembly is fitted inside Detector plus base: 0.21kg 0.33kg
the body and connected to the feed-through capacitors. All
external connections to the circuit are thereby provided with Environmental
EMI filtering. Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C - but see
note below.
3.3 FINAL ASSEMBLY Storage Temperature: -25°C to +80°C
The two labyrinth mouldings are fitted on the body and the Note: Operation below o°
C is not recommended
smoke entry area is sealed by a wire mesh to keep out larger unless steps are taken to eliminate
insects. The labyrinth is retained by the outer cover which is condensation and hence ice formation on the
a snap fit on the body. detector
Relative Humidity: 95% non-condensing

Shock: ) Designed to meet
4.1 GENERAL Vibration: ) BS 5445 : Pt 7
Impact ) [EN54-7]
Two sensor types are offered within the MRS00 Range. The
technical specifications of these are very similar and the
details given below are applicable to both unless otherwise
102.6 Dia. .
!
38.5
\ /
96
' 77.3
.[_------_.
- .-t--- 30 SLOTS
57.S
\...._ - .. - ~
- EQUI-SPACED
AROUND COUER ----~----
-l-----l--===-..:...---
zo 90
- L-CLEARANCE
------------··----··-··----
FOR REMOVAL
Fig. 6 Overall Dimensions of MRS0IT Range
Re(:istered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on--Thames Middlesex TWl6 5DB
,,
;·
I
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D11
02 2/97
EMC: Equals or exceeds the 4.5 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and The MR50 IT sensor, with the M500 Base, forms an
BS EN 50082-1. analogue addressable detector which transmits signals
representing the sensor analogue current levels to a remote
control unit. The control unit evaluates these signals against
prc-dctennined criteria and decides when an ALARM
condition has occurred. The information given below
The following characteristics [Table I] apply at 25°C and therefore relates to the performance of the MR50 IT as a
with VS= VA +!2.4V unless otherwise specified. transducer only, since the system alarm response is
detennined by the control unit.
Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Unit

4.5.1 RESPONSE TO SMOKE
Operating Voltage (VS] 11.5 - 13 V
The response of an optical smoke detector is normally
Quiescent Current [Pin] - - 180 mA
measured with reference to the obscuration produced by
Control Voltage - HIGH 8 - VS+0.5 V smoke. Obscuration is measured in percent per metre, or in
[VC] -LOW 0 - 4 V dB per metre. The latter unit is used in BS5445 Pt. 7 and is
designated ·m'.
Analogue Output [VA] 9 - VS+0.5 V
Output Resistance 200 - - kQ Unfortunately, there is no fixed relationship between optical
[Analogue Output] scattering and obscuration, the ratio between them being
dependent on the type of smoke. For convenience, 'grey
Identity Current [VC<4] 8.1 9 10.0 mA
smoke is normally used but white and black smokes give
Identity Current [VC<4] Ex 4.0 4.5 5.0 mA more or less scattered light respectively for a given
Condition Current [VC>8] 0 - 28 mA obscuration level.
Condition Current [VC>8] Ex 0 - 14 mA The condition current of the MR501T is a linear function of
Table I: Electrical Characteristics obscuration for a given type of smoke. For grey smoke the
current is given by:
4.4 INTRINSIC SAFETY CONDITION CURRENT (It)= 8.8 +40 x 'm' m

For Xe 20 mA
The MR50 I TEx Sensor, when used in the MS00Ex Base, is
designed to comply with BS 550 I: Pt. 7 E 50 020] for This is shown graphically in Fig. 7.
intrinsically safe apparatus. It is designed to be certified
Note: The current levels of the MR501TEx are half

E Ex ia IIC TS those given above for the MR501.
CURRENT
•A
and to be used in conjunction with a suitable zener safety
barrier in a certified intrinsically-safe system.
20
...
18
Electrical and performance details arc generally the same a 17
16
for the MR50I Detector. The following additional 15
infonnation is applicable to the MRS0ITEx detector: 14
13
Maximum Voltage (for safety]: 28V 12
11
Maximum Power Input: 0.58W 10
Equivalent Inductance: 0
•
8
7
Equivalent Capacitance: 1.5nF 6
s
4
3
The response of an optical smoke detector is nonnally z [M dB/m)
1 0.1 0 Z 0 3
measured with reference to the obscuration produced by 0
smoke. Obscuration is measured in percent per metre or in 0 6
dB per metre The latter unit is used in BS 5445 Pt. 7 and is OBSCURATION
1esignated ·m'.

(Grey Smoke)
PAGE 6 of 7
_.,,_UHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D11
11111 SEClTRITY ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 219T
4.5.2 EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE It will be noted that the MRSO IT responds to TFI open
cellulsic [wood flaming fire which is not the case for
The High Perfonnance Optical sensor's gain varies with the ordinary optical detectors, and that the grading for TF4 and
'Rate of Rise· of air temperature. Over a given time period, TFS has improved from a grade C to a grade B. However the
the rate of rise is converted into a temperature differential MRSOIT does not respond to TF6 liquid [methylated spirit]
between 'open' and 'closed' temperature sensors. Fig. 8 which although having a rapidly rising tempemture, does not
shows the relationship between sensor Temperature generate any optical scattering. This shows that the High
Differential (dT) and Response Threshold (dB/m) Perfonnance Optical detector will nor respond to 'rate rise•
alone.
dB
•
E
Note: The MR501T complies with BS5445 : Pt 7
s [EN54 : Pt 7] 'FIRE SENSITIVITY' when used
p
:, with its LPCB approved controller set to the
0
N
s
E
.,
N'
O'
'
'
111,
A'
oN
.,'"
:~,c
'Normal' and 'High' sensitivity settings only.
T
L: 'E
5. INSTALLATION
•"
E
'o
RECOMMENDATIONS
s
ff
0 It is not recommended that the MR50 IT be installed in areas
L where it is likely to be regularly enhanced since in this
D
condition the sensor is extra sensitive and there is a
dT
possibility of unwanted alarms from low ambient smoke
T£Mf'E.R.-\TURE Dlt"ft:RENTIAL
levels. The MRSO IT is designed to become enhanced by
Fig. 8 Temperature Differential (dT) vs detecting a rapid temperature rise [>5°C] in air moving
Response Threshold (m) horizontally across the ceiling. Siting sensors in positions
where air is being blown through the detector should
Nonnal response threshold = 0.15 dB/m 3.4%/m
therefore be particularly avoided, eg. close to ceiling ducts
Fully Enhanced threshold • - 0.05 dB/m I. I%/m or ceiling mounted industrial heaters; or areas of forced
ventilation, such as ducts and under floor voids of computer
*For thermistor Temperature differential 28°C
suites. Also not recommended are areas open to the
outdoors, such as cargo handling bays, or areas where the
detector may become contaminated.
The MR50 IT is not recommended for use in applications
The response of an optical scatter sensor to a particular 'real' where a heater jacket is required. The MR50 IT is primarily
fire will depend, to a large extent, on the colour of the smoke aimed at benign environments.
produced ira th.: fire. In order to evaluate the response under
realistic conditions, detectors are subjected to test fires
which cover a range of fire types. These tests are defined in 6. ORDERING INFORMATION
BS 5445: Pt. 9 EN54 Pt. 9] which also defines the way in
which detector sensitivity is classified. Three classes are MRSO I Standard Sensor: 5 I6-031-004
used A, B and C, where A is the highest sensitivity. If the
MRSO ITEx Intrinsically-Safe Sensor: 516-031-005
detector does not respond, or responds inadequately to a test
fire, it is not classified, [denoted N]
Typical results for the MR50 IT with the Controller set to 7. RELATED PUBLICATIONS
normal sensitivity are given in Table 2.
OIA-03-D2 MSOO SERIES. BASE AND ACCESSO-
RIES - PRODUCT APPLICATION &
TFI open cdlulosic (wood flaming) C DESIGN INFORMATION
TF2 smouldering pyrolisis B OIA-03-11 MSOOSERIES DETECTOR BASE -
TF3 glowing smouldering (cotton} B IN-STALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
TF4 open plastics (polyurethane) B OIA-03-CI M500 SERIES DETECTOR BASE -
TFS liquid (n-heptane) B COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
TF6 liquid (methylated spirits) N JM/jm
Table 2: Response to Fire Tests 6th Februaruy 1997
R1-gislered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury--on-Thames Middle.sex TI'r'l6 SOB
-···-
-· .. -TJHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT: M500 SERIES
ISSUE No. & DATE:
01A-03-D6
02 2/97
MO501 HEAT SENSOR
PRODUCT APPLICATION ANO DESIGN INFORMATION
1. INTRODUCTION If the temperature is constant, or changing Only slowly, the

thennistor temperatures will track the air temperature and the
The MD50 I heat sensor forms part of the M500 Analogue bridge voltage will be a simple function of air
Addressable fire detection system. The sensor plugs into the temperature. However, even the sensing thermistor will be
M500 base to form an analogue addressable detector which unable to follow rapid changes in temperature such as those
transmits analogue signals representing temperature conditions which can occur in fires. Under these conditions the
to a remote control equipment. An intrinsically safe version is temperature of the thermistor is no longer an accurate
available for use, in conjunction with the M500Ex base, in indication of the air temperature.
hazardous atmospheres.
The rapid change in temperature does however cause a
temperature difference to be established between the sensing
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE and reference thermistors. This imbalance adds to the bridge
voltage and compensates for the finite response time of the
The MD501 uses two matched thermistors in a bridge sensing thermistor.
configuration to give a response which depends both on
absolute temperature and rate of change of temperature. The The output of the differential amplifier is thus a function of
thermal and electrical characteristics are designed in such a way absolute temperature and rate of change of temperature. This
that rhc sensor can be made to emulate many types of heat signal voltage, together with a reference voltage, is fed via the
detector without the use of complex processing of the analogue electronic changeover switch S, to a voltage-controlled current
output. sink.
The logic circuit responds to the state of the CONTROL input
2.1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION so that when the CONTROL is LOW the current sink is equal
to the fixed IDENTITY current. Conversely, when the
A block schematic of the sensor is given in fig. I. CONTROL is HIGH the current represents the bridge out-of
balance voltage, that is the CONDITION current.
The negative temperature coefficient thermistors, Rscns and
Rrcf, arc connected in a bridge circuit as shown. One The M500 addressable base provides the CONTROL input and
thcnnistor. Rscns• is exposed to the air while the other, Rrcf, is allows the current sink to draw current from the detector loop
thermally lagged inside th(: detector body. The out-of-balance wiring in response to the address programmed in the
voltage of the bridge is buffered and amplified by the base. The current drawn by the current sink [ANALOGUE
differential amplifier, A. OUTPUT] is evaluated by the control unit which takes the
appropriate action.
~----.-------------<~-----------------<.>+IN
Rsens Rref fi:;7:7_ 1c f----------~ocoITTROL
i.:::::::::..J ~--uANALOGUE
Ot.rrPUT
DIFFERENTIAL
Usig
...
Bl CURREITT
SINK
AMPLI Fl ER s
'----4~------------<>---------------<>----0-VE
Fig. I Sensor Block Schematic
Registered Orfice: Security House ne Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIV16 SDB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D6
'2 2/97
~
• I
Fig. 2 MDSOI Heat Sensor, Exploded View
PAGE 2 of 5
_.,,_ UHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D6
The ANALOGUE OUTPUT current flows through the contacts in the M500 Base. The moulding incorporates
internal LED indicator which lights each time the sensor is securing and polarising features to retain the detector in the
polled. base.
2.2 INTRINSICALLY SAFE SENSOR shielding against Electromagnetic Radiation [EM!]; the
connections between the contacts and the PCB are made
The MD501Ex is identical in principle to the conventional using feed-through capacitors.
sensor but has small circuit changes to ensure that intrinsic
safety is maintained with any two circuit faults. Because of
the limitations imposed by the zener safety barriers used in
3.2 HYBRID/PCB ASSEMBLY
the system, the ANALOGUE OUTPUT currents are reduced The MD500 range of detectors uses a unique construction
to half those used in tbi standar~ [safe area] sensors. for the sensor in which all critical circuit components are
contained within a single thick-film hybrid circuit. This
hybrid also incorporates the n.t.c thermistors which are
3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION printed and fired into the ceramic substrate using a special
temperature-dependent ink. Reference and sensing
The major components of the MDS00 range of detectors arc: thennistors are thus made under identical conditions which
• Body Assembly ensures good matching and very good tracking with both
temperature and age. Excellent reproducibility and long-
• Hybrid/PCB Assembly tenn stability are thereby guaranteed.
• Sensor Housing The hybrid circuit is conformally coated with epoxy to
• Outer Cover provide environmental protection, and then mounted on a
circular printed circuit board. The circuit board provides
interconnections to the detector terminals as well as
carrying a small number of additional components which
An exploded view of the complete detector is given in fig. 2.
include the LED alarm indicator.
Secured to the feed-through capacitors in the body to
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY provide good rejection of line-borne and airborne EMI, the
PCB assembly is encapsulated in epoxy, together with the
The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which major part of the hybrid circuit, in order to provide
arc secured the four detector contacts which align with the environmental and mechanical protection.
102.6
.I
I
38.5
I
;
-- i
89
--. i ··- 70.3

I 50.5
\..._ I - 12 VANES
EQUl -SPACED
AROUND COVER
20 ,o'
.. -··- .. --·- .. - ·---· ---- --·
~
CL EARANCE FOFI REMOVAL
Fig. 3 Overall Dimensions

Rc-gislen-d Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TI\/16 5D8
MSOO SERIES
01A-03-D6
'2 2/97
3.3 FINAL ASSEMBLY 4.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

After encapsulation, the prism and sensor housing are fitted The following characteristics apply at 25°C and with
to the body assembly. Finally, the outer cover is snapped VS=VA=l2V as shown in Table 1 unless otheiwise stated.
into position on the body to provide mechanical protection
to the otherwise exposed sensing thermistor. Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Operating Voltage 11.5 12.4 13.0 V
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Quiescent Current 20 55 100 µA
Control Voltage High 8,0 Vs+0.5 V
4.1 MECHANICAL
Control Voltage Low 0 4 V
Dimensions Voltage at Analogue -
9.0 Vs+0.5 V
The overall dimensions are shown in fig. 3 on the Output Va
preceding page. Output Resistance
200 kQ
(Analogue Output)
Materials Identity Current 12.8 14.3 15.8 mA
Body & outer cover 'Bayblend' ABS/ Identity Current (Ex) 6.4 7.2 7.9 mA
Polycarbonate
alloy thermo-plastic self-
Conditional Current (Ex) 0 4 14 mA
coloured white.
Table. 1 Electrical Characteristics
Weight 0.18kg
0.30kg [including base]
The MD50 I Ex is designed to comply with BS 550 I Pt. 7
[EN 50 020] for intrinsically safe apparatus, and is certified:
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature
E Ex ia IIC TS
Long-term -20°C to+ 70°C
Shor1-tcnn [<3 min] -40°C to + I 20°C
under BASEEFA certificate number 89C2200X and can be
Note: The maximum temperatures quoted are those used with zener safety barrier in a certified intrinsically safe
at which the detector may sustain permanent system.
damage. Maximum ambient temperatures at Electrical and perfonnance details are generally the same as
which detectors may be used, without high for the safe-area equivalent detectors. The following
false alarm rates, are dependent upon detector additional infonnation is applicable to Ex types:
type.
Maximum voltage [for safety] 28V
Relative Humidity 95% non-condensing Maximum power input IW
Equivalent inductance 0
Shock Equivalent capacitance l.5nF
Vibration To BS 5445 Pt. 5 [EN54-5]
Impact
4.5 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Corrosion
4.5.1 GENERAL
EMI: Equals or exceeds the The performance of heat detectors is defined within the
requirements of United Kingdom and most other E1,1ropean countries by the
BS EN 50081-1 and harmonised European standard EN54, published in the
BS EN 50082-1 U.K. as BS5445. Two parts of this standard are relevant
these being Part 5, for detectors for normal ambients, and
Part 8 for detectors for high ambient temperatures. Within
each of these parts are a number of response grades which
define the limits of response of the detectors.
PAGE 4 of5
MSOO SERIES
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···-
EQUIPMENT:
It must be remembered that the MD50 I is a sensor rather than 4.5.3 THRESHOLD CURRENTS AND
a detector and the alarm threshold will therefore be set in the RESPONSE TIMES
control unit. With appropriate control units the MD50 I is
able to provide response characteristics complying with all The threshold currents required to give particular response
Grades specified in Part 5 and additionally will meet the grades, together with typical response characteristics,
requirements of the Temperature Range 2 specified in Part measured in accordance with the requirements of
8. The way in which this is achieved is described below. BS5445(EN54), are given in Table 2. Maximum ambient
temperatures in which the various settings should be used
are also given.
4.5.2 TEMPERATURE CHARACTERISTICS
The output current of the MD50 I is, as noted in para 2.1, a 5. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
function of both absolute temperature and rate of change of
temperature. The exact form of the relationship between The detector is compatible with the Company's new ranges
output current and air lemperature depends on the rate of of analogue addressable controllers.
change of temperature and is such that a set of fixed current
thresholds can be used to select the response grade required as
shown in Table 2. 6. ORDERING INFORMATION
It is important to note that even with the rate of rise response
Heat Detector Type MDS0I: 5 I6-033-00 I
of the sensor. the air temperature at which an alarm will be
Grade I, 2, 3 and Range 2
given is always higher for a Grade 2 response than for a Grade
I and so on. This means that in environments subject to high Heat Detector Type MD50 I Ex: 516-033-002
temperatures and high rates of rise, such as kitchens and Grade I, 2, 3 and Range 2
boiler rooms, a Grade 2 or Grade 3 response can safely be
used without risk of false alann. For even higher ambients
the Range 2 response should be chosen. This will give a
static alann point of between 90°C and I00°C. JM/jm
6th February 1997
RESPONSE TYPE GRADEi GRADE2 GRADE3 RANGE2 UNITS

THRESHOLD CURRENT FOR MD501 10.7 11.5 13 19.5 mA
THRESHOLD CURRENT FOR MD501EX 5.35 5.75 6.5 9.75 mA
TYPICAL RESPONSE TIMES
0
@30 c/min 1:21 1:41 2:00 1:56 m:s
0
@20 c/min 1:58 2:23 2:49 2:21 m:s
0
@10 c/min 3:32 4:23 5:35 4:00 m:s
0
@5 c/min 6:45 8:42 10:30 7:36 m:s
0
@3 c/min 11:00 13:50 16:50 11:40 m:s
0
@I c/m:in 33:00 41:-00 49:00 33:30 m:s
STATIC RESPONSE 58 66 74 98 oc
MAX AMBIENT TEMP. 40 45 55 70 oc
Table. 2 Current Thresholds and Typical Response Times

Registeffd Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TI\116 5D8
:::::r--riHORN
-···- .lJ EQUIPMENT: MS00 SERIES
ISSUE No. & DATE:
01A-03-D5
02 2/97
INFRA-RED FLAME SENSOR MS502Ex
1. INTRODUCTION 2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE

The MS502Ex infra-red flame detector forms part of the M500 2.1 OPTICAL CHARACTERISTICS
analogue addressable fire detection system. The sensor plugs
into the M500 or M500Ex base to form an analogue addressable The MS502Ex is designed to detect the infra-red radiation pro-
detector which transmits analogue signals, to a remote control duced by flaming fires involving carbonaceous materials.
equipment and represents the state of a sensing clement, that re- fig. l(a) shows the spectrum ofa typical fire of this type,
sponds ro flaming carbonaceous fires.
fig. l(b) the spectrum of the radiation of the sun and
fig. l(c), that ofa tungsten filament lamp.
Nore: The combination of MS00Ex base and MS502Ex
sensor forms an intrinsically safe combination and It can be seen that there is a large peak in the flame output at
wavelengths in the region of 4.4µm. This peak is a character-
may be used in Hazardous areas. The MS502Ex
istic of carbonaceous flames and results from the formation of
may also be used with a M500 base in conventional carbon dioxide in the flame. It will be seen also that the radi-
systems this combination is not intrinsically safe. ation from the sun and from the filament lamp is relatively low
in this region.
,_n , , ,,.. ..............

•t-c
''
; : , ''
: :i I '
:
j
:J
'
: ;~
: I :
: f \
i I l
: I : ''
li' \ '
!.: I '
t.: \/\
!1
!1
:,: I i ...
: : !
: I
iI ~.: \(°·· . .
: I H i :' ·,
: I
i• . l/
1 2
WAVELENGTH - Microns
Fig. I Spectrums of a) Typical Carbonaceous Fire

b) Solar Radiation at Ground Level
c) Tungsten Filament Lamp

Regh,lered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Th.amn Middlesex TWI6 50B
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D5
02 2/97
In order to exploit these spectral characteristics. the plirude and frequency characteristics of the flicker. If the
MS502Ex uses an optical filter which transmits infra-red be- flicker signal is above the threshold and maintained, the out-
tween 4.2µm and 4.7µm [shown shaded in fig. l(a)]. This put of the pulse analyser will be increased from its quiescent
bandwidth allows high sensitivity to flames with low sensi- value. This signal voltage is fed via an electronic change
tivity to other interfering sources. over switch ·s· to a voltage controlled current sink.
The logic circuit responds to the state of the control input so
that when the control is LOW the current sink is equal to a
2.2 FLICKER CHARACTERISTICS fixed identity current. Conversely, when the control signal
is HIGH the current sink represents the status or condition of
It is observed that the radiation from a flame is not constant
the pyroelectric sensing element.
but varies with time. This flicker is present in all flames to
a greater or lesser degree [including those resulting from The M500Ex addressable base provides the control input
high pressure gas jets] and can be used to give improved dis- and allows the current sink to draw current from the detector
crimination between flames and other sources of infra-red. loop wiring in response to the address programmed in the
base. The current drawn by the current sink [Analogue
The MS502Ex responds to flicker frequencies in the range I-
Output] is evaluated by the control unit which takes the ap-
I OHz which provides high sensitivity to almost all types of
propriate action.
accidental fire.
The analogue current flows through the internal LED indica-
tor which lights when the sensor is polled.
2.3 CIRCUIT OPERATION
A simplified block schematic of the circuit is given in Fig.2.
The infra-red radiation passing through the narrow-band fil-
ters falls on a pyroelectric sensor which responds to the An exploded view of the sensor is given in fig. 3.
flickering component of the radiation. The electrical signal The major components of the sensor are:
--iroduced is filtered, to remove frequencies outside the re-
1.uired flicker region, and amplified to drive the threshold de- • Body assembly
tector.
• Printed circuit/sensor assembly
The threshold detector and pulse analyser evaluate the am-
• Outer cover
~~ ""
PVRO- VOLTAGE •! N
ELECTRIC REGULATOR
SENSOR
OPTI cs
t I I I CONT ROL
L.P. HRESHOU PULSE
I LOGIC :
Fl LTER f+ AMPLIFIER --+-- DETECTOR + ANALYSER

,__. ANAL OGUE
. .
4-- I'---A '

V ...........
s
81 CURRE NT
SIN)(
-UE
.
Fig. 2 Simplified Block Schematic Diagram
PAGE 2 of9
-···-
PUBLICATION:
MSOO SERIES
01A-03-D5
Fig. 3 General Assembly, Type MS502Ex Flame Sensor
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE 3of9

Rq:istrred Office: Security House The Summit Hamrnrth Road Sunbury-cm-Thames Middlesn TIVl6 50B
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D5
02 2/97
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which 4.1 MECHANICAL
are secured the four sensor contacts which align with the
contacts in the M500Ex base. The moulding incorporates Dimensions
securing and polarising features to retain the sensor in the The overall dimensions are shown in fig. 4 below.
base.
shielding against EM! [Electro-Magnetic Materials
Interference]. The connections between the contacts and Body & outer cover "Bayblend" ABS/
the PCB are made using feed-through capacitors. Polycarbonate alloy Self
coloured white.
3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/SENSOR Flame retardant to
ASSEMBLY UL94-V0.
The greater part of the circuit is contained within a custom
thick-film hybrid. This, together with the sensor, the LED Window Synthetic sapphire.
indicator and a number of other components, are mounted on
a single printed circuit board. Weight 174gm
The printed circuit board is fitted inside the body assembly 275gm [including base].
and secured to the feed-through capacitors. All external
connections to the circuit are thereby provided with EMI fil-
tering. 4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
The body assembly is then filled with epoxy resin so that all Temperature
critical components and conductors are Operating -10°C to +60°C
1capsulated. Excellent protection against corrosion and
mechanical shock is thus guaranteed. Storage -30°C to +80°C
3.3 FINAL ASSEMBLY Note: Operation below OOC is not recommended unless
The assembly is completed by the outer cover which is a steps are taken to eliminate condensation and
snap fit onto the body assembly. The inside surface of the hence ice formation on the detector.
cover is metallised to complete the EMI shielding. A sap-
phire window in the co\"cr allows infra-red radiation to reach
the sensor.
102 6 D ·.•. .
I .!
.
I
38.5
:
I I
I / 'I
I d b
74 .5 I
55.8
I 3£,
'
\...
I
I
_,,, ,!,
'
_,,, ,.
so
20 •
··-
- CLEARANCE FOR REMOVAL
PAGE 4 of9
::::: TH<)RN PUBLICATION: 01A-03-O5
Relative Humidity 95% [non-condensing] 5. PERFORMANCE

CHARACTERISTICS
Shock Satisfactory performance 5.1 MAGNITUDE OF CONDITION
Vibration de-rnonsrated using test CURRENT
Impact methods detailed in The condition current of the MS502Ex at any instant is a
Corrosion EN54-5 [8S5445 Part 5] function of the input infra-red signal to the sensing
element. However, because of the complex nature of the
EMI: Equals or exceeds the flame flicker signal, it is necessary to cany out a great deal
requirements of of the signal processing in the sensor itself. The condition
BS EN 50081-1 and current is therefore not simply proportional to the infra-red
BS EN 50082-1 level but is a more complex function of signal amplitude
and its behaviour with time. The processing carried out by
the sensor is equivalent to that used, and highly proven, in
the S 100 series of detectors.
In effect, the condition current represents the probability
Specified at 25°C, 12.4\/ supply unless otherwise stated as that the sensor is seeing a fire. At a current level of 8mA
shown in Table I. this probability can be considered to be I 00% and the con·
trot unit should signal an alarm condition at this level. In
Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Unit practice the current level may fluctuate rapidly and special
Operating Voltage I 1.5 12.4 13 V processing is needed in the control unit to ensure reliable
operation.
Quiescent Current 80 IO0 120 µA
Vs+0.6 Under normal conditions the current should not exceed
Control Voltage High 8 V
2mA, although occasional excursions above this level can
Control Voltage Low -0.6 4 V occur. If the number of such excursions is too frequent
Voltage at Analogue then this may be an indication that the sensing element or
9 the background are noisy and that the probability of false
Output Va
alann is unacceptably high. Suitable processing in the
Output Resistance
200k Ohms control unit can indicate this as a fault condition thereby re-
(Analogue Output)
ducing the incidence of false alarms.
Ident Current 4.8 5.4 6.0 mA
5.2 MODE OF OPERATION - BEHAVIOUR
Table 1: Elec:trical Characteristics IN FIRE TESTS
4.4 INTRINSIC SAFETY The operating principles of the detector have been described
in Para 2 and the information given below is intended to
The MS502Ex complies with BS550l part 7 [ENSO 020 supplement this basic description.
[ 1977) and BS55Ql part I [ENSO 014 [1977)) for intrinsically
safe apparatus, and is certified: It has already been noted that the detector analyses the
signal flicker frequency and produces an increase in
E Ex ia lie TS condition current if the level is above the threshold. It is
worth stressing that if the signal is below this threshold the
detector will not respond even after a long time.
and can be used in conjunction with specified safety barriers
in a certified intrinsically safe system. The level of the signal received depends on the size of the
flame and its distance from the detector. For liquid fuels
The intrinsic safety certification specifies the following pa- the level is almost proportional to the surface area of the
rameters: burning liquid. For any type offire, the signal level varies
inversely with the square of the distance.
Max input voltage Vmax 28V
Max power input Wmax IW Fire tests are normally carried out using liquid fuels,
burning in pans of known area. The sensitivity of a
Equivalent capacitance Ceq l.SnF detector is then expressed as the distance at which a
particular fire size can be detected.
CERTIFICATE No. Ex89C2200X

Retistered Office: Security House ne Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury.on--Thames Middlesex TIVl6 SDB
M500 SERIES
01A-03-D5
02 2/97
It is important to think in terms of distance rather than time The graph in fig. 6 shows the typical detection ranges as a
because of the burning characteristics of different function of pan area for petrol fires. It will be seen that this
fuels. fig. 5 shows the typical response of two different curve is approximately a square law; that is to say that to ob-
fuels which ultimately produce the same signal level. The tain detection at twice the distance the pan area must be mul-
signal level given by petrol quickly reaches its maximum, in tiplied by four.
approximately six [6) seconds after ignition. Kerosene,
being less volatile, takes approximately sixty (60] seconds to
reach equilibrium burning state. 5.3.2 OTHER LIQUID HYDROCARBONS
The time taken by the fire to reach equilibrium depends on Ranges achieved with other fuels burning in 0.1 rn2 pans are
the initial temperature of the fuel. If kerosene is pre-heated as follows:
to a temperature above its flash point, then it behaves the
same as petrol at 25°C. n-heptane 26m
The test data presented below refers to fires which have Kerosene 26m
reached their equilibrium condition. The range specified is Alcohol [I.M.S.] 22m
that obtained with the detector axis horizontal and with the
fire on the detector axis. Diesel oil 22m
Ethylene glycol 26m
5.3 FIRE TEST DATA
The typical detection range for other pan areas may be cal-
It will be appreciated that the overall response to fire will de-
culated using the square law relationship give in Para 5.3.1.
pend both on the response of the MS502Ex and the control
unit. The data presented below are based on a system using
recommended processing in the control equipment.
5.4 DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVITY
The sensitivity of the MS502Ex is at a maximum on the de-
,.3.1 PETROL tector axis. The variation of range with angle of incidence
is shown in fig. 7.
The most convenient fuel for fire tests is petrol [gasoline]
since it is readily available and quickly reaches its equilibri-
um burning rate.
a) PETROL FIRE O. 1m' RT 18M RANGE

b) HEROSENE FIRE 0.1m' AT 18m RANGE
.,
SIGNRL
LEVEL
0 10 20 30 40 so 60
TINE SECONDS
Fig. 5 Typical Response to Fires
PAGE 6 of9
EQUIPMENT: MSOO SERIES
-···-
-···-TJHORN PUBLICATION: 01A-03-D5
,,o
15
RANGE
METERS 30
PAN AREA rn'
lS
o+--------.-------.-------,-------.--
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.1
Fig. 6 Typical Detector Range vs Pan Area - Petrol
so·
so·
'i'O"
,o·
1;0•
•o·
so· so·
•10°
10·
ao· 10· o· 10· 20· ao·
Fig. 7 Relative Range vs Angle of Incidence

R-egistered Orfice: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TIVl6 SDB
MS00 SERIES
01A-03-D5
02 2/97
soo soo
2
0. 05111 S. 25m
.12. s... I
0. l,n 2 + 10.5111
.,-zsm
15.75m
121'37.SM
0. 'Im~ 21.0..
ll'l'SOm
Fig. 8 Field of View
6. DESIGN OF SYSTEM If the spillage is of a less volatile material [e.g. kerosene],

the spread of the flame from the ignition point will be much
6.1 GENERAL slower. The detector will then respond in a time dependent
on the distance from the fire.
Using the information given in Paras 2 to 5, it is possible to
design a flame detection system having a predictable
performance. Guidance on the application of the abo,·c
data and on siting of detectors is given on the following 6.3 DETERMINING THE NUMBER OF
page. DETECTORS
The number of detectors required for a particular risk \Viii
depend on the area involved and the fire size at which detec-
6.2 USE OF FIRE TEST DATA tion is required. Large areas or small fires require large
It has been explained in Para 5 that the sensitivity of the de- numbers of detectors.
tector is specified in tcnns of.its response to well-defined test As there are no agreed •rules' for the application of flame de-
fires. Tests arc carried out using a 0.1 m 2 pan. Sensitivity tectors, the overall system sensitivity must be agreed be-
to other pan areas is calculated from the square law tween the designer and the end user. When agreement has
relationship. That is to obtain detection at twice the dis- been reached the system designer can determine the area to
tance, the pan area must be multiplied by four. be covered by each detector using the fire test data.
Accidental fires are rarely of a well-defined size. It is still The detector is designed primarily for ceiling mounting with
possible however to calculate the response to a ·real' fire us- its axis vertically downwards. When used in this way it
ing the fire test data. will cover a circular area at ground level, the diameters of
For example, a spillage fire involving a highly volatile liquid the circle being proportional to the height. Under these
[e.g. petrol] will spread quickly from the point of ignition conditions the effective sensitivity is that which is achieved
to cover the complete surface of the pool. Such a spillage at the edge of this circular area t~king into account the slant
would nonnally cover approximately 2m2. Using the data range and the angle of incidence.
for petrol fires and extrapolating to an area of 2m 2, the fig. 8 shows the effective sensitivity for petrol fires when
MS502Ex should respond at a distance of about 120m with- used in this configuration. Sensitivity to other fuels can be
;n ten [ IO] seconds. It WILL NOT respond in less than determined from the data given in Para 5.2.
£hree [3] seconds, even at short range.
PAGE 8 of9
===== TH<)RN PUBLICATION: 01A-03-D5
Note: Any object within the detector's field of view will 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
cause a 'shadow· in the protected area. Small ob-
jects close to the detector can cause large shadows. MS502Ex infra-red flame detector: 516-032-00 I
M500 Base: 517-035-001
M500Ex Base: 517-035-002
0lA-03-Dl ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE DETECTORS. M500 SERIES SYSTEM DESIGN
AND APPLICATION
0lA-03-D2 M500 ADDRESSABLE BASE AND ACCESSORIES. DESIGN INFORMATION
JM/jm
6th February 1997
© 1997 Thorn Security Limited PAGE9 of9

Registered Office: S«urity House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury--on~Thames Middlesu TIVl6 SDB
!! ~ Security EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
M300 SERIES
01A-02-D6
Technical Information
MS302Ex, INFRA-RED FLAME DETECTOR
1. INTRODUCTION Fig. I(a) shows the spectrum ofa typical fire of this type,
Fig. l(b) the spectrum of the radiation of the sun and
The MS302Ex infra-red flame detector forms part of the M300
series of plug-in detectors for ceiling mounting. The detector Fig. l(c), that of a tungsten filament lamp.
is intended for two-wire operation on all control equipment
currently manufactured by Thom Security Limited. It can be seen that there is a large peak in the flame output at
wavelengths in the region of 4.4µm. This peak is a
The detector is certified intrinsically safe and may therefore be characteristic of carbonaceous flames and results from the
used in hazardous areas in conjunction with specified safety fonnation of carbon dioxide in the flame. It will be seen also
barriers, or without a ban-ier in safe areas. that the radiation from the sun and from the filament lamp is
relatively low in this region.
In order to exploit these spectral characteristics, the MS302Ex
2. OPERATING PRINCIPLE uses an optical filter which transmits infra-red between 4.2µm
and 4.7µm [shown shaded in Fig. l(a)). This bandwidth
2.1 OPTICAL CHARACTERISTICS
allows high sensitivity to flames with low sensitivity to other
The MS302Ex is designed to detect the infra-red radiation interfering sources.
produced by flaming fires involving carbonaceous materials.
't-c
''
'
'
''
''
'
2 3 4 5
WAVELENGTH - microns
Fig. I Spectrums of a) Typical Carbonaceous Fire b) Solar Radiation at ground level c) Tungsten Filament Lamp
© 1991 THORN SECURITY Limited PAGE 1 of 8

M300 SERIES
01A-02-D6
001 12/91
2.2 FLICKER CHARACTERISTICS 3. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION

It is observed that the radiation from a flame is not constant An exploded view of the detector is given in Fig. 3.
but varies with time. This flicker is present in all flames to
a greater or lesser degree [including those resulting from The major components of the detector are:
high pressure gas jCts] and can be used to give improved
• Body assembly
discrimination between flames and other sources of infra-
red. • Printed circuit/sensor assembly
The MS302Ex responds to flicker frequencies in the range I- • Outer cover
I OHz which provides high sensitivity to almost all types of
accidental fire.
3.1 BODY ASSEMBLY
2.3 CIRCUIT OPERATION The body assembly consists of a plastic moulding to which
are secured the four detector contacts which align with the
A simplified block schematic of the circuit is given in Fig.2. contacts in the M300 base. The moulding incorporates
The infra-red radiation passing through the narrow-band securing and polarising features to retain the detector in the
filters falls on a pyroelectric sensor which responds to the base.
flickering component of the radiation. The electrical The inside surface of the moulding is metallised to provide
signal produced is filtered, to remove frequencies outside the shielding against RFI [Radio Frequency Interference] and
required flicker region, and amplified to drive the threshold EMI [Electro-Magnetic Interference]. The connections
detector. between the contacts and the PCB are made using feed-
The threshold detector and pulse analyser evaluate the through capacitors.
amplitude and frequency characteristics of the flicker. If
the flicker signal is above the preset threshold for three
seconds, the output latch is triggered to light the internal 3.2 PRINTED CIRCUIT/SENSOR
LED alarm indicator. The increased current drawn from ASSEMBLY
the line signals the alarm condition to the control unit.
The greater part of the circuit is contained within a custom
All critical parts of the circuit are fed by an internal voltage thick-film hybrid. This, together with the sensor, the LED
regulator to make the sensitivity independent of supply over alarm indicator and a small number of other components, are
a wide range. mounted on a single printed circuit board.
The facility for a remote LED indicator is available without The printed circuit board is fitted inside the body assembly
the need for additional circuitry. and secured to the feed-through capacitors. All external
Two +ve tenninals are provided to allow the monitoring of connections to the circuit are thereby provided with RFI
the circuit wiring through the detector. filtering.
• IN
UOLTAGE
REGULATOR
+OUT]
~-----oREMOTE
LED
~
PYRO- TIMER/
L.P. PULSE
ELECTRIC f't'IPLIFIER OUTPUT
Fl LTER ANALVSER
SENSOR LATCH
OPTICS
L - - - - - - 0 -VE
Fig. 2 Simplified Block Schematic Diagram
PAGE 2 of 8
!,! ~ Security PUBLICATION: 01A-02-D6
Technical Information ISSUE No. & DATE:
C11c"ri!y Hom1t, Twickanh;im Ro;id. Fe!th~m, TW'J ()CO 001 12/91
Fig. 3 General Assembly, Type MS302Ex Flame Detector

MJOO SERIES
01A-02-D6
001 12/91
The body assembly is then filled with epoxy resin so that all Window Synthetic sapphire.
critical components and conductors are
encapsulated. Excellent protection against corrosion and Weight !74gm
mechanical shock is thus guaranteed. 275gm [including base].
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
3.3 FINAL ASSEMBLY Temperat1,1re
The assembly is completed by the outer cover which is a Operating -! o0 c to +60°C
snap fit onto the body assembly. The inside surface of the
Storage -30°C to +80°C
cover is metallised to complete the RFI shielding. A
sapphire window in the cover allows infra-red radiation to
reach the sensor. Note: Operation below lf'C is not recommended
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION detector.
4.1 MECHANICAL
Dimensions Relative Humidity 95% [non-condensing]
The overall dimensions arc shown in Fig. 4 below.
Shock Satisfactory performance
Vibration demonsrated using test
Materials Impact methods detailed in EN54-5
Body & outer cover "Bayblend" ABS/ Corrosion [BS5445Part 5]
Polycarbonate alloy Self
coloured white. Flame
retardant to UL 94-Y0. 4.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
RFI To BS6667 Part 3, [I0Y/m@
!00kHz to 500MHz]
.
'
l 02 6 D ia . ...!
I
-~
I
38.5
I
74 . s
. "\
i
I
55.8
I
36
\....
I 6'
• I ..,)
'
20
90 ..
-• .
-CL EAfl ANCE FOR REMOVAL
PAGE 4of 8
!,! ~ Security PUBLICATION: 01A-02-D6
Technical Information ISSUE No. & DATE: 001 12/91
4.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Max input voltage Vmax 28V

Specified at 2SC, 20V supply unless otherwise stated. Max power input Wmax IW
Equivalent capacitance Ceq I.5nF
Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Unit CERTIFICATE No. Ex88B2l68X
Operating Voltage (d.c.( 15 20 24 V
Quiescent Current 100 µA
Switch-o~-Surge Limited by circuit duration 5. PERFORMANCE
<S00µs CHARACTERISTICS
Stabilisation Time 20 sec 5.1 MODE OF OPERATION - BEHAVIOUR
Alarm Load/Equivalent 330ohms in series with 4V IN FIRE TESTS
Alarm Circuit zener
The operating principles of the detector have been described
Alarm Current 5 20 50 mA
in Para 2 and the infonnation given below is intended to
Holding Current I mA supplement this basic description.
Holding Voltage 2 volts It has already been noted that the detector analyses the
Remote LED drive Alarm Current less 10 mA signal flicker frequency and produces an alarm if the level
Reset Time 2 sec is above a preset threshold for three seconds. It is worth
stressing that if the signal is below this threshold the
detector will not respond even after a long time.
The level of the signal received depends on the size of the
The MS302Ex complies with 8S550 I part 7 [ENSO 020 flame and its distance from the detector. For liquid fuels
[1977]+AI andBS5501 part I [EN500.14(1977]+Al-4]for the level is almost proportional to the surface area of the
intrinsically safe apparatus, and is certified: burning liquid. For any type of fire, the signal level varies
E Ex ia lie TS inversely with the square of the distance.
Fire tests are normally carried out using liquid fuels,
and can be used in conjunction with specified safety barriers burning in pans of known area. The sensitivity of a
in a certified intrinsically safe system. [Sec System 60 l detector is then expressed as the distance at which a
Handbook]. particular fire size can be detected.
The intrinsic safety certification specifies the following It is important to think in terms of distance rather than time
parameters: because of the burning characteristics of different
fuels. Fig. 5shows the typical response of two different
fuels which ultimately produce the same signal level. The
signal level given by petrol quickly reaches its maximum,
1r ..,) PETROL FIRE 0.1nr' AT 18111 RANGE

b) HEROSENE FIRE 0.1in' AT 18m RANGE
.,
SIGNAL
LEVEL
0 10 20 30 <O 50 60
TIME SECONDS
Fig. 5 Typical Response to Fires

M300 SERIES
01A-02-D6
001 12/91
and produces an alarm in approximately six [6] seconds after 5.2.2 OTHER LIQUID HYDROCARBONS
ignition. Kerosene, being less volatile, takes
approximately sixty [60] seconds to reach equilibrium Ranges achieved with other fuels burning in 0.lm2 pans are
burning state and an alarm is given approximately fifty-five as follows:
[55] seconds after ignition. n-heptane 26m
The time taken by the fire to reach equilibrium depends on Kerosene 26m
the initial temperature of the fuel. If kerosene is pre-heated
to a temperature above its flash point, then it behaves the
Alcohol[I.M.S.] 22m
same as petrol at _25°C. Diesel oil 22m
The test data presented below refers to fires which have Ethylene glycol 26m
reached their equilibrium condition. The range specified is
that obtained with the detector axis horizontal and with the
fire on the detector axis. The typical detection range for other pan areas may be
calculated using the square law relationship give in Para
5.2.1.
5.2 FIRE TEST DATA
5.2.1 PETROL 5.3 DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVITY
The most convenient fuel for fire tests is petrol [gasoline] The sensitivity of the MS302Ex is at a maximum on the
since it is readily available and quickly reaches its detector axis. The variation of range with angle of
equilibrium burning rate. incidence is shown in Fig. 8.
The graph in Fig. 7shows the typical detection ranges as a
function of pan area for petrol fires. It will be seen that this
curve is approximately a square law; that i.s to say that to
obtain detection at twice the distance the pan area must be 6. DESIGN OF SYSTEM
multiplied by four.
6.1 GENERAL
Using the information given in Paras 2 to 5, it is possible to
design a flame detection system having a predictable
performance. Guidance on the application of the above
data and on siting of detectors is given on the following
page.
60
45
RANGE
METERS 3o
PAN AREA m•
15
o+-------~------~-------~------~--
0 0.3
0.1 0.2 0.4
Fig. 6 Typical Detection Range vs Pan Area - Petrol
PAGE 6 of 8
!.! ~ Security PUBLICATION: 01A-02-D6
Technical Information ISSUE No. & DATE: 001 12/91
90·
so·
?Cl"
70·
e.o·
60"
so· so·
40"
Fig. 7 Relative Range vs Angle oflncidence
6.2 USE OF FIRE TEST DATA 6.3 DETERMINING THE NUMBER OF

It has been explained in Para 5 that the sensitivity of the DETECTORS
detector is specified in terms of its response to well-defined test The number of detectors required for a particular risk will
fires. Tests arc carried out using a 0.1 m 2 pan. Sensitivity to depend on the area involved and the fire size at which
other pan areas is calculated from the square law detection is required. Large areas or small fires require
relationship. That is to obtain detection at twice the distance, large numbers of detectors.
the pan area must be multiplied by four.
As there are no agreed "rules' for the application of flame
Accidental fires are rarely of a well-defined size. It is still detectors, the overall system sensitivity must be agreed
possible however to calculate the response to a 'real' fire using between the designer and the end user. When agreement
the fire test data.
has been reached the system designer can detennine the
For example, a spillage fire involving a highly volatile liquid area to be covered by each detector using the fire test data.
[e.g. petrol] will spread quickly from the point of ignition to The detector is designed primarily for ceiling mounting
cover the complete surface of the pool. Such a spillage would with its axis vertically downwards. When used in this way
nonnally cover approximately 2m 2. Using the data for petrol it will cover a circular area at ground level, the diameters of
fires and extrapolating to an area of2m 2, the MS302Ex should the circle being proportional to the height. Under these
respond at a distance of about 120m within ten [IO] conditions the effective sensitivity is that which is achieved
seconds. It WILL NOT respond in less than three [3] at the edge of this circular area taking into account the slant
seconds, even at short range.
range and the angle of incidence.
If the spillage is of a less volatile material (e.g. kerosene], the Fig. 8 shows the effective sensitivity for petrol fires when
spread of the flame from the ignition point will be much used in this configuration. Sensitivity to other fuels can be
slower. The detector will then respond in a time dependent on determined from the data given in Para 5.2.
the distance from the fire.
© 1991 THORN SECURITY Limited PAGE 7of 8

M300 SERIES
01A-02-O6
001 12/91
50° soo
0.05111~ S.ZSm
l!f12.5m
10.Sm
.-zsm I
+ 15. 75.,,
Fig. 8 Field of View
Note: Any object within the detector' ~·field ofvielv will

cause a 'shadow' in the protected area. Small
objects close to the detector can cause large
shadows.
MS302Ex infra-red flame detector: 516-022-00 I
0IA-02-D2 DESIGN INFORMATION, M300
SERIES DETECTOR BASE AND
ACCESSORIES.
0IA-02-11 INSTALLATION, M300 SERIES

BASE AND ACCESSORIES.
0IA-02-Cl COMMISSIONING, M300 SERIES

BASE AND ACCESSORIES.
0IA-02-1 MAINTENANCE & SERVICE, M300

SERIES DETECTORS AND BASE.
JM/kdh j9-l 4
I 6th October 1991
PAGE 8 of 8
EQUIPMENT: CP510

CP510 - SLAVE CALLPOINT

1. INTRODUCTION
CAUTION:
The CP5 IO Slave Callpoint is designed to be used in CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN UPGRADING A
conjunction with a CP520 Master Callpoint. It enables the area SYSTEM THAT EVACUATE AND ALARM
of protection to be increased at a minimal cost. Like the CP520, LEVEL CALLPOINTS ARE NOT WIRED
the CPS IO consists of a switch contact which is operated by TOGETHER.
breaking a glass sheet. When connected to a CP520 Callpoint.
the switch contact in the CPS 10 Callpoint is wired in series with
that in the Master.
The CP5 IO Slave Callpoint meets the requirements of 8S5839
Pt 2. The CP5 IO is fitted into a standard KAC break glass cal lpoint
housing. The housing consists of three parts, the Front Cover.
By the selection of component values. it is possible for the Main Assembly and Box. The Front Cover and Main Assembly
CPS IO to cause the address unit in the CP520 to signal one of consist of a plastic bezel containing the switch, glass sheet and
two levels of alarm to the controller when operated. These levels the terminals. A red LED is provided at the top edge of the
are; Evacuate and Alert.
Main Assembly providing a visual indication of the condition
Up to IO CP5 IO Slave Call points can be anachcd to one CP520 of the internal switch. The Box is used to fix the Callpoint to a
Master Callpoint. Refer to Publication 0&A-02-D9 for details of BESA Box, MK/ Appleby Box or a suitable !lat surface and the
the connection and the alarm level setting for the CP520 Master cover screwed onto it.
Call point. The terminals are fitted onto the rear of the cover. Connections
are made internally to the integral switch and LED. The
terminals are used for connection to the Master Callpoint, any
Note: From firmware version 8.0 and later. selection of additional Slave Callpoints used, and for the fitting of the EOL
alarm level setting is done through 'CONSYS', resistor and alarm level resistors [R].
therefore it does not matter which value of alarm
level resistor is fitted.
FRONT COVER
LED
MAIN ASSEMBLV
BEZEL
BOX
BEZEL
(OPTIONAL)
•
IF•rE1
BREAd CLASS
104 87 •••
PRES; HERE
~ T E S T SEVHOLE
104
FRONT COVER
RETAINING SCREW
Fig. I CPSI0 Break Glass Manual Callpoint

R<'gistered Offiu: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QI-:

CP510
08A-02-D8
03 4/99
The operation of the switch can be tested at any time with the
aid of the special tool provided. This tool is inserted into the
side of the housing thus moving the glass sheet down and
operating the switch contact.
The level of the alann signalled by the callpoint is set by
selecting the appropriate value of resistor R from the
following list:
LEVEL OF ALARM RESISTOR VALUE
EVACUATE 270 ohm
ALERT 0ohm
Note: Refer to the Note and Caution in Para 1.

51
"'
4.1 DIMENSIONS [see Fig. 4]
Fig. 2 CP510 Break Glass Manual Callpoint Fixing
Dimensions
3. OPERATION
The CPS IO Manual Callpoint consists of a switch contact
operated by breaking the glass sheet. The Master Callpoint
to which the Slave is attached is able to signal the condition BREAK.!CLASS
of the Slavc·s S\virch to the controller. The LED is pulsed 87 I - a
PRES, HERE
when the switch contact is operated into the · ALARM'
condition.
87
Sl
ALARM LEVEL
RESISTOR
Fig, 4 CPSI0 Break Glass Manual Callpoint Overall

Dimensions
TO NFXT CALLPOINT
4.2 MATERIAL
FROM PREVIOUS lA
CALLPOINT OR EOL RESISTOR
Housing: Modified Polyphenylcne
2 2A
Oxide [Noryl SE I 00]
4.3 WEIGHT
3 3A
Housing: 150gms
4.4 ENVIRONMENTAL
Fig. 3 CPSIO Break Glass Manual Callpoint Terminals
Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C
Humidity: 95% Relative Humidity
The operation of ANY Slave Callpoint will cause the [ non- condensing]
associated Master Callpoint to register an alann and signal it
to the controller.
PAGE 2 of 4
EQUIPMENT: CP510
PUBLICATION: 0SA-02-D8
4.5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Additional Slave Callpoints may be ·ctais_y chained' together
as shown in Fig. 5 overleaf. A 4k7 ohm end-of-line resistor
Addressable Circuit is fitted to the last Slave Call point on the Slave Loop. Refer
Voltage: 28V d.c. [polarity to Publication 08A-02-D9 for details of the connections and
conscious] address setting for a CP520 Master Callpoint.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMC: Equals or exceeds the
requirements of • CP520 Master Callpoint
BS EN 50081-1 and
• BESA Box
BS EN 50082-1
• MK/ Appleby Box

of the European Directive for EMC 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
(89/336/EEC).
CP5 I0 Slave Callpoint: 514-001-018
5. CABLING
Cables arc to be selected in accordance with Publication
0SA-02-DI and BS5839 Pt I. Two connection terminals [2
and 3] arc provided for connection to a CP520 Master
Callpoint. A maximum of two l.5mm 2 or two 2.5mrn 2
cables may be connected at any one terminal.
The appropriate value of Alarm Level resistor R is fitted
between terminals I and lA. If no further slave units are to
be attached ie the last unit in the slave loop, a 4k7 ohm end-
of-line resistor is connected between terminals 2A and 3A.
Volum~ 15A MINERVA RANGE 01' ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS

Registered Office: 19-21 Denm.ark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

CP510
0BA-02-O8
03 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP - f - - - - - - - -....- - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - ~
+ f - - - - - - - -....- - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -....- - - ~
MS00 SERIES CPSZO/CPS30MASTER CALLPOINT

DETECTOR
R
CPS10 SLAUE CALLPOINT
R R
1A 1A
z ZA z ZA EOL
4k7
3 3A 3 3A
I
I
L _ _ _ _ __.__ _J,_ __._J
R
R ALARM LEVEL SELECT RESISTOR
NOTE A SLAVE CALLPOINT CANNOT HAUE A HIGHER PRIORITY THAN A MASTER

CALLPOINT J.E. IF A MASTER CALLPOINT GIVES AN ALERT SIGNAL.
A SLAVE CALLPOIITT MUST NOT BE SELECT£.> TO GIVE AN ALARt-1 SIGNAL.
Fig. 5 CP510/CP528 Simplified \Viring Diagram
CB/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT: CP520

ADDRESSABLE MASTER BREAK GLASS CALLPOINTS

The CP520 Master Break Glass Callpoint are designed to The CP520 is fitted into a standard K.A.C. break glass callpoint
monitor and signal the condition of the switch contact in a break housing. The housing consists of the front cover, main
glass call point. By the selection of suitable component values, it assembly, box and bezel (optional]. The front cover and main
is possible for the unit to signal one of two alarm levels assembly consist of a plastic bezel containing the switch, glass
[Evacuate or Alert] when operated. sheet and the address module PCB. A red LED is provided at
the top edge of the main assembly providing a visual indication
of the condition of the internal switch. The fixing options are
Note: From firmware version 8.0 and later. selection of shown in Fig.3 . The bezel may be used when the callpoint is
alarm level setting is done through 'CONSYS', semi-recess mounted on an MK/Appleby box. Cables enter via
therefore it does not matter which value of alarm a cable gland or conduit at the top and /or bottom of the
level resistor is fitted. callpoint. Cables may also enter into the callpoint via the rear
of the box.
The PCB is fixed to the rear of the main assembly. It is fitted
CAUTION: with an address unit, tlying leads and tenninals. The address
CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN UPGRADING A unit includes a custom chip and a 7-way OIL switch which is
SYSTEM THAT EVACUATE AND ALARM LEVEL used to define the address of the callpoint. The tenninals are
CALLPOINTS ARE NOT WIRED TOGETHER. used for connection to the addressable circuit, any slave
callpoints used, the EOL resistor and alann level resistor [R].
The CP520 Master Callpoint meets requirements ofBS5839 Pt

2.
It is possible to connect up to ten CP5 IO Slave Callpoints to one
CP520 Master Callpoint in order to extend the area covered.
Refer to publication 0SA-02-D8 for details of the CP5 IO Slave
Callpoint.
The CP530 T\fastcr callpoint is a v;eatherproof version of the
CP520, refer to publication 0SA-02-DIO.
FRONT COVER
LED
MAIN ASSEMBLY
BEZEL
~ - - - BOX
BEZEL
(OPTIONAL)
•
~ T E S T MEVHOLE
FRONT COVER
RETAINING SCREW
Fig. I CP520 Manual Break Glass Callpoint

Registered Office: 19·21 Denmark Stnet, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

CP520
0SA-02-D9
03 4/99
3. OPERATION Electromagnetic Compatibility
The CP520 Manual Callpoints consists of a switch contact EMC: Equals or exceeds the
which is operated by the breaking of the glass sheet. When requirements of
the callpoint is addressed by the controller, it signals the BS EN 50081-1 and
condition of this switch contact to the controller. The LED is BS EN 50082-1
pulsed when the switch contact is in the 'ALARM'
condition.
Nole: The above standards fulfil the requirements
The operation of the switch can be tested at any time with the of the European Directive for EMC
aid of the special tool provided. This tool is inserted into the (89/336/EEC).
side of the housing thus moving the glass sheet down and
operating the switch contact.
The level of the alann signalled by the callpoint is set by 5. CABLING
selecting the appropriate value of resistor [RJ from the
following list: Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication
05A-02-DI and the requirements of the current issue of
LEVEL OF ALARM RESISTOR VALUE 8S5839. Four connection tenninals are provided on the PCB
for connection to the addressable circuit. The appropriate
EVACUATE 270 ohm
value of alarm level resistor [R] is fitted between the
ALERT 0ohm terminals shown. If no slave units are to be connected, a 4k7
ohm end-of-line resistor is connected between the tenninals
shown.
Nole: The same resistor values are filled to the If CP510 Slave Callpoint[s] are to be used, no end-otCJine
CP510, a slave cal/point cannot have a higher resistor is fitted into the Master Callpoint. The first Slave
priority than a master cal/point i.e. if a master Callpoint is connected to the terminals shown, with
cal/point gives an Alert signal a slave cal/point additional callpoints being "daisy-chained" together. A 4k7
must not be selected to give an Alarm signal. ohm end-of-line resistor is fitted to the last Slave Callpoint
on the slave circuit. Maximum physical distance between
callpoints 30m, maximum cable length to last callpoint
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 600m.
O\'erall Dimensions
Height: 87mm
Width: 87mm
Depth: dependant on fixing method
[sec Fig. 3]
Weight: 200g
Material
Housing: Modified Polyphenylene
Oxide [Noryl SE I 00]
Environmental
.,
Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH
[non-condensing] s,
Electrical Characteristics
Addressable circuit voltage: 28V d.c.
[polarity conscious]
Fig. 2 CP520 Manual Break Glass Callpoint Fixing

Dimensions
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: CP520
PUBLICATION: OBA-02-D9
IFl~E I -
BREAK,CLASS
87 •••
PRES~ HERE
-
-4- , ,
I·
87
.I I. 51
•I I, 51
•I
SURFACE MOUNTING SURFACE MOUNTING
UITH SURFACE PVC WITH CONCEALED
TRUNKING OR FLEX/ CABLES VIA BACM
CONDUIT OR CABLE ENTRV BESA BOX
GLAND OR SEJ11-RECESSED
MOUNTING ON AN
MIVAPPLEBV BOX
Fig. 3 CP520 Manual Break Glass Callpoint - Fixing Options and Overall Dimensions
I :cJ
B I I
0
0
le~~eij~fl TBl
0
0
EOL ~----~v~•-• LOOP IN
+ve
'-------~=•-- LOOP OUT

ALARM LEVEL
F'ig. 4 CP520 Manual Break Glass Callpoint - Connection Diagram
• CPS IO Slave Call point
• BESA Box
• MK/Appleby Box
© 1999 Tyco Electronic product Group PAGE 3of 4

Registerttl Office: 19-21 Denmark Strttl, Wokingham, Berks RG40 ZQE
A tqc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

CP520
0BA-02-O9
03 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP ~ l - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - ~
+1----------4-------------1------------4----
MS00 SERIES
CPSZO/CPS30MASTER CALLPOINT
DETECTOR
LOOP
R
CP510 SLAIJE CALLPOINT
R R
1A 1A
z ZA z ZA EOL
4k7
3 3A 3
R = ALARM LEVEL SELECT RESISTOR
NOTE A SLAVE CALLPOINT CANNOT HAUE A HIGHER PRIORITY THAN A MASTER

CALLPOINT I.E. IF A MASTER CALLPOltlT GIVES AN ALERT SIGNAL,
A SLPVF. CALLPOIHT t1lJST NOT 8£ SELECTED TO GIVE AN Al.ARM SIGNAL.
Fig. 5 CP520/CPSIO Simplified Wiring Diagram
CP520 Master Callpoint: 514-001-021
Bezel (pack often]: 515-001-019
0SA-02-DS CP5 IO - SLAVE CALLPOINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-DIO CP530 - WEATHERPROOF MASTER BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT
Volume 15A MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
CB/jm
I 9th April l 999
PAGE4of4
EQUIPMENT: CP530

ADDRESSABLE WEATHERPROOF MASTER BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT

The CP530 Weatherproof Master Break Glass Call point is The housing consists of, the front cover and mounting box. The
designed to monitor and signal the condition of the switch front cover contains the switch, glass sheet, address module
contact in a break glass callpoint. By the selection of suitable PCB and a sealing 'O' ring. A red LED is provided at the top
component values, it is possible for the unit to signal one of two edge of the front cover providing a visual indication of the
alann levels [Evacuate or Alert] when operated. condition of the internal switch. Cables may enter into the
callpoint via cable gland entries at the top and bottom of the
The CP530 Master Callpoint meets requirements ofBS5839 Pt
front cover. The mounting box may only be surface mounted.
2.
The PCB is fixed to the rear of the front cover. It is fitted with
It is possible to connect up to ten CPS IO Slave Callpoints to one
an address unit, flying leads and terminals. The address unir
CP530 Master Callpoint in order to extend the area covered.
includes a custom chip and a 7-way OIL switch which is used
Refer to publication 08A-02-D8 for details of the CP5 IO Slave
to define the address of the callpoint. The terminals are used for
Callpoint.
connection to the addressable circuit, any slave callpoints used,
The CP530 is fitted into a standard K.A.C. break glass callpoint the EOL resistor and alann level resistor [R].
housing.
The CP530 Master callpoint is a weatherproof version of the
CP520, refer to publication 08A-02-D9.
LED
0 0
!FIRE!
124 87 BREAK CLASS ALLEN SCREWS x 0
0
••• SECURE FRONT COVER MOUNTING BOX SECURED
PRESS IERE
O
~THORN
0
TO MOUNT I NG BOX
j INSIDE REAR Of FRONT

COUER
TEST KEVHOLE • 39
• 59
:I
Fig. I CP530 Weatherproof Manual Break Glass Callpoint

Registern:I Offrce: 19-21 Denmark Streel, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

CP530
0SA-02-D10
03 4/99
3. OPERATION 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

The CP530 Manual Callpoint consists of a switch contact Overall Dimensions
which is operated by the breaking of the glass sheet. When Height: 124mm
the callpoint is addressed by the controller, it signals the
condition of this switch contact to the controller. The LED is Width: 124mm
pulsed when the switch contact is in the 'ALARM" Depth: 59mm
condition. Weight: 200g
The operation of the switch can be tested at any time with the
aid of the special tool provided. This tool is inserted into the
side of the housing thus moving the glass sheet down and Material
operating the switch contact. Housing: Modified Polyphenylene Oxide
The level of the alarm signalled by the callpoint is set by ~ [Noryl SE 100]
selecting the appropriate value of resistor [R] from the
following list:
Environmental
LEVEL OF ALARM RESISTOR VALUE Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C
EVACUATE 270 ohm Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH
Oohm
[non-condensing]
ALERT
Note: Note :The same resistor values are fitted to the
CP510, a slave cal/point cannot have a higher Electrical Characteristics
priority than a master cal/point i.e. if a master Addressable Circuit Voltage: 28V d.c.
cal/point gives an Alert signal a slave caffpoint [polarity conscious]
must not be selected to give an Alarm signal.
Current Consumption
Note: From firmware version 8.0 and later, selection Normal: O. I8mA
of alarm level setting is done through
'CONSYS', therefore it does not matter which Alarm: 0.1 SmA
value of alarm level resistor is fitted.
IP Rating: IP66
CAUTION:
CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN UPGRADING
A SYSTEM THAT EVACUATE AND ALARM
LEVEL CALLPOINTS ARE NOT WIRED
TOGETHER.
75
EARTH FIXING
BLOCK
~-
75
105
Fig. 2 CP530 Manual Break Glass Callpoint - Fixing Dimensions
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: CP530
I =c:::::J
B I I
0
0
lij~~~e~el
• T81
0
'
0
EOL ~---~~•s.....- LOOP IN
+ve
~ - - - - - _ : - : , v : E • - LOOP OUT
ALARM LEUEL
Fig. 3 CP530 Manual Break Glass Callpoint - Connection Diagram
Electromagnetic Compatibility 6_ ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

• CP5 IO Slave Callpoint
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
CP530 Weatherproof Master Callpoint: 514-001-022
of the European Directive for EMC
(89/336/EEC).
5. CABLING
0SA-02-D I and the requirements of the current issue of
BS5839. Four connection tenninals arc provided on the
PCB for connection to the addressable circuit. The
appropriate value of alarm level resistor [R] is fitted
between the terminals shown. If no slave units arc to be
connected, a 4k7 ohm end-of-line resistor is connected
between the terminals shown.
If CPS JO Slave Callpoinc[s] are to be used, no end-of-line
resistor is fitted into the Master Callpoint. The first Slave
Callpoint is connected to the terminals shown, with
additional slave callpoints being "'daisy-chained" together.
A 4k7 ohm end-of-line resistor is fitted to the last Slave
Callpoint on the slave circuit [see Fig. 4]. Maximum
physical distance between callpoints 30m, maximum cable
length to last callpoint 600m.


CP530
0BA-02-O10
03 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP +f--------+--------------<1-------------4----
MS00 SERI ES
DETECTOR CP530 MASTER CALLPOINT
LOOP
R
CPS10 SLAVE CALLPOINT
R R
2 2A 2 EOL
4k?
3 3A 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L------o---~~~~
R
R = ALARM LEVEL SELECT RESISTOR
Fig. 4 CP530/CPS IO Simplified Wiring Diagrams
VOLUME 15A MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
CB1Jrn
19th April 1999
PAGE4of4
EQUIPMENT: CP530/930
PUBLICATION: FIL 0027
LEAFLET S/C 120-415-218
CP530/930 ADDRESSABLE WEATHERPROOF CALLPOINT
INSTALLATION
1. INTRODUCTION
The CP530/930 Callpoint backbox MUST be mounted as shown in Fig. 1 to avoid the possibility of the
earth fixing point shorting the addressable loop cables.
TOP
75
.~
EARTH FIXING
BLOCK
75
105
Fig. I CP530 Mounting Orientation
JM/jm
1st August 1997
© 1997 Thom Security Limited PAGE 1 of 1

EQUIPMENT: CP540Ex
PUBLICATION: 0BA-02-D11
ISSUE No. & DATE: 03 4/99·

INTRINSICALLY SAFE MONITORED BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT

1. INTRODUCTION Note: From firmware version 8.0 and later, selection of
alarm level setting is done through 'CONSYS',
The CP540Ex Intrinsically Safe Break Glass Callpoint is de- therefore it does not matter whether the link is
signed to monitor and signal the condition of the switch contact fitted or not fitted.
associated with the break glass. By the use of a wire link it it is
possible to signal one of two alarm levels [Evacuate or Alert].
Each module contains an · end ofline' resistor and light emitting
diode.
-
The CP540Ex module is designated a ·simple apparatus' and as
such may be used in hazardous areas in MINERVA addressable 14700 l DLINK
systems when connected to an IF500Ex Addressable Interface 1A
Module. It is pcnnissible to operate two CP540Ex modules as
master" and 'slave' with each IF500Ex interface. 3k3
EOL
l -v
-
z
l ZA
lk
The housing consists of a front cover and mounting box. The
front cover contains the glass frangible element, a sealing ·o·
3
ring and terminal block. A red LED is provided at the top edge
of the front cover providing a visllal indication of the condition 3A
of the internal switch. Cables may enter via two cable gland en- TERMINAL
tries at the top and bottom of the front cover. The mounting box BLOCK
may only be surface mounted.
Fig. I Internal Circuit Diagram
3. OPERATION
When two CP540Ex modules are used with a single IF500Ex
The CP540Ex Manual Break Glass Call point consists of a module in a master and slave configuration. The 3k3 EOL
switch which is operated by the breaking of a glass sheet. When resistor should be removed from tenninals 2A & I A of the first
the IF500Ex Interface Module to which the 'callpoint' is device which is designated 'slave'. whilst the second device on
connected is addressed by by the controller. the condition of the the line retains the 3k3 resistor and is designated 'master'. Sec
break glass switch contact is signalled. The LED is pulsed each Figs. 3 & 4.
time the IF500Ex is addresscd[only in the unit with the EOL
fined i.e. the master unit].
The operation of the switch can be tested at any time by the Note: Only two CP540Ex modules are permitted with
insertion of a special key provided. This key is inserted into the each IFS00Ex [see publication 26A-02-O1, for
side of the housing thus moving the glass sheet down and details of I. S. System 602).
operating the switch contact. The level of the alann signalled by
the interface/callpoint is set by a wire link between terminal I A
and I from the table I below. 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Overall Dimensions
See Fig. 2.
LEVEL OF ALARM LINK
Material
EVACUATE OMIT LINK(4.5mA)
Housing: Modified Polyphenylene Oxide
ALERT LINK I & IA(6.3mA) (Noryl SE I 00)
Table 1: Alarm Level Settings

Registered Office: 19-21 ~nmark Street, Wokingham., Berks RG40 2QE:

CP540Ex
0BA-02-D11
03 4/99
124
87 LED
0 0
jFIRE I
l24 87 0
• ••
BREAK GLASS
PRESS HER£
~TOORN
0
ALLEN SCREWS x 6
SECURE FROITT COUER
TO MOUNTING BOX
MOUNTING BOX SECURED
INSIDE REAR OF FRDITT
COUER
TEST kEVHOLE
59 I
<
105
0 75
75
Fig. 2 CPS40Ex Overall and Fixing Dimensions
Environmental
Operating Temperature : -20°C to +70°C EMC: Equals or exceeds the
Relative Humidity : up to 95% RH requirements of
(non-condensing) BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
IP Rating: IP67
Electrical Characteristics Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements

Addressable current voltage :28V d.c.
(89/336/EEC).
(polarity conscious)
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: CP540Ex
PUBLICATION: 0BA-02-O11
I F500Ex
INTERFACE CPS40Ex
MODULE
2 A
JkJ
ADDRESSABLE EOL
LOOP 1A
~·-~~~~::·-~:+
• SAFETY .
~ BARRI ER 4 "-~-+---!--'
IN
47on
! ------·-·-· !
LED
3 JA
SAFE AREA HAZARDOUS AREA
Fig. 3 IFS00Ex With Single CP540Ex Module
CPS40Ex CPS40Ex
I FSOOEx SLAVE
INTERFACE MASTER
MODULE
2 2A 2 2A
JkJ
lA lA EOL
IN
470n 470n
LED LED
3 3A 3 3A
SAFE: AREA HAZARDOUS AREA
Fig. 4 IFS00Ex With Two CP540Ex Modules
5. CABLING 6. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

See LS. system documentation 26A-02-Dl for cable • IF500Ex Interface Module
parameters.
A 6-way terminal block is pro\·ided on the rear of the cover
for connections. The cable from the interface module should 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
be connected to tenninals 2 & 3 observing correct polarity.
CP540Ex: 5I5-001-023
An additional CP540Ex may be connected via terminals 2A
& JA again observing correct polarity. If a second CP540Ex IF500Ex: 514-001-017
is used, remove the EOL resistor connected between
terminals I A & 2A on the first unit.
If the CP540Ex is to be used as an 'alert' callpoint, link
terminals I & IA.
The maximum physical distance between callpoints is 30m
and the maximum cable length between the first and second
callpoint is 60m.

Registerfll Oflic:e: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Be.-ks RG40 2QE

CP540Ex
0SA-02-O11
03 4/99
26A-02-DI INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS FOR USE IN LOW VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS
APPLICATION AND DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-Dl2 IF500Ex - INTRINSICALLY SAFE ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULE
CB/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT: AM921

AM921 ADDRESSABLE ASPIRATING INTERFACE MODULE
PRODUCT APPLICATION & SYSTEM DESIGN
1. INTRODUCTION 2. OPERATION
The AM921 Addressable Aspirating Interface module is The AM92 l module is capable of identifying and ~~onalling to
designed to monitor VESDA ® LaserPLUSTM Aspirating the Minerva c.ontroller the status of the LaserPLUS 1Rt detector.
Detector systems. The AM921 module has no housing of its
own and is plugged directly onto the VESDA ® termination card Alarm [Normally Open]
which may be fitted to a detector. remote unit or externally Pre-Alarm [Normally Open]
mounted in a rack system. Fault [Normally Closed]
If resetting from the Minerva controller is required an external
+24V supply must be connected to the AM92 I.
These contacts can be correctly identified in the event of failure
'Nhen fitted on LaserPLUSTM remote or 19" rack units the of one or more of the other contacl-;. The above Minerva states
AM921 remote reset is not supported. In these cases, it is equate to the Vesda states as follows:
advised that the LaserPLUsTM relays are programmed as non-
latching. Minerva VEDSA Relay No.
The AM92 I is compatible with the following VESDA® Alam, Fire I 6
LaserPLUSTM systems with seven relay outputs: Fire 2 7
Pre-Alarm Alert 4
VLP-000 LaserPlus Detector
Action 5
VLP-0<)2 LaserPlus Detector +· Display
Fault Isolate I
VLP-012 Lac;erPlus Detector-:-- Display+ Programmer
Minor Fault 2
VLS-200 FD7 Scanner PSU Fault (hard wired) External
VLS-204 FD7 Scanner + Display Urgent Fault 3
VLS-214 FD7 Scanner+ Display+ Programmer
VLP-400 LaserPlus detector with FOK LED
Note: The default La,erPLVSn,, relay configuration
VLS-600 FD7 LaserPlus Scanner with FOK LED.
should be used.
The AM92 I is not compatible with VESDA ® LaserPLUSTM

systems with twelve relay outputs. 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
O,·crall Dimensions
Note: Height: 35mm
1) The VESDA® LaserPLUS™ unit is not suit.able for Width: 70mm
Minerva Fire Detecnon systems where Ground
Fault Monitoring is required. In any system where Depth: 75mm
Ground Fault Monitoring is enabled, connections Weight: 56g
of the VESDA® unit via the AM921 may result in a
ground fault condition. Environmental
2) For standard Minerva 8, 16E, AND 80, Ground Operating Temperature: -l0l1C to +55°C
Fault Monitoring is not provided so there are no Storage Temperature: -20°C to +80°C
problems in connecting VESDA® LaserPLUS™
units via AM921s to the Minerva controllers. Relative Humidity: Upto95%RH
T890tr891 systems should have Ground Fault non-condensing]
Monitoring - SOLAS requirement.
Electrical Characteristics: 28V d.c.
3) To enable the VESDA® LaserPLUS™ 'Alert' and [polarity conscious]
'AcOon' signals, the Minerva Pre-Alarm function
must be enabled.

Regbtt«d Offie1:: 19-21 Denmllrk Street:, Wf>kingham. Berlo: RG40 2QE
A 1:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

AM921
0BA-02-O33
06 11/99
Safety
The AM92 I meets the requirements of
BS EN 60950: 1992 and amendments.
Other Standards Conformity

European Fire and Safety Group Document No.
EPSGiFi95/007 for Fire Detection and Fire Alann
Systems.
UL864 - Control Units for Fire-Protective Signalling
Systems Standard for Safety.
4. CABLING
Refer to Fig. 3. Cables are to be selected in accordance with
Publication 05A-02-D I and the requirements of the cmTent
joo oolBB
._,.+--~+---~ PSU FAULT +24V OV
issue of BS5839. Two pairs of connection te1Tninals [L+ and
L~J are provided. These terminals are used for connecting the
module on to the addressable drcuit. A maximum of one
LINE POWER
1.5mm 2 or one 2.5mm2 cable may be connected at any one
____ --i- LINE & POWER tem1inal.
L- 1 CONNECTORS
Terminal blocks are also provided for connection of an
external 24V supply and for monitoring the Vesda power
supply.
CONNECTORS TO VESDA: HEAD TERMINATION CARO 5. ORDERING INFORMATION

fig. 1 .Ai\1921 Aspirating Interface Module VLP-000 - LaserPlus Detector: 516.018.003
Electromagnetic Compatibility VLP-002 - laserPlus Detector
+ Display: 516.018.002
requirements of VLP-012 - LaserPlus Detector+ Display
BS EN 50081-1 and + Programmer: 516.018.001
BS EN 50082-1 VLS-200 - FD7 Scanner: 516.018.006
VLS-204 - FD7 Scanner+ DisplaY,: 516.018.005
Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements VLS-214 - FD7 Scanner+ Display
of the European Directive for EMC + Programmer: 516.018.004
(89/336/EEC). VLP-400 - LaserPlus detector
with FOK LED: 516.018.013
VLS-600 - FD7 LaserPlus Scanner
with FOK LED: 516.018.016
AM92 I - Aspirating Interface Module: 546.()04.007
JM/jm
25 th October 1999
PAGE 2 of 3
EQUIPMENT: AM921
PUBLICATION: OSA-02-D33
ISSUE No. &DATE:
06 11/99
C)O
0 _.. --- CHASSIS
AM921
ASPIRATING
INTERFACE
MODULE
FILTER
Note: Removal of the chassis is NOT

necessary when installing the
AM921 addressable interface.
FRONT COVER
(THE FOUR COVER RETAINING SCREWS
ARE BENEATHTHE INDIVIDUAL COVERS
ON THE FRONT PANEL)
FILTER
ACCESS
PANEL
Fig. 2 Exploded View of the VESDA
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP +r-------------+------------------+-~
M900SERIES AM921AOOAESSABLE
DETECTOR ASPIRATING INTERFACE
e
TO EXTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY PSU FAULT • •
LOOP RELAY
{CONTACTS
HELD CLOSED)
M900
SERIES
EXTERNAL 24V POWER SUPPLY DETECTOR
OR 24V SUPPLY ON VESDA HEAD
TERMINATION CARD
NOTE: IF THE EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY RELAV INPUT
IS NOT USED, THE TERMINALS MUST BE LINKED
Fig. 3 Simplified Wiring Diagram

Rcgi,t~red Offi«: 19-21 Dcuwark Stred, Wokingh•rn, &rb RG40 2Q[

. EQUIPMENT: AM521

ADDRESSABLE ASPIRATING INTERFACE MODULE

1. NTRODUCTION 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
The AM52 I As~irating Interface Module is designed to monitor Overall Dimensions
three VESDA M E70 Mk lll Aspirating Detector contacts
[Alann, Pre-Alann and Fault]. The module provides one Height: 70mm
identifiable detection loop which is capable of monitoring the Width: 100mm
above contacts.
Weight: 42g
The AM52 I module is plugged directly to the VESDA ™De-
tector control PCB and has no housing of its own.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: -20"C to + 70''C
2. OPERATION
Relative Humidity: Up to 95% RH [non-condensing]
The AM52 I module is capable of identifying and signalling to
the controller the state of three sets of contacts:
Electrical Characteristics: 28V d.c.
Alarm (Normally Open]
Prc-Alann [polarity conscious]
[Normally Open]
Fault [Normally Closed]
These contacts can be correctly identified in the event of failure EMC: Equals or exceeds the
of one or more of the other contacts. requirements of BS EN 50081- l
and BS EN 50082-1
I- i:::=:::J Note: The above standards fulfill the requirements of

i:::=:::J the the European Directive for EMC (89/336/
- ~~
EEC).
D [I][J
[I][J
CID
[I][J
CID
4. CABLING
CID
CID Cables arc to be selected in accordance with Publication 05A-
- - 02-DI and the requirements of the current issue of 8S5839.
Three pairs of connection tenninals [L + and L-/ are provided
on the tenninal block inside the VESDA T~ unit. These
tcnninals are used for connecting the module to the
addressable circuit. A maximum one l.5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2
D cable may be connected at any one terminal. The third pair of
L+ and L- ter-minals may be used to ·spur' the addressable
circuit, but this is not recommended as the 'spur' circuit will be
lost if the AM521 module is removed.
VESDA ™ E70 Mk lll Aspirating Detector.
Fig. I AM521 Aspirating Interface Module

R~istered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham. Berks RG-10 2QE

AM521
OSA-02-D13
03 4/99
Fl LTER
BOWL
RETA I NJ NG
CLIPS~-~~~~~
4 ,c 6 DIA
MOUNTING
HOLES
Fig. 2 AM52 I Module Mounting Location
REFERENCE
I NPlIT
At1521
CONNECTOR
REFERENCE 24U SUPPLY

OUTPUT
Fig. 3 Connection ofan AM521 Module and a VESDATM Detector
6. ORDERING INFORMATION 7. RELATED PUBLICATIONS

AM52 I Aspirating Interface VESDA ™Aspirating Detector manufacturers manual.
Module: 546-017-00 I JM/jm
VESDA TM E70 Mk Ill Aspirating
Detector: 516-017-001 20th April l 999
PAGE 2 of 2
EQUIPMENT: CM520
ISSUE No. &DATE: 03 4/99"

ADDRESSABLE CONTACT MONITORING MODULE

The CM520 Contact Monitoring Module is designed to monitor As stated. the CM520 Contact Monitoring Module is fitted on
fire contacts such as extinguishing system control, ventilation to a custom-built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto a
control, fire door control, etc. The module provides one identi- Standard dual-gang ME box. The dimensions of this fascia
fiable detection loop which is capable of monitoring nonnally plate are given in Fig. I.
open or normally closed contacts.
The ME box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
The CM520 Contact Monitoring Module is contained on a dou- be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
ble sided printed Circuit board [PCs] which is fitted into a cus- required for MITT cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
tom built fascia plate with a protective cover being fined over must be fitted when using PVC cable.
the PCs, leaving only the connection terminals exposed. The
fascia plate is then fitted onto a standard dual-gang ME box. The The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate with a pro-
CM520 is designed for internal applications. tective plastic cover being fitted over the PCB leaving only the
connection tenninals exposed.
The PCB is fitted with a red LED which extends through the
front of the fascia plate and provides indication of unit opera-
tion.
DEUICE ADDRESS/
(© CMSZO
ZONE NUMBER LABEL
DE~ICE TYPE LAB£L
0
@ @ 8?
• 14
148 - - - - - - - - - l
Fig. I CM520 Contact Monitoring Module - Fascia Plate

R~istered Office: 19-21 Denmark Stn;-et, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2Q£
CM520
08A-02-D3
03 4/99
Fig. 2 CM520 Fascia Plate fback view) Showing Position of PCB

The CM520 Contact Monitoring Module is capable of iden- Overall Dimensions
tifying and signalling to the controller the following condi-
Height: 87mm
ions of a single contact:
Width: 148mm
• Normally open - OPEN
Depth: 14mm [sec Fig. I]
• Normally open - CLOSED Weight: IOOg
• Nonna Ily closed - OPEN
0
Nonrnally closed - CLOSED Material
Housing: BAYBLEND" [Polycarbonate/
The detection circuit is monitored for short and open circuit ABS alloy]
co11Jitiom, and is <1.bk to operate into a continuous short-cir-
cuit. The LED is ON when the monitored contact has oper- Environmental
ated and the controller has acknowledged this condition.
Relative Humidity: upto95% RH
[ non-condensing]
{polarity conscious]
requirements of
·Bs EN 5008 I -I and
BS EN 50082-1

(89/336/EEC).
PAGE2of4
EQUIPMENT: CM520

Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication The module fits on to a standard dual-gang MK box
05A-02-D I and the requirements of the current issue of
BS5839. Three pairs of connection terminals [L+ and L-) are
provided on the tem1inal block. These terminals are used for 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
connecting thl! module on to the addressable circuit. This
circuit will permit 'teed' or 'spur' junctions which may be CM520 Contact Monitoring Module: 555-180-021
used to simplify the installation cabling. A maximum of one Cover: 517-035-007
l .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any one
terminal. The third pair of L+ and L- terminals may be used
to spur the address3ble circuit cabling.
Note: The 'spur' connection may be made from any

of the three LINE 1/Ps, but for ease of of circuit
identification, the center /IP should be used.
I I
-
0
0
0
0
~so
~r
~ t;
DD
"+ u
0 '
oO
~
0 +
0
~
~' .
~
'
0 ~ ~
0 ' -
0
~ ~
0 ~
+ :cJ
1
[§§~§~~~,
Fig. 3 CM520 Contact Monitoring Module PCB

Note: Address switches shown enlarged for clarity.

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG.40 2QE

CM520
0SA-02-D3
03 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP +l-----------4--------------4---------------4'--------
FOR SPUR
M500 SERIES Cl RCUIT
DETECTOR
IDENT
CURREITT
8ZOR
MONITORED CONTACT
1k
DEJJICE WITH NORMALLY
1k
OPEN CONTACT
CONDITION CURRENT
01520 CONTACT MONITORING

MODULE
!DENT
CURRENT
SZOR
MONITORED COITTACT
DEUICE WITH NORMALLY
CLOSED CONTACT
CONDIT!ON CURRENT
Fig. 4 CM520 Simplified Wiring Diagram
VOLUME 15A
CB/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE4of4
EQUIPMENT: DM520

CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE

The DM520 Conventional Detector Module is designed to As stated, the DM520 Conventional Detector Module is fitted
monitor and signal alarms from a conventional detector loop of on to a custom-built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto
up to twenty 20V detectors. The module is backward a standard dual-gang MK box. The dimensions of this fascia
compatible with low voltage conventional point type detectors plate are given in Fig. l.
of the S100 series, M300 series and 'H' series detectors and
conventional manual callpoints. The conventional detectors The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
may be reset in response to a command signalled by the be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
controller. The module requires an external 24V d.c. power required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
supply. must be fitted when using PVC cable.
The DM520 Conventional Detector Module is contained on a The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate with a
double sided printed Circuit board [PCB] which is fitted into a protective plastic cover being fitted over the PCB leaving only
custom built fascia plate with a protective cover being fitted over the connection terminals exposed.
the PCB, leaving only the connection terminals exposed. The The PCB is titted with a red LED which extends through the
fascia plate is then fitted onto a standard dual-gang MK box. front of the fascia plate and provides indication of unit
The DM520 module may be used to pick up zones of existing operation.
conventional 20V systems and interface them with an
addressable system. The detectors in these zones, however, will
not be individually addressable.
(@
0
@ @ 87
},
1-48 - - - - - - - - -
'T
Fig. 1 DM520 Conventional Detector Module - Facia Plate

Rell:istered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, lkrks RG40 2QE

DM520
08A-02-D2
OA 4/99
Fig. 2 DMS20 Facia Plate (back view) Showing Position of PCB
3. OPERATION Electrical Characteristics
A reset command signalled by the controller reduces the Addressable circuit voltage: 28V d.c.
20V detector voltage to below 0.5V d.c. with a reset period, [polarity conscious]
dctcm1incd by the controller, of between six to ten External power supply; 24V d.c. [nominal)
seconds. The same reset command is also capable of 20V d.c. [minimum]
driving an output \;hich can be used to intcnupt the external 32V d.c. [maximum]
power source to reset those detectors which require resetting Current: 22mA [typical] quiescent for
by this method. a 20V loop
The module monitors the condition of the wiring and signals 45mA alarm load
o the controller if an open circuit [>5.6k ohm] or short 'D+' to 'D-': 20V d.c. [typical]
i.:ircuit [<!00 ohms] fault is detected. The Normal and
Alarm conditions of the detector line are reported to the Alarm condition: 100 ohm< lkO
controller when the alann line is monitored via a 4k7 ohm Detector wiring: o/c > 5k6
EOL resistor. sic < I 00 ohm
The module requires a 2-lV d.c. external power supply and
is compatible with the ·-C" range, system 1700 and
'MINERVA' power supply units. A power supply unit fault
is signalled if the external power supply to the module fails. EMC: Equals or exceeds the
requirements of
The red LED is used t0 indicate an alarm condition.
BS EN 50081-i and
BS EN 50082-1
Overall Dimensions Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements of
Height: 87mm the European Directive for EMC (89/336/
EEC).
Width: 148mm
Depth: 14mm [see Fig. I]
Weight: IOOg 5. CABLING
Refer to Figs. 3 & 4. Cables arc to be selected in accordance
Material with Publication 05A-02-Dl and the requirements of the
Housing: ··BAYBLEND" [Polycarbonate current issue of BS5839. Three pairs of connection
/ABS alloy] terminals [L+ and L-] are provided on the tenninal block.
These terminals arc used for connecting the module on to
the addressable circuit. This circuit will pennit 'teed' or
Environmental
'spur' junctions which may be used to simplify the
Operating Temperature; -20°C to +70°C installation cabling. A maximum of one l.5mm2 or one
Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH 2.5mm2 cable may be connected at any one tenninal. The
[non-condensing] third pair of L+ and L- terminals may be used to spur the
addressable circuit cabling.NA maximum of twenty 20V
detectors may be connected to a DM520 module.
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: DM520
PUBLICATION:
0BA-02-O2
ISSUE No. & DATE:
04 4/99
The external power supply is connected at the tenninal

block as follows:
• Positive [24V]
• Negative [OV]
The detector circuit is connected at the tenninal block as

follows:
• Positive (D+]
• Negative [D-]
The remaining tcnninals are not connected.
Note: In all cases, the alarm conditions are signalled

via the module via the D+ and 0- terminals.
End-of-line resistors [4k7 ohm] arc required to be fitted at

the end of the conventional detector loop wiring.
Fig. 3 DM520 Conventional Detector Module PCB

Note: Address switches shown enlarged for clarity. 6. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
The module fits onto a standard dual-gang MK box.

of the three LINE l!Ps, but for ease of circuit 7. 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
identification, the centre /IP should be used.
DM520 Conventional Detector
Module: 517-035-012
Cover: 517-035-007

R~isterffl Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A tqcu INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

DM520
08A-02-D2
OA 4/99
CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR
<MR301 OPTICAL SMOKE
DETECTOR EXAMPLEl
4k7 EOL
RETHRN WIRING _ _,.__ _ __

ADDRESSABLE
LOOP TO CONTROLLER----<<----
CONTROLLER DMSZ0 CONVENTIONAL
MS00 SERI ES DETECTOR MODULE
DETECTOR
EXTERNAL 24U d. c. SUPPL\/

<MAY BE SUPPLIED FROM
CONTROLLER)
EXTERNAL 24V d.c. SUPPL\/

CONTROLLER)
lt;fRJNSICALLI/ SAFE SYSTEM 601

COr,JEHTI ONAL DETECTORS I .S. INTERFACE UNIT
(MR301E>< OPTICAL SMOKE
DETECTOR EXAMPLE) SCREENED CABLE-
EOL
Fig. 4 DM520 Simplified Wiring Diagram
VOLUME 15A 52MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
JM/jm
20th April 1999
PAGE 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT: MDM521
ISSUE No. & DATE: 02 4/99-

MULTI-CIRCUIT CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE

The MDM52 l Multi-Circuit Conventional Detector Module a The MDM52 I module is contained on a double sided printed
Minerva ancillary that is designed to monitor and signal alarms circuit board, which may be mounted in a Minerva Ancillary 8
from eight conventional detector loops of up to twenty detectors housing - 4 units max. or Minerva Ancillary 3 housing - I unit
each. The module is compatible with low voltage conventional max.
point type detectors of the M600 series, SI 00 series, M300
series, S23 I i/S23 If [6 max, refer to detector documentation],
'H' series heat detectors and conventional manual callpoints. 3. OPERATION
The conventional detectors may be reset in response to a
command signalled by the controller. The module requires an A reset command signalled by the controller reduces the 20V
external 24 V d.c. power supply to power the detection zones. detector voltage to below 0.5V d.c. with a reset period.
determined by the controller, of between 5 to 15 seconds. The
The module also provides a +24V d.c.@ IA output via a 4-way
same reset signal reduces the 4-wire detector output to 0.5V for
terminal block for powering 4-wire detectors.
the same period.
The MDM521 module may be used to pick up zones of existing
The module monitors the condition of the wiring and signals to
conventional 20V systems and interface them with a Minerva
the controller if an open circuit [>5.6k ohm] or short circuit
addressable system. The detectors in these zones. however, will
[<IOO ohms J fault is detected. The Nonna! and Alann
not be individually addressable.
conditions of the detector line are reported to the controller
The MDM521 is configured in 'CONSYS' as a single DM520 when the alarm line is monitored via either a 4k7 ohm EOL
for each zone used. Zone I takes the base address. zone 2 base resistor, a Active EOL unit or EOL unit dependant on the type
address+ I etc. lfa zone is not used, putting the associated link of bases used.
into the ·Park' [sec Section 6) position disables that address.
The module requires a 24V d.c. external power supply and is
which may be used for a different ancillary.
compatible with the "C' range, system 1700 and 'MINERVA'
Each zone may be configured to produce either an Alann or power supply units. A power supply unit fault is signalled if the
Fault when a short circuit condition occurs by setting the external power supply to the module fails.
associated link.
The red LED is used to indicate an alarm condition.
The module works with the following end of line devices:
• M300 Conventional base 4k7 EOL resistor.
• M300 Schottky Diode Continuity base and
Active EOL unit. Overall Dimensions
• M300 Cl base and EOL unit. Length: 290mm
• M600/900 Universal Base Assembly 4k7 EOL Width: 88mm
resistor. Depth: 30mm
• M600 Diode Continuity base and Active EOL Weight: 150gm
unit.
En\'ironmental
A fault on any zone does not affect the operation of another
zone. Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C
[ non-condensing]

Registered Offi«: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 ZQE

EQUIPMENT: MDM521
Electrical Characteristics 6. LINK SETTINGS

Addressable circuit voltage: 28V d.c. LINK ZONE
3 2
External power supply: 24V d.c. [nominal]
20V d.c. [minimum] 5 3
32V d.c. [maximum] 7 4
Zone current: 20mA [typical] 9 5
quiescent per 20V loop
II 6
45mA [typical] alarm
13 7
per 20V loop
15 8
4-wirc output: +24V d.c.@ IA
· Zone +ve' to
'Zone -vc': 21.3V d.c. [typical] 7. ADDRESS SETTING
Alarm condition: 100 ohm< lk0
SI is a 4-way DIL switch which represents the four top
Detector wiring: o/c > 5k6 address switches of a normal 7-way address switch;
sic< 100 ohm ic SWIii = 8, SWl/2 = 16, SWl/3 = 32 and SWl/4 = 64.
Therefore, the first possible address of an MDM52 l is 8 and
EMC: Equals or exceeds the thereafter, addresses are selected as multiples of 8.
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1 8. ORDERING INFORMATION
MDM52 I Multi-circuit
Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements Conventional Detector Modu!e: 517.035.017
(89/336/EEC). M300 Mounting Base: 517.025.001
M300 CI Mounting Base: 517.025.005
M300 Schottky Diode Continuity Base: 517.025.007
5. CABLING
M600 Mounting Base: 517.050.001
Refer to Figs. I and 2. Cables arc to be selected in
accordance with Publication 0SA-02-DI and the M600 Continuity Diode Continuity Base: 517.050.007
requirements of the current issue of BS5839. Two pairs of Minerva Ancillary 3 Housing: 557.180.097
connection terminals [L+ and L-] arc provided on tem1inal
block TB 1. These tenninals are used for connecting the Minerva Ancillary 8 Housing: 557.180.096
module on to the addressable circuit. A maximum of one
Minerva Ancillaries Stacking Kit: 557.180.095
I .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any one
tenninal. A maximum of 160 20V detectors may be
connected to the 8 zones of the MDM521 module.
The external power supply is connected at terminal block
TB2 as follows:
• Positive [24V] JM/jm
• Negative [OVL] 20th April 1999
The detector circuits are connected at tenninal blocks TB3

to TB 10.
End-of-line resistors [4k7 ohm], Active EOL units or EOL
units arc required to be fitted at the end of the conventional
detector loop wiring dependant on the type of base used.

Registered Office: 19-21 ~nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

EQUIPMENT: MDM521
o D
~wsm
w ~ CJ>
0
z w m
0 > ~
N +
0
z~
Lil ~
0
wfEllil
w
>
co
m
~
N +
0
D 0
~w~
~ ~
D
==:-
OW ~ G ~
~ ~ ~
o~
N
~J J
0 ~o~
D 0
•wttill
W>
z w•
0
N~
G
m
~
w > w~
M
z
~
• m
D 0
ow
~o< n~ D
N~
~
•
~
J
~
~
J
0 o
0
u~
~ ~ w~ :;
D
N
2 ~ ~
0
0
~&o~D
o D0
D
1
0 0
<
w
~
0
Fig. I Multi-Circuit Detector Module PCB Layout

Registered om~ 19-21 IHnmark Strttt, Wokingham, lk-rks RG40 2QE

MDM521
0SA-02-D25
02 4/99
i;;~OVL
OUTPUT FOR ffi 0VL
11
4-WIRE DETECTORS~ +24V TB
i +24V
ZONES
rr:JTl-VE TB10
[J_LJ+VE
ZONE7
[JTl-VE 189
[lLJ+VE
4k7
EOL
ZONE6
-VE TBS
+VE
M600 SERIES M300SERIES

DETECTOR DETECTORS
ZONE 5
IT:lTl-VE T87
[jj.J+VE
4k7
EOL
M600 SERIES M300SERIES

DETECTOR DETECTORS
ZONE 3
[Jfl-VE TBS
[Jlj+VE
ZONE2
[Jfl-VE TB4
tolJ+VE
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
ZONE 1
LOOP + ITJn-VE IB3
RETURN [J_LJ+VE
O +24V
0 TB2
+
0 0VL
0 SWt
LOOP
+VE l/lN
-VE
-VE UOUT
TB1 D
+VE
M500/M900 SERIES ADDRESSABLE EXTERNAL 24V d.c.

DETECTOR CALLPOINT SUPPLY
Fig. 2 MDM521 Multi-Circuit Conventional Detector Module - Simplified Wiring Diagram
PAGE4of4
EQUIPMENT: IF500Ex

INTRINSICALLY SAFE ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULE

The Intrinsically Safe IF500Ex Intetfacc Module is designed for As stated previously, the IF500Ex Interface Module is fitted
use with MINERVA Analogue Addressable system and is used into a polyester box. The dimensions are given in Fig. I.
to monitor and signal the condition of two types of equipment;
Printed on the cover of the box are the designation of the unit
firstly, the CP540Ex Weatherproof Monitored Break Glass
and details of the BASEEFA certification [see Fig. I].
Callpoint, secondly, equipments described as 'simple
apparatus·. It is possible in conjunction with the CP540Ex to The box is to be surface mounted. Holes arc provided in the
signal two levels ofalann when operated [Evacuate or Alert]. A lower section of the box, access is obtained by removal of the
second CP540Ex may also be connected to operate as a slave lid. Holes are provided for 3 x 20mm cable entry glands. The
callpoint. unit is supplied with a single blanking plug which retains the
earth continuity/electronics mounting plate within the housing
The IF500Ex is contained in within a grey compression
during transit. The PCB is potted within a white moulded
moulded glass tilli.!d polyester box with 3 x 20mm cable gland
plastic tray to which is fitted the tenninal pressings which fonn
holes. The electronic components are mounted on a double
the interface between external wiring and the PCB. The potted
sided printed circuit board built into a potted module formed
tray is mounted on the earth continuity plate. Sandwiched
from a plastic moulding to which arc fitted the four connection
between the plate and the tray is a label showing the terminal
tcm1inals.
functions and the BASEEFA certification [see Fig. 2).
122 ZS 65
EB EB
INTERFACE MODULE
<G EEx la IIC T5. (@)

BASEEFA No.Ex89C2202
120 Leq=O Ceq=O
Umax=28V Wmax=1W
ELECTROSTATIC HAZARD -
0
CLEAN ONLY WITH DAMP CLOTH
IF500Ex
E9 E9
Fig. I IFSOOEx Dimensions


IFSOOEx
08A-02-D12
03 4/99
IFSOOEx INTERFACE MODULE 3. OPERATION

0 EEx ia IIC TS
The IF500Ex Interface Module, when addressed, signals the
condition of a CP540Ex Break Glass Callpoint or other
simple apparatus [i.e. a switch contact with a suitable
+Q <G@O+ resistor] connected to the ·cp• terminals. The module will
signal short and open circuits of the ·cp· terminals also
("') evacuate and alert conditions. The module instigates an
-,:,
r- interrupt procedure to the addressing sequence in the event
z
0 m
z
of an alarm condition.
0 Overall Dimensions
BASEEFA No.Ex89C2202 Height: 120mm
Leq=O Ceq=O Width: 122mm
Umax=28V Wmax=1W Depth: 95mm
Weight: 900g
Fig. 2 Label Details

Material
Housing: Glass filled Polyester
The loop address for the module is set on a 7-way DIL
switch mounted on the PCB [see Fig. 3]. The address Environmental
between I & 99 is set in binary code, switch 1 being the least
,ignlficant bit. Operating Temperature: -20°C to+ 70°C
Relative Humidity: upto 95% RH
[non-condensing]
IP Rating: IP65
•VE -v
0 Electrical Characteristics
[polarity conscious)
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
•VE -VE
(89/336/EEC).
Fig. 3 IFS00Ex Addressable Interface Module
Note: Address switches shown enlarged for clarity. 5. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
° CP540Ex
• Simple apparatus as defined in BS5345 Pt 4
Clause 6.3.3.
PAGE 2 of3
EQUIPMENT: IF500Ex
ISSUE No. &·DATE: 03 4/99 -
I F500Ex
INTERFACE
MODULE CPS40Ex CPS40Ex
BREAM GLASS BREAK GLASS
ADDRESSABLE
00
- 17 I
CALLPOll'IT CALLPOINT
-
r·-·-·-·-·-·7
j
t--t----il
I. S.
ZENER 3 i+ I
+
LI NE IN
2 2A
) 2
SPUR. SAFETY I '---._
:
4 3
i .BARRIER_ i
3A 3
+ CP (
I
SAFE ARE A HAZARDOUS AREA
Fig. 4 IFS00Ex Simplified \Viring Diagram
6. CABLING
CAUTION:
A simplified wiring diagram is shown in Fig. 4. APPARATUS WITH CLEAN RELAY
Sec I.S. System document 26A-02-D I for cable parameters. CONTACTS OPERATED FROM AN
INDEPENDENT SUPPLY OR FROM
One pair of 'LINE' and one pair of 'CP' terminals arc ANOTHER SAFETY BARRIER MAY NOT
provided. MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF BS5345:
PART 4 CLAUSE 5.
The 'LINE' should be connected, observing correct polarity,
to the cable from the l.S. zcncr safety barrier and the ·cp·
terminals to the CP540Ex or simple apparatus.
IF500Ex: 514-001-017
CP540Ex: 5I4-001-023
26A-02-Dl INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS FOR USE IN LOW VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS
APPLICATION AND DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-Dl I CP540Ex - INTRINSICALLY SAFE MONITORED BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT
CB/jm
19th April 1999
© .1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 3 of 3

Registered Office: 19-21 Di!nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

EQUIPMENT: IF520Ex

IF520Ex INTRINSICALLY SAFE ADDRESSABLE
HEAVY DUTY MANUAL PUSHBUTTON CALLPOINT
1. INTRODUCTION A retaining strap connects the front cover and mounting box.
The IF520Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable Heavy Duty The housing is constructed from LM 25 TF marine grade alloy.
Manual Pushbunon Callpoint is designed to monitor and signal Four 9mm mounting holes are provided on the mounting box.
the condition of the switch contact in the callpoint. The
IF520Ex is for use with the Minerva Series of Analogue
Addressable Controllers. 3. OPERATION
The Pushbutton is latching and requires resetting by the use of a
key. The IF520Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable Manual
Pushbutton Callpoint consists a switch which is operated by
The IF520Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable Heavy Duty lifting the hinged flap and pressing the button, once pressed the
Manual Pushbutton Callpoint meets the requirements of button remains in the latched position. When the addressable
CENELEC EN50020 and EEx ia IIC T5 BASEEFA Certificate interface is addressed by the controller, the condition of the
No. 89C2202 and as such is suitable for use in Zones I and 2. switch contact is signalled. The LED is pulsed each time the
IF520Ex callpoint is addressed, when the switch is operated the
LED remains ON until the pushbutton is reset.
The housing consists a front cover and a mounting box. The
outside of the front cover contains the pushbutton under a
liftablc hinged flap together with a glass window. The inside of
the front cover contains a high intensity red LED, switch contact
and terminal block.
The mounting box contains the addressable interface unit with
address switches. Cables may enter via cable gland entries at
the top and bottom of the box. The mounting box may only be
surface mounted.
4x 9mm HOLES
122 118 ·I
Fig. I


IF520Ex
08A-02-D31
02 8/99
ADDRESS
SWITCH
SECURING
STRAP
LOOP
,VE
0 0
Fig. 2
4. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Electromagnetic Compatibility

Overall Dimensions EMC: Equals or exceeds the
requirements of
Height: 122mm BS EN 50081-1 and
Width: 122mm BS EN 50082-1
Depth: 118mm
Weight: 2.5kg Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements
(89/336/EEC).
Material
Housing: Grade 316 ANC4B Stainless Steel
Finish: Red Epoxy paint 5. CABLING
Cables arc to be selected in accordar.cc with Publication
Environmental 26A-02-D I. Two connection tcnninals are provided on the
Operating Temperature: -20°C to +55°C PCB for connection to the addressable circuit. The
addressable interface will accept cables up to 2.5mm 2
Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH cables.
[ non-condensing]
Electrical Characteristics JM/jm
Addressable Circuit 30th July 1999

Voltage: 28V d.c.
Contact Rating: 2A
IP Rating: IP66 and IP67
PAGE2 of 3
EQUIPMENT: IF520Ex
ISSUE No. &·DATE: 02 8/99
I
I
I
I
I
I
AD DRESSABLE I
I
LOOP
I
I ADDRESSABLE
1.5. 4 '
I
INTERFACE
SHUNT
SPUR SAFETY I
BARRIER I
3
'
I
I
I LINE LINE
I -VE +VE
I
I --------- -- - -
I
I
I ---
I
I
I
Fig. 3 I.S. Connection

Registered Office: 19-21 ~nmark Strttt, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

EQUIPMENT: Ll520 Mk 2

LINE ISOLATOR MODULE Mk 2

The Ll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module is designed to be used on As stated, the LI520 Mk 2 Linc Isolator Module is fitted on to
addressable controller circuits and allows higher currents to be a custom-built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto a
passed down the line Tor circuits incorporating loop powered standard dual-gang MK box. The dimensions of this fascia
sounders. plate are given in Fig. I.
It monitors the line condition and, when detecting a short cir- The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes arc required to
cuit, will isolate the affected section whilst allowing the rest of be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
the addressing circuit to function normally. The purpose of the required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
Ll520 Mk 2 Linc Isolator is to ensure that, on a looped address- must be fitted when using PVC cable.
able system, no short circuit fault can disable more detection de-
vices than would be lost on a conventional non-addressable fire The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate with a pro-
circuit and to meet the requirements of BS5839 Pt I. tective plastic co\·er being fitted over the PCB leaving only the
connection terminals exposed.
The LI520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module is contained on a double-
sided printed circuit board [PCB] which is fitted to a custom- The PCB is fitted with a yellow LED which extends through
built fascia plate which fits onto a standard dual-gang MK box. the front of the fascia plate and provides indication of unit op-
This fascia plate is common to all modules of the M520 range eration.
with the exception of the MSOO Addrcssabie Detector Base and
the Callpoints. The LIS20 Mk 2 is designed for internal applica-
tions.
An Ll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module must be used between the-
oretical zones to ensure compliance with BSS839 Pt I .
@
0 • Ll520
@ 87
DEUICE ADDRESS/
ZONE NU1BER LABEL
DEUICE TYPE LABEL
'
11
I. 148 - - - - - - - - -
Fig. I Ll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module - Fascia Plate

Registerl.'d Office: 19-21 Denr;nark Strttt, Wokingham, B~rb RG40 2QE

Ll520 Mk 2
0BA-02-O20
03 4/99
TERMINAL BLOCK ;{)".
Fig. 2 Ll520 Mk 2 Facia Plate (back view( Showing Position of PCB

The Ll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module continuously moni- Addressable circuit voltage: 18V - 28V d.c.
tors the line voltage for line faults. On detecting the pres- (polarity conscious]
ence of a short circuit during the controller's bi phase address
period by looking for a resistance less than the design pa-
rameters, i.e. a resistance [typically 3k ohm or less] which Maximum Series Resistance
would give rise to a 5mA or more standing current in the (Isolator ON): 0.25 ohm
measurement period. If the line voltage falls by more than
~0%1 below that of the supply voltage during the refresh pe-
riod the module will trip. Current Loading:
In order to enable the isolator's use in a looped circuit, it is input Current: 3mA max [nonnal]
capable of passing current in both directions. The yellow 9mA max [tripped]
LED is ON when the module is isolating.
Refresh Drive: I Amax

Overall Dimensions Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMC: Equals or exceeds th~
Height: 87mm requirements of
Width: 148mm BS EN 50081-1 and
Depth: 14mm [sec Fig. I] BS EN 50082-1
Weight: IOOg
Material (89/336/EEC).
Housing: 'BAYBLEND.
[Polycarbonate/ABS alloy]
5. CABLING
Environmental Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication
05A-02-D I. Four pairs of connection terminals [L+ and L-]
Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C are provided on the terminal block. A maximum of one
Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH I .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any one
[non-condensing] terminal. As can be seen from Fig. 3, the terminals are divid-
ed into 'LINE IN' and 'LINE OUT' connections.
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: Ll520 Mk 2
One "LINE IN" and one "LINE OUT' pair would be used for
connecting the module on to the addressable circuit, the oth- CAUTION:
er pair being used to provide ·teed' or 'spur· circuit connec-
tions, as shown in Fig. 4. 'Teed' or 'spur' circuits may be DO NOT EXCEED THE CABLE
used to sirnplit)' installation cabling. Spur circuits are sus- PARAMETERS SPECIFIED IN THE MINERVA
ceptible to the affects of an open circuit, in that communica- DESIGN DOCUMENTS.
tions will be IL1st with all devices aticr the break. With a
looped circuit. a SINGLE open circuit will not disable any
device as there are always two communication paths.
For types of cable refer to 05A-02-D I - LOW VOLTAGE
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS : GENERAL DESIGN
Note: The 'spur' connection may be made from either
INFORMATION
of the LINE /Ps/OPs, but for ease of circuit
identification, the second /IP and the first O/P
should be used.
LI520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module: 545-001-007
Cover: 517-035-007
"
0
0
0
0
1,0
'
J
+
J
=
w
J
08A-02-CI
JM/jm
MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGE
ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
0
0
0
;l,
J
' r
-
J
19th April 1999
0 J
Fig. 3 Ll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module PCB
The maximum permissible series resistance of an addressa-

ble circuit is typically 75 ohm. Each LI520 Mk 2 Linc Iso-
lator Module has a series resistance of 0.25 ohm, thus to
calculate the maximum permissible distance to the physical-
ly remotest addressable point, use the following formula:
Length (111) = (75 - 0.25n + ohm/m ofselected cable) + 2
Where II is the number ofLI520 Mk 2 Modules.

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Stn,d, Wokinghllm, Berks RG40 2QE

Ll520 Mk 2
0SA-02-D20
03 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN. f - - - - - - - - - - - - -......- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LOOP
M500 SERIES
DETECTOR
+>---- r - - - - - . - ~ r - - - - - - -
LOOP + ~ - + ~ -
FOR SPUR
CIRCUITS
Fig. 4 LI520 Mk 2 Simplified Wiring Diagram
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP FOR INTRUDER
CONTROLLER SPUR
RETURN -1-------------.....,.-------++-----------
LOOP
+f-----------~--------++-------,
MSOOSEAIES
DETECTOR
+f---, r - - - - - o - - - , - - - - - - - ~
•• 1
LOOP + ~ - + ~ -
Ll520 Mk 2 LINE
ISOLATOR
MODULE
Fig. S LIS20 Mk 2 Simplified Wiring Diagram For Intruder Use

Note:
1) This configuration isolates the spur but does not isolate the loop.
2) This configuration is for use with the MINERVA Fire & Security Controller where the spur is used
for intruder ancillaries only.
PAGE 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT: Ll530Ex

Ll530Ex INTRINSICALLY SAFE LINE ISOLATOR MODULE

The LI530Ex Line Isolator Module is designed to be used with As stated previously. the Ll530Ex Line rsolator Module is
the MINERVA Analogue Addressable systems in Hazardous fitted
Areas. It monitors the line condition and when detecting a short
circuit, will isolate the affected section whilst allowing the rest into a polyester box. The dimensions are given in Fig.
I. Printed on the cover of the box are designation of the unit
of the addressable circuit to function nonnally. The purpose of
and details of the BASEEFA certification [sec Fig. I].
the Ll530Ex Line Isolator is to restrict the number of detectors
rendered inoperative by a line fault to a minimum, comparative The box is to be surface mounted. Mounting holes arc pro\·idcd
to those which would be lost in a conventional zonal system, and in the lower section of the box to which access is obtained by
to comply with BS5389 Pt. I. removal of the lid. Holes are provided for 3 x 20mm cable entry
glands. The unit is supplied with a single blanking plug which
The Ll530Ex Linc Isolator is contained within a grey
retains the earth continuity/electronics mounting plate \\·ithin
compression moulded glass filled polyester box with 3 x 20mm
cable gland holes. The electronic components are mounted on a the housing during transit.
double sided printed circuit board built into a potted module The PCB is potted within a white moulded plastic tray to which
formed from a plastic moulding which contains the four are mounted the tenninal pressings which form part of the
connection terminals interface between the loop wiring and the PCB. The potted tray
is mounted on to the earth continuity plate. Sandwiched
between the plate and tray is a label which contains details of
the terminal functions and BASEEFA certification [see Fig. 2].
122 25 65
';
EB EB
LINE ISOLATOR MODULE
<G) EEx ia IIC TS (@)

BASEEFA No.Ex89C2201
120 Leq=O Ceq=O
Umax=28V Wmax=1W
ELECTROSTATIC HAZARD -
0
CLEAN ONLY WITH DAMP CLOTH
Ll530Ex
(±) (±)
Fig. 1 LI530Ex Dimensions

Registered Office; 19-21 Denmark Strttt. Wokingh:.1m, lkrks RG40 ZQE
A -tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

Ll530Ex
0SA-02-D5
02 4/99
Material
LI 5 3OEx LINE !SOI.ATOR MODULE Housing: Glass filled Polyester
EEx la IIC TS
0 <&>@ Environmental
+Q O+ Operating Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
-20"C to + 70·'C
up to 95% RH
r- [non-condensing]
~
C
-<
o r-
m
z
z IP Ra1ing: IP65
Electrica I Characteristics
,Q Q, Addressable circuit voltage: 28V d.c.
BASEEFA No. Ex89C22O1 Maximum Series Resistance
Leq=O Ceq=O
[isolator ON]: 1.6 ohms
Umax=28V Wmax=1W Current Loading
Measurement Period: <I0µA
Address Period: <I0µA
Fig. 2 Label Details Refresh Period: <2mA
3. OPERATION Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMC: Equals or exceeds the requirements of
\he ll530Ex Linc Isolator Module detects the presence ofa
short circuit during the controllers biphase address period by BS EN 50081-1 and
looking for a resistance which would give rise to a 5mA or BS EN 50082-1
more standing currcm in the measurement period. The
isolator docs not trip below a standing current of 5mA. In
order to enable the isolators use in a looped circuit, it is
Note: The above standards fulfill the requirements of
capable of passing current in both directions.
the the European Directive for EMC (8913361
EEC).
5. 5. CABLING
O\'crall Dimensions
Fig. 3 shows a simplified wiring diagram.
Height: 120mm
Sec LS. Systems documentation 26A-02-DI for cable pa-·
Width: 122mm
rameters.
Depth· 95mm
Although the two pairs oftenninal are labelled 'LINE IN'
Weight: 900g and 'L[NE OUT' the unit is bi-directional. With 'T' or
'Spur' circuits the main loop wiring may be connected to ei-
ther the 'LINE rN' or 'LINE OUT' terminals. The spur cir-
cuit is then connected to the unused pair.
Ll530Ex: 545-001-003
7. 7. RELATED PUBLICATIONS
26A-02-DI INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS FOR USE IN LOW VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS -
APPLICATIONAND DESIGN INFORMATION
JM/jm
20th April I 999
PAGE 2 of 3
EQUIPMENT: Ll530Ex
PUBLICATION:
0SA-02-O5
ISSUE No. & DATE:
02 4/99
SAFE AR EA HAZARDOUS AREA

L l530Ex
!
I i
i+ +i ·+
I
i -i L
i
! I i
i._ ·-·-·-·_j
LOOP
ItffRINSICALLV SAFE
ADDRESSABLE DETECTORS
(Map SOOEx RANGE)
LIS30Ex
r----·-·-·7
i
__tj
!
-,
I i
i _________ _j
r
i
L___..!J
I SPUR
-!
!
I
Fig. 3 Ll530Ex Simplified Wiring Diagram

Registered Orne~: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

EQUIPMENT: LPBB521

LPBB521 LINE POWERED ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER
PRODUCT APPLICATION & SYSTEM DESIGN
1. INTRODUCTION LPBB52 Is and LPS520 Loop Powered Sounder modules may

both be used on the same loop.
The LPBB52 l Line Powered Addressable Sounder is designed
to be driven from a MINERVA Analogue Addressable control- A maximum of 24 sounders may be connected per loop.
ler via the addressable loop. The sounder is the low frequency
[800-950Hz] Hosiden Besson Banshee version. The sounder 2. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
output is continuous [fast sweep 9 times/sec], but may be
pulsed under control of the Minerva. The LPBB52 l electronics arc mounted in a standard Besson
Banshee housing. The dimensions are given in Fig. 1.
Note: The base contains mounting holes for fixing onto standard
electrical conduit boxes.
1) For a MINERVA 8 or 16E, the Main Processor
must be Issue 9 or above and used in conjunction
with a Loop Power Insertion Module 3. OPERATION
2) For a MINERVA 80, the Main Processor may be
The LP8852 I activates the sounder on receipt of a command
any issue, used in conjunction with ALXM-LP,
from the controller and keeps the sounder activated until a
Motherboard-LP and DCPM-LP. The DCPM-LP
command is received from the controller to deactivate the
is fitted to the Motherboard.
sounder.
3) If morethan 80 sounders are used on a MINER-
The LPBB docs not monitor the sounder circuit, but monitors
VA 80 an LP-Power Box containing an additional
the operated condition of the module. The LPBB draws power
ACPM [no batteries] is required.
from the addressable loop during the refresh period.
4) L/520 Mk2 Line Isolators must be used on all ad-
dressable loops used for line powered sounders.
The LPBB52I is contained on a double sided PCB which is fit- Overall Dimensions
ted to the banshee housing. Two pairs of LINE +ve and LINE Sec Fig.
-vc terminals arc exposed. Two Terminals, 24V and 0V allow
the sounder to be operated from an external source. Two fly- Weight: IOOg
ing leads connect the LPBBs output to the banshee sounder.
92
:,-;~~~~·
i( [ ~Iii )'}) ;\;
-~...,--
:-.-,_--=--'--·
;/)/ ,'
·. ----
------------=-----
·::~--~;.:-~'
_____
60
,,
Fig. I Loop Powered Addressable Sounder - Overall Dimensions

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmuk Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

LPBB521
0SA-02-O22
04 4/99
Environmental
Operating Temperature; -20°C to+ 70°C
[non-condensing]
-VE§][§·VE
+VE
TB2 TB1
+VE
C)
OV(PWR) ---- 24V(PWR)
Sound Output: up to 100 dB[AJ at I metre
800 to 950 Hz 00
Addressable Circuit Voltage: 18V - 28V d.c.
Refresh Input Current: l 7mA max when active
Quiescent Current: 0.52mA
5. CABLING
Cables arc to be selected in accordance with Publication sw1
05A-02-D I. Two pairs of connection terminals (L+ and L-]
arc provided on the terminal block. A maximum of one Fig. 2 LPBB521 Line Powered Sounder PCB
I .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any one Note: Address switch S\VJ shown enlarged for clarity.
terminal.
6. LOOP POWERED SOUNDERS MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION

Definition
An LPU is a Loop Power Unit composed as follows:
I LPBB52 I ~ I LPU
I LPS520 ~ 6 LPU [max]
Maximum number of LPUs·

Per Loop: 24 LPIJ [i.e. 24 LPBBs or 4 LPS or combinations]
Per Minerva 8: 24 LPU
Per Minerva I6E: 48 LPU
Per Minerva 80: 80 LPU - with one ACPM
200 LPU - with 2 ACPMs [one ACPM with batteries and one without]
Maximum loop length

I Km - with evenly distributed LPBBs and LPS modules and up to 7 Linc Isolator modules [ll520 Mk ll].
An example of the maximum length ofa fully loaded loop with 4 LPS modules evenly distributed is:
200m
MINERVA
i--200m
_ _ _ LPSl---200_m_ _
PAGE 2 of 3
EQUIPMENT: LPBB521
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN - l-----------------,1------------------~
LOOP
+f------------------1---------------
MSOOSERIES LPBB521 LINE POWERED MSOO
DETECTOR ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER SERIES
DETECTOR
LOOP + ~ -
Fig. 3 LPBBS21 Loop Powered Sounder- Simplified Wiring Diagram
LPBB521 Line Powered Sounder: 577-001-026
ALXM-LP: 557-180-203
Motherboard-LP: 557-180-204
DCPM-LP: 557-180-205
08A-02-D2 I LINE ISOLATOR MODULE Mk 2 - PRODUCT APPLICATION & SYSTEM DESIGN
FS-2.2.32.16 LOOP POWER INSERTION MODULE -TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
JM/jm
19th April 1999

Registered Office: 19--21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2Q[

LPBD520
-···-
-···-TJHORN
-···-
EQUIPMENT:

LPBD520 LOOP POWERED BEAM DETECTOR INTERFACE MODULE

The LPBD520 Loop Powered Beam Detector Interface Module The LPBD520 Loop Powered Beam Detector Interface
is designed to interface a FIRERAY 2000 Beam Detector to the Module may be fitted on to a custom-built fascia plate designed
Minerva Analogue Addressable Loop [it must not be used with to be mounted onto a standard dual-gang backbox with
other types of beam detector]. The LPBD520 monitors the Fire B.E.S.A. fittings
and Fault contacts and also monitors for open and short circuits
on the connections between the interface and the beam detector. The dimensions of the fascia plate are given in Fig. I.
The LPBD520 Loop Powered Beam Detector Interface Module The backbox is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
is contained on a double sided printed Circuit board [PCB] be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
which is fitted into a custom built fascia plate with a protective required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
cover being fitted over the PCB, leaving only the connection must be fitted when using PVC cable.
terminals exposed. The fascia plate is then fitted onto a standard The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate with a
dual-gang back box with B.E.S.A. fittings. protective plastic cover being fitted over the PCB leaving only
The LPBD520 Module may be used to power the complete the connection tenninals exposed.
FIRERAY 2000 system [via the loop], or just the Control and The PCB is fitted with a bi-colour [yellow/red] LED which
Receiver units in which case a second LPBD520 is required to extends through the front of the fascia plate and provides
power the Transmitter unit. The second LPBD520 must be indication of the beam detector's condition.
configured in "CONSYS' (version 10 or laterJ to the
"SYSOOO Dummy Group'. The use of this option will help
reduce long cable runs.
Bl-COLOUR LED
DEVICE ADDRESS
ffi
2
5
-----1---1--
LPBD520
ZONE NUMBER LABEL
I----+-- DEVICE TYPE LABEL
@ @ 87
====THORN
ijjji SECURITY
Fig. I
148
----·' i
LPBDS20 Loop Powered Beam Detector Interface Module - Fascia Plate

Registered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TW16 SOB
A "t:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY
LPBD520
OBA-02-D26
03 2/98
ADORES
SWITCH
0
Fig. 2
3. OPERATION Environmental
The LPBD520 Beam Detector Interface Module is capable Operating Temperature: -20°C to+70°C
of identifying and signalling to the controller the following Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH
conditions:
[non-condensing]
• Fire alann
• Fault Electrical Characteristics
• Open circuit/Short circuit between the Addressable circuit voltage: 28V d.c.
interface and beam detector
The bi-colour LED indicates the status of the FIRE RAY Current consumption:
2000. Red indicates that the alam1 relay has been operated
and is controlled by the Minerva. The red LED is powered Quiescent: l 2mA
during the refresh period and will appear to be on Alarm: 20mA
continuously whilst in the alarm condition. Yellow
indicates that the fault relay has been operated and will flash
when the device is polled. If used only to power a Tx unit:
Quiescent: 5mA
Alarm: 5mA
4. FIRERAY 2000
The FIRERAY .2000 must be set to 'Auto Reset' ic the alam,
condition latches on the· Minerva and is cleared by a reset.
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1.
O,·erall Dimensions
Height: 87mm of the the European Directive for EMC
(89/336/EEC).
Width: 148mm
Depth: 14mm
Weight: IOOg
Material
Housing: BAYBLEND" [Polycarbonate
ABS alloy]
PAGE 2 of 5
_,,._ UHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT:
PUBLICATION:
LPBD520
0BA-02-D26
6. CABLING Maximum loop length
Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication I Km - with evenly distributed LPBD520s ..
0SA-02-D I and the requirements of the current issue of An example of the maximum length of a fully loaded loop
8S5839. Two pairs of connection tcnninals [L+ and L-] are with 12 modules cYenly distributed is:
provided on the terminal block. These terminals are used for
conncctin1! the module on to the addressable circuit. /\
maximum~of one l.5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be
76.9m 76.9m
connected at any one terminal. LPBD
MINERVA } MAAOF8
The LPBD520 connections are as follows: FURTHER
IDENTICAL
76.9m 76.9m SECTIONS
PIN CONNECTION
Fault N/0
2 ov
3 +24V
4 Alarm Common
5 Alarm N/0
6
7
8
Not Connected
L-
L+
;=
!,:
B
8022 B
9 L- =
10 L+ == ;;;
== ,-.. ~
'=
Fig. 5 shows the various methods of powering the FIRERAY ==
2000 transmitter. =
== @]: G
~.
1
6.1 FIRERAY RECEIVER CABLING

If the FIRER.AV receiver is mounted over 3 metres from the
S1
I
controller. then MICC cable must be used, connected as
close to the receiver as possible. Fig. 3 LPBD520 Loop Powered Beam Detector
Module Interface PCB
7. LOOP POWERED BEAM

DETECTORS MAXIMUM 8. ORDERING INFORMATION
CONFIGURATION LPBD520: 557.180.217
Definition FIRERAY 2000: 516.015.006
I LPBD 520 - 2 LPU JL/jm
\0th February 1998
Maximum number of LPUs
Per Loop: 24 LPU [i.e. 12 LPBDs]
Per Minerva I6E: 48 LPU
200 LPU - with 2 ACPMs
[one ACPM with batteries
and one without]

Registered Office: Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on~Thames Middlesex TW16 508

LPBD520
0BA-02-D26
03 2/98
LPB0520 (SUPPLYING TRANSMITTER ONLY) LPBD520
0 OJ 0
Gl
~ G IT]~ C
rn
~ G
1K0
-c=1
ll 11 TIT
- ~ 181
II II II II II II II II II II
-
/ ' '
,J
L+]c:j
I
II L-
L+
' \
Tx UNIT
NOTE: IF AN LPBDS20 IS USED TO POWER THE TRANSMITTER SEPARATELY,

A 1K0 1% RESISTOR IS TO B E PLACED ACROSS THE ALARM COMMON
ANO OV TERMINALS. DOTIE D LINES INDICATE NOT CONNECTED If
SECOND LPBD520 IS USED TO POWER THE TRANSMITTER.
SIGNAL LEVEL OFF ON
+VRx
0
LEDJ Go LE02
[Q:=J
Test/Reset
ALARM
NO
SIG Rx EOL [ NC I-
1K51%
OVRx
COMM
NO
EOL [ NC
1K81%
TEST
METER-VE
COMM 1--~ WIRE
FAULT
LINK
TEST
METER+VE
LINKS I FS1100mA
I
EXTERNAL
RESET
§ •VE
-i-
---
TX UNIT
-VE -·
ARERAY 2000 PCB
Fig. 4 LPBD520 Simplified Wiring Diagram
PAGE 4of 5
LPBD520
-···-lJHORN
-···- EQUIPMENT:
LOOP ..,.. _ _~1~0~0m"-"m~a~x~.----

POWERED
CONTROLLER
ADDRESSABLE LOOP
Tx
LPBO I - - - - - J F I R E R A , 1 - - - - - - - - - - '
520 2000
A
LOOP
POWERED
CONTROLLER
ADDRESSABLE LOOP
Tx
LPBD 1 - - - - FIRERA LPBD

520 2000 520
B
LOOP
POWERED
CONTROLLER
ADDRESSABLE LOOP
ADDRESSABLE LOOP
. ---
- 9 .. - -~~
-. - --. ----.
--- - - . - .
Tx
-
I LPBO I
520 I
FIRERA,
2000
I LPBD I
I 520
Fig. 5 FIRERAY 2000 connections

Note: If used in configuration 'B', a maximum of6 FIRERAY 2000s may be used.

Registered Office; Security House The Summit Hanworth Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TW16 SOB
A 'l:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

EQUIPMENT: LPS520

LPS520 LINE POWERED SOUNDER MODULE

The LPS520 line Powered Sounder module is designed for use As stated, the LPS520 line Powered Sounder module is fitted
with a MINERVA Analogue Addressable controller to extract into a custom-built fascia is contained on a double sided printed
power from the addressable loop during the refresh phase, and circuit board [PCB] which is fitted into a custom built fascia
on a command signalled from the controller, drive a group ofup plate designed to be mounted onto a standard dual-gang MK
to six electronic sounders. The module monitors the sounder box. The dimensions of the facia plate are given in Fig. I.
loop for open and short circuits
The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
The LPS520 Line Powered Sounder module is contained on a be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
double sided printed circuit board [PCB] which is fitted custom required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
built fascia plate with a protective cover being fitted over the must be fitted when using PVC cable.
PCB, leaving only the connection terminals exposed. The fas-
The PCB is mounted on the rear of the facia plate with a pro-
cia plate is then fitted onto a standard dual-gang backbox with
tective plastic cover being fitted over the PCB leaving only the
B.E.S.A. fittings. The LPS520 is designed for internal applica-
connection terminals exposed.
tions.
front of the facia plate and provides indication of unit opera-
Note: tion.
1) For a MINERVA 8 or 16E, the Main Processor
must be Issue 9 or above and used in conjunction 3. OPERATION
with a Loop Power Insertion Module
The LPS520 Line Powered Sounder module activates up to six
2) For a MINERVA 80, the Main Processor may be external electronic sounders in response to a command signal
any issue, used in conjunction with ALXM-LP; from the controller. The module is capable of monitoring and
Motherboard-LP and DCPM-LP The DCPM-LP is signalling the following conditions when the sounder circuit is
fitted to the Motherboard. monitored via a 22k EOL resistor.
3) If more than 80 sounders are used on a MINERVA • Normal condition.
80 an LP-Power Box containing an additional
ACPM [no batteries] is required. • Open er short circuit on the sounder circuit.
- -
OEUICE ADDRESS/
(© LPS520
ZONE NU'18ER LABEL
DEVICE TYPE LABEL
0
@ @ 87
' ~
I. 148 . I-
'
14
Fig. I LPS520 Line Powered Sounder Module - Fascia Plate


LPS52Q.
0SA-02-D19
03 4/99
Fig. 2 LPS520 Fascia Plate (back view) Showing Position of PCB
• Power failure to the sounders. 5. CABLING

• Sounders operating correctly.
0SA-02-Dl and the requirements of the current issue of
The red LED is on when the sounders are operated. 8S5839. Three pairs ofconnection terminals (L+ and L-) are
provided on the tenninal block. These tenninals are used for
connecting the module on to the addressable circuit. This
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION circuit will permit 'teed' or 'spur' junctions which may be
used to simplify the installation cabling. A maximum of one
Overall Dimensions
I .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any one
Height: 87mm terminal. The third pair of L+ and L- tenninals may be used
to spur the addressable circuit cabling.
Width: 148mm
Depth: 14mm [sec Fig. I) Cables for the sounder circuit must comply with those spec-
ified in BS5839 Part I
Weight: IOOgm
Note: The 'spur' connection may be made from any of

Material the three LINE 1/Ps, but for ease of circuit iden-
Housing: 'BAYBLEND' [Polycarbonate tification, the centre /IP should be used.
/ABS alloy]
Environmental
[non-condensing]
+
(polarity conscious] ...J
Sounder wiring: o/c > I OOk ohm

sic< 2k ohm
maximum sounder cable
length using l .5mm 2 cable
is 500m
ON ·
i;ii;i;ii;ii;i~i;i
1234567
Fig. 3 LPS520 Line Powered Sounder Module
PAGE 2 of 4
EQUIPMENT: LPS520
6. LOOP POWERED SOUNDERS MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION

Definition
I LPBB52 I - I LPU
I LPS520 - 6 LPU [max)
Maximum number of LPUs

Per Loop: 24 LPU [i.e. 24 LPBBs or 4 LPS or combinations]
Per Minerva I 6E: 48 LPU
200 LPU - with 2 ACPMs [one ACPM with batteries and one without]
Maximum loop length

I Km - with evenly distributed LPBBs and LPS modules and up to 7 Linc Isolator modules [U520 Mk II].
An example of the maximum length ofa fully loaded loop with 4 LPS modules evenly distributed is:
200m 200m
MINERVA 200m
200m 200m
ADDRESSABLE
FOR
LOOP
SPUR
CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT
RETURN - 1-----------------t-------++-------------~
LOOP
+f-----------------,>---------1--1--------
MSOOSERIES LPS520 LINE POWERED
DETECTOR SOUNDER MODULE
+f-----, r--------~------~
LOOP .~ -
22k
EOL
NOTE:
1. THE MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH USING 1.Sm' CABLE IS soom.
2. A MAXIMUM OF SIX SOUNDERS PER LPS520.
Fig. 4 LPS520 Simplified Wiring Diagram

Registered Office: 19-ZI Denmark Strttt, Wokingham, Berk§ R~O ZQE
A "tqc::a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

LPS520
OSA-02-D19
03 4/99
LPS520 Line Powered
Sounder Module: 577--001-027
0SA-02-DI RM520 - RELAY MODULE- PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D2 DM520 - CONVENTIONAL DETECTOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-02-D3 CM520 - CONTACT MONITORING MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-02'D4 LI520 - LINE ISOLATOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D5 LI530Ex - INTRINSICALLY SAFE LINE ISOLATOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION
& DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D6 SM520 - SOUNDER DRIVER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D7 SB520 - SOUNDER BOOSTER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-02-D8 CP510 - SLAVE CALLPOINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-D9 CP520 - MASTER BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
M.~-02-DI0 CP530 - WEATHERPROOF MASTER BREAK GLASS CALL POINT - PRODUCT APPLICATION
0SA-02-D 11 CP540Ex - WEATHERPROOF MONITORED BREAK GLASS CALLPOINT - PRODUCT
08A-02-Dl2 INTRINSICALLY SAFE ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION
08A-02-Dl3 AM52 I - ASPIRATING INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN
INFORMATION
08A-02-Dl4 VM520 VOICE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
0SA-02-D15 SU521 SHOP INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-Dl6 TM520 TIMER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-Dl7 SD520 SMOKE DAMPER MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-Dl8 PI52 I PLANT INTERFACE MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D20 LI520 Mk 2 LINE ISOLATOR MODULE - PRODUCT APPLICATION & DESIGN INFORMATION
08A-02-D22 LPBB52 I LINE POWERED ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER - PRODUCT APPLICATION
0SA-02-1 I 520 SERIES - INSTALLATION
08A-02-CI 520 SERIES - COMMISSIONING
FS-2.2.32.16 LOOP POWER INSERTION MODULE - TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
JM/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE4of4
EQUIPMENT: Pl521
ISSUE No. & DATE:
04 4/99

Pl521 ADDRESSABLE PLANT INTERFACE UNIT

1. INTRODUCTION 3. OPERATION
The Pl52 I Plant Interface Unit is designed to provide the inputs The Pl52 I Plant Interface Unit relays are controlled by
and output required to monitor and control plant machinery. commands signalled from the controller.
The Pl52 I provides multiple volt-free DPDT changeover relay
contacts [rated 240V @ SA) which are controlled from the
control unit via the addressable loop and to monitor multiple 3.1 RELAY OUTPUTS
external relay contacts.
The relay outputs are monitored via the second pole of the
The PI52 l is produced in one version which is link configurable relay, these outputs only become valid after the refresh period
to give the following configurations, 2 inputs/2 outputs, of an address poll, therefore the monitored value is only valid
4 inputs/4 outputs and 6 inputs/6 outputs. The three versions after a second poll of the address. The outputs are also
use the following number of loop addresses: controlled by using the Minerva keypad via the addressable
loop. the keypad can be used to force the outputs LOW, HIGH
VERSION NO. ADDRESSES MAX No./LOOP or AUTO. The keypad may also be used to read the status of
P152 l/2 4 24 the relay.
Pl52 l/4 8 12
Pl52 l/6 12 8 3.2 RELAY INPUTS
The relay inputs are monitored using external circuits with two
The board is the same for all versions, the options being set via contacts per circuit. The relays are monitored in the condition
two headers. current slot and the resultant current will show the state of the
contacts. Only NORMALLY CLOSED contacts arc
The PI52 I is contained on a double sided printed circuit board monitored.
[PCB).
Fig. I shows the external contact monitoring circuit.
An external 24V d.c. is required to power the relays.
910A 1k8
2. MOUNTING DETAILS
The Pl52 I may be mounted in a number of ways:
Up to 4 Pl52 l PCBs may be mounted on a back plate and fitted RELAY CONTACT 1 AELAYCONTACT2
to a MINERVA 8 Ancillary Housing.
470A
One Pl52 I PCB may be fitted to a MINERVA 3 Ancillary EOL
Housing.
The dimensions of the MINERVA Ancillary Housings are given
in Figs. 2 and 4.
fig. I Pl52 I Plant Interface Module - External Circuit
DIN rail mounted in any box suitable for the application.
WARNING:
IF MOUNTING IN AN ADDRESSABLE MINERVA

ANCILLARY BACKBOX OR METAL BOX, THE
BOX MUST BE EARTHED.

Registered Office: 19-21 De-nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

Pl521
08A-02-D18
04 4/99
340
173 62
i.-
0
'
22
'
6mm
290
0
., •
37
_!_
20 /
------------------ '
' L___$g_(Q)_o_(Q)_(Q)_(Q)_(Q)_(Q)_o_(Q)______JE
Fig. 2 ·MINERVA' Ancillary Housing 3 - Overall and Fixing Dimensions
CHASSIS PLATE
3x520's EARTH STUD

POSITIONS 521 POSITION
Fig. 3 'MINERVA' Ancillary Housing 3 - PCB Location
PAGE 2 of6
EQUIPMENT: Pl521
04 4/99
ISSUE No. & DATE:
440
220
~
fE5l
t3:=Sdla.
fE5l
9.5 dia.
320
200
- ... -- - --- -·-

i
-- . --- t}- ,.,
6.4 DIA.
--------- ----f-.--. -
l
ss
ss
fE5l fE5l
100 I 100
20
140
•
I
)
0
ON TOP ONLY ON TOP ONLY
Fig. 4 "MINERVA' Ancillary Housing 8 - Overall and Fixing Dimensions
CHASSIS PLATE
FIXING SCREW CHASSIS PLATE
E3 E3
TYPICAL POSITION
OF 521 MODULE
(1 PER ROW) ~~-~~:~---~-7.,
_____ J
TYPICAL POSITIONS
OF 520 MODULES
{4 PERROW) COVER
EARTH
TRANSIT SCREW CHASSIS Pt.ATE

EARTH
Fig. 5 'MINERVA' Ancillary Housing 8 - Chassis Plate


Pl521
08A-02-D18
04 4/99
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 6. MAINS SWITCHING

Overall Dimensions If the unit is used to switch mains [LV] controlling other
Length: 245mm equipments, to comply with the Low Voltage Directive (73/
23/EEC (UK Regulatory Statutory Instrument 1994/3260)],
Width: 72mm then the mains to be switched must comply with the
Depth: 15mm following. The equipment to be switched must have an
isolation protection device. which may be one of the
Weight: 230gm
following types:
Environmental • The plug on the po\\"er supply cable.
Operating Temperature: -20°C to+ 70°C • An appliance coupler.

Relative Humidity; up to 95% RH • Isolating switch.
[non-condensing] • Circuit-breaker.
Electrical characteristics • Any equivalent device offering a degree of

safety equal to the above.
Note: Some disconnect devices complying with /EC
1058-1 are examples of those considered to
Relay contacts: SA@ 240V a.c. comply with the above requirements.
Curn~cnt consumption:
The mains for the equipment must also have an overcurrent
Quiescent: 0.5mA protection device to comply \vith IEE Regulations [16th
Alarm: 0.5mA Edition Pt. 4 Ch. 13].
A Contact Rating label [supplied] must be affixed to the
24V load: housing adjacent the PCB.
Quicsccn1: 0.0mA A Mains Supply Warning label [supplied] must be affixed to
Alarm: 40mA per operated the outside of the housing cover.
relay A Mains Isolator Table label [supplied] must be affixed in a
prominent visible position inside the housing and be filled
Electromagnetic Compatibility in by the Commissioning Engineer. The label indicates the
location of the isolator serving the relevant relay circuit and
should be completed using a marker pen RSl87-I 162 or
requirements of equivalent.
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements PI52 I Plant Interface Module: 546.004.006
(89/336/EECJ. Minerva Ancillary Housing - 8: 557. 180.096
Minerva Ancillary Housing - 3: 557.180.097
Din Rail Mounting Kit: 547.004.001
5. CABLING
Contact Rating Lable:
Addressable loop cables arc to be selected in accordance Isolation Table: 120.247.650
with Publication 0SA-02-D I. Two pairs of connection
Mains Supply Flash: 120.247.648
terminals [L+ and L-] are provided on the terminal block.
A maximum of one l.5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be
connected at any one tenninal.
PAGE 4 of6
EQUIPMENT: Pl521
ISSUE No. & DATE:
04 4/99
OUT 1 TB9
,,r
N
0
OUT 2TB10
-uo
N IC:Jz
,,r w IC:]
w "'IC] ~
0 m IC:]
mu
... IC:]
~
OUT 3TB11
,,r
~
OUT 4TB14
,,
r
m
0
... :u~
~ N[l:J
w{U en
"'10 w
OUT 5Te12 Cl'I 11:J
~o·
z m10
0 ,,r ... IC:]
m m <
0
~ m
<
m
~ •;;;
OUT 6 T813
LINE
ii
Fig. 6 Pl521 Plant Interface Unit PCB

Note: Header Link H1 in the Park position disables S2 and Header Link H2 in the park position disables S3.

Registt'red Office: 19-21 lffnmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A tqc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

Pl521
OSA-02-D18
04 4/99
470R 1%
EOL
CONTACT~
VALVE 2 ,fl
OPEN 1k81,!_
VALVE , If
CLOSED 910A ll_ WATER
PUMP
CONTACT
1
OAIVE~--f- AC SUPPLY
- - :,;c~~
'ii!:;
:,;~
c~
-
:,;~
c~
'ii;
-mm
Ox
c~
-mm
Ox
c~
=u;
'n ~ 'ii~
"'z "'z "'z ~;; "'z
ADDRESSABLE ~~
~~ 3~ ~~
LOOP
CONTROLLER
~- -- ~-
~r
-~ --
RETURN - f--------------t--t---t--t--+++-+-+-f-HH--+--+-+-+-++--------~
LOOP
+ f---------- 1--1---t-+---t--;---;-1--1--t-+-r--t-+-i-t-r-t-1---~
MSOOSERIES
DETECTOR
+f---~11
LI---~
, ~· ,z zz l,,z
5on 5n'ilaoin0o00in0
z
r:-t-!
-
~
~
l]-
- i-- ,- - I
~ .___ ~I~ . _ _ I ~
TB13 T812 TB14 TBlt TB10 TB9
LOOP + -
!:iilres T84 [ ~TB3 TB2 TB1
- '
-f-----~ L - - - - - - j - + - J ~---<-+----+ll---++-----.-+t-_-----J -
- -
Pl521 PLANT
INTERFACE
MODULE
d.cl
EXTERNAL 24V
POWER SUPPLY I
Fig. 7 Pl52I Simplified Wiring Diagram
VOLUME I SA MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
JM/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE6of6
EQUIPMENT: RM520

RM520 ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE

The RM520 Relay Module is designed to provide one volt-free As stated, the RM520 Relay Module is fitted in to a custom-
changeover relay contact derived from a latching relay which is built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto a standard dual-
controlled by a command signalled from the control unit via the gang MK box. The dimensions of this facia plate are given in
addressable circuit. Fig. I.
The RM520 Relay Module is contained on a double sided The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
printed Circuit board [PCB] which is fitted into a custom built be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
fascia plate. The fascia plate is then fitted onto a standard dual- required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
gang MK box. The RM520 is designed for internal applications. must be fitted when using PVC cable.
The PCB is mounted on the rear of the facia plate with a
protective plastic cover being fitted over the PCB leaving only
WARNING: the connection terminals exposed.
THE MODULE MUST NOT BE USED TO front of the facia plate and provides indication of unit
SWITCH MAINS VOLTAGES. operation.
DEVICE ADDRESS/
ZONE NU1BER LABEL
RM52O --1--- DEVI CE TYPE LABEL
0
@ @ 87
Fig. I RM520 Relay Module - Fascia Plate

Rl.'gistered Officl.': 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A "tqc:a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

RM520
08A-02-D1
03 04/99
Fig. 2 RM520 Fascia Plate fback view) showing position of PCB
3. OPERATION Environmental
The RM520 Relay Module relay contact is controlled by Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C
commands signalled from the controller. The state of the Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH
~lay [activated or unactivated] is reported to the controller. non-condensing]
fhc red LED may be turned ON or OFF by the controller
during a relay activated condition.
The LED also indicates the following when addressed: Electrical Characteristics
I) When scanning nonnally [relay Addressable circuit voltage: 28V d.c.
unactivated}. the LED will illuminate once [polarity conscious]
every two seconds when the address is
scanned.
Relay contact: IA@30V d.c.
2) When the relay is initially activated, the
LED will illuminate for a short period, then
illuminate once every two seconds when the Note: Mains voltages MUST not be used with the
address is scanned [the LED will be brighter relay contact.
than when the relay is unactivated].
Overall Dimensions requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
Height: 87mm BS EN 50082-1
Width: 148mm
Weight: IO0g of the European Directive for EMC
(89/336/EEC).
Material
Housing: "BAYBLEND" [Polycarbonate
/ABS alloy]
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: RM520

Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication The module fits on to a standard dual-gang MK backbox.
05A-02-D I and the requirements of the current issue of
BS5839. Three pairs of connection terminals [L + and L-] arc
pro\"ided on the tenninal block. These tenninals are used for 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
connecting the module on to the addressable circuit. This
circuit will permit "teed' or ·spur' junctions which may be RM520 Relay Module: 568.001.011
used to simplify the installation cabling. A maximum of one Cover:
l .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be connected at any one 5 I 7.035.007
terminal. The third pair of L+ and L- terminals may be used
to spur the addressable circuit cabling.
D
1 TBl
N/0
I I
SPARE[]
0
0
0
0
N/C
SPARE
COM
D
D
0
0
1
L-'
L+
L-
LINE
DDoo
0 L+ I/P'S
0
0
TBZ
L-
L+
:cJ
i~~§§§~~I
0
1
N.C. = NOT CONNECTED
Fig. 3 RM520 Relay Module PCB
Note: Address switches shown enlarged for clarity.
Note: The 'spur' connection may be made from any of

the three LINE //Ps, but for ease of circuit
identification, the centre /IP should be used.

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2Q[

RM520
08A-02-D1
03 04/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP -1------------<t-------------+----------------<t-----,
+1------------<t-------------+----------------<t---~
MS00 SERIES RMSZ0 RELAY MODULE
DETECTOR
LOOP
POUER SUPPLY
UNIT
EXTERNAL DE.VICE/
SWITCHABLE CIRCUIT
ELECTRONIC SWITCHING
Cl RCUIT
Fig. 4 RM520 Simplified \\,'iring Diagram
VOLUME 15A MINERVA ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE RANGE OF CONTROLLERS
CB/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT: SB520

SOUNDER BOOSTER MODULE

The S8520 Sounder Booster Module is designed to activate a As stated, the SB520 Sounder Booster Module is fitted on to a
number of polarised and suppressed sounders. The sounders are custom-built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto a
powered from an independent power supply and the module is standard dual-gang MK box. The dimensions of this fascia
capable of passing up to a maximum of 15A. The principle use plate are given in Fig. I.
of the module is to increase the current driving capabilities of
controllers and Sounder Driver Modules to allow such devices The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
as Xenon beacons, klaxons, etc. to be driven. be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
required for M (CC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
The use of an S8520 Sounder Booster Module is preferable to must be fitted when using PVC cable.
simply using external relays as the module allows the sounder
circuits [and itself] to be monitored. The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate. The PCB is
fitted with a red LED which extends through the front of the
The S8520 Sounder Booster Module is contained on a double fascia plate and provides indication of unit operation.
sided printed Circuit board [PCB] which is fitted into a custom
built fascia plate. The fascia plate is then fitted onto a standard
dual-gang MK box. The S8520 is designed for internal 3. OPERATION
applications.
The S8520 Sounder Booster Module activates the externally
powered sounder(s] in response to an input. This input may
come from the sounder output of a controller, or from a
Sounder Driver Module. The module monitors the sounder
circuits, and itself. via end-of-line devices. Any fault may
therefore be signalled back to the controller and appropriate
action taken. It is therefore preferable to use an S8520 module
than un-monitored external relays.
~~~==+----f---
'.0
CIRCUIT IDENTIFIER
LABEL
'---~S~B~S~Z~Ocj·---1-- DEVICE TYPE LABEL
0
@ @ 87
____________,_ l 14
148 - - - - - - - - -
'
Fig. I SB520 Sounder Booster Module - Fascia Plate

Registered Offi<:e: 19-21 Denmark StreeC, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

SB520
OBA-02-D7
03 4/99
Fig. 2 SB520 Fascia Plate (back viewJ Showing Position of PCB
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 5. CABLING

Overall Dimensions Cables are to be selected in accordance with Publication
Height: 87mm 0SA-02-0 I and the requirements of the current issue of
BS5839. A maximum of one l.5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable
Width: 148mm may be connected at any one terminal.
Depth: 14mm [sec Fig. I 1
Weight: 100g
Material
Housing: "BAYBLENo·· [Polycarbonate - Di '
~
/ABS alloy]
0
0 }i
Environmental
0
0 }~D
Operating Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
-20°C to +70°C
up to 95% RH
0
0 }~ I I
[ non-condensing]
0
0
}~
External power supply: 24V d.c. [nominal]
0
0
0
.'_J
.
~
20V d.c. [minimum]

32V d.c. [maximum] 0 ~
0
Current rating: 15A @24V d.c.

0 ,w
--' I
[IOA max. per
tenninal]
D I I
Sounder wiring: olc > 5k ohm
sic< 70 ohm
Fig. 3 SB520 Sounder Booster Module PCB
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
Vote: The above standards fulfil the requirements

(89/336/EEC).
PAGE 2 of4
EQUIPMENT: S8520
The external power supply is connected at the terminal block 6. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
as follows :
The module fits onto a standard dual-gang MK box.
• Positive [24 VJ,
The Sounder Booster Module may be used in association
• Negative [0V]. with any sounder that is polarised and suppressed and to a
maximum of 15A per module.
Note: If MORE than 10A is to be drawn, then BOTH The module may be driven by the sounder outputs from any
pairs of terminals are to be used. controller [or from a Sounder Driver Module].
The sounder circuit is connected at the terminal block as

follows: 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
• Positive [SDR +ve)] SB520 Sounder Booster Module : 557-001-023
• Negative [SDR -ve]. Cover: 517-035-007
Note: If MORE than 10A is to be drawn, then BOTH

pairs of terminals are to be used.
The module is connected to the sounder circuit output from

a controller or Sounder Driver Module as follows :
• Positive [1/P +vc ],
• Negative [1/P -vc].
The EOL terminals arc used for connecting EITHER a 22k

resistor OR a polarised EOL device.
SOUNDER OUTPUT FROM

SM520 MODULE [SEE NOTE 1]
+24V
OV
HOR
2.5W
EOL
SOUNDER OUTPUT FROM

CONTROLLER {SEE NOTE 2J
- ,
(SEE NOTE3J
POLARISED
EOL UNIT
+24V
OV
270R
2.5W
EOL
Fig. 4 SB520 Simplified Wiring Diagram

Note I: Only one SB520 can be connected to a SMS20.
Note 2: Only one S8520 can be connected to a bell circuit.
Note 3: If more than I0A is drawn, then both pairs of 0/24V and SOR terminals are to be used.

RegbterN Office: 19-21 lknmark Street, Wokingham, Berk5 RG40 2QE:
A °ti/CD INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

S8520
08A-02-D7
03 4/99
VOLUNE 15A MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
CB/jm
26th March I 999
PAGE 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT: S0520

SD520 ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DAMPER INTERFACE

1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
The SD520 Smoke Damper Interface Module is designed to The SD520 Smoke Damper Interface Module may be fitted on
provide the inputs and output required to monitor and control a to a custom-built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto a
smoke damper. standard dual-gang MK box.
The SD520 provides one volt-free changeover relay contact The dimensions of the fascia plate arc given in Fig. I.
rated 5A@ 240V a.c. which is controlled from the control unit
and monitors up to two external contacts. The relay may be Up to 16 520 type PCBs may be mounted on a back plate and
fitted to a MINERVA 8 Ancillary Housing.
monitored for operation using the first external contact on the
second pole of the relay flink selectable, HD I pins I & 2]. Up to 3 520 type PCBs may be fitted to a MINERVA 3
Ancillary Housing.
The output may be controlled using the MfNERVA keypad via
the addressable loop. The keypad is used to force the outputs The dimensions of the MlNERVA Ancillary Housings are
LOW, HIGH or AUTO. The status of the output is also readable given in Figs. 2 and 3.
by using the keypad.
The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
An external 24V d.c. is required to operate the relay. be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
The SD520 Smoke Damper Interface Module is contained on a required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
must be fitted when using PVC cable.
double sided printed circuit board [PCB]. The SD520 Smoke
Damper is designed for internal applications. The PCB is mounted on the rear of the facia plate with its red
LED extending through to provide indication of relay
operation.
0
@ @ 87
148 ---------i
'I
14
Fig, I SD520 Smoke Damper Interface - Fascia Plate

RegislerOO Office: 19-21 INnmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 ?QE
'i A "tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

I
I,,_---------------------
I
5D520
0BA-02-D17
03 4/99
ADDRESS
SWITCH
"
Fig. 2 SD520 Fascia Plate !back view) Showing Position of PCB
440
220 -
IE5
- 5 dia.
~9.Sdia.
E"".j
20
200
6.401A.
"'-
55
55
E"".j E"".j
100 100
20
140
NOT ON TOP
Fig. 3 'MINERVA' Ancillary Housing 8 - Overall and Fixing Dimensions
PAGE2of6
EQUIPMENT: SD520
ISSUE No. & DATE:
03 4/99
340
173 62
- i-.-
0
.
'
22
6mm
290
0
-- , '
37
i20, t. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
~-----------------------~
Fig. 4 'MINERVA~ Ancillary Housing 3 - Overall and Fixing Dimensions
I
The ancillary housings are surface mounted and arc The output is also controlled by using the MINERVA
provided with knockouts top and bottom for the 8 housing keypad via the addressable loop. the keypad can be used to
and top for the 3 housing. force the outputs LOW, HIGH or AUTO. The keypad may
also be used to read the status of the relay.
2. OPERATION
The SD520 Smoke Damper relay is controlled by 2.2 RELAY INPUTS [RELAY NOT
commands signalled from the controller. Header HI selects MONITORED]
internal relay monitoring, pins I and 2 linked for internal
monitoring or pins 2 and 3 linked for two external contacts. The relay inputs are monitored using external circuits. The
relays are monitored in the condition current slot and the
The LED indicates when the relay is operated. resultant current will show the state of the contacts.
Fig. 5 shows the external contact monitoring circuit.
2.1 RELAY OUTPUT [RELAY
MONITORED]
The relay output is monitored [link selectable] via the
second pole of the relay, these outputs only become valid
after the refresh period of an address poll, therefore the
monitored value is only valid after a second poll of the
address.

Registen,-d Office: 19-21 Denmark Strttt, Wokingham, Buks RG40 2QE

SD520
0SA-02-O17
03 4/99
910R 1k8 EMC: Equals or exceeds the
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
RELAY CONTACT 1 RELAY CONTACT 2
470R Note: The above standards fulfill the requirements

EOL
(89/336/EEC).
fig. S SD520 - External Circuit

4. CABLING
05A-02-D I. Four pairs of connection tcnninals [L+ and L-]
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION arc provided on the terminal block. A maximum of one
2 2
I .5mm or one 2.5mm cable may be connected at any one
Overall Dimensions terminal.
Height: 87mm
Width: 148mm
Depth: 14mm [see Fig. I] N/0 C NIC
Weight: I00g
TB2
i\:laterial TB1
Housing: 'BAYBLEND' 0 CT+

[Polycarbonate/ABS alloy]
0 CT-
RL1
Ancillary Housing 8: 18 SWG mild steel
0 ov
Ancillary Housing 3: 'BAYBLEND'
0
Di
24V
Polycarbonate/ABS alloy
0 L-
HD1
Environmental 0 L+
Operating Temperature: -20°C to+ 70°C 0 L·
Relative Humidity: up to 95% RH 0 L+
[non-condensing] -c-
sw,
Addressable Circuit Voltage: 28V d.c.
Fig. 6 SD520 Smoke Damper Interface PCB
Relay Contact: SA @ 240V a.c.
Current Consumption:
No1TT1al: 0.25mA
5. MAINS SWITCHING
Alarm: 0.25mA If the unit is used to switch mains [LV] controlling other
equipments, to comply with the Low Voltage Directive [73/
23/EEC (UK Regulatory Statu1ory Instrument 1994/3260)],
24V load: then the mains to be switched _must comply with the
following. The equipment to be switched must have an
Quiescent: 0.0mA isolation protection device, which may be one of the
Alarm: 40mA following types:
• The plug on the power supply cable.
• An appliance coupler.
PAGE 4 of6
EQUIPMENT: 5D520
ISSUE No. & DATE:
03 4/99
• Isolating switch.
• Circuit-breaker.
• Any cqui\·alent device offering a degree of
safety equal to the above.
Note: Some disconnect devices complying with /EC

1058-1 are examples of those considered to
comply with the above requirements.
The mains for the equipment must also have an overcurrent

protection device to comply with IEE Regulations [16th
Edition Pt. 4 Ch. 13].
A Contact Rating label [supplied] must be affixed to the
housing adjacent the PCB for Minerva 3 or Minerva 8
housings or to the plastic cover when mounted to a facia
plate.
A Mains Supply Warning !able (supplied] must be affixed
to the outside of the housing cover.
A Mains Isolator Table label [supplied) must be affixed in
a prominent visible position inside the housing and be filled
in by the Commissioning Engineer. The label indicates the
location of the isolator serving the relay circuit and should
be compkrc<l using a marker pen RSl87-l 162 or
equivalent.
SD5.20 Smoke Damper Module: 568-004-014
MINERVA Ancillary Housing 8: 557-180-096
MINERVA Ancillary Housing 3: 557-180-097
MINERVA Ancillaries Stacking Kit: 557-180-095
Contact Rating Labk:
Isolation Tabk: 120.247.650
Mains Supply Flash: 120.247.648


S0520
08A-02-D17
03 4/99
SMOKE DAMPER
r------------------,
I
I 910A 1k8
I
I
I
I DAMPER DAMPER
I OPEN CLOSED 470A
I EOL
I
I
I
I DAMPER
I DRIVE
I
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER EXTERNAL 24V d.c. - - - - - A . C . IN
SUPPLY
RETURN - > - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' - + + - , _ _ , _ - - + - + - - ~ - - - ~
LOOP
+f--------------~--------t-lr+-+----++---~
MSOOSERIES S0520 SMOKE DAMPER
DETECTOR INTERFACE MODULE
+ f---.--, r - - - - - - 1 0 - ~
LOOP + ~ - + ~ -
EXTERNAL 24V d.c. 470R

SUPPLY EOL
+ ~ -
SMOKE
DAMPER
Fig. 7 SDS20 Smoke Damper Interface Module - Simplified Wiring Diagram
Volume I SA MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
CB/jm
19th April 1999
PAGE 6 of 6
EQUIPMENT: SM520

ADDRESSABLE SOUNDER DRIVER MODULE

The SM520 Sounder Driver Module is designed to provide an As stated, the SM520 Sounder Driver Module is fined on to a
output, in response to a command signalled from a controller, to custom-built fascia plate designed to be mounted onto a
activate a number of polarised and suppressed sounders. The standard dual-gang MK box. The dimensions of this fascia
sounders arc powered from an independent power supply and plate are given in Fig. I.
the module is capable of passing up to a maximum of 500mA
[e.g. ten 24V d.c. 50mA Company sounders or a mixture of dif- The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to
ferent current rated Company sounders not exceeding a maxi- be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
mum loop current of 500mA]. required for MICC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
must be fitted when using PVC cable.
The SM520 Sounder Driver Module is contained on a double
sided printed Circuit board [PCB] which is fitted into a custom The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate with a
built fascia plate with a protective cover being fitted over the protective plastic cover being fitted over the PCB leaving only
PCB, leaving only the connection terminals exposed. The fascia the connection terminals exposed.
plate is then fitted onto a standard dual-gang MK box. The The PCB is fitted with a red LED which extends through the
SM520 is designed for internal applications. front of the fascia plate and provides indication of unit
The use of two SM520 Sounder Driver Modules may be operation.
required to satisfy the requirements of BS5839 Pt I for two
independent sounder circuits.
The current capability of the module may be increased by the
use of an SB520 Sounder Booster Module [see publication
[0SA-02-D7].
DEVICE ADDRESS/
(8 SM520
ZONE NUMBER LABEL
DEVICE TYPE LABLE
0
@ @ 87
7
_., J
I. 148 _ _ _ _ , ., i.
Fig. I SM520 Sounder Driver Module - Fascia Plate


SM520
08A-02-D6
03 4/99
Fig. 2 SM520 Fascia Plate (back viewJ Showing Position of PCB

The SM520 Sounder Driver Module activates the externally (polarity conscious]
powered soundcr[s] in response to a command signalled
from the controller. The module is capable of monitoring Normal load: 0.18mA
and signalling the following conditions when the sounder Alarm load: 0.7mA
circuit is moniwrcd via a 22k EOL resistor.
• Nomial condition. External power supply: 24V d.c. [nominal]
20V d.c. [minimum]
• Power supply fault, signalled if the external
power supply to the module is lost. 32V d.c. [maximum]
• Open or short circuit on the sounder circuit. Nonnal load: 8mA
Alarm load: 45mA
• Relay coil fault, signalled if the relay coil be-
comes open circuit.
• Sounder relay operated correctly.
Sounder ,viring: olc > I00k ohm
s/c < 2k ohm
The power supply to the sounder circuit is limited by a

thcnnistor which acts as a resettable fuse [630mA]. The red
LED is ON when the sounder relay is operated. EMC: Equals or exceeds the
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION BS EN 50082-1
Overall Dimensions
Height: 87mm of the European Directive for EMC
Width: 148mm (89/336/EEC).
Weight: 100g 5. CABLING
Material 0SA-02-DI and the requirements of the current issue of
BS5839. Three pairs of connection tenninals [L+ and L-] are
Housing: ·'BAYBLEND" [Polycarbonate provided on the terminal block. These terminals are used for
/ABS alloy] connecting the module on to the addressable circuit. This
circuit will permit 'teed' or ·spur· junctions which may be
used to simplify the installation cabling. A maximum of one
Environmental I .5mm2 or one 2.5mm2 cable may be connected at any one
Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C tenninal. The third pair of L+ and L- tenninals may be used
to spur the addressable circuit cabling. A maximum of ten
company sounders [ 50mA max each] may be driven from a
[non-condensing] single SM520 Sounder Driver Module. If more than this
number are required, then the SB520 Sounder Booster Mod-
ule may be used to increase the current canying capacity to
15A.
PAGE 2 of 4
EQUIPMENT: SM520
PUBLICATION: OSA-02-D6
01 The Sounder Driver Module may be used in association with

any sounder that is polarised and suppressed and to a
D}
maximum of 500mA per module [unless an SB520 module
is additionally used].
J
0 G
J
0 ~
I~
"'' D
N
=w 7. ORDERING INFORMATION
0 0J
~w
0 0J
"'+ SM520 Sounder Driver Module: 577-001-022
0 ' }
oO
~
SM520 Sounder Module: 577-001-022
0 +
~"'
0 ' ;..
~ '
Cover: 5 I 7-035-007
~ ii
0
0
0 +
~ :cJ
f§§§§§§§I
'o
'
Fig. 3 SM520 Sounder Driver Module PCB

Note: Address switch shown enla;·ged for clarity.

of the LINE 1/Ps, but for ease of circuit
identification, the center /IP should be used.
The external power supply is connected at the terminal block

as follows:
• Positive [24V]
• Negative [0V]
The sounder circuit is connected at the terminal block as

follows:
• Positive [SDR +vc]
• Negative [SDR -ve]
CB/jm
19th Apri I 1999


SM520
08A-02-D6
03 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP
+f---------4-----------------+-------------t-----,
SMSZ0 SOUNDER DRIUER
M500 SERIES
MODULE
DETECTOR
LOOP
EXTERNAL Z4U d.c. SUPPLY

CONTROLLER)
22k EOL
FOR SPUR
Cl RCUIT
EXTERNAL 24V d.c. SUPPLY

<MAV BE SUPPLIED FROM
CONTROLLER>
221< EOL
Fig. 4 SM520 Simplified Wiring Diagram
PAGE 4 of4
EQUIPMENT: SU521

SU521 ADDRESSABLE SHOP INTERFACE UNIT

1. INTRODUCTION 3.2 RELAY INPUTS
The SU52 l Shop Interface Unit is designed to provide all inputs The relay inputs are monitored using external circuits with two
and outputs typically required to interface individual shop units contacts per circuit. The relays are monitored in the condition
with a landlords site-wide monitoring system. A typical current slot and the resultant current will show the state of the
application would be a shopping precinct. contacts. Only NORMALLY CLOSED contacts arc
monitored.
The SU52 I provides multiple volt-free changeover relay
contacts (rated 24V@ IA] derived from latching relays which Fig. l shows the external contact monitoring circuit.
arc controlled from the control unit via the addressable loop and
to monitor multiple external relay contacts. 910A 1k8
The SU52 I is produced in one version which is link
configurable to gi\'C the following configurations, 2 inputs/2
outputs, 4 inputs/4 outputs and 6 inputs/6 outputs. The three
versions use the following number of loop addresses: RELAY CONTACT 1 RELAYCONTACT2
VERSION NO. ADDRESSES MAX No./LOOP 470R

EOL
SU52l/2 4 24
SU52 I /4 8 12
SU52l/6 12 8 Fig. I SU521 Shop Interface Unit- External Circuit
The SU52 I is contained on a double sided printed circuit board 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
[PCB].
Overall Dimensions
The relays arc powered by the addressable loop
Length: 245mm
Width: 72mm
2. MOUNTING DETAILS Depth: 15mm
The SU520 may be mounted in a number of ways: Weight l20gm
MINERVA ancillary backbox - up to 4 units.

Environmental
Din rail mounted in any box suitable for the application.
3. OPERATION [ non-condensing]
The SU521Shop Interface Unit relays arc controlled by com- Electrical characteristics
mands signalled from the controller
Addressable circuit voltage:28V d.c.[polarity conscious]
3.1 RELAY OUTPUTS Normal load: O.SmA

Alarm load: I.OmA
The relay outputs are monitored via the second pole of the relay,
these outputs only become valid after the refresh period of an Relay contacts: IA@24V d.c.
address poll, therefore the monitored value is only valid after a
second poll of the address.
The outputs are also controlled by using the MINERVA keypad
via the addressable loop. the keypad can be used to force the
outputs ON, OFF or UNFORCE. The keypad may also be used
to read the status of the relay.

Registered Office: 19--21 ~nmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE
A °tqc::a INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

SU521
08A-02-D15
04 4/99
requirements of
~oc
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
-u~
IC]
[I_J m z
Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements IC]
- m
of the European Directive for EMC IC]

(89/336/EEC). IC]
[I_J "?
~o·
N 0
5. CABLING
Addressable loop cables are to be selected in accordance 1~ I ~o!
w z
D~
with Publication 05A-02-D I. Two pairs of connection 0
tcnninals [L+ and L-] are ~rovidcd on the terminal block. A
maximum of one I .5mm 2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable may be
1~ I~ ~
connected at any one terminal. ~ ~
-rn~
117
CJ
LI
~o·
~ '
SU52 I Shop Unit Interface Module: 568-00 I -013 CJ

CJ
MINERVA Ancillary Housing 8: 557-180-096 CJ~
MINERVA Ancillary Housing 3:
Din Rail Mounting Kit:
557-180-097
54 7 -004-00 I
~=
PARK LJNK 2
Da
g? ;
;Dai
1~
1~
-CJ~
IC]
IC]
~o·
~ '
IC]
117
117 [K[J
~~
IC]~
PARK LINK 3
iD!
1~
1~
l~oa
I~ i
Fig. 2 SU521 Shop Interface Unit PCB
PAGE2of3
EQUIPM.ENT: SU521
EXAMPLE:
MINERVA 1 TO 4 ZONE
CONTROLLER
470R FIRE
470R ALARM FAULT
EOL EOL RELAY RELAY
1k8 1k8
NTACT 910A 1k8

CONTACT
2
2
,
CONTACT CONTACT
2 EOL
470R
ONTACT
COMMON ALARM 1/P
TB9 TB6
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP Al-
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP + f-----------~-+f------J+----J+----Jf+----~
MSOO SERIES
DETECTOR
LOOP + ~ -
SU521 SHOP
INTERFACE
MODULE
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL

EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
Fig. 3 SU521 Shop Interface Unit - Simplified \Viring Diagram
VOLU:VIE 15A MINERVA RANGE OF ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE CONTROLLERS
ML/jm
19th April 1999

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Bi.-rks RG40 2QE

EQUIPMENT: TM520

TM520 TIMER MODULE

The TM510 module is used to control the Sector Disable As stated, the TM520 Timer Module is fitted onto a custom
function i.e. disable detectors in specified sectors for a built facia plate designed to be mounted onto a standard dual-
predetermined time, i.e. whilst loading/unloading is in progress gang MK box. The dimensions of this facia plate are given in
in a large internal loading bay. The module may be connected Fig. I.
via a Crv1520 Contact Monitoring Module or directly to the
controller \·ia rhe Occupied Premises input and provides three The MK box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required
volt free contacts [Common, Nonnally Open and Normally to be drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland
Closed]. Once operated by the keyswitch, the module activates is required for MfCC cable and conduit use, whilst a grommet
a relay for a prcdctcnnined period of time selected via a 7-way must be fitted when using PVC cable. The PCB is fitted with
DIL s,\·irch [see Table I] plus a 5 minute safety ti_meout period. a red [TIMEOUT] and a yellow [TIMING] LED which extend
through the front of the facia plate and provides indication of
The TM520 Timer Module is contained on a double sided unit operation.
printed circuit board [PCB] which is fitted to a custom built
facia plate with a protective covering being fitted over the PCB.
leaving only the connection tenninals and OIL switch
exposed. The facia plate is then fitted onto a standard dual-gang
MK box. The TM520 is designed for internal applications.
x=ON
SWITCHES
1. z. 3.
o=Off
4 ODO XDD DXD

s.
xxo
.. 7
oox xox DXX XXX
0000 2hr -40 Shr ZO Bhr 10hr 40 13hr ZO 16hr 18hr 40

>COOO
10 2hr SO Shr 30 Bhr 10 10hr SO 13hr 30 16hr 10 18hr SO
0><00 20 3!,r 5hr -40 8hr ZO 11hr 13hr 40 16hr ZO 19hr
)()(00 30 3hr 10 5hr SO 8hr 30 11hr 10 13hr 50 16hr 30 19hr 10
'10><0 40 3hr 20 bhr 8hr 40 11hr ZO 14hr 16hr 40 19hr ZO

XO)(O so 3hr 30 &hr 10 8hr 50 11hr 30 14hr 10 16hr SO 19hr 30
0><)(0 1hr 3hr 40 6hr 20 9hr 11hr 40 14hr 20 17hr 19hr 40

XX>CO 1hr 10 3hr SO 6hr 30 9hr 10 11hr SO 14hr 30 17hr 10 19hr 50
000>< 1hr ZO 4hr 6hr 40 9hr ZO 12hr 14hr 40 17hr ZO ZOhr

><OO>< 1hr 30 4hr10 6hr SO 9hr 30 1Zhr 10 14hr 50 17hr 30 20hr 10
O><O>< 1hr 40 4hr 20 7hr 9hr 40 12hr ZO 1Shr 17hr 40 ZOhr ZO
xxox 1hr SO 4hr 30 7hr 10 9hr SO 12hr 30 1Shr 10 17hr 50 20hr 30
OOX)( 2hr 4hr 40 7hr 20 10 hr 1Zhr 40 15hr ZO 18hr 20hr 40
xoxx 2hr 10 '4hr SO 7hr 30 10hr 1C 1Zhr 50 15hr 30 18hr 10 ZOhr 50
0><><>< Zhr ZO 5hr 7hr 40 10hr ZO 13hr 15hr -40 18hr 20 21hr
)()()()( 2hr 30 5hr 10 7hr SO 10hr 30 13hr 10 15hr SO 18hr 30 21hr 10
Fig. I TM520 Timer Module Switch Settings

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, lkrks RG40 2QE:

TM520
0BA-02-O16
03 4/99
148
1~ .. I
RED LED
VELLOW LED
TIMEOUT TMS20
TIMING
87
@ @
TIMER OFF~
. . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , _t_
Fig. 2TM520 Timer Module Front Cover

-.
14

The operation of the TM520 Timer Module is controlled by Overall Dimensions [sec Fig. I]
the TIMER OFF keyswitch, on operation of the key switch
the timing sequence is initiated. The yellow TIMING LED Weight: 100g
will flash one second ON, one second OFF. At the end of the
prc-dctcnnined time period, the red TIMEOUT LED will
'ight and the internal buzzer will sound synchronously with Material
(he yellow Tl~-11NG LED for the 5 minute safety timeout Housing: "BAYBLEND' [polycarbonate
period. /ABS alloy]
Operation may be cancelled at any time by turning the
TIMER OFF keyswiteh off. Turning the TIMER OFF
Environmental
keyswitch OFF then ON within 3 seconds reinitiates the
timeout period. Operating Temperature: -20°c to + 70°C
Relative Humidity: up to95% RH
[non-condensing)
0 0
0
t•Z4VBQ 00 Electrical Characteristics
Power supply:
Current rating:
28V d.c. (from external
supply or controller)
40mA max when operated
8
I=
GND
N/0
N/G
f I
Relay Contact Rating:
Relay Operation/Release:
I A @ 24 V d.c.
7ms I 3ms
I=
Fl
G
NOT USED
f If I Electromagnetic Compatibility
Do f I
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS El'J 50082-1
f I f~~~~~~~I
0 ' 0 Note; The above standards fulfil the requirements
(89/336/EEC).
fig, 3 TM520 Timer Module PCB
PAGE 2 of 3
EQUIPMENT: TM520
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP -1---------._--------------<lf------------+-----,
•1--------.---------------<II------------+----~
FOR SPUR
MS00 SERIES CIRCUIT
DETECTOR
I DENT
CURRENT
BZOR
TB1 EXTERNAL
+ ------------------------
POWER
SUPPLY
OR CONTROLLER
OCCUPIED
PREMISES
1/P •
TM520 TIMER MODULE
NORNALLV OPEN CONTACT
Fig. 4TM520 Simplified Wiring Diagram
5. CABLING
Refer to Fig. 4. A maximum of one 1.5mm cable may be
connected at any one terminal.
The external power supply is connected as follows:
• Positi\"c(+24V)
• Negative (GND)
The Timer Module may be used in conjunction with a
CM520 Contact Monitoring Module.
TM520 Timer Module: 557- I80-423
CB/jm
19th April 1999

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Strt'et, Wokingham, Berks RG~O 2QE

EQUIPMENT: VM520

VM520 VOICE MODULE

The VM520 Voice Module is designed to provide a combined As stated previously, the VM520 Voice Module is fitted into a
voice message and siren output, in response to a command non·Standard electrical back box (the dimensions of this box
signalled from a controller. A maximum of 4 loudspeakers, each are given in Fig. I], this box fits onto a standard dual gang
capable of providing audibility of85 dBA at 3 metres for I kHz, electrical back box.
may be used with each voice module.
The box is surface mounted. Suitable holes are required to be
The VM520 Voice Module is contained on a double-sided drilled in the box for electrical connection. A cable gland is
printed circuit board [PCB] which is fitted onto a custom-built required for MICC cable and conduit use.
fascia plate which fits onto non-standard electrical back box.
The VM520 is designed for internal applications only. The PCB is mounted on the rear of the fascia plate and is fitted
with a red LED which extends through the front of the fascia
The +24V supply has polarity reversal protection and is isolated plate and provides indication of unit operation.
from the power amplifier to prevent excessive power
consumption, upon activation the supply is connected via an
FET.
The output circuit is completely isolated from the address
circuit by the use of opto·isolators.
The VM520 should only be specified for use in single
compartments [e.g. hotel bedrooms].
l2J l2
VMS20
0
112
ol
-- lo
/ I
' 15
t
55
l
200
t
Fig. I VMS20 Voice Module

Registered Off~e: 19--21 Denmark Street, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

VM520
08A-02-D14
04 4/99
'
:1u I~-~,
TERMINAL BLOCI<
_;,;.-
ADDRESS V 0
SWITCH - 0 0 0 I::,.
~
Fig. 2 VM520 Facia Plate !hack view! Showing Position of PCB
3. OPERATION • Relay coil fault signalled if the relay coi I

becomes open circuit
The VM520 Voice Module is capable of out-putting any one
of three voice messages, by using the two spare command • Voice module relay operated correctly.
bits in the Minerva address signalling system. The messages • Open or short circuit on the loudspeaker
may be customised for a specific application, the default circuit
messages arc:
Message I
The power supply to the voice module circuit is limited by a
5 second pulsed tone and 'ALARM TEST' thermistor which acts as a resettable fuse [630mA] The red
Message 2 LED is on when the voice sounder relay is operated.
5 second tone [tone duration 500ms, alternating The audibility output can be adjusted via an on·board
between 750Hz an !kHz] and 'FIRE ALERT, variable resistor RV I and the transformer tappings on the
PREPARE TO LEAVE' loudspeakers.
Message 3
3.2 second alternating 2 tone siren [tone duration
200ms, alternating between 750Hz and IkHz] and
'FIRE EMERGENCY, EVACUATE NOW' CAUTION:
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE OUTPUT

When commanded, the output shuts off only when either the DRIVER STAGE, THE INPUT CURRENT
siren or the voice message has completely finished. FROM THE EXTERNAL SUPPLY MUST BE
LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM OF 500mA USING
The user manually selects one of the three messages by RV1, THIS MUST BE SET WHILST THE
depressing the appropriate switch for the duration of the VM520 IS PRODUCING A CONTINUOUS
message, selecting more than I message will select message TONE.
3.
The module is capable of monitoring and signalling the
following conditions when the loudspeaker circuit is
monitored via a 22Kohm EOL resistor, Note: When designing a system with more than one
VM520 module, care should be taken to ensure
• Nonna! condition
that the speakers of each module are
• Power supply fault, signalled if the external positioned to avoid a timing conflict with
power supply to the module is lost adjacent modules; ie VM520 modules are not
addressed simultaneously
PAGE 2 of 5
I·
I
EQUIPMENT: VM520
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION A maximum of one l.5mm2 or one 2.5mm 2 cable maybe

connected at any one tcm1inal.
Overall Dimensions
Height: 112mm
Width: 200mm of the three LINE 1/Ps, but for ease of circuit
Depth: 71mm identification, the centre /IP should be used.
Weight 630gm
Material <I
0
Housing: Polystyrene 0
u 0
Environmental
Operating Tempcra1urc: -20°C to +70°C
0
Relative Humidity; up to 95% RH
[non-condensing]
Addressable Circuit: 28V d.c. [polarity conscious]
External Power Supply: 24V d.c. [nominal]

-,.
HO
30-]i
3"+ ~
20V d.c. [minimum]
32V d.c. [maximum] 30-]
30•
3(1- ~
:3fl+ .J
30-
Address Circuit: l25µA from loop 30•
X
Output Circuit: Quiescent: l5mA from CJ;
supply
Operated: 120mA@ I00V
per speaker
0
o > .., ~ ....
--~:".'.;-;-.."'.!
...
.,...,__..-
..,_,,. ,. 0
EMC Equals or exceeds the
Fig. 3 \'M520 Voice i\:lodule PCB
requirements of
BS EN 50081-1 and
BS EN 50082-1
The external power supply is connected at the terminal block
Note: The above standards fulfil the requirements as follows:
(89/336/EEC). • Positive [+24V]
• Negative [0V-L]
5. CABLING
The loudspeaker circuit is connected at the terminal block as
Cables arc to be selected in accordance with Publication OSA-
follows:
02-D I and the requirements of the current issue of
8S5839. Three pairs of connection tenninals [L+ and L-] are • Positive [SPKR +ve]
provided on the terminal block. These terminals are used for
connecting the module on the addressable circuit. The third • Negative (SPKR -ve]
pair will permit 'teed' or 'spur' junctions which may be used
to simplify cabling installation.
The same terminal block provides three pairs of terminals for
manual selection of the output message and a pair of
terminals for connection of the loud speaker circuit.

Registered Office: 19-21 IHnmark Sired, Wokingham, Berks R(riO 2QE
f
VM520
0SA-02-D14
04 4/99
ADDRESSABLE
LOOP
CONTROLLER
RETURN
LOOP +1----------1--------------+-------------I----~
M$00 SERI ES VMS20 VOICE MODULE

DETECTOR
••••••
LOOP
EXTERNAL 24U d.c. SUPPLY

(MAY BE SUPPLIED FROM
CONTROLLER>
22k
EOL
MESSAGE 1
MESSAGE Z
FOR SPUR
MESSAGE 3 CIRCUIT
I
NORMALLY OPEN I
CONTACT DEVICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c _____,,.__I_JL----1~===t=!==l--tt-t:::~._
EXTERNAL 24U d.c. SUPPLY

(MAY BE SUPPLIED FROM
CONTROLLERl
22k
EOL
Fig. 4 VM520 Simplified \\'iring Diagram
6. POWER TAPPINGS FOR

SPEAKERS
The power tapping details for the recommended speakers arc
contained in the following paragraphs.
4W
6.1 CABINET SPEAKER IOOV 2W
The power tappings for Cabinet Speaker - 8 ohm impedance : 50CV , , 1-I_W~
(SIC No. 557-001-104). O.SW
C
PAGE 4 of 5
EQUIPMENT: VM520
6.2 FLUSH MOUNT SPEAKERS Note: Ignore any numbers marked on the actual
speaker rotary control switch, as these may be
The power tappings for Flush Mount Speaker - 8 ohm incorrect! Switch position 1 quoted above is
impedance (S/C No. 557-001-106). fully anti-clockwise, and all other switch
positions in this document are referenced to
this setting.
6W
IOOV 3W
: 5~V I I.SW
~
0.5W
The module fits on to a standard dual-gang electrical back
C box.
The Voice Module may be used is association with any loud
6.3 METAL CABINET SPEAKER speaker meeting the following specification [a maximum of
four loud speakers may be connected to one VM520]:
The power tappings for SAFEV6T Metal Cabinet Speaker -
8 ohm impedance (SIC No. 557-001-109).
• IOOV line transformer.
• Secondary of transfonner capable of having
a minimum of 4 possible power tappings,
6W RED [initially set at second lowest rating].
IOOV 3W
• Blocking capacitor - 2.2µF 250V d.c. bi-
I
PINK
I.SW directional to be placed in series with
GREY
: 5~V 0.75 positive of primary of transfonner for d.c.
VIOLET line monitoring.
C
• Audibility output 90 dBA.
6.4 HORN SPEAKER

The AR-JOT Horn Speaker (S.C. No. 577-001-108) has a 8. ORDERING INFORMATION
rotary control switch in place of power tappings, and is set
VM520 Voice Module: 577-001-102
as follows for I 00 Volt input:
Housing: 577-001-101
Switch Position Wattage
Cabinet Speaker- 8 ohm impedance: 577-001-104
I (Fully Anti-clockwise) 2.5 Watts
Flush Mount Speaker- 8 ohm impedance:577-001-106
2 5.0 Watts
Horn Speaker - AR-JOT: 577-001-108
3 7.5 Watts
Metal Cabinet Speaker - SAFEV6T: 577-001-109
4 10.0 Watts
5, 6, 7 Do not use these settings! -
They may damage the
VM520.
8 Switches off the speaker.
CB/jm
29th March 1999
!
Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Street, \Vokinghan1, Berks RG40 2QE
I A tqcu INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 15A-02-D1 App A

APPENDIX A
PRODUCT APPLICATION AND SYSTEM DESIGN
DEVICES
1. INTRODUCTION • The M500 Addressable Detector Base may
also be used with the following M400 series of
Appendix A gives a list of ancillary devices which may be fire detectors:
used with a MINERVA analogue addressable fire controller.
MD40 I Heat Detector
[Publication 0IA-03-DI0],
2. ANCILLARY DEVICES MF40 I Ion-chamber Smoke Detector
[Publication 0IA-03-D7],
2.1 DEVICE TYPES MR401 Optical Smoke Detector
The following addressable devices arc suitable for use with the [Publication 0 IA-03-D8],
·MINERVA' range of fire controllers: MR401T High Perfonnance Optical
Smoke Detector
• M500/M500Ex [Publication 0IA-03-D2]
[Publication 0IA-03-D9]
Addressable Detector Base. for use with the
following M500 series of analogue fire
detectors:
• M600/M900 Universal base [Publications
MD50 I Heat Detector 01 B-03-D2] Detector Base, for use with the
[Publication 0IA-03-D6] following M900 series of analogue addressable
MF50 I Ion-chamber Smoke Detector fire detectors:
[Publication 01 A-03-D3] MR90 I Optical Smoke Detector
MR50 I Optical Smoke Detector [Publication 0 I B-03-D6]
[Publication 0 I A-03-D4] MR901T High Performance Optical
MRS0IT High Performance Optical Smoke Detector
Smoke Detector [Publication 0IB-03-D4]
[Publication 0IA-03-DI I] MF90 I Ion-chamber Smoke
MS502Ex Infra-red Flame Detectvr Detector [Publication 0! 8-03-D3]
[Publication 0 I A-03-DS] M D90 I Heat Detector
[Publication 0 I B-03-D5]
MU901 Carbon Monoxide Detector
WARNING: [Publication 0IB-03-D7]
AN MR501 OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR SET • The M600/M900 Universal Detector Base
FOR 'LOW' SENSITIVITY BY THE [Publication 0 I 8-03-D2] and M600 Diode
CONTROLLER DOES NOT COMPLY WITH Base [Publication 0 I B-04-D7] may also be
BS5445: PART 7. used with the following M600 series of
conventional fire detectors:
MR60 I Optical Smoke Detector
[Publication 0 I 8-04-D6]
Note: The M500Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable
Detector Base MUST be used with the MR60 IT High Performance Optical
Intrinsically Safe versions of the above detectors. Smoke Detector
[Publication 01 B-04-D4],
MF60 I Ion-chamber Smoke Detector
[Publication 0IB-04-D3]
MD60 I Heat Detector
[Publication 0IB-04-DS]

Registered Office: 19-21 Denmark Stn-et, Wokingham, Berks RG40 2QE

MINERVA
15A-02-D1 App A
03 4/99
MD6 I I Heat Detector • CP930 Manual Break Glass Callpoint, an

[Publication 01 B-04-D5] addressable break glass callpoint [Publication
MU60 I Carbon Monoxide Detector OSA-02-D34].
[Publication 01 B-04-DS] • CP950Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable
Heavy Duty Manual Break Glass Callpoint,
[Publication 08A-02-D32].
• *RM520 Relay Module, used to provide a
remotely controllable, change-over relay • SB520 Sounder Booster Module, used to
contact [Publication OSA-02-DI ]. drive a number of polarised and suppressed
sounders, such as Xenon beacons, klaxons
etc. [Publication OSA-02-D7).
WARNING: • IF500Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable
Interface Module, used to monitor CP540Ex
RM520 IS NOT TO BE USED FOR Callpoint and simple apparatus in a
SWITCHING MAINS VOLTAGES Hazardous Area [Publication OSA-02-D 12].
• IF520Ex Intrinsically Safe Addressable
Manual Pushbutton Callpoint for use in a
• AM52 l Aspirating Interface Module, used to Hazardous Area [Publication 08A-02-D3 IJ.
interface to a VESDATM E70 aspirating
detector [Publication OSA-02-DI 3]. • VM520 Voice Module, used to provide a
combined voice message and siren output in
• AM92 I Aspirating Interface Module, used to response to a command issued from the
interface to a VESDA.g. LascrPLUSTM controller [Publication 08A-02-D4].
• SU52 I Shop Unit Interface, is used to provide
• SM520 Sounder Driver Module, used to all inputs and outputs typically required to
remotely control, and monitor the state of, up interface individual shop units with a
to ten conventional fire sounders landlord's site-wide monitoring [Publication
[Publication 08A-02-D6]. OSA-02-D 15).
• DM520 Conventional Detector Module, • PI52 I Plant Interface Module, is used to
used to interface conventional fire detectors monitor and control plant using a.c relays,
[e.g. SI 00 series, M300 series, M600 series, contacts rated at SA
etc.] to a 'MINERVA' fire controller [Publication 08A-02-Dl8].
• LPBD520 Loop Powered Beam Detector
• MDM521 Multi-Circuit Conventional Interface Module, is used to interface a
Detector Module, is used to monitor and FIRERAY 2000 Optical Beam Smoke
signal alanns from eight detector loops with Detector to the MINERVA analogue
up to twenty detectors per loop [Publication addressable loop [Publication 08A-02-D26].
08A-02-D25].
• LPS520 Linc Powered Sounder Module, is
• CM520 Contact Monitoring Module, used to used to drive up to six Besson Banshee
rcmetcly rnonitor-the condition ofa voltage- sounders [Publication OSA-02-D 19].
free contact [Pubtication 0SA-02-D3].
• LPBB52 I Linc Powered Addressable
• CP520 Master Manual Break Glass Sounder, up to 12 Line Powered Addressable
Callpoint, an addressable break glass Sounders can be driven per loop [Publication
callpoint [Publication 08A-02-D9). 08A-02-D22].
• SD520 Smoke Damper Interface Module, is
used to monitor and control a smoke damper
Note: A weatherproof version of the CP520
[Publication OSA-02-D 17].
designated the CP530, is a/so available
[Publication 0BA-02-D10). • M900 Functional Bases, provide 3 Minerva
related functions [Publication OI B-07-D I]:
MB900 Type 'A' Sounder Base.
• CP920 Manual Break Glass Callpoint, an
addressable break glass callpoint MC6/900 Relay base.
[Publication 08A-02-D27]. Ml900 Isolator Base.
PAGE2of3
EQUIPMENT: MINERVA
PUBLICATION: 15A-02-D1 App A
2.2 NON-ADDRESSABLE DEVICES 3.3 RM250

In addition to the above addressable devices, the following his recommended that if the RM520 is used in the pulsing
non-addressable devices can also be connected to a mode the maximum number of modules connected to any
"MINERVA' analogue ;;i.ddressablc fire controller: one addressable circuit is limited to 20.
• CP5 IO Sla,·e Manual Break Glass Callpoint,
used in conjunction with the CP520/CP530
unit to extend the area covered. Up to ten 3.4 DM520
slave callpoints may be attached to one A maximum of 20 conventional detectors may be connected
master callpoint (Publication OSA-02-D8]. to a DM520 module. Zonal limitations imposed by BS 5839
• TM520 Timer Module, used to provide a Part I should also be obser\ed.
timed period output, monitored either by the
occupied premises input or a CM520
[Publication OSA-02-D 16].
• Ll520 Mk 2 Line Isolator Module, used on JM/jm
the addressable circuits to monitor for, and
161h April1999
protect against, short-circuits in the
wiring. The use of line isolator modules is
also required to meet the requirements of BS
5839 Part I for zoning of an installation [see
para 4.5.3] [Publication OSA-02-D2 I].
• Ll530Ex Intrinsically Safe Line Isolator, for
use in Hazardous Areas [Publication 08A-
02-D5].
• CP540Ex Monitored Callpoint, for use in
Hazardous Areas [Publication 08A-02-
DI I].
3_ DEVICE LIMITATIONS
3.1 CM 520
The contact used must be able to pass a minimum current of
lmA.
3.2 CP520
It is recommended that the maximum number ofCP520/530
modules connected to any one addressable circuit is limited
to 30.

Registered Office: 19~21 Denmark Street, \\'okingham, Berks RG40 2QE

SOLO
FIL 0032
03 512000
LEAFLET S/C 120-415-339
SOLO AEROSOL DISPENSING SMOKE DETECTOR TESTER

OPERATOR'S GUIDE
1. INTRODUCTION 2.3 MAINTENANCE
This documi:111 relates lo Tyco Ekc1011il.: Product Group The aerosol dispenser gathers an oily residue within the cup after
m~uwfacrured deh:clors only. a period of time.
The aerosol dispc-nsing s:nuke dc"tt'.'(;'IOr tester en.ables smoke To clean the t.:up. wipe gently with a soft lint-free cloth. If
detec1ur:- 10 he tested without removing. them from their necessary the <lispenser can also he washed in warm soapy water
operational posilil,li.
omd <lried with a lint-free doth.
A dose of aerosol mixturi:. simulating smoke. is <lispensi:<l by
the rester. circ.:ulated around the dispenser cup and into che No other maintenance is required. Do not removt: 01 .idjust
<letectur. screw settings.
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS JM/jm

2.1 FITTING THE AEROSOL CANISTER 27th April 2000
a) Place the uerosol 1..."anister 517.001.229 into
517.001.225 the frame (3) beneath the
dispe-nser cup {I).
b) 1igh1en the knurh:d knob (2) against the base of
the canister until it is firmly in the housing.
Note: To prevent the aerosol discharging when in

transit, loosen the knob which secures the
canister within the dispenser.
2.2 OPERATING PROCEDURE

a) Fil the required extension poles 517.001.230/
517.(Kll.226.
h) Place lhe! dispc:nser cup over the detector co he
tes1ed. Ensuring sensing chamber is scaled
within the silicone diaphragm
c) Push the dispenser assembly lightly upwards
wich enough force co release a bursc of aerosol
spray into lhe cup for ·approximately I
second. Hold the cup over the detector for
approximately IO seconds. If no alarm is
initiated. repeat 1he process for a maximum of 60
seconds or until an alann is achieved.
<l) Ion c;hamber conventional and addressable
de1ecturs should normally respond in
approximately 6 to 12 sec..-unds. unless they are
delayed versions which have response times of
approximately 30 secon<ls.
e) Optical detectors only take measurements every
J 2 secon<ls so their response time is Jess
predictable. The response time for conventional Fig. I Aerosol Dispenser
and ad<lressable optical and high performance
optical detector should typically be 6 to 22
seconds. There are no delayed variants of these
detectors.
f) If a detector dl.X!s not respond. it should he
retested. If the detector fails to respond after a
second 60 st"conds of !esting it may be
insensitive or non-func;tional and require
changing.

SOLO
FIL 0032
03 5/2000
3. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
1 COMPOSITION AND INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS

Substance: A 15 bar Aerosol canister containing a mixture of oxy-hydrocarbons and
1, 1, 1,2-tetrafluoroethane, liquified gas propellant.
Hazardous lngredi~ot~:
Chemical name: 1, 1, 1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFC 134A) Blended Oxy-hydrocarbons.
CAS No. 811-97-2
EEC No. 212-377-0
Class/Risk: None F, R11
Weight: >50% 10 - 25% 50% refers to HFC 134A
1O - 25% refers to oxy-hydrocarbons
2 HAZARDOUS IDENTIFICATION
Under normal usage this product has very low toxicity and is non flammable.
Inhalation: Very high concentrations can cause headaches, loss of concentration, tiredness and
ultimately asphyxiation. Sudden exposure to very high levels may induce cardiac
sensitisation and possible heart attack. No side effects are noticed in normal use and
when used as directed.
Skin Contact: When used as directed, no ill effects. Direct spray contact may result in frostbite effects
leading to defatted skin and dryness/irritation. Liquid residue may cause mild irritation.
Eye Contact: Avoid contact with the eyes. Aerosols in large quantity may cause irritation. Large
liquid splashes are considered unlikely in normal usage. Residue may cause irritation.
Ingestion: Direct spray causes serious cold burns to mouth and throat and can cause
vomiting. Such ingestion should not occur under the use as intended and described.
Physical and Chemical Hazards: Heating will cause a rise in pressure with a risk of bursting if heated above 45°C. On
combustion toxic gases are released.
3 FIRST AID MEASURES
Seek medical treatment when anyone has symptoms due to inhalation or contact with skin or eyes.
Inhalation: If symptoms from high concentrations are observed, immediately move patient to
uncontaminated area. If patient has stopped breathing, commence artificial
respiration. Summon immediate medical attention. For protection, if ventilation is inadequate,
the use of positive pressure air line respirators is required. Keep warm and at rest.
Skin Contact: If symptoms from direct spray or irritation are suffered, immediately wash the area with cold or
tepid water for at least 15 minutes. Use soap if necessary.
Eye Contact: If affected, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water or eyewash solution for at least 15
minutes holding lids apgrt.
Ingestion: Not specifically applicable (gas).
Other Requirements: Inhalation can cause sensitisation. Adrenaline or similar sympathomimetic drugs should not be
given.
4 FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
Aerosol cans may burst under fire conditions. Precautions (removal or spraying with water) may be taken against this risk.
In contact with flames, irrijating and toxic fumes are evolved. If large quantities are present, wear self containe<! breathing
apparatus and evacuate area. Ventilate the area before resuming work.
Foam or any chemical extinguishing agents should be used.
5 ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
If canister is ruptured, evacuate the area, except personnel dealing with the emergency. Extinguish or isolate power from
sources of ignition. Ventilate area. Disperse vapour clouds with water spray. Cover drains, sewers etc. Inform local
authority if major spillage occurs. Do not breathe gas, do not smoke. Avoid contact with eyes.
© 2000 Tyco Electronic Product Group 2

SOLO
FIL 0032
03 5/2000
I6 HANDLING AND STORAGE

I Clothing/Safety Equipmeni: Norie required under normal usage.
I Precautions for Use: Do not spray on a naked flame of on any incandescent material. Do not
I
i direct at face or eyes. Use in a well ventilated area. If intending to use in a

particularly confined space please contact manufacturer to discuss.
Storage: Pressurised container. Protect from sunlight and do not expose to
temperatures exceeding 45°C. Do not pierce or burn, even when empty.
Note: In summer or on hot days extra care should be taken to protect from sunlight and other high temperatures. Even
th€. boot of a car can reach excessive temperatures. If in doubt an insulator/ 'Thermos· type bag should be
used to store the cans.
'=
7 EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Cccupational Expos1,.1re Limit:
>
Gas: 1OOOppm (3540mg/m0 ) (Long term exposure limit - 8hr TWA reference period).
Aerosol mist: 1000ppm (2500mg/m') LTEL (Equivalent to approximately 5 seconds discharge /m").
Ventilation: Use product in a well ventilated space.
Toxicity: Very low toxicity, weak anaesthetic.
B PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance: Colourless gas, liquid under pressure. Aerosol is visible as a light mist.
Odour: Slight hydrocarbon smell.
Boiling Point: -26.5°C (Propellant)
Flash Point: Not applicable.
Vapour Pressure: 5.4 Bar at 25°C
Liquid Density: 1057 kgtni3 at 25°c
Vapour Density: 3.5 (Air= 1)
Solubility: Total product is slightly soluble in water and soluble wtth most common organic
solvents. Final aerosol product is soluble in water.
Partition Coefficient: Unknown
Other Data: None
9 STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability: Stable at ambient temperature and under normal conditions of use.
Hazardous Reactions: May decompose and form toxic gases on contact with hot surfaces and flames.
Incompatibility: Reacts violently with alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, magnesium, powdered
metals.
Decomposition Products: On combustion or on thermal decomposition (pyrolysis) releases toxic gases,
(Hydroflouric acid, Fluorinated compounds).
10 TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Eye Contact: (Aerosol) High concentrations may cause eye irritation.
Skin Contact: (Aerosol) Repealed or prolonged skin application may cause mild skin irritation
Inhalation: High concentrations of aerosol may be irrttanl lo the respiratory tract,
and cause headaches, dizziness, and possible loss of consciousness.
Ingestion: (Aerosol) Low oral toxicity.
Long Term Effects: No evidence of significant effects.
3
SOLO
FIL 0032
03 5/2000
10 TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Eye Contact: (Aerosol) High concentrations may cause eye irritation.
Skin Contact: (Aerosol) Repeated or prolonged skin application may cause mild skin irritation
Inhalation: High concentrations of aerosol may be irritant to the respiratory tract.
and cause headaches, dizziness, and possible loss of consciousness.
Ingestion: (Aerosol) Low oral toxicity.
Long Term Effects: ~o evidence of significant effects.
11 ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Mobility: Long term aerosol product is soluble in water. All remaining
components are highly volatile.
Degradability: Decomposed comparatively rapidly in lower
atmosphere. Atmospheric lifetime of propellant is 15.6 years.
Biodegradability of aerosol residues (Static test
method) (Bismuth active substance) 100% in 19 days.
Short and Long Term Effects: Does not deplete ozone. Does not influence photochemical
smog (i.e. Is designated a non-VOC).
12 DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Do not pierce, incinerate or expose to temperatures above 45°C even when empty. Dispose of in accordance with local
regulations.
13 TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN No: 1950
UN Hazard Class: 2.2 Non-flammable gas
IMORMDG Class: 2.2
Page No: 2012 and 2012A
ADR/RID:
Class: 2.2
Item No: 5° (a)
Hazard Iden!. No: 20
Air (ICAO-IATA):
Class: 2.2
Labelling: COMPRESSED GAS NON-FLAMMABLE
14 REGULATORY INFQRMATION
Product Label: Not Applicable
Risk Phrases: No A-phrases
Safety Phrases: S2 Keep out of reach of CHILDREN.
S3 Keep in a cool place.
S9 Keep container in a well ventilated place.
S23 Do not breathe spray.
S24/25 Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
S41 In case of fire and/ or explosion do not breathe fumes.
S51 Use only in well ventilated areas.
References: The Chemicals (Hazardous Information & Packing) regulation 1994 S.I. No.669. (CHIP
2). The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations 1989 S.I. 1657. The
Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.

4

IE-29-B Inst. Manual For Fire Alarm Sys. (OCR)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IE-29-B Inst. Manual For Fire Alarm Sys. (OCR)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEC. NO.

SHIP DESIGN OFFICE SHIP TYPE

TEL. NO. SHIP NO. SHIP NAME

DATE SCALE DRAWING NO.

~ HYUNDAI HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD

DOCUMENT CONTROL NUMBER /

PRODUCT APPLICATION AND SYSTEM DESIGN

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 1 of67

4.7.2 SYSTEM ZONING 44 7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 59

1. INTRODUCTION 2. SALIENT FEATURES

• MINERVA l 6E • Display pre-programmed event messages on

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 3of67

A t:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

A MINERVA-8 fire controller can: • Connection to a Programmable Logic

The MINERVA 16E is designed for use in small to mcdi~1111

• Arrange the devices in up to 80 zones, • Provide zonal display mimics of the

• Provide point alann/fault displays [point 3. OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND

A 1:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

MINERVA MARINE FIRE CONTROLLER

Fig. I MINERVA Fire Controller - Front Panel Layout

A. 'FIRE' LED - RED L. 'POWER FAIL' LED - YELLOW [T890/T891

3.3 SWITCHES 3.5 ACCESS TO CONTROLL~R

• A 20-key keypad, containing the following 4. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

3.4 BASIC CONTROLLER OPERATION

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 7 of 67

A tqcu INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

Note: The housings are NOT suitable for exterior

Fig. 2 MINERVA-8/16E/80 - Controller Housing (Surface Mounting(

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 9 of67

HOLES TOP SURFACE ONLY

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 11 of 67

A tqca INTERNATIONAL LTD COMPANY

CABLE GLAND MAXIMUM USABLE AREA

Fig. 5 T890ff89I Fire Controller Housing - Overall Dimensions

@ NOTE: THE TWO OUTER HOUSING

Fig. 6 Bulkhead Mounting Bracket - Overall and Fixing Dimensions

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 13 of 67

A t:qco INTERNATIONAL LTD COMPANY

0 SIDE FIXINGS ···~··

Fig. 7 Rack Mounting Brackets - Overall and Fixing Dimensions

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 15 of 67

A t:qca INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

4.2 MAINS SUPPLY 4.3 CABLES

4.3.2 CABLE TYPES

Power box 10 Controller

Serial output; Wall mounted printer [conduit/MJCC].

© 1999 Tyco Electronic Product Group PAGE 17 of67

A "tqco INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY

4.3.3 CABLE TERMINATION

DRAIN WIRE/SHIELD IMUST BE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND TERMI-

DRAIN WIRE SLOT

20/16 20 15 3.1 - 8.6 24.4 223

Fig. 9 Cable Termination CXT Type Gland Detail

SIIV type gland:; arc Stock cod.::d as follows:

INNER OUTER STOCK CODE

I .Smm 2 two core 3.5 - 5.0mm 6.8- 8.8mm SHV0I 90 I .007.369

2.Smm 2 two core 4.5- 6.0mm 8.5 - I0.8mm SHV02 901.007.370

I .5mn/ 4 core 5.0- 5.7mm 8.5 - 10.8mm SHV03 901.007.371

4.3.8 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT CABLES

Push earthing ferrule between braid and cable.

Ali exposed metalwork and cabling conduits must be returned

Note: Earthing should be to IEE. Regulations.

4.3.7 HAZARDOUS AREA CABLES